Home

IBM SC30-3865-04 Network Router User Manual

1. CNA DLSw an BAN a a ea aae E BDA A _Y pict Sine Logical view APPN node Figure 6 Single Connection Network using BAN with 1 Frame Relay Port Note The BDA address must be defined on the connection network definition Example 2 Chapter1 APPN 45 APPN C APPN node DLCI 1 CNA DLSw st APP APPN APPN BAN BNI 1 gt BNI 1 BDA A Cr BNI 1 node p gt BNI 1 s lt 7 PLCI 1 Logical view Figure 7 Single Connection Network using BAN with Multiple Frame Relay Ports Example 3 Notes 1 2 3 4 APPN node ont zoe APPN APPN fo os QO CNA node BNI 1 BDA A I BN I es APPN node CHeran HE OENB APPN oo en BNI 1 ay BNI 1 node e The same DLCI number must be specified on both ports The BDA address must be defined on the connection network definition The BNI addressees on both ports can be the same or different If the APPN node initiates the connection to the device the APPN port that gets chosen for the connection is dependent upon which port responds first to the test frame APPN DLCI 1 BDA A DLCI 1 Logical view Figure 8 Multiple Connection Networks using BAN Example 4 Notes 1 Th
2. 90 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 6 Configuration Parameter List HPR Timer and Retry Options continued Parameter Information Parameter Maximum RTP retries Valid Values 0 to 10 Default Value 6 Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of retries before RTP initiates a path switch on an HPR connection that carries traffic with medium transmission priority Parameter Path switch timer Valid Values 0 to 7200 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter specifies the maximum amount of time that a path switch may be attempted on an HPR connection carrying traffic with medium transmission priority A value of zero indicates that the path switch function is to be disabled and a path switch will not be performed High transmission priority traffic Parameter RTP inactivity timer Valid Values 1 to 3600 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter specifies RTP s inactivity interval for HPR connections that carry traffic with high transmission priority This is an end to end version of the LLC inactivity timer Ti If no receptions occur during this interval RTP transmits a poll Idle periods are monitored to ensure the integrity of the connection Parameter Maximum RTP retries Valid Values 0 to 10 Default Value 6 Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of retries before RT
3. Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 129 APPN Configuration Commands Table 18 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter ATM Network Type Valid Values Campus or Widearea Default Value Campus Description This parameter specifies the network type used for default values for connection networks and other link stations defined on this port Parameter Shareable connection network traffic Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether connection network traffic can be routed on the ATM VC set up for a link station on this port Parameter Shareable other protocol traffic Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether other higher level protocol traffic can be routed on the ATM VC set up for a link station on this port Parameter Broadband Bearer Class Valid Values Class_A Class_C Class _X Default Value Class_X Description This parameter specifies the bearer class requested from the ATM network The classes are defined Class A Constant bit rate CBR with end to end timing requirements Class C Variable bit rate VBR with no end to end timing requirements Class X Service allowing user defined traffic type and timing requirements 130 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 18 Configuration Par
4. Syntax delete lu This command removes a TN3270E LU You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 45 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E LU Parameter Information Parameter LU name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z and e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the LU name of the dependent LU to be removed Syntax delete implicit pool Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 205 APPN Configuration Commands This command removes a TN3270E implicit pool You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 46 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E Implicit Parameter Information Parameter Pool name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of the LU pool to be deleted Parameter Delete entire pool Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether the entire pool or a specific entry is to
5. 270 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands This is used to detect packets which are in routing loops which occur when routes decay The maximum visits is 63 This is the default This argument should be larger by a factor of two than both maximum hops and area maximum hops state on Enables DNA May be issued at any time providing the router has a valid node address state off type Disables DNA May be issued at any time The default state is off For set set executor will be inhibited if the DNA initialization failed for lack of available memory for the routing tables define only On X 25 circuits causes the router to act in one of four ways depending on the value selected The options are DEC routing iv configures the router as a DEC compatible Level 1 router DEC area configures the router as a DEC compatible Level 2 area router Routing iv configures the router as a Level 1 router without DEC compatibility on X 25 circuits This is the default Area configures the router as a Level 2 area router without DEC compatibility on X 25 circuits A Level 2 router accepts adjacencies with routers in other areas and maintains routes to all areas If it can reach other areas it also advertises itself to Level 1 routers as a route to other areas For Level 1 routers adjacencies are accepted only to routers in the same area Example define executor state on de
6. Cache size Number of fastpath cache entries List of configured interfaces Lists each interface number and its network range node number and zone name s as well as the default zone For each interface also lists whether or not input and output zone filters and network filters and enabled or disabled If they are enabled indicates whether or not they are inclusive or exclusive Input output Zfilters Indicates zone filters assigned to an interface Inclusive means that only packets matching the filter will be routed Exclusive means that all packets matching the filter will be discarded The name of the zone filtered is displayed Input means that the filter is applied to traffic coming into the interface Output means that filter is applied to traffic going out to the interface Input output Nfilters Indicates net filters assigned to an interface Inclusive means that only packets matching the filter will be routed Exclusive means that all packets matching the filter will be discarded The range of networks filtered is displayed Input means that the filter is applied to traffic coming into the interface Output means that filter is applied to traffic going out to the interface Split horizon routing Shows whether or not split horizon routing is enabled or disabled on each interface Use the set command to define the cache size of fastpath or specific AppleTalk Phase 2 parameters including the network range in seed routers and t
7. Parameter Maximum percent ISR sessions used by DLUR LUs Valid Values 0 to 100 percent Default 0 percent Description This parameter specifies the largest percentage of ISR sessions used by DLUR LUs This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Parameter Maximum number of ISR accounting memory buffers Valid Values Oori Default Value 0 default is 1 if ISR session accounting is enabled Description This parameter specifies a maximum number of buffers to be reserved for ISR session accounting This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Parameter Maximum memory records per ISR accounting buffer Valid Values 0 to 2000 Default Value 100 Description This parameter specifies a maximum number of memory records per ISR accounting buffer This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 99 APPN Configuration Commands Table 8 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Tuning continued Parameter Information Parameter Override tuning algorithm Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description When enabled this parameter overrides the tuning calculations generated by the Command Line and enables you to specify explicit values for the Maximum shared memory parameter and the Maximum cached directory entries parameter This parameter is configurable using the Configura
8. SC30 3680 C30 3865 These books describe how to access and use the Multiprotocol Routing Services command line router user interface to configure and monitor the routing protocol software and features shipped with the router They include information about each of the protocols that the devices support SC30 3682 This book contains a listing of the error codes that can occur along with descriptions and recommended actions to correct the errors Configuration Online help The help panels for the Configuration Program assist the user in understanding the program functions panels configuration parameters and navigation keys GC30 3830 This book discusses how to use the Configuration Program GG24 4446 IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotoco Router Description and Configuration Scenarios This book contains examples of how to configure protocols using IBM Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services Safety D21 0030 Caution Safety Information Read This First This book provides translations of caution and danger notices applicable to the installation and maintenance of an IBM 2210 The following list shows the books in the IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotocol Router library arranged according to tasks Planning and Installation GA27 4068 IBM 2210 Introduction and Planning Guide xxiii GC30 3867 IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotoco Router Installation and Initial Configuration Guide These books are shipped with the 2210 They
9. as one of the non native CP names Such a table is known as the default COS mapping table and will be the table used by the extended border node whenever no other table has a CP name that matches the non native network COS name pairs are the final part of configuring a COS mapping table Here you are prompted for one or more pairs of COS names Each COS name pair consists of a native COS name followed by the corresponding COS name used in the non native network The extended border node uses this table to translate from native to non native networks and vise versa If you need to map multiple native COS names into a common non native COS name you should configure one COS name pair for each possible mapping Similarly you may need to map multiple non native COS names into a common native COS name and that too can be accomplished by configuring a COS name pair for each possible mapping If there are multiple possible mappings in a table the extended border node will use the first exact mapping found Each COS mapping table may have one COS name pair where the non native COS name is a wildcard This is the default COS mapping entry for that table and it is used to translate all unrecognized non native COS names into a single native Chapter1 APPN 35 APPN COS name Each COS mapping table may have one of these default COS mapping entries You can never code a as the native COS name High Performance Routing DLUR ee
10. e Because only SLUs are supported Network Routing Facility NRF and Network Terminal Option NTO are not supported e Extended recovery facility XRF and XRF CRYPTO are not supported e You must be able to establish an APPN only or APPN HPR only session between DLUS and DLUR The CPSVRMGR session cannot pass through a subarea network VTAM Considerations for DLUR The following are example VTAM Switched Major Node definitions for DLUR You should note that PATH statements are necessary only if VTAM is initiating the connection to the DSPU You should refer to VTAM Resource Definition Reference SC31 6427 for details of the DLC parameter statements for the Switched Major Node definitions DABDLURX VBUILD TYPE SWNET MAXGRP 400 MAXNO 400 MAXDLUR 20 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk IN THE DLCADDR THE SUBFIELD_ID CV SUBFIELD OF THE CV91 MINUS 0X90 7 FOR EXAMPLE THE CV94 SUBFIELD IS CODED ON DLCADDR 4 X kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Following are PU Statements for 2 0 and for 2 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 2 0 PU STATEMENT kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PUZORT PU ADDR 05 PUTYPE 2 MAXPATH 8 AN
11. shortcuts to ATMARP clients Allows or disallows shortcuts to ATMARP clients This parameter can be used to allow or disallow the server from giving out shortcuts to native ATMARP clients that do not support NHRP This may be required if these clients are not capable of supporting large number of VCs Use the Exclude List option if shortcuts need to be disallowed selectively to certain clients or subnets Example set shortcut Allow shortcuts to Classical IP clients Yes Accessing the NHRP Monitoring Process To access the NHRP monitoring prompt 1 At the operator monitoring prompt type talk 5 and press enter 2 At the gt prompt type protocol nhrp and press enter 3 The NHRP gt prompt is displayed 368 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 NHRP Monitoring Commands Box Status NHRP Monitoring Commands Talk 5 This section explains all of the NHRP monitoring commands as shown in Table 64 Enter the commands from the NHRP gt prompt Table 64 NHRP Monitoring Command Summary Command Help Box Status Interface Status Statistics Cache Server_purge_cache MIB LANE Shortcuts CONFIG Parameters Reset Exit Function Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for specific commands if available See Displays NHRP interface status Displays NHRP interface statistics Displays NHRP resolution cache entries Displays NHRP server_purge_cach
12. Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables the creation of data records for intermediate sessions passing through this node The records contain information about session counters and session characteristics RSCV information is also included in the data records if the Save RSCV information for intermediate sessions parameter is enabled If this parameter is set to yes the setting of collect intermediate session information is overridden Parameter Record creation threshold Valid Values 0 to 4 294 967 in 1 KB increments Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies a byte threshold for creating intermediate session records When session data exceeds the value in this byte counter by an even multiple a record is created 122 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 15 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Management continued Parameter Information Parameter Held alert queue size Valid Values 0 255 Default Value 10 Description This parameter sets the size of the configurable held alert queue This queue is used to save APPN alerts prior to sending them to a focal point If the queue overflows the oldest alerts are discarded Table 16 Configuration Parameter List APPN ISR Recording Media Parameter Information Memory Parameters Parameter Memory see table notes Valid Values Yes No Default Value No
13. Description This parameter identifies a pair of COS names A native COS name is followed by the corresponding non native COS name For any given COS mapping table one of the COS name pairs may specify the non native COS name as This designates the default entry to use for all non native COS names that do not explicitly match another entry in the table One COS name pair cannot exactly match another COS name pair in a given table However a given native COS name can be used in multiple entries and it is also okay for a given non native COS name to be used in multiple entries The operational software will use the first entry it finds This question will be repeated until terminated with a null entry Notes 1 The native and non native names cannot be identical Only COS names that need to be changed should be specified 2 A given native or non native COS name may appear in multiple entries but you cannot have two identical COS name pairs 3 When you have multiple native COS names mapping to the same non native COS name the border node will use the first of those mappings when it needs to map from non native to native Similarly when you have multiple non native COS names mapping to a common native COS name the border node will use the first of those mappings when it needs to map from native to non native 4 Any given COS mapping table can have the following maximum number of COS name pairs e 2210 12x not suppor
14. Parameter Cost per byte Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Description This parameter expresses the relative cost of transmitting a byte over the associated TG The units are user defined and the assigned value should reflect the actual expenses incurred for transmitting over the TG relative to all other TGs in the network A value of zero means that bytes may be transmitted over the TG at no additional cost Higher values represent higher costs Parameter Security Valid Values Nonsecure all else for example satellite connected or located in a nonsecure country Public switched network secure in the sense that route is not predetermined Underground cable located in secure country as determined by the network administrator Secure conduit not guarded for example pressurized pipe Guarded conduit protected against physical tapping Encrypted link level encryption is provided Guarded radiation guarded conduit containing the transmission medium protected against physical and radiation tapping Default Value Nonsecure Description This parameter indicates the level of security protection associated with the TG If security attributes other than the architecturally defined ones are needed one of the user defined TG characteristics may be used to specify additional values Parameter Propagation delay Valid Values e Minimum LAN less than 480 microseconds e Telephone
15. between 48 and 49 152 milliseconds e Packet switched between 49 152 and 245 76 milliseconds e Satellite greater than 245 76 milliseconds Maximum Default Value LAN Description This parameter specifies the approximate range for the length of time that it takes for a signal to propagate from one end of the TG to the other Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 181 APPN Configuration Commands Table 32 Configuration Parameter List TG Characteristics Connection Network continued Parameter Information Parameter Effective capacity Valid Values 2 hexadecimal digits in the range X 00 to X FF Default Value X 75 Description This parameter specifies the effective maximum bit transmission rate for this connection network TG Effective capacity specifies the maximum effective rate for both physical links and logical links The effective capacity is encoded as a single byte representation The values X 00 and X FF are special cases used to denote minimum and maximum capacities The range of the encoding is very large however only 256 values in the range may be specified Parameter First user defined characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 128 Description This parameter specifies the first of three additional characteristics that users may define to describe the TGs in the network The default value of 128 allows a subset of TGs to be defined as more or less desirable than
16. out and if the filter is inclusive or exclusive Inclusive means that only packets matching the filter will be routed Exclusive means that all packets matching the filter will be discarded Example ap2config gt enable zfilter in inc Interface 0 Example ap2config gt enable zfilter out exec Interface 0 0 List Use the list command to display the current AP2 configuration In the example the router is a seed router on interfaces 0 and 1 Note The list command accepts an interface as an argument Syntax list Example ap2config gt list APL2 globally enabled Checksumming disabled Cache size 500 List of configured interfaces Interface netrange node Zone 0 1000 1000 1 SerialLine Def 226 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Set AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Input ZFilters disabled Input NFilters inclusive Output ZFilters disabled Output NFilters disabled Split horizon routing enabled 1 10 19 52 EtherTalk Sales Def Input ZFilters disabled Input NFilters inclusive Output ZFilters disabled Output NFilters disabled Split horizon routing enabled unseeded net 0 Input ZFilters disabled Input NFilters inclusive Output ZFilters disabled Output NFilters disabled Split horizon routing disabled APL2 globally Indicates whether AppleTalk Phase 2 is globally enabled or disabled Checksumming Indicates whether checksum is enabled or disabled
17. APPN configuration command 83 IPV6 configuration command 388 NDP configuration command 409 OSI configuration command 317 PIM configuration command 412 RIP6 configuration command 428 VINES configuration command 242 Enterprise Extender Support for HPR over IP 25 es adjacencies OSI DECnet V monitoring command 334 ES IS protocol 286 description 299 hello message 299 es is stats OSI DECnet V monitoring command 334 exclude lists 354 exit VINES monitoring command 248 Extended Border Node 14 16 configuring 31 COS mapping table 35 network requirements 16 routing list 33 extensions IBM vendor private extensions 355 path information extensions 355 F features IP version 6 IPv6 377 focal point 17 36 H How LUs are chosen for client connections 23 HPR 6 36 IBM specific extensions NHRP 355 implementation on the router 3 implicit focal point 19 185 interface AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring command 232 IPV6 monitoring command 399 PIM monitoring command 417 intermediate session data collecting 40 IP packet size 436 IPV6 configuring 383 IPv6 overview 377 using 377 ipv6 command 383 IPV6 configuration commands add 383 change 387 delete 387 disable 388 enable 388 list 389 set 391 summary 383 update 394 IPV6 monitoring commands accessing 397 cache 398 counters 398 dump 399 interface 399 mcast 399 mid 400 packet filter 401 path mtu 401 ping6 402 route 400 sizes 400 static 401 summary of 398
18. Change DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 the set of receive passwords is processed through the IS any incoming packets whose passwords do not match are dropped Example add receive password Note You get an error message if you use an invalid password type Password type Domain Password Reenter password Password type Designates one of the two types of passwords domain or area Domain passwords are used with L2 LSPs Level 2 Link State Packets and SNPs Sequence Number PDU Area passwords are used with L1 LSPs and SNPs Password Designates the character string that you are using for authentication Maximum allowable string is 16 characters template femplate name routing circuit name destination DTE call UserData Creates a template by which the router makes outgoing calls on a static out routing circuit Templates for static out circuits are analogous to filters for static in circuits The template name is the name you give the template The routing circuit name is the name of the routing circuit with which the template is associated The destination DTE is an address for the remote router of up to 14 digits The call UserData must match the call data set up for a filter on the remote circuit Call UserData can have one of three values osi dec or user e For osi the router automatically configures an ISO protocol discriminator for the call data and requires the call to go to an OSI route
19. Circuit config 3 gt list all Base net 2 Destination name brown Circuit priority Destination address subaddress 555 1211 62 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Outbound calls allowed Inbound calls allowed Idle timer 0 fixed circuit SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms Circuit config 3 gt ex Config gt net 2 V 34 Data Link Configuration V 34 System Net Config 2 gt list all V 34 System Net Configuration Local Network Address Name default address Local Network Address 9999999 Non Responding addresses Retries 1 Timeout 0 seconds Call timeouts Command Delay ms Connect 60 seconds Disconnect 2 seconds Modem strings Initialization string at amp f amp s111 amp d2 amp c1x3 Speed bps 115200 V 34 System Net Config 2 gt set local Local network address name gray V 34 System Net Config 2 gt list all V 34 System Net Configuration Local Network Address Name gray Local Network Address 555 1212 Non Responding addresses Retries 1 Timeout 0 seconds Call timeouts Command Delay ms Connect 60 seconds Disconnect 2 seconds Modem strings Initialization string at amp f amp s111 amp d2 amp c1x3 Speed bps 115200 V 34 System Net Config 2 gt Notes J A non zero value for Idle Timer results in a dial on demand link A zero value results in a leased link Configuring APPN Over ATM The following sample configures APPN over ATM Notes 1 When
20. IP p Interface number Default 0 0 9 Port name Max 8 characters PPP009 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Limited resource Y es N o Y 4 xxx note that limited resource YES High performance routing Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2044 2044 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxxx Configure the linkstation for the DOD link to NN15 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk APPN config gt add 1i APPN Station Port name for the link station ppp009 Station name Max 8 characters tol5dod Limited resource Y es N o Y g xxxx lt note limited resource YES TG Number 1 20 1 xxxx lt note TG number is required input for limited resource Adjacent node type APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 0 High performance routing Y es N o Y Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y NE xxxx lt Be sure to NOT allow CP CP sessions or link won t hang up Fully qualified CP name of adjacent node netID CPname stfnet NN15 xxxx lt Adjacent node name required for limited resource links Edit TG Characteris
21. List NDP Configuration Commands Talk 6 delete ra Use the disable command to disable route advertisement Syntax disable ra ra Disables route advertisement Use the enable command to enable route advertisement Syntax enable ra ra Enables route advertisement Use the list command to display the NDP configuration Syntax list all ra prefix Example NDP config gt list all NDP config gt list ra NDP config gt list prefix NDP config gt Accessing the NDP Monitoring Environment Use the following procedure to access the NDP monitoring commands This process gives you access to the NDP monitoring process 1 At the OPCON prompt enter talk 5 For more detail on this command refer to FThe OPCON Process in Software User s Guide For example talk 5 After you enter the talk 5 command the GWCON prompt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again 2 At the prompt enter the p ndp command to get you to the NDP gt prompt Example Chapter 15 Configuring and Monitoring Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP 409 NDP Configuration Commands Talk 6 p ndp NDP gt NDP Monitoring Commands This section describes the NDP monitoring commands Table 70 NDP Monitoring Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the pens for specific commands if available
22. List of Abbreviations 441 NRZ non return to zero NRZI non return to zero inverted NSAP Network Service Access Point NSF National Science Foundation NSFNET National Science Foundation NETwork NVCNFG nonvolatile configuration OPCON Operator Console OsI open systems interconnection OSICP OSI Control Protocol OSPF Open Shortest Path First OUI organization unique identifier PC personal computer PCR peak cell rate PDN public data network PING Packet internet groper PDU protocol data unit PID process identification P P Point to Point PPP Point to Point Protocol PROM programmable read only memory PU physical unit PVC permanent virtual circuit RAM random access memory RD route descriptor REM ring error monitor REV receive RFC Request for Comments RI ring indicator routing information RIF routing information field RII routing information indicator RIP Routing Information Protocol RISC reduced instruction set computer RNR receive not ready ROM read only memory 442 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 ROpcon RPS RTMP RTP RTS Rtype rxmits rxmt SAF SAP SAP SCR SCSP sdel SDLC seqno SGID SGMP SL SMP SMTP SNA SNAP SNMP SNPA SPF SPE1 SPE2 SPIA SPID SPX SQE SRAM SRB SRF SRLY SRT Remote Operator Console ring parameter server Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RouTing update Protocol request to send route type retransmissions retransmit source address filtering service access point
23. Parameter Trace Locates Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will filter the trace data according to locates Parameter Trace TDUs Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will filter the trace data according to transmission data units Parameter Trace route setups Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will filter the trace data according to route setups Parameter Trace CP Capabilities Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will filter the trace data according to CP Capabilities 120 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 14 Configuration Parameter List Miscellaneous Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Trace Session Control Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will filter the trace data according to session control Parameter Trace XIDs Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will filter the trace data according to XIDs Syntax set management You will be prompted to enter values for t
24. Please tell us how we can improve this book Thank you for your responses May we contact you Yes No Dissatisfied E Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied When you send comments to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Name Address Company or Organization Phone No Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You SC30 3865 04 Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 40 ARMONK NEW YORK POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE IBM Corporation Design amp Information Development Department CGF Bldg 656 PO Box 12195 Research Triangle Park NC 27709 9990 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES Fold and Tape SC30 3865 04 Please do not staple Fold and Tape a a a a a a a PEE EE EEN ea EE E Cut or Fold Along Line Cut or Fold Along Line Printed in the United States of America Ce on recycled paper containing 10 recovered post consumer fiber SC30 3865 04 Spine information Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 SC30 3865 04
25. See dump Displays routing tables ping6 Dynamically pings an IPv6 address list Displays the configuration Exit Returns you to the previous command level See FExiting a Lower Level Dump j for information about the dump command Ping6 See EPing amp on page 402 for details about the ping6 command List Use the list command to display the configuration Only interfaces with RA configured are displayed even though a prefix may exist in the prefix list on other interfaces as a result of IPv6 address configuration Syntax list Example NDP gt list all Router Advertisement for Interface 0 PPP 0 Hop RA Interval Rtr Reach State M OLLA Limit Min Max Lifetime Time ENABLED NN Y O 200 600 1800 0 Advertised Prefixes Prefix Length On Link Auto Valid Preferred Life 410 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 16 Configuring and Monitoring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM Configuration for PIM is done for each interface This chapter describes how to use the PIM configuration and operating commands and includes the following sections Accessing the PIM Configuration Environment Use the following procedure to access the PIM configuration process 1 Atthe OPCON prompt enter talk 6 For more detail on this command refer to FThe OPCON Process in Software User s Guide For example talk 6 Config gt After you enter the talk 6 command the CONFIG prompt
26. Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about the activities of the configuration control component of the APPN network node The configuration control component manages information about node resources Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 105 APPN Configuration Commands Table 10 Configuration Parameter List Node Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Timer service Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about requests for timer service from the APPN network node Parameter Service provider management Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about the definition and enabling or disabling of services within the APPN network node Parameter Inter process message segmenting Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about the buffer transfer and freeing of chained messages with
27. Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list link tosecstn STATION Port name SDLC001 Interface number DLSw 254 1 Link Type SDLC Station address Cl Activate link automatically YES Allow CP CP sessions on this link YES CP CP session level security NO Fully qualified CP name of adjacent node Encryption key 0000000000000000 Use enhanced session security only NO Cost per connect time 0 Cost per byte 0 Security Nonsecure 1 Public Switched Network 2 Underground Cable 3 Secure Conduit 4 Guarded Conduit 5 Encrypted 6 Guarded Radiation 0 Propagation delay 0 Minimum 1 Lan 2 Telephone 3 Packet Switched Network 4 Satellite 5 Maximum 2 Effective capacity 45 First user defined TG characteristic 128 Second user defined TG characteristic 128 Third user defined TG characteristic 128 Predefined TG number 0 APPN config gt act kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k Configuring a Secondary Point To Point SDLC Station kkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt set data sdlc 1 Config gt n 1 SDLC user configuration SDLC 1 Config gt set link role secondary SDLC 1 Config gt set link cable rs 232 dte SDLC 1 Config gt list link will show link configuration SDLC 1 Config gt add station Enter station address in hex C1 Enter station name SDLC C1 Include stat
28. as a CP name you cannot configure the local node s CP name 3 Any given routing list can have the following maximum number of CP names and keywords e 2210 12x not supported e 2210 14x or 24x 96 4 Across all routing lists you may use no more than the following number of different CP names and keywords e 2210 12x not supported e 2210 14x or 24x 96 5 Any given CP name or keyword may appear in no more than 255 routing lists Syntax add cos_mapping_table Note These questions are asked only if you have configured the node as a border node COS mapping tables are not supported for 2210 12x models The editing shortcut keys specified at the beginning of the routing list table are also valid here Use them to speed modification of the non native CP names and COS name pairs 190 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 38 Configuration Parameter List COS Mapping Table Configuration Parameter Information Parameter COS mapping table name Valid Values Character string up to 20 characters in length with no imbedded blanks Mixed case and special characters are allowed Default Value Blank Description This parameter identifies a specific COS mapping table It allows you to identify the table for modification listing or deletion by the configuration software It is not used by the operational software Up to 255 COS mapping tables may be configured depending
29. data circuit 1 A pair of associated transmit and receive channels that provide a means of two way data communication I 2 In SNA synonym for link connection 3 See also physical circuit and virtual circuit Glossary 451 Notes 1 Between data switching exchanges the data circuit may include data circuit terminating equipment DCE depending on the type of interface used at the data switching exchange 2 Between a data station and a data switching exchange or data concentrator the data circuit includes the data circuit terminating equipment at the data station end and may include equipment similar to a DCE at the data switching exchange or data concentrator location data circuit terminating equipment DCE In a data station the equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment DTE and the line I Notes 1 The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of the DTE or of the intermediate equipment 2 ADCE may perform other functions that are usually performed at the network end of the line data link connection identifier DLCI The numeric identifier of a frame relay subport or PVC segment in a frame relay network Each subport in a single frame relay port has a unique DLCI The following table excerpted from the American National Standards Institute ANSI Standard T1 618 and the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee ITU T CCI
30. fwd cache alloc Indicates the number of cache entries allocated The current forwarding cache size is the number of entries allocated fwd cache alloc minus the number of cache entries freed fwd cache freed fwd cache freed Indicates the number of cache entries freed The current forwarding cache size is the number of entries allocated fwd cache alloc minus the number of cache entries freed fwd cache freed fwd cache GC Indicates the number of cache entries were cleared because they were not recently used and the cache overflowed local group DB alloc Indicates the number of local group database entries allocated The number allocated local group DB alloc minus the number freed local group DB free equals the current size of the local group database local group DB free Indicates the number of local group database entires freed The number allocated local group DB alloc minus the number freed local group DB free equals the current size of the local group database Use the neighbor command to display information about neighbor PIM devices and their adjacency status 420 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 PIM PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Syntax neighbors Example PIM6 gt neighbor PIM Neighbor Listing Last First Neighbor Addr DR Heard Heard Ifc 9 4 3 101 2 123 NO 21 6139 Tkr 0 23 2 45 2 12 3 111 YES 29 6204 Tkr 1 PIM6 gt Neighbor Addr Identifies if this router has identified the
31. integrated services digital network International Organization for Standardization kilobits per second L2TP Network Access Concentrator local area network link access protocol balanced local area transport Link Control Protocol light emitting diode largest frame line feed Logical IP subnet logical link contro logical link control 2 local management interface L2TP Network Server 440 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 LRM LAN reporting mechanism LS link state LSA link state advertisement LSB least significant bit LSI LAN shortcuts interface LSreq_ link state request LSrxl link state retransmission list LU logical unit MAC medium access control Mb megabit MB megabyte Mbps megabits per second MBps megabytes per second MC multicast MCF MAC filtering MIB Management Information Base MIB Il Management Information Base II MILNET military network MOS Micro Operating System MOSDBG Micro Operating System Debugging Tool MOSPF Open Shortest Path First with multicast extensions MSB most significant bit MSDU MAC service data unit MRU maximum receive unit MTU maximum transmission unit nak not acknowledged NBMA Non Broadcast Multiple Access NBP Name Binding Protocol NBR neighbor NCP Network Control Protocol NCP Network Core Protocol NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System NHRP Next Hop Resolution Protocol NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NPDU Network Protocol Data Unit
32. next hop towards a destination The NBMA next hop may be the destination itself or the egress router from the NBMA network that is nearest to the destination station This next hop information is called a cut through route or VC in the NHRP specification the router uses the term shortcut instead of cut through The source station can then establish an NBMA virtual circuit directly with the destination or the egress router and reduce the number of hops through the network NHRP Server NHRP Server Router Router 7 NHRP Client NHRP Server Router Shortcut VC for client to client traffic Figure 27 Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP Overview The 2210 can use NHRFP to establish shortcuts for IP traffic over the ATM NBMA network for both RFC 1483 and Emulated LAN ELAN interfaces The Internet draft does not address the use of NHRP in an ELAN environment but the 2210 includes enhancements to allow using LANs These enhancements are currently implemented using the vendor private extensions included in the NHRP protocol definition The NHRP draft describes the basic protocol flow as follows NHRP clients register their protocol addresses and their NBMA addresses with one or more NHRP servers The servers are typically routers on the routed path through the NBMA network to the clients When a client wants to establish a shortcut to a destination it sends a Next Ho
33. 0 For IP 0 for Campus and WAN For all other 0 Description This parameter specifies the cost per byte TG characteristic for all link stations defined on this port The cost per byte TG characteristic expresses the relative cost of transmitting a byte over the associated TG The units are user defined and the assigned value should reflect the actual expenses incurred for transmitting over the TG relative to all other TGs in the network A value of zero means that bytes may be transmitted over the TG at no additional cost Higher values represent higher costs Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 141 APPN Configuration Commands Table 20 Configuration Parameter List Port Default TG Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Security Valid Values Nonsecure all else for example satellite connected or located in a nonsecure country Public switched network secure in the sense that route is not predetermined Underground cable located in secure country as determined by the network administrator Secure conduit Not guarded for example pressurized pipe Guarded conduit protected against physical tapping Encrypted link level encryption is provided Guarded radiation guarded conduit containing the transmission medium protected against physical and radiation tapping Default Value For ATM SVCs and ATM PVCs Campus ATM best effort Nonsecure Campus ATM reserve
34. 10 minutes IPV6 config gt list addresses IPV6 addresses for each interface intf 0 IP disabled on this interface intf 1 IP disabled on this interface intf 2 IP disabled on this interface intf 3 IP disabled on this interface intf 4 IP disabled on this interface intf 5 1234 1234 1234 1234 5234 6234 7234 8234 128 1223 7 1234 8 Router ID 1 9 Internal IP address 1 8 IPV6 config gt list icmp redirect ICMP Redirect generation for IP interface intf 0 IP disabled on this interface intf 1 IP disabled on this interface intf 2 IP disabled on this interface intf 3 IP disabled on this interface intf 4 IP disabled on this interface intf 5 1234 1234 1234 1234 5234 6234 7234 8234 128 ICMP Redirect enabled 1223 7 1234 8 ICMP Redirect enabled intf 6 IP disabled on this interface intf 7 IP disabled on this interface IPV6 config gt list leaked routes IPv4 Address Mask IPV6 config gt list mld Net Query Interval Response Interval Leave Query Interval secs secs secs 5 125 10 1 IPV6 config gt list packet filter List of packet filter records Name Interface State packet 1 0 On pack0l 5 On Access Control is enabled IPV6 config gt list routes route to 1234 1223 128 via 1234 0 9 8 cost 100 via 1234 0 9 8 8 7 6 8 cost 232 via 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cost 1 via 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cost 1 route to 0 via 1 8 cost 100 route to 2 8 9 8 via 1 8 cost 1 IPV6 config gt list sizes Routing table size 768 ne
35. APPN Config gt exit APPN config gt act Configuring Enterprise Extender Support for HPR Over IP t 6 Q45 Config gt p appn APPN config gt add port APPN Port Link Type P PP FR AME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A TM I P ip Port name Max 8 characters IP255 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2048 768 UDP port number for XID exchange 1024 65535 11000 UDP port number for low priority traffic 1024 65535 11004 UDP port number for medium priority traffic 1024 65535 11003 UDP port number for high priority traffic 1024 65535 11002 UDP port number for network priority traffic 1024 65535 11001 IP Network Type CAMPUS 1 WIDEAREA 0 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 LDLC Retry Count 1 255 3 LDLC Timer Period 1 255 seconds 15 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written 3 3 3 3 is the router s internal IP address APPN config gt add link APPN Station Port name for the link station ip255 Station name Max 8 characters tonn Activate link automatically Y es N o Y IP address of adjacent node 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node or Unknown node type 0 Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure
36. Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 197 APPN Configuration Commands Table 41 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Implicit continued Parameter Information Parameter Pool class Valid Values 1 or 2 where 1 Implicit workstation 2 Implicit printer Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies type of LU pool Parameter Station name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name representing the link between the DLUR and the PU or the subarea link over which SNA data will flow Parameter LU Name Mask Valid Values A string of 1 to 5 characters e First character A to Z and e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value 01LU Description This parameter specifies the mask to be used to ensure that the LU names will not duplicate other names in the network LU names are generated by appending the NAU address to the end of the LU name mask When not specifying an address range NAU addresses from 2 253 will be checked to see if the address is unused If the address is available it will be used Otherwise the next NAU address will be tried For example if the LU name mask is FRED the possible LU names are FRED2 FRED FRED253 198 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands
37. Description The DLCI parameter identifies the frame relay logical data link connection with the adjacent node Parameter Station address of adjacent node SDLC only Valid Values Address in the range of 1 FE Default Value Ci Description This parameter specifies the address of the adjacent node Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 155 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Limited Resource PPP X 25 FR over dial circuits ATM Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No If the link type is PPP or FR the default will be taken from the limited resource parameter for the associated port Description This parameter specifies whether the TG for this link station is a limited resource If you answer yes then the Virtual Channel Type is SVC Parameter Branch Uplink Valid Values Yes or No Default Value The value specified for Branch Uplink on the port Description This parameter indicates whether this link will be a Branch uplink to WAN or Branch downlink to LAN This question is asked only if Enabled Branch Extender has been set to yes and if this link station is not a network node If Enabled Branch Extender has been set to yes and this link station is a network node then Branch Uplink defaults to yes Parameter Is uplink to another Branch Extender node Valid Values Ye
38. Description This parameter enables or disables the collection of intermediate session data in the router s local memory Parameter Maximum memory buffers Valid Values 0 to 1 Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies the number of buffers to be allocated in the router s local memory for storing intermediate session records Parameter Maximum memory records per buffer Valid Values 0 to 2000 Default Value 100 Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of intermediate session records that may be stored in the memory buffer on the router Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 123 APPN Configuration Commands Add Table 16 Configuration Parameter List APPN ISR Recording Media continued Parameter Information Parameter Memory buffers full Valid Values Stop recording 0 Wrap 1 Default Value Stop recording 0 Description This parameter specifies the action to take when the memory buffer allocated to store intermediate session records becomes full Select Stop recording to instruct the router to discard any new intermediate session records Select Wrap to allow new records to overwrite existing records in the buffer The oldest records in the buffer are overwritten first Parameter Memory record format Valid Values ASCII 0 Binary 1 Default Value ASCII 0 Description This parameter specifies the format in which intermediate sessio
39. Direction Indicates how the router establishes a static routing circuit by an incoming call request IN or an outgoing call request OUT In either case the SVC is initially established upon operator action but the circuit is not fully enabled until both ends of the circuit have initialized successfully Initial Min Timer The amount of time in seconds that a static out circuit waits for a link to be initialized reception of either an ESH or an ISH after the call request has been accepted If the initial min timer expires before the link is fully initialized the SVC is cleared and an event is generated indicating initialization failure Enable IS IS Indicates whether the IS IS protocol is enabled on this circuit L2 Only Indicates whether this routing circuit is used for Level2 routing only External Domain Indicates whether the router transmits and receives messages to and from a domain outside its IS IS routing domain Metric Gives the cost of this address ISIS Hello Timer Gives the time interval between transmissions of ISIS hellos DECnetvV Link Initialization Indicates whether DEC style link initialization for this circuit is enabled YES or disabled NO Receive Verifier Displays verification data to be checked against a received XID when verifying by circuit Transmit Verifier Displays verification data to be included in XIDs when verifying by circuit Explicit Receive Verification Indicates whether veri
40. Enable Disable beh og Set Add Delete List Activate_new contig TN3270E Monitoring APPN Accessing the APPN Monitoring Commands APPN Monitoring Commands n Aping Dump List Memory Restart Stop TN3270E Chapter 3 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 Basic Configuration Procedures Enabling Router Parameters Setting Network Parameters v MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 213 213 AppleTalk over PPP AppleTalk 2 Zone Filters General Information Why ZoneName Filters How Do You Add Filters Sample Configuration Procedures Chapter 4 Configuring and Monitoring AppleTalk Phase 2 Accessing the AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Environment AppleTalk Phase 2 nena Commands Add ioe Delete Disable Enable List Set Accessing the AppleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Environment AppleTalk Phase 2 aes Commands Atecho Cache Clear Counters Counters Dump Interface Chapter 5 Using VINES VINES Overview VINES Over Router Protocols and Interfaces Service and Client Nodes VINES Network Layer Protocols VINES Internet Protocol VINES IP Routing Update Protocol RTP Internet Control Protocol ICP VINES Address Resolution Protocol VINES ARP Basic Configuration Procedures i Running Banyan VINES on the Bridging Router Running Banyan VINES over WAN Links Chapter 6 Configuring and Monitoring VINES Accessing the VINES Configuration Envir
41. IP Host NHRP Client non NHRP Shortcut VC part of routed path that is not bypassed Figure 29 NHRP in a Classic IP Environment with non NHRP Device 348 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using NHRP NHRP in a Pure LAN Emulation Environment In the LAN emulation case routers use the IBM extensions to provide NBMA information for devices on their ELANs When Device1 receives traffic from host A destined to host B it originates a Next Hop Resolution Request and sends it on the routed path Device2 replies to the request with NBMA information about host B one of the stations that it serves because they are on the same ELAN Device1 then can establish a data direct VCC to host B even though host B does not participate in or support the NHRP exchanges Note that this VCC would be used only for traffic in the direction from A to B Similarly when host B sends traffic to host A Device2 generates a Next Hop Resolution Request Device1 replies with addressing information about host A and Device2 establishes a data direct VCC to A for traffic from B to A The LECs in this example are standard compliant devices with no NHRP support They must satisfy the LEC requirements described in ENH ee 354d Nothing special has to be configured in these devices or in the NHRP servers The NHRP traffic flows over the ELAN subnet with no additional VCs Device 1 HRP Server IP Router 7 Device 2 NHRP Se
42. Indicates whether the metric cost is used for external E routing or internal I routing State When set to ON this address will receive packets When set to OFF this is a non functional address routing circuit routingcircuitname Changes the values of the configuration for a routing circuit You can enter a routing circuit name or let the router prompt you for a name The values in brackets are the current values taken from the permanent database Example change routing circuit Routing Circuit Name currentvalue Recall Timer 0 65535 currentvalue Max Call Attempts 0 255 currentvalue Initial Min Timer 1 65535 currentvalue Enable ES IS currentvalue Enable IS IS currentvalue Level 2 only currentvalue External Domain currentvalue Default Metric currentvalue ESIS IS Hello Timer currentvalue ISIS Hello Timer currentvalue Enable DECnetV Link Initialization currentvalue Modify Receive Verifier YES NO currentvalue Modify Transmit Verifier YES NO currentvalue Explicit Receive Verification TRUE FALSE currentvalue template femplate name Changes the values of the template for a static out routing circuits You can enter a template name or let the router prompt you for a template name The values in brackets are the current values for the parameters the configured values read from the permanent database Example change template Template Name currentvalue
43. NHRP Access Controls NHRP access controls for denying shortcuts to certain IP addresses may be defined by adding those addresses to both the exclude list and disallowed router to router shortcuts ATM Network ID Since an server may have more than one ATM adapter it may be connected to two different or unassociated networks This must be considered when deciding when shortcut VCs should be allowed You can determine which interfaces should be treated as if they are connected to the same physical ATM network by assigning each ATM interface a Network ID by using the set command at the ATM Interface Config gt prompt as described in the Using and Configuring ATM chapter in Software User s Guide ATM interfaces with the same Network ID are considered to belong to the same network By default all ATM interfaces are assigned to Network ID 0 Configuring the LANE Shortcuts Interface LSI The NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface LSI is automatically created for each ATM adapter when NHRP is enabled for the router The LSI uses default values for the following parameters e ESI e Selector e Use Best Effort Service for Data VCCs e Peak Cell Rate of outbound Data VCCs e Sustained Cell Rate of outbound VCCs e Use ATM adapter s universally administered MAC address for source The default values may be modified using the change command from the NHRP Advanced config gt prompt See Configuring Devices in an ATM Network If you ha
44. Note the interface number of each Token Ring interface Config gt list device 3 Use the network command with the interface number of the Token Ring interface you want to configure This places you in the Token Ring configuration process Config gt network 0 TKR config gt 4 Use the list command to verify the Token Ring configuration information TKR config gt list Token Ring configuration Chapter 7 Using DNA IV 261 Using DNA IV 9 Packet size INFO field 2052 Speed 4 Mb sec Media Shielded RIF Aging Timer 120 Source Routing Enabled Mac Address 000000000000 Exit the Token Ring configuration process and enter the DNA NCP configuration process TKR config gt exit Config gt protocol DN NCP gt Use the define command to define a DNA circuit on the Token Ring interface NCP gt define circuit tkr 0 state on Optionally use the define command to set the routing type for the circuit For bilingual or Phase IV support you need to change the routing type from the default standard to either bilingual or AMA NCP gt define circuit tkr 0 router type bilingual or NCP gt define circuit tkr 0 router type AMA Use the list command to check the parameters NCP gt list circuit tkr 0 characteristics Circuit Permanent Characteristics Circuit TKR O State On Cost 4 Router priority 64 Hello timer 15 Max routers 16 Router type Standard Restart the router so that all configured param
45. Routing CP prompt s are the last part of entering a routing list Here you supply the names of one or more CPs that may know how to reach the configured list of LUs Along with each CP name you may configure an optional subnetwork visit count This allows you to specify a different maximum number of subnetworks a session may traverse for different CPs In addition to explicitly configuring FQCP names there are a couple keywords defined that equate to the local node s CP name all native extended border nodes etc See the section with configuration command detail for those keywords As with the LU name list the same shortcut keys are available to speed stepping through an existing CP name list Add COS Mapping Table Note COS mapping tables are not supported for 2210 12x models 34 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN The class of service mapping table allows for the conversion of non native COS names to native COS names and vice versa Non native networks using the same COS names as the extended border node s native network need not have a COS mapping table defined If only some of the non native COS names differ from the native COS names then only those that differ should be configured in a COS mapping table A given COS mapping table may apply to a single or multiple non native networks You may configure multiple COS mapping tables as necessary There are limits on the number of non native network names used in COS mappi
46. The interval between generation of complete SNPs Partial SNP The minimum interval between sending partial SNPs Min LSP Generation Max LSP Generation The minimum and maximum intervals between generations of LSPs Min LSP Transmission The minimum interval between LSP retransmissions Min Broadcast LSP Transmission The minimum interval between LSP retransmissions on a broadcast circuit Waiting Time The time the update process must delay before entering the ON state DR ISIS Hello The interval between generations of IS IS hello PDUs if this router is a designated router ES Config Timer The minimum interval between that an ES must send a hello packet each time an interface comes up virtual circuits Displays information about all X 25 virtual circuits Example list virtual circuits Use the set command to configure the router to run the OSI protocol Syntax set adjacency algorithm globals network entity title phaseivpfx subnet switches Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 323 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 timers transmit password DEC configuration only virtual circuit IBM 2210 configuration only adjacency Adds or changes an ES adjacency Add an ES adjacency for all LAN ESs that do not run the ES IS protocol Example set adjacency Interface Number 0 Area Address System ID MAC Address Interface Number Indicates the interface number that co
47. This parameter specifies the fully qualified CP name of the dependent LU server DLUS that is to be used as a backup for the downstream PU associated with this link station This parameter allows the default backup server to be overridden A backup is not required and the NULL value indicates the absence of a backup server Note that NULL can be specified even when a default backup server has been defined by erasing the default value that appears for this parameter 168 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 27 Configuration Parameter List Modify LLC Characteristics Parameter Information Parameter Remote APPN SAP Valid Values Multiples of four in the hexadecimal range of X 04 to X EC Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the Destination SAP DSAP address on the destination node to which data will be sent This DSAP address value will appear in the LLC frame to identify the service access point SAP address associated with the adjacent node s APPN link station Parameter Maximum number of outstanding l format LPDUs TW Valid Values 1 to 127 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the transmit Command Line option which is the maximum number of sequentially numbered l format LPDUs that the link station may have unacknowledged
48. VR 1 In SNA either a a logical connection between two subarea nodes that is physically realized as a particular explicit route or b a logical connection that is contained wholly within a subarea node for intranode sessions A virtual route between distinct subarea nodes imposes a transmission priority on the underlying explicit route provides flow control through virtual route pacing and provides data integrity through sequence numbering of path information units PIUs 2 Contrast with explicit route ER See also path and route extension REX W wide area network WAN 1 A network that provides communication services to a geographic area larger than that served by a local area network or a metropolitan area network and that may use or provide public communication facilities T 2 Adata communication network designed to serve an area of hundreds or thousands of miles for example public and private packet switching networks and national telephone networks 3 Contrast with local area network LAN and metropolitan area network MAN wildcard character Synonym for pattern matching character X X 21 An International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee CCITT recommendation for a general purpose interface between data terminal equipment and data circuit terminating equipment for synchronous operations on a public data network X 25 1 An International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Co
49. When APING responds faster than 1 millisecond the data rate displayed appears as Syntax aping flags lu_name where flags Specifies the options for the APING M Mode name Default Value INTER Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 209 APPN Monitoring Commands Dump List t TP name Default Value APING i Count of sends and receives to issue Default Value 1 X Count of conversations to run Default Value 1 y Count of TPs to run Default Value 1 S Size of packet Default Value 100 q Quiet b Background display goes to talk 2 lu_name Specifies the fully qualified LU name of the target of the APING Valid Values Any valid fully qualified LU name Default Value None Use the Dump command to create an APPN dump You can use Boot config gt on talk 6 to determine where the dump will be saved The dump name will be the same as the dump of the whole router with _A 1 concatenated to the end You can initiate multiple dumps The concatenation will be incremented for each dump When the dump name has reached _A 5 it will be reset to _A 1 Syntax dump You can check the size on the dump server to know when the dump finishes The router continues to execute while the dump occurs Use the List command to display information about the APPN configuration The command lists Syntax list name Command Function List cp Displays a table of all cp sessions List isr
50. able 2 on page 29 for a list of ports that support HPR A for information about configuring the eee that Peen APPN and HPR routing over direct DLCs on the router In the case of HPR parameters such as retry and path switch timers the configuration is done at the node level and is not specified on individual adapters ee able 2 on page 29 for a list of ports that support DLUR Configuring Focal Points Focal points can be explicit or implicit Explicit focal points are configured at the focal point itself No configuration at the router is required Implicit focal points on the other hand are configured at the router You configure them with the command add focal_point Add the primary implicit focal point first If you add another focal point it is known as the first backup implicit focal point If you add yet another it is known as the second backup implicit focal point Up to eight backup implicit focal points may be added for a total of 9 To delete a focal point use the command delete focal_point You will be prompted for the name of the focal point to delete When the name is deleted the remaining focal points retain their relative position with each other Subsequent focal points will be added at the end of the list There is no way to insert a focal point in the middle of the list You must delete them one at a time and then re enter the entire list Configuring Held Alert Queue Size To configure the size of the held al
51. define module access control command and the circuit specifier state on Enables the access control list on this circuit state off Disables the access control list on this circuit type exclusive Specifies that any packets matching one or more of the filters in the access control list for this interface will be dropped type inclusive Specifies that only packets matching one or more of the filters in the access control list for this interface will be forwarded filter source result source mask dest result dest mask Adds a filter to the list for the specified circuit The filter is added to the end of the existing list The source address is masked with the source mask and compared to the source result The same is done with the dest mask and dest result The action depends on what type of access control is in use on the circuit The following items are the options you select from after you enter the define module access control command and the filter circuit specifier source result Address that the source address is compared to after masking source mask Mask used for the source address dest result Address that the destination address is compared to after masking dest mask Mask used for the destination address Example define module access control circuit eth state on 272 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands module routing filter circuit specifier argument def
52. e Layer 3 protocol ID X 7085 SNA APPN HPR NLP e Enterprise Extender Support for HPR over IP Refer to Table 2 on page 24 for a list of DLCs that support HPR Note HPR is not supported over SDLC X 25 or DLSw ports Dependent LU Requester DLUR The DLUR option extends the support of T2 0 or T2 1 devices containing dependent LUs to APPN nodes The DLUR function on an APPN network node or an APPN end node works in conjunction with a dependent LU server DLUS in a mixed APPN subarea network The DLUS function may reside in some other part of the mixed network from the DLUR The dependent LU flows SSCP PU and SSCP LU are encapsulated over an LU 6 2 CP SVR pipe established between the DLUR APPN node and the DLUS SSCP The CP SVR pipe is made up of a pair of LU 6 2 sessions using a new CPSVRMGR mode between the DLUR and the DLUS This pipe brings the SSCP function in the DLUS to the DLUR APPN node where it can be made available to attached T2 0 T2 1 nodes containing dependent LUs The dependent LU will appear to be located within the domain of the serving SSCP Session initiation flows will be emulated from the DLUS but session bind and data paths will be calculated directly between the dependent LU and its session partner This path may or may not traverse the serving DLUS node Set the adjacent node type parameter to PU 2 0 Node when defining a link station to a T2 0 adjacent node containing dependent LUs Set the adjacent node
53. information that is transmitted using SDLC procedures frame level Synonymous with data link level See link level frame relay 1 An interface standard describing the boundary between a user s equipment and a fast packet network In frame relay systems flawed frames are discarded recovery comes end to end rather than hop by hop 2 A technique derived from the integrated services digital network ISDN D channel standard It assumes that connections are reliable and dispenses with the overhead of error detection and control within the network front end processor A processor such as the IBM 3745 or 3174 that relieves a main frame from the communication control tasks G gateway 1 A functional unit that interconnects two computer networks with different network architectures A gateway connects networks or systems of different architectures A bridge interconnects networks or systems with the same or similar architectures T 2 In the IBM Token Ring Network a device and its associated software that connect a local area network to another local area network or a host that uses different logical link protocols 3 In TCP IP synonym for router general data stream GDS The data stream used for conversations in LU 6 2 sessions general data stream GDS variable A type of RU substructure that is preceded by an identifier and a length field and includes either application data user control data or SNA defined
54. mixed classical IP and ELAN 350 exclude lists 354 implementation 352 disallowed router to router shortcuts 355 IBM specific extensions 355 LANE shortcuts 352 limitations 347 next hop routers 354 virtual network interface VNI 352 NHRP configuration commands 345 accessing 359 add 361 advanced 360 change 363 delete 362 disable 360 enable 359 list 360 364 set 365 summary 359 NHRP interfaces configuring 345 monitoring 359 NHRP monitoring commands accessing 368 list of 369 node level parameter lists 48 node tuning 38 node types 1 O Open System Interconnection OSI address prefix encoding 297 298 attached L2 IS routers 295 authentication passwords 298 designated IS 293 domain specific part DSP 287 end system ES 285 end system hello messages 299 ES IS protocol 299 external routing 296 initial domain part IDP 286 description 286 287 intermediate system IS 285 internal routing 296 IS hello messages 299 IS IS addressing format 287 address format 288 AFI 298 area address 287 default address prefixes 298 fixed length IDI 297 non pseudonode 294 point to point 293 pseudonode 294 295 selector 287 system ID 287 variable length IDI 298 IS IS areas 289 Open System Interconnection OSI continued IS IS domain 290 IS to IS hello IIH messages 292 293 L1 IIH message 292 L1 link state updates 294 L1 routing 295 L2 IIH messages 293 L2 link state updates 294 295 L2 routing 296 link state
55. the Internet suite of protocols a network management protocol that is used to monitor routers and attached networks SNMP is an application layer protocol Information on devices managed is defined and stored in the application s Management Information Base MIB SNA management services SNA MS The services provided to assist in management of SNA networks socket 1 An endpoint for communication between processes or application programs 2 The abstraction provided by the University of California s Berkeley Software Distribution commonly called Berkeley UNIX or BSD UNIX that serves as an endpoint for communication between processes or applications source route bridging In LANs a bridging method that uses the routing information field in the IEEE 802 5 medium access control MAC header of a frame to determine which rings or token ring segments the frame must transit The routing information field is inserted into the MAC header by the source node The information in the routing information field is derived from explorer packets generated by the source host source routing In LANs a method by which the sending station determines the route the frame will follow and includes the routing information with the frame Bridges then read the routing information to determine whether they should forward the frame source service access point SSAP In SNA and TCP IP a logical address that allows a system to send data to a remo
56. token ring FR X 25 only Valid Values 0 to 100 The sum of the percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls and the percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls cannot exceed 100 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies the percentage of the maximum number of link stations that will be reserved for incoming calls Link stations that are not reserved for incoming or outgoing calls are available for either purpose on a demand basis 136 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 19 Configuration Parameter List Port Definition continued Parameter Information Parameter Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls Valid Values 0 to 100 The sum of the percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls and the percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls cannot exceed 100 If SDLC primary and multipoint then valid value is 100 Default Value 0 If SDLC primary and multipoint then default value is 100 Description This parameter specifies the percentage of the maximum number of link stations that will be reserved for outgoing calls Fractions resulting from the computation are truncated Link stations that are not reserved for incoming or outgoing calls are available for either purpose on a demand basis Parameter UDP port number for XID exchange Valid Values 1024 to 65535 Default Value 11000 Description This parameter s
57. type Example clear password transmit Password Type Domain delete command to remove parameters previously configured using the set or add command Syntax delete adjacency alias area filter DEC configuration only prefix address routing circuit 314 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 subnet template DEC configuration only virtual circuit adjacency Removes a Statically configured ES adjacency previously configured with the set adjacency command Example delete adjacency Interface Number 0 Area Address System ID Interface number Indicates the interface of the adjacency Area address Indicates the area address of the adjacency System ID Indicates the portion of the NET that identifies the adjacency within the area alias Removes the ASCII string that designates a portion of an area address or system ID Example delete alias ALIAS area address Removes the area address address previously configured with the add area command Example delete area 47000580999999000012341234 filter filter name Removes a filter record from the permanent database Example delete p_systems prefix address Removes the prefix address previously configured with the set prefix address command Example delete prefix address Interface Number 0 Address Prefix Interface number Indicates the interface number over which the prefix a
58. 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 10 00 5A Os ses siren svevauscaveaee Z 009C 01 95 01 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 J ee eee OOAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 DE 08 00 5A 00 eee eee Za 00BC 00 01 00 07 06 AO 00 80 00 20 80 00 00 00 sida ee ee eee eee eee Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 375 NHRP Packet Tracing 376 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 13 Using IP Version 6 IPv6 This chapter describes how to use IPv6 IPv6 Overview IP Version 6 IPv6 is a new version of the Internet Protocol It is designed as a successor to IP Version 4 IPv4 The following list identifies some of the advantages provided by IPv6 Large address space IPv6 uses a 128 bit address Routing Using the large address size IPv6 provides an hierarchical address scheme which allows you to create a flexible routing hierarchy Ease of configuration NDP provides host autoconfiguration Security IPv6 makes IP Security mandatory Support for multimedia traffic The IPv6 header has priority and flow label fields to accommodate integrated Quality of Service Simplification The IPv6 header is fixed and simplified The router is no longer required to perform fragmentation simplifying packet processing In addition options type data is implemented in extension headers that are only processed by the destination node IPv6 Comparison with IPv4 IPv6 includes many changes from IPv4 The most
59. 1 Dest Protocol Addr 3 3 3 2 0038 00 08 00 1C 08 00 5A 00 00 01 00 OA 00 00 00 00 f VATAR 0048 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0058 00 08 00 34 08 00 5A 00 00 01 00 OC 00 00 00 00 0068 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 374 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 NHRP Packet Tracing 0078 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO ee eee ee eee 0088 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 08 00 08 08 00 5A 00 eee eee Z 0098 00 01 00 06 80 00 00 OO nee e eee eee Sample trace output 2 Dir INCOMING Time 0 0 50 69 Trap 6035 Comp NHRP Type UNKNOWN Port 1 Circuit 0x000000 Size 202 x NHRP MPOA Frame AddressFamily ATM NSAP ProtocolType IPv4 HopCount 63 PacketSize 202 Checksum 0xEC88 ExtensionOffset 0x005C Version 1 PktType ResolutionReply SrcAddrTL 20 SrcSubAddrTL 0 SrcProtoLen 4 DstProtoLen 4 Flags requester is a router Flags authoritative info Flags requested info unique ReqID 1 Src NBMA 39840F0000000000000000000610005A019600C9 Src Protocol Addr 6 6 6 1 Dest Protocol Addr 3 3 3 2 1483 VCC Shortcut Information CIE follows CIE Code 0 Prefix 32 MTU 4376 Htime 180 Preference 254 CIE NBMA 39840F0000000000000000000310005A01950103 CIE Protocol Addr 3 3 3 1 005C 00 08 00 1C 08 00 5A 00 00 01 00 OB 00 00 00 D1 fas TEETE 006C 97 00 01 04 03 03 03 02 11 18 90 00 5A 01 94 00 aeesssssssses Lisa 007C 00 08 00 34 08 00 5A 00 00 01 00 OD 00 B4 14 00 Pe A A 008C 39 84 OF 00 00 00
60. 2 2 236 15 Sample Neighbor Table 6m Bok oe we a wa A ew 2OF 16 Example of Inclusive Access Control Od of Se a oe ee mee BOO 17 Example of Exclusive Access Control 256 18 Example of Area Routing Filter for Security 258 19 Example of Blending DECnet Domains 2 260 20 OSI Network ge aap Ui car es HS oe e a ee He a ek ae ee 21 NSAP Address Structure me 4 E eG ed ok a ok Dow 462286 22 IS IS NSAP Addressing Interpretation St ee ee a e o eee 23 GOSIP Address Format 2 2 288 24 OSI Domain s s s ioe k qg ee ee ee ee 29 25 Synonymous Areas bog E g ow dk E w a 2292 26 Internal and External Routing Metrics a8 fe amp ite ew ue te 297 27 Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP Overview amp fe ce ke we ae a oe E 28 NHRP in a Classic IP Environment ew ee 848 29 NHRP in a Classic IP Environment with non NHRP Device oe we 848 30 NHRP in an ELAN Environment 2 ig me Bo 2 BAY 31 NHRP in an ELAN Environment with LAN Switches ee a a es amp 2 390 32 NHRP in a Mixed Classical IP and ELAN Environment 351 33 NHRPtoantEgress Router foe gaee bee we 2 OOM 34 Using Disallowed Router to Router Shortcuts ba ee we oe we a ow BBE Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 xi Xii MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Tables Implementation of APPN Network Node Functions Port Types Supported for APPN Ro
61. 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 18 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Backward Traffic Tagging Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes unless Best Effort connection Description This parameter indicates that cells that are nonconforming to cell loss priority 0 traffic specification but are conforming to cell loss priority 1 traffic specification are marked and allowed into the ATM network You cannot specify this parameter for a Best Effort connection Parameter Backward QoS Valid Values CLASS _0 CLASS _1 CLASS 2 CLASS _3 CLASS 4 where CLASS_0 The unspecified class The network does not specify any QoS CLASS _1 Performance is comparable to current digital private line performance CLASS _2 Intended for packetized video and audio in teleconferencing and multimedia applications CLASS 3 Intended for interoperation of connection oriented protocols such as Frame Relay CLASS 4 Intended for interoperation of connectionless protocols such as IP Default Value CLASS 0 Description This parameter indicates which class of service is provided to an ATM virtual connection You cannot specify this parameter for a Best Effort connection Parameter LDLC retry count Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 3 Description This parameter is used in conjunction with the LDLC timer period to provide reliable delivery of XIDs The re
62. 6 CNA r oo APPN APPN CH Bridge lt APPN e URN CNA 7 a node o BNI 1 node M LO BNI 1 DLCI 1 APPN j CNB APPN A p node KOH Bridge lt H BNI 1 node HOO LAN BNI 1 DLCI 1 Logical view Figure 11 Multiple Connection Networks Using Bridging Notes 1 This configuration requires two connection network definitions since there are two SATFs Chapter 1 APPN 47 APPN 2 The DLCI number specified on the ports can be the same or different 3 The BDA MAC address is not defined on the connection network definition 4 The BNI MAC address SAP pair specified on the ports can be the same or different Port Level Parameter Lists Use the following tables to configure APPN ports Link Level Parameter Lists Use the following tables to configure APPN link stations LU Parameter List Use the following table to configure an LU Node Level Parameter Lists Use the following tables to configure an APPN node 48 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN APPN Configuration Notes The following examples show special parameters to consider when configuring various features to transport APPN traffic Note These examples show sample output The output you see may not appear exactly like the output shown here Note In some configuration examples the results of a talk 6 list command may show more configuration than is actually presented in the sample However the sample will show all of th
63. 81 globals Displays the router s current NET area addresses switch settings global parameters and timer configuration Example list globals DNAV State Enabled Network Entity Title 4700050001 0000931004F0 Manual Area Addresses 1 4700050001 2 7700050011 Switches ESIS Checksum On ESIS Init Option Off Authentication Off Globals IS Type L2 System ID Length 6 318 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 L1 LSP Size 1492 bytes L2 LSP Size 1492 bytes Max IS Adjs 50 Max ES Adjs 200 Max Areas 50 Max ESs per Area 50 Max Ifc Prefix Adds 100 Max Ext Prefix Adds 100 Max Synonymous Areas 3 Max Link State Updates 100 OSI State or DNAV State Indicates if the OSI or DNA V protocol is running on the router Network Entity Title Indicates the area address and system ID that make up the router s NET Manual Area Addresses Areas that the router operates within The first area address reflects the router s configured NET area address Additional area addresses were added with the add area command Globals Indicates the currently configured global parameters IS Type The router s designation in the OSI environment L1 or L2 Domain ID Length The size in bytes of the system ID portion of the NET Note All routers throughout the domain must agree on the length of the domain ID L1 LSP Size L2 LSP Size Displays the L1 and L2 maxi
64. A process that on demand connects two or more data terminal equipment DTEs and permits the exclusive use of a data circuit between them until the connection is released I A 2 Synonymous with line switching class A network In Internet communications a network in which the high order most significant bit of the IP address is set to 0 and the host ID occupies the three low order octets class B network In Internet communications a network in which the two high order most significant and next to most significant bits of the IP address are set to 1 and 0 respectively and the host ID occupies the two low order octets class of service COS A set of characteristics such as route security transmission priority and bandwidth used to construct a route between session partners The class of service is derived from a mode name specified by the initiator of a session client 1 A functional unit that receives shared services from a server T 2 A user client server In communications the model of interaction in distributed data processing in which a program at one site sends a request to a program at another site and awaits a response The requesting program is called a client the answering program is called a server clocking 1 In binary synchronous communication the use of clock pulses to control synchronization of data and control characters 2 A method of controlling the number of data bits sent on
65. APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters TOSTNC2 Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Station address 1 fe C2 Note C2 must match to the remote secondary station Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list link tostnc2 will show link station definitions APPN config gt act Note J Configuring a primary point to point SDLC station Configuring a secondary point to point SDLC station Configuring a negotiable point to point SDLC station u Configuring a primary multipoint SDLC station J Configuring secondary point to point multi APPN link stations Configuring APPN Over X 25 This example shows APPN configuration for an X 25 port and two link stations One link station is a PVC and one is an SVC The SVC is configured as a limited resource The SVC will be activated when needed and brought down when it is not Boats Config gt p appn APPN user configuration Boats APPN config gt add port APPN Port Link Type P PP F RAME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A T IP x Interface number Default 0 0 2 Port name Max 8 c
66. An extension to SNA featuring a greater distributed network control that avoids critical hierarchical dependencies thereby isolating the effects of single points of failure b dynamic exchange of network topology information to foster ease of connection reconfiguration and adaptive route selection c dynamic definition of network resources and d automated resource registration and directory lookup APPN extends the LU 6 2 peer orientation for end user services to network control and supports multiple LU types including LU 2 LU 3 and LU 6 2 Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN end node A node that provides a broad range of end user services and supports sessions between its local control point CP and the CP in an adjacent network node It uses these sessions to dynamically register its resources with the adjacent CP its network node server to send and receive directory search requests and to obtain management services An APPN end node can also attach to a subarea network as a peripheral node or to other end nodes 448 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN network A collection of interconnected network nodes and their client end nodes Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN network node Anode that offers a broad range of end user services and that can provide the following e Distributed directory services including registration of its domain resources to a central direc
67. Border Node question If you answer 0 none of the following Branch Extender questions will appear b Answer yes or no to the Permit search for unregistered LUs question depending on whether or not you want to allow searches from the backbone for LUs that were not registered with the network node server c Your answer to the Branch uplink question will determine the default for the analogous link level question Use the add link command to a Answer yes to the Branch uplink question if you want the router to appear as an end node on this link An end node is for links to network nodes in the backbone Note that this question doesn t appear and is forced to yes if you 30 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN have defined the adjacent link station to be a network node on one of the earlier configuration prompts Answer no if you want the router to appear as a network node on this link A network node is for links to end nodes b The s uplink to another Branch Extender node question is asked only if this link has been defined as a limited resource and has also been defined as a Branch Extender uplink Answer yes if the adjacent node is another Branch Extender c The Preferred network node server question is asked only if the adjacent node is a network node and CP CP sessions are supported on this link Since you can only have a single preferred network node server you won t be prompted for this question once it has been set to yes
68. Config gt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again 2 At the CONFIG prompt enter the p pim command to get to the PIM6 Config gt prompt PIM Configuration Commands To configure PIM enter the commands at the PIM6 Config gt prompt Table 71 PIM Configuration Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the eens for specific commands if available See delete Deletes a PIM interface disable Disables PIM on the device enable Enables PIM on the device and sets global PIM default configuration values list Lists the configuration set Sets PIM configuration parameter values Exit Delete Use the delete command to remove a configured PIM interface Syntax delete interfaceadadr Interface address Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 411 PIM Configuration Commands Talk 6 Disable Enable List Example PIM6 Config gt delete Interface address Use the disable command to disable PIM on the device Syntax disable Use the enable command to enable PIM on the device and set global PIM default configuration values Syntax enable Use the list command to display the PIM configuration Syntax list all interface preference variables all Displays all PIM configuration information interface Displays PIM configuration information about the curren
69. DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Note You cannot do a traceroute to yourself or you will receive the following error message Sorry can t traceroute to this router Syntax traceroute address Example traceroute 490002aa0004000e08 Successful trace TRACEROUTE 470007 56 databytes 1 490002aa0004000e08 32ms 5ms 5ms Destination unreachable response Destination unreachable No response 1 k Qe RK TRACEROUTE Displays the destination area address and the size of the packet being sent to that address 1 The first trace showing the destination s NSAP and the amount of time it took the packet to arrive at the destination The packet is traced three times Destination unreachable Indicates that no route to destination is available a a 2 Indicates that the router is expecting some form of response from the destination but the destination is not responding The router will wait 32 hops before timing out Go to the ELS and turn on OSI CLNP messages to determine why the host is not responding 344 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 11 Using NHRP This chapter describes how to use e Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP as specified in Internet Draft Version 13 which has been submitted for RFC status Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP Overview The Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP defines a method for a source station to determine the Non Broadcast Multi Access NBMA address of the
70. E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A TM IP p Interface number Default 0 0 4 Port name Max 8 characters PPP004 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Limited resource Y es N o N High performance routing Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2044 2044 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt add li J APPN Station Port name for the link station ppp004 Station name Max 8 characters toNN6WRR Limited resource Y es N o N Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 0 High performance routing Y es N o Y Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt add li APPN Station Port name for the link station fr 01 Station name Max 8 characters tonnlpri Activate link automatically Y es N o Y DLCI number for link
71. Edit Node Level Traces Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description his pa Table 10 on page 103l for the set of questions you will be asked if this option is enabled Parameter Edit Interprocess Signals Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description his parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option See for the set of questions you will be asked if this option is enabled Parameter Edit Module Entry and Exit Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description for the e of questions you will be asked if this option is enabled 102 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 9 Configuration Parameter List Trace Setup Questions continued Parameter Information Parameter Edit General Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description Table 10 Configuration Parameter List Node Level Traces Parameter Information Parameter Process management Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about the management of processes within the APPN network node including the creation and termination of processes processes entering a wait state and the posting of processes Parameter Process to process communication Valid Values Yes No Def
72. Example 12 routes Level 2 Routes Destination Cost Type 4700 0500 01 0 LOC AREA 4900 02 20 AREA 0000 9310 04C9 Next Hop Destination Indicates the system ID of the destination area or reachable address Cost Indicates the cost of this route Type Indicates the four types of routes LOC area local LOC prefix area prefix l and prefix E LOC area is a directly connected area a LOC prefix is 338 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 L1 Summary OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 a prefix that this router advertises prefix I and prefix E are routes that require another hop to reach their destination Next Hop Indicates the next hop a packet would take on its route An designation or a direct designation refers to a directly connected host off the router A system ID refers to the next router the packet must pass through to reach its destination Use the I1 summary command to display a summary of the level 1 link state database Syntax 11 summary Example 1 summary Link State Database Summary Level One LSP ID Lifetime Sequence Checksum Flags Cost 0000 9300 40B0 0000 0 0 0 0 1024 0000 93E0 107A 0000 384 CE 3CC9 1 0 AAQ0 0400 0504 0000 298 8E 40F1 B 20 AAQO 0400 0504 0100 4 B8 A812 3 20 Total Checksum 25CC LSP ID This represents the system ID of the source of the link state PDU plus two additional bytes The first additional byte designates the type of update 00 represents a non psuedono
73. LLC Characteristics 28 Configuration Parameter List Modify HPR Defaults 29 Configuration Parameter List LEN End Node LU Name 30 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Detail CONOR WN gt 31 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Configuration for ATM 32 Configuration Parameter List TG Characteristics Connection Network 33 Configuration Parameter List APPN COS Mode Name to COS Name Mapping Detail a 34 Configuration Parameter List APPN Additional port to Connection Network S im amp 35 Configuration Parameter List APPN Implicit Focal Point 36 Configuration Parameter List APPN Local PU s 37 Configuration Parameter List Routing List Configuration i 38 Configuration Parameter List COS Mapping Table ae f 39 TN3270E Configuration Command Summary 40 Configuration Parameter List Set TN3270E 41 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Implicit 42 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E LU 43 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Map 44 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Port 45 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E LU 46 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E Implicit 47 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E Map 48 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E Port 49 APPN Monitoring Command Summary 50 TN3270E Monitoring Command Summary 51 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configurat
74. Network Server LNS An LNS operates on any platform capable that can be a PPP end station The LNS handles the server side of the L2TP protocol Since L2TP relies only on the single media over which L2TP tunnels arrive the LNS has only a single LAN or WAN interface yet is still able to terminate calls arriving from any the full range of PPP interfaces supported by a LAC These include asynchronous ISDN synchronous ISDN V 120 and other types of connections LAN bridge server LBS In the IBM Token Ring Network Bridge Program the server that keeps statistical information about frames forwarded between two or more rings through a bridge The LBS sends these statistics to the appropriate LAN managers through the LAN reporting mechanism LRM LAN Emulation LE An ATM Forum standard that supports legacy LAN applications over ATM networks LAN Emulation Client LEC ALAN Emulation component that represents users of the Emulated LAN LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS ALAN Emulation Service component that centralizes and disseminates configuration data LAN Emulation Server LES ALAN Emulation Service component that resolves LAN Destinations to ATM Addresses LAN Network Manager LNM An IBM licensed program that enables a user to manage and monitor LAN resources from a central workstation LAN segment 1 Any portion of a LAN for example a bus or ring that can operate independently but that is connected to
75. Note For a point to point synchronous line circuit set this argument to 1 The result is significant memory savings on a router with multiple point to point lines Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 267 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands The sum of maximum routers over all circuits should be less than the executor maximum broadcast routers argument although this limit is not strongly enforced recall timer Determines the delay in seconds between call attempts to establish an X 25 outgoing static circuit For define valid values are in the range 1 to 60 seconds The default is 1 second See also the argument maximum recalls For set valid values are in the range 0 to 65595 seconds The default is 60 seconds router priority range Specifies the router s priority in bidding to become the designated router for the end nodes on this circuit Range 1 to 127 where 127 is the highest priority Default 64 If two routers have the same priority the one with the higher node address wins The router priority has no effect on area routing decisions or in reaching the closest attached level 2 router Use the router priority to choose the designated router to be the one that is most likely to be the best next hop for the end nodes on the circuit If there are two routers on a circuit one with 500 nodes behind it the other with 20 nodes behind it the one with 500 nodes should have the higher router prio
76. PIM Monitoring Command Summary 2 416 73 RIP6 Configuration Command Summary 425 74 RIP6 Monitoring Command Summary 481 75 Comparison Protocols 2 4 483 76 Protocol Key Pon ow aoe bw ce a 77 Default Network Specific Maximum Packet Size oar a amp foe ie wy of ABS X V MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Notices References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM s product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any of IBM s intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product program or service Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products except those expressly designated by IBM are the user s responsibility IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it a
77. PPP 214 AppleTalk Phase 2 basic configuration procedures 213 216 configuring 213 monitoring 221 network parameters 213 216 router parameters 213 AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration commands add 222 delete 223 disable 224 enable 225 list 226 set 227 AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring commands atecho 229 cache 230 clear counters 231 counters 231 dump 231 interface 232 APPN monitoring 208 APPN DLSw 27 APPN configuration commands activate_new_config 193 add 124 delete 192 enable disable 83 list 193 set 83 TN3270 81 APPN Frame Relay BAN Connection Network 44 175 176 APPN monitoring commands accessing 208 Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 APPN monitoring commands continued aping 209 dump 210 list 210 memory 211 restart 211 stop 211 summary 209 tn3270e 211 atecho AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring command 229 ATM APPN using 63 ATM LAN Emulation configuring DNAIV 250 B before you configure 36 Border Node COS mapping table 190 routing list 187 Branch Extender 13 16 30 156 157 158 C cache AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring command 230 IPV6 monitoring command 398 change IPV6 configuration command 387 IPV6 update packet filter configuration command 395 NDP configuration command 407 RIP6 configuration command 426 change metric OSI DECnet V monitoring command 331 change prefix address 311 clear 313 PIM monitoring command 416 Client IP Address to LU Name Mapping 22 CLNP protocol 286 clnp Stats OSI DECnet V monit
78. Pertaining to two or more processes that depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals T 2 Occurring with a regular or predictable time relationship Synchronous Data Link Control SDLC 1 A discipline conforming to subsets of the Advanced Data Communication Control Procedures ADCCP of the American National Standards Institute ANSI and High level Data Link Control HDLC of the International Organization for Standardization for managing synchronous code transparent serial by bit information transfer over a link connection Transmission exchanges may be duplex or half duplex over switched or nonswitched links The configuration of the link connection may be point to point multipoint or loop I 2 Contrast with binary synchronous communication BSC SYNTAX In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a clause in the MIB module that defines the abstract data structure that corresponds to a managed object system In data processing a collection of people machines and methods organized to accomplish a set of specific functions I A system configuration A process that specifies the devices and programs that form a particular data processing system system services control point SSCP A component within a subarea network for managing the configuration coordinating network operator and problem determination requests and providing directory services and other session servic
79. RIP6 429 RIP6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 List Set static routes Enables advertisement of RIP6 static routes on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes poisoned reverse routes Enables poison reverse in sending RIP6 updates on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Use the list command to display the RIP6 configuration Syntax list all Example RIP6 config gt list all Use the set command to set RIP6 configuration parameters Syntax set rip6 in metric rip6 out metric rip6 in metric Sets the RIP6 metric on incoming RIP6 updates Change RIPng metric on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 input metric is to be set Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 RIP6 input Metric Specifies the value of the RIP6 metric used on incoming RIP6 updates Valid Values 1 15 Default Value 1 rip6 out metric Sets the RIP6 metric used on outgoing RIP6 updates Change RIPng metric on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 output metric is to be set Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 430 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 RIP6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 RIP6 output Metric Specifies the value of the metric used on outgoing RIP6 updates Valid Values 0 15 Default Value 0 Accessing the RIP6 Monitoring Environment Use the following procedure to access the RIP6
80. Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Figures Tables Notices Notice to Users of Online Versions of This Book Trademarks About the Software Conventions Used in This Manual i IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotocol Router Publications Summary of Changes for the IBM 2210 Software Library Editorial Changes ne ee ee ee Getting Help Exiting a Lower Level Environment Chapter 1 APPN What is APPN Peer to Peer Communications APPN Node Types What APPN Functions Are Implemented o on the Router APPN Network Node Optional Features 2 or gna High Performance Routing Dependent LU Requester DLUR APPN Connection Network Branch Extender Extended Border Nodes Branch Extender vs Extended Border Node Managing a Network Node Entry Point Capabilities for APPN related Alerts SNMP Capabilities for APPN MIBs i Topology Database Garbage Collection Configurable Held Alert Queue Implicit Focal Point Dynamic Definition of Dependent LUs DDDLU TN3270E Server Support for Subarea SNA Connections from the TN3270E Server to the Host Enterprise Extender Support for HPR over IP a a a ae Supported DLCs f on Router Configuration Process ak Configuration Changes That Require the APPN Function to Restart Configuration Requirements forAPPN ee ee Configuring the Router as an APPN Network Node Configuring Branch Extender Si tie Ga i Configuring Extended Border Nodes High Performance Routi
81. Service Advertising Protocol Sustained cell rate Server Cache Synchronization Protocol start delimiter SDLC relay synchronous data link control sequence number sever group id Simple Gateway Monitoring Protocol serial line standby monitor present Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Systems Network Architecture Subnetwork Access Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol subnetwork point of attachment OSPF intra area route OSPF external route type 1 OSPF external route type 2 OSPF inter area route type service profile ID Sequenced Packet Exchange signal quality error static random access memory source routing bridge specifically routed frame SDLC relay source routing transparent List of Abbreviations 443 SR TB source routing transparent bridge STA static STB spanning tree bridge STE spanning tree explorer STP shielded twisted pair spanning tree protocol SVC switched virtual circuit TB transparent bridge TCN topology change notification TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TEI terminal point identifier TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TKR token ring TMO timeout TOS type of service TSF transparent spanning frames TTL time to live TTY _ teletypewriter TX transmit UA unnumbered acknowledgment UDP User Datagram Protocol Ul unnumbered information UTP unshielded twisted pair VCC Virtual Channel Connection VINES Virtual NEtworking System V
82. TH Control information optionally followed by a basic information unit BIU or a BIU segment that is created and used by path control to route message units and to control their flow within the network See also path information unit transparent bridging In LANs a method for tying individual local area networks together through the medium access control MAC level A transparent bridge stores the tables that contain MAC addresses so that frames seen by the bridge can be forwarded to another LAN if the tables indicate to do so transport layer In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model the layer that provides a reliable end to end data transfer service There may be relay open systems in the path T See also Open Systems Interconnection reference model trap In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a message sent by a managed node agent function to a management station to report an exception condition Tunnel A tunnel is defined by an LNS LAC pair The tunnel carries PPP datagrams between the LAC and the LNS A single tunnel can multiplex many sessions A control connection operating over the same tunnel controls the establishment release and maintenance of all sessions and of the tunnel itself tunneling To treat a transport network as though it were a single communication link or LAN See also encapsulation T1 In the United States a 1 544 Mbps public access line It is available in twenty f
83. TROOO 0004AC9416B4 YES YES 1 TOVTAM1 TROOO 400000003888 YES YES 1 TONN35 PPPOO1 000000000000 YES YES 0 LU NAME LU NAME STATION NAME CP NAME APPN config gt Note J The primary route is interface 1 frame relay 58 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN The alternate route is interface 4 and is disabled Destination of WAN reroute is NN6 Configure WAN reroute primary and alternate Add the APPN port to NN22 Link station on APPN port NN22 Primary port Alternate port Alternate station to NN6 iy Primary station to NN6 iJ Destination configuration WZ APPN port on destination link station will be dynamically created when WAN reroute occurs Kk SS fre mm ES re He Configuring WAN Restoral The following example shows APPN over a primary PPP link For APPN no unique definitions are needed Both sides of the communication link are enabled for WAN restoral and are similarly configured kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxx Configuration of NN6 with a Wan Restoral link to NN35 xxx interface 1 is the primary interface 8 is the Secondary xxx NN35 must also have Wan Restoral configured for its primary secondary xxx interfaces xxx Note that for APPN there are NO unique definitions needed kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Circuit configuration FR Config gt li al Base net 6 Destination name 2210 35 Circuit priority 8 Inbound de
84. Value None Description This parameter specifies the fully qualified name of the connection network being defined on this router network node Since this name becomes the CP name of the virtual routing node VRN the name must be unique among all CP and LU names in the APPN network same as in the local Control Point Name All nodes that are members of a given connection network must use the same VRN Name The fully qualified VRN Name CP name of VRN has the form Network D ConnectionNetworkName where NetworkID is this router network node s network identifier Parameter Port type required Valid Values Token ring Ethernet Frame Relay BAN IP ATM Note If the port type is IP no port name will be specified since there is only one IP port Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the type of ports providing connectivity to the SATF for the connection network being defined A given connection network only supports one type of port with one set of characteristics 174 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 30 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Port name required Valid Values Name of port on which APPN routing has been enabled Note If the port type is IP no port name will be specified since there is only one IP port Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the n
85. Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 System ID Length Selects the length of the domain ID portion of the NET This length must be the same for all routers in same domain Max Synonymous Areas Selects the maximum number of level 1 areas that are serviced by this router L1 LSP Buffer Size Selects the buffer size of the level 1 LSPs and SNPs originated by the router Range is 512 to 1492 If the interface packet size is less than what you configured here OSI will not run and the router generates the ELS message ISIS 053 L2 LSP Buffer Selects the buffer size of the level 2 LSPs and SNPs originated by the router Range is 512 to 1492 If the interface packet size is less than what you configured here OSI will not run and the router generates the ELS message ISIS 053 Max IS Adjacencies Selects the total number of IS adjacencies allowed for all circuits This number is used to size the IS adjacency free pool Max ES Adjacencies Selects the total number of ES adjacencies allowed for all circuits This number is used to size the ES adjacency free pool Max Areas in Domain Selects the total number of areas in the routing domain This number is used to size the L2 routing table Max ESs per Area Selects the total number ESs in any one area This number is used to size the L1 routing table Max Internal Reachable Addresses Selects the number you are using to size the internal metric routing table Max External R
86. X EC Default Value x 04 Description This parameter specifies the local SAP address to be used for communicating with APPN link stations defined on this port 138 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 19 Configuration Parameter List Port Definition continued Parameter Information Parameter Local HPR SAP address Ethernet and token ring only Valid Values Multiples of four in the hexadecimal range X 04 to X EC Default Value X C8 Description This parameter indicates the local service access point to be used for communicating with HPR link stations defined on this port Parameter Branch uplink Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter indicates whether the default for link stations using this port will be uplink or downlink If yes is specified link stations using this port will default Branch uplink to yes Notes 1 This question is asked only if the node level parameter Enabled Branch Extender is yes 2 If Branch uplink is yes the Branch Extender will present its end node appearance to this link station Otherwise the Branch Extender will present its network node appearance 3 Typically Branch uplink is yes for WAN attached network nodes and is no for LAN attached end nodes Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 139 APPN Configuration Commands Table 20 Configuration Parameter List Port Default TG Charac
87. a given connection network s VRN e Because the VRN is not a real node CP CP sessions cannot be established with or through a VRN e When a connection network is defined on the router network node a fully qualified name is specified for the connection network name parameter Only connection networks with the same network ID as the router network node may be defined The network ID of the VRN is then the same as the network ID of the router network node Branch Extender The Branch Extender BrNN function is designed to optimize the connection of a branch office to an APPN WAN backbone network The BrNN isolates all the end nodes on one or more branch office LANs from the backbone WAN The domain of a BrNN may contain only end nodes and cascaded BrNNs The domain of a BrNN does not contain network nodes or nodes with DLUR When configuring a BrNN configure link stations to the backbone to be uplinks This causes the BrNN to appear as a conventional end node to the backbone From the perspective of the backbone all resources in the domain of the BrNN appear to be owned by the BrNN hiding the topology of the BrNN s domain from the backbone and reducing the number of broadcast locates in the backbone A BrNN presents a conventional network node interface over downlinks End nodes in the domain of the BrNN register their resources with the BrNN and use the BrNN as a conventional network node server Chapter1 APPN 13 APPN A BrN
88. an ISTG must meet one of these requirements e APPN Ver1 with option set 1013 Interoperability with peripheral extended border node e APPN Ver2 where option set 1013 is part of the base software Nodes attached using ISTGs that do not meet either of these requirements will generate alerts and do not handle some of the new flows associated with BNs However if other paths through the network are available you may still have end to end connectivity Branch Extender vs Extended Border Node Both Branch Extender and Extended Border Nodes serve to minimize network topology The choice of which to use depends upon the network A branch extender is the appropriate choice when you have a single network with one or more groups of end nodes where each group of end nodes typically needs to communicate with other end nodes in that group and only occasionally need to interact with the backbone network None of the devices downstream from the branch extender may be network nodes DLUR VTAM or VTAM end nodes 16 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN With the branch extender in place the backbone network s view of the branch extender is as a giant end node with all the downstream LUs being owned by this giant end node The backbone has no knowledge of the topology downstream from the branch extender thus reducing the overhead of topology exchanges Conversely the branch extender s network node server which is part of the backbone
89. and ISs attached to the same subnetwork to dynamically discover each other s existence and availability This information also permits ESs to obtain information about each other without an available IS Route redirection information enables an IS to inform an ES of a better route when forwarding NPDUs to a particular destination For example a better route could be another IS on the same subnetwork as the ES or the destination ES located on the same subnetwork Hello Message Addressing information is passed on to ESs and ISs through hello messages A local configuration timer CT and a holding timer HT is present on each ES and IS Each time the CT expires a hello message is multicast on the LAN When the hello message is received the recipient sets its HT value according to the value transmitted in the HT field of the message The recipient is expected to retain this information until the HT expires to ensure correct operation of the ES IS protocol End System Hello ESH Message The ESH message is multicast from the ES to all L1 ISs when its local CT expires The ES constructs this message to inform an IS of any NSAPs that it serves Upon receiving this message the IS extracts the NSAP and SNPA information and stores the pair in its L1 routing table replacing any other information currently stored there Intermediate System Hello ISH Messages The ISH message is multicast to all adjacent ESs when its local CT expires The IS c
90. and all its attached PIM activated interfaces This can be used if several unicast routing protocols are in use by this router adjacent routers are running different routing protocols or route types such as default routes are desired over learned routes Routetype can specify the following route types e rip e direct e fixed e default e filter Example PIM Config gt set preference rip RIP Metric Preference hex FFFF Metric Preference This value is sent to other routers in the assert process during duplicate multicast forwarding detection and is used with route metric costs to determine which router should be the forwarding router All metric preferences are initially set to X FFFF Valid Values A 4 digit hexadecimal value Default Value X FFFF variables cache _life Example PIM config gt set v cache_life Mcfwd cache Holdtime 60 Mcfwd cache holdtime Specifies the amount of time in seconds that a multicast forwarding entry which has not been used to forward any multicast datagrams will be allowed to exist in the multicast forwarding cache before it is removed 414 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 PIM Configuration Commands Talk 6 Valid Values A numeric value greater than 0 Default Value 60 variables assert_tout Example PIM config gt set v assert_tout PIM Assert Time Out 210 Assert time out The amount of time in seconds that downstream routers will save assert information received fro
91. and initiates a connection Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 153 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Allow CP CP sessions on this link Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes if adjacent node type is APPN network node or APPN end node No for all other adjacent node types Description This parameter specifies whether sessions between control points are to be activated over this link station This parameter allows control of CP CP session establishment between adjacent network nodes so that the overhead associated with topology database updates TDUs may be constrained Note Every APPN network node must have at least one CP CP session established to another APPN network node in order to maintain the minimum connectivity necessary to update the topology database In addition more than minimum connectivity could be desired to eliminate single points of failure and to improve network dynamics Parameter CP CP session level security Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether session level security is enforced for CP CP sessions established over this link station When session level security is enabled encrypted data is exchanged and compared during the BIND flows which includes the BIND the BIND response and an FMH 12 Security RU To successfully establi
92. area the router extracts the system ID from the address Searching for a match the router compares the system ID to the system IDs in the L1 routing table 3 If a match occurs the IS routes the packet to the ES or the next hop IS If no match occurs the packet is dropped 4 If the packet is not destined for this area the L1 forwards the packet to the nearest L2 IS or if this router is an L1 L2 IS it checks its L2 routing tables as described in the next section If the L1 cannot determine where to route the packet the packet is dropped Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 295 Using OSI DECnet V L2 Routing An L2 IS contains three routing tables an L2 area address routing table an internal metric reachable address prefix table internal and an external metric reachable address prefix table external The following summarizes L2 routing 1 An L2 IS receives a packet and compares the destination address in the header of the packet to the set of area addresses in the area address routing table If a match exists the packet is forwarded to the next hop backbone router If no match exists the router checks the internal routing table 2 The internal routing table contains entries of reachable address prefixes that lead to other domains If the internal routing table contains a match the packet is forwarded along the backbone to the appropriate domain If no match exists the router checks the external routing table 3 The externa
93. between machines or hosts flash memory A data storage device that is programmable erasable and does not require continuous power The chief advantage of flash memory over other programmable and erasable data storage devices is that it can be reprogrammed without being removed from the circuit board flow control 1 In SNA the process of managing the rate at which data traffic passes between components of the network The purpose of flow control is to optimize the rate of flow of message units with minimum congestion in the network that is to neither overflow the buffers at the receiver or at intermediate routing nodes nor leave the receiver waiting for more message units 2 See also pacing fragment See fragmentation fragmentation 1 The process of dividing a datagram into smaller parts or fragments to match the capabilities of the physical medium over which it is to be transmitted 2 See also segmenting frame 1 In Open Systems Interconnection architecture a data structure pertaining to a particular area of knowledge and consisting of slots that can accept the values of specific attributes and from which inferences can be drawn by appropriate procedural attachments T 2 The unit of transmission in some local area networks including the IBM Token Ring Network It includes delimiters control characters information and checking characters 3 In SDLC the vehicle for every command every response and all
94. cable and patch cables that are connected 2 In Internet communications the unit of transfer between TCP functions in different machines Each segment contains control and data fields the current byte stream position and actual data bytes are identified along with a checksum to validate received data segmenting In OSI a function performed by a layer to map one protocol data unit PDU from the layer it supports into multiple PDUs sequence number In communications a number assigned to a particular frame or packet to control the transmission flow and receipt of data Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP A protocol used over a point to point connection between two IP hosts over a serial line for example a serial cable or an RS232 connection into a modem over a telephone line server A functional unit that provides shared services to workstations over a network for example a file server a print server a mail server T service access point SAP 1 In Open Systems Interconnection OSI architecture the point at which the services of a layer are provided by an entity of that layer to an entity of the next higher layer T 2 A logical point made available by an adapter where information can be received and transmitted A single service access point can have many links terminating in it Service Advertising Protocol SAP In Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX a protocol that provides the following A mechani
95. cache then specify that here If this maximum is reached before any entries exceed the time limit the least recently entries are discarded List dynamics is the next prompt and it allows you to control how the extended border node determines possible next hops when attempting to locate resources LUs The temporary list of possible next hop CPs is built dynamically by the operational code whenever the border node is attempting to locate a resource This parameter specifies source s of next hop CP name s the extended border node may use to build this temporary dynamic list of CP names Chapter 1 APPN 31 APPN After the temporary list is built it is always ordered so that configured next hop CPs are first followed by CPs associated with similarly named known resources Additional reordering may be performed Once all the reordering is complete the extended border node starts searching for the target resource one CP after another Note that once the extended border node actually locates a resource it will remember the next hop CP and always use that next hop CP for that particular resource ignoring the routing lists Entries from this table of located resources can be quite long lived They are discarded if the table reaches its maximum size a later search to that CP fails to locate the resource or if search from that LU comes from a different CP The list dynamics parameter is set to one of the following values It is possible to respe
96. cannot specify this parameter for Best Effort connections 164 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter QoS Valid Values CLASS _0 CLASS _1 CLASS 2 CLASS 3 CLASS 4 where CLASS_0 The unspecified class The network does not specify any QoS CLASS_1 Performance is comparable to current digital private line performance CLASS _2 Intended for packetized video and audio in teleconferencing and multimedia applications CLASS 3 Intended for interoperation of connection oriented protocols such as Frame Relay CLASS 4 Intended for interoperation of connectionless protocols such as IP Default Value CLASS 0 Description This parameter indicates which class of service is provided to an ATM virtual connection You cannot specify this parameter for Best Effort connections Table 25 Configuration Parameter List Modify TG Characteristics Parameter Information Parameter Cost per connect time Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter expresses the relative cost of maintaining a connection over the associated TG The units are user defined and are typically based on the applicable tariffs of the transmission facility being used The assigned values should reflect the actual expens
97. command Example ap2config gt delete nfilter out Interface 0 0 First Network range number decimal 0 11 Last Network range number decimal 0 20 zfilter in interface zone name Deletes a zone name filter from the input of the interface Chapter 4 Configuring and Monitoring AppleTalk Phase 2 223 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Disable Example ap2config gt delete nfilter in Interface 0 1 Zone name Marketing zfilter out interface zone name Deletes a zone name filter from the output of the interface Example delete zfilter out Interface 0 1 Zone name Marketing interface Use this command to delete an interface This is the only way to delete zone names that have non printing characters Example ap2config gt delete interface 1 Use the disable command to disable AP2 on all interfaces or on a specified interface checksumming filtering APL AP2 translation or split horizon routing Syntax disable ap2 checksum interface nfilter in nfilter out zfilter in zfilter out split horizon routing ap2 Disables the AppleTalk Phase 2 packet forwarder for all interfaces Example ap2config gt disable ap2 checksum Specifies that the router will not compute the checksum in packets it generates The router usually checksums all packets it forwards This is the default Example ap2config gt disable checksum interface interface
98. commands Enter these commands at the VINES gt prompt Table 56 VINES Monitoring Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or Counters input queue was full when packets were received from the specified interface Dump Displays the current contents of the VINES routing and neighbor tables Route Displays an entry from the VINES routing table Exit Use the counters command to display routing errors and the number of times the VINES input queue was full when packets were received from the specified interface Syntax cou nters Example counters Routing Errors Count Type 2 Net Unreachable 3 Hop Count Expired 3 Routing Update from Orphan Client 0 Routing Redirect Received 0 Routing Response Received VINES Input Packet Overflows Net Count Eth 0 5 Eth 1 1 Chapter 6 Configuring and Monitoring VINES 245 VINES Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Dump Net Unreachable The number of times the router received a packet destined for a node that was not found in the routing table Hop Count Expired The number of times the router discarded a packet because its hop count expired Routing Update from Orphan Client The number of times the router received an update packet from a client node whose service node does not exist A routing update from an orphan client can occur when the router boots and hears from the client node first rather than t
99. data link level performs such functions as inserting transmit bits and deleting receive bits interpreting address and control fields generating transmitting and interpreting commands and responses and computing and interpreting frame check sequences See also packet level and physical level 2 In X 25 communications synonym for frame level data link switching DLSw A method of transporting network protocols that use IEEE 802 2 logical link control LLC type 2 SNA and NetBIOS are examples of protocols that use LLC type 2 See also encapsulation and spoofing data packet In X 25 communications a packet used for the transmission of user data on a virtual circuit at the DTE DCE interface data service unit DSU A device that provides a digital data service interface directly to the data terminal equipment The DSU provides loop equalization remote and local testing capabilities and a standard EIA CCITT interface data set ready DSR Synonym for DCE ready data switching exchange DSE The equipment installed at a single location to provide switching functions such as circuit switching message switching and packet switching I data terminal equipment DTE That part of a data station that serves as a data source data sink or both 1 A data terminal ready DTR A signal to the modem used with the EIA 232 protocol data transfer rate The average number of bits characters or blocks per unit time pa
100. databases 294 link state updates 294 multicast addresses 288 network address structure 286 network addresses 286 Network Entity Title NET 287 network protocol data units NPDU 285 NSAP addressing 286 protocols running under 286 pseudonode 293 routing metric 296 routing tables 295 synonymous areas 291 unattached L2 IS routers 295 optional features 6 OSI configuring 301 X 25 over OSI 307 OSI configuration commands add 305 change prefix address 311 clear 313 delete 314 disable 316 enable 317 list 317 set 323 summary of 305 OSI DECnet V monitoring 305 OSI DECnet V monitoring commands addresses 330 change metric 331 clnp stats 331 designated router 333 DNAV info 333 es adjacencies 334 es is stats 334 is adjacencies 336 is is stats 336 l1 routes 338 l1 summary 339 l1 update 340 l2 routes 338 I2 summary 340 I2 update 341 OSI DECnet V monitoring command 333 ping 1139 341 route 342 send echo packet 342 subnets 343 summary of 329 Index 475 OSI DECnet V monitoring commands continued toggle alias no alias 343 traceroute 343 P packet filter IPV6 monitoring command 401 packet size 435 path mtu IPV6 monitoring command 401 PIM configuring 411 pim PIM monitoring command 421 PIM command 411 PIM configuration commands delete 411 disable 412 enable 412 list 412 set 413 summary 411 PIM monitoring commands accessing 415 clear 416 dump 416 interface 417 join
101. delete command to remove an access control item from the access control list Syntax delete access control index access control Deletes access control index of access control to be deleted Specifies the index of the access control configuration to be removed Valid Values 1 to the number of access control records defined for this packet filter Default Value 1 Move Use the update packet filter move command to re order the access control list applied to the packet filter Syntax move access control index after access control index of control to move Valid Values 1 to the number of access control records defined for this packet filter 396 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Default Value 1 Move record after record number Specifies target location in the access control list You will be asked to verify that this is the action you want to configure Valid Values 1 to the number of access control records defined for this packet filter Default Value 0 List Use the update packet filter list command to display the access control list configuration Syntax list access controls Example Packet filter x Config gt li acc Access control is enabled List of access control records 1 Type IS Source 2001 1 6101 128 Dest 2001 1 86 128 Tid 3 2 Type I Source 0 Dest 0 Packet filter x Config gt Accessing the IPV6 Monitoring Environment Use
102. does not take effect until the router is restarted Default 32 Maximum 33 times the number of circuits This value should be greater than or equal to the sum of circuit maximum routers over all circuits although this is not strongly enforced This parameter has a strong effect on memory utilization and should not be set much larger than required Because the default is rather high you may need to reduce the value if you have set a large maximum address maximum cost number Maximum cost allowed between this router and any other node in the area If the best route to a node is more cosily than this that node will be considered unreachable Maximum 1022 Default 1022 It should be greater than the maximum legal cost to the most distant node A suggested value is 25 times maximum hops maximum hops number Maximum number of hops allowed between this router and any node in the area If the best route to a node requires more hops than this that node will be considered unreachable Maximum 30 Default 30 It should be about twice the longest path length in hops that is expected The hop count is used by routing only to speed the decay of routes to unreachable nodes The maximum number of hops may be reduced to cause unreachable nodes to become unreachable more quickly maximum visits number Specifies that any packet forwarded by this router that has been forwarded by more than maximum visits routers will be dropped
103. domain name FQDN of a host system is ralvm7 vnet ibm com each of the following is a domain name e ralvm7 vnet ibm com e vnet ibm com e ibm com domain name server In the Internet suite of protocols a server program that supplies name to address translation by mapping domain names to IP addresses Synonymous with name server Domain Name System DNS In the Internet suite of protocols the distributed database system used to map domain names to IP addresses dotted decimal notation The syntactical representation for a 32 bit integer that consists of four 8 bit numbers written in base 10 with periods dots separating them It is used to represent IP addresses dump 1 Data that has been dumped T 2 To copy the contents of all or part of virtual storage for the purpose of collecting error information dynamic reconfiguration DR The process of changing the network configuration peripheral PUs and Glossary 453 LUs without regenerating complete configuration tables or deactivating the affected major node Dynamic Routing Routing using learned routes rather than routes statically configured at initialization E echo In data communication a reflected signal on a communications channel For example on a communications terminal each signal is displayed twice once when entered at the local terminal and again when returned over the communications link This allows the signals to be checked for accuracy E
104. enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the address space manager component 114 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 13 Configuration Parameter List General Component Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Architected transaction programs Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the architected transaction programs component Parameter Configuration services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the configuration services component Parameter Dependent LU requester Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the dependent LU requester component Parameter Directory services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facil
105. enabled for connections between the router network node and an adjacent node Both partners in the connection require a matching hexadecimal key that enables each node to verify its partner before the connection is established When routing session data to an adjacent node the router segments a request response unit RU if the message unit exceeds the maximum message size that can be sent across the transmission group If the router receives a segmented RU the node reassembles it After successfully locating a resource in the APPN network the router stores or caches this information in its local directory database for future use However the router does not save these cached directory entries to a permanent storage medium such as a disk to provide for recovery if the node fails The router cannot be used as a central directory server for an APPN network The router is capable of using a central directory server however to obtain directory information about the location of a resource in the network To prevent other network nodes from discarding information about the router from their topology databases the router creates a topology database update TDU about itself and its locally owned transmission groups every 5 days and broadcasts this TDU to network nodes An interval timer is associated with every resource entry in the router s network topology database If the router does not receive any information about a resource within 1
106. facilitate international exchange of goods and services and develop cooperation in intellectual scientific technological and economic activity International Telecommunication Union ITU The specialized telecommunication agency of the United Nations established to provide standardized communication procedures and practices including frequency allocation and radio regulations worldwide internet A collection of networks interconnected by a set of routers that allow them to function as a single large network See also nternet Internet The internet administered by the Internet Architecture Board IAB consisting of large national backbone networks and many regional and campus networks all over the world The Internet uses the Internet suite of protocols Internet address See P address Internet Architecture Board IAB The technical body that oversees the development of the Internet suite of protocols that are known as TCP IP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP The protocol used to handle errors and control messages in the Internet Protocol IP layer Reports of problems and incorrect datagram destinations are returned to the original datagram source ICMP is part of the Internet Protocol Internet Control Protocol ICP The Virtual NEtworking System VINES protocol that provides exception notifications metric notifications and PING support See also RouTing update Protocol RTP Internet Engineering T
107. from domain B To configure router 1 18 in Eigure 19 parameters NCP gt NCP gt NCP gt NCP gt NCP gt NCP gt NCP gt NCP gt def mod def mod def mod def mod def mod def mod def mod def mod routing filter circ routing filter circ routing filter circ routing filter circ routing filter circ routing filter circ routing filter circ routing filter circ eth 0 eth 0 eth 0 eth 0 ppp ppp ppp ppp Domain A Intersection Area 9 Domain B enter the following NCP commands and outgoing outgoing incoming incoming outgoing outgoing incoming incoming Figure 19 Example of Blending DECnet Domains MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 area 1 2 state on area 3 4 6 8 state on area 1 2 state on area 3 4 6 8 state on Filtering Fence Using DNA IV There is still no way that a node in domain A area 5 can communicate directly to a node in domain B area 5 For nodes in these two areas to communicate you must do a series of application level relays using the set host command For example e Run the set host command to remotely login from a node in the domain A area 5 to a node in domain A area 8 e Run the set host command to remotely login from a node in domain A area 8 toa node in area 1 or 2 e Run the set host command to remotely login from a node in area 1 or 2toa no
108. group of LUs with similar routing requirements would be configured into a single routing list Additional groups of LUs each group with its own routing requirements would be configured into additional routing lists There are limits on the number of LU names and number of CP names used in routing lists These limits vary according to the model router you have See aeaio the configuration command detail Limits have been set to allow as much flexibility as possible in various environments The ability of the router to handle the specification of many routing lists each with many LU names and CP names is limited by the availability of configuration nonvolatile memory router Chapter 1 APPN 33 APPN memory and APPN shared memory See discussion of the APPN tuning parameters which control the amount of shared memory Recall from the discussion under the set node prompt that configured routing lists are never modified by operational code When the extended border node uses a given routing list it copies the next hop CP names into a temporary routing list This temporary dynamic routing list is augmented with dynamic entries as allowed by your configuration setting of the list dynamics parameter This temporary list is short lived and is discarded once the destination resource is found or the list is exhausted The routing list name is the first prompt you see when adding or modifying a routing list This name is not used by the operatio
109. hello Timed out route reactivated An ESIS hello packet with a previously timed out route was received No resources to send redirect An ESIS redirect packet could not sent because of a lack of resources Redirect not sent handler error An ESIS redirect packet could not be sent because of a handler error Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 335 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 IS Adjacencies IS IS Stats Sent redirect An ESIS redirect packet was sent out the interface Timed out route An ESIS hello route has timed out Unable to allocate resources for a new ES adjacency An ES IS hello packet was received but the router had insufficient resources to establish an ES adjacency with the sending node hello PDU dropped received over point to point circ An ES IS hello packet was dropped because the circuit involved is a point to point circuit ESIS hello PPDU dropped no matching area address An ES IS hello packet was dropped because the area did not match the router s area address The ES IS protocol applies to one area only dropped hello packet manual ES adjacency exists An ES IS hello packet was dropped because a static ES adjacency exists with the sending node Use the IS adjacencies command to list all the IS adjacencies that are learned through the ISIS protocol Syntax is adjacencies Example is adjacencies Intermediate System Adjacencies System ID MAC Address Int Level Usa
110. match the PVC address configured at the X 25 prompt If the addresses do not match the system defaults to a switched virtual circuit SVC Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 241 VINES Configuration Commands Talk 6 Delete Disable Enable handle user configurable name that uniquely identifies each remote server Example add interface 0 4508907898 test Deletes an X 25 address translation Syntax delete interface Specifies the interface number remote X 25 addr Can include up to 15 digits If the specified interface has not been configured using the VINES add interface command the terminal displays the message That X 25 address has not been configured Example delete interface 1 4799999999 compress Use the disable command to disable the VINES protocol on all interfaces or a single interface or to disable checksumming Syntax disable checksumming interface vines checksumming interface Disables checksumming on packets that the specified interface generates broadcast packets excluded For all interfaces the default is checksumming disabled Example disable checksumming 0 interface interface Disables the VINES protocol on the specified interface Example disable interface 1 vines Disables the VINES protocol on all interfaces Example disable vines Use the enable command to enable the VINES protocol on all interfaces or a single interface or to enable checksumming Syntax en
111. monitoring commands This process gives you access to the RIP6 monitoring process 1 Atthe OPCON prompt enter talk 5 For more detail on this command refer to The OPCON Procasal in Software User s Guide For example talk 5 After you enter the talk 5 command the GWCON prompt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again 2 At the prompt enter the p rip6 command to get you to the RIP6 gt prompt Example p rip6 RIP6 gt RIP6 Monitoring Commands This section describes the RIP6 monitoring commands Table 74 RIP6 Monitoring Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the eens for specific commands if available See list Displays the configuration dump Displays routing tables ping6 Dynamically pings an IPv6 address Exit List Use the list command to display the configuration Syntax list Example RIP6 gt list Dump g for information about the dump command Chapter 17 Configuring and Monitoring Routing Information Protocol RIP6 431 RIP6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 i Ping6 See Ping6 on page 402 for details about the ping6 command 432 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Appendix A Comparison of Protocols This appendix compares some of the well known protocols that your router supports It is provided as a memory ai
112. must be initiated by either the DSPU the PU 2 0 or by VTAM Chapter 1 APPN 51 APPN Considerations When Using DLUR for T2 0 or T2 1 Devices For T2 0 or T2 1 nodes utilizing DLUR for dependent session traffic an SSCP PU and an SSCP LU session must be active in order to establish an LU LU session These sessions are included in the session count for the link to the DSPU Therefore if limited resource is yes the link will remain active as long as the SSCP PU session is active or LU LU sessions are active over this link If you specify no for the limited resource parameter link deactivation is controlled by the node that initiated the connection If the link to the DSPU was activated due to the DSPU calling into the DLUR node or the DLUR node calling out to the DSPU i e the link station to the DSPU has been configured in the router and activate link automatically is yes when the active session count goes to zero the link is deactivated by APPN DLUR only if the DSPU requested DACTPU In this case if the DLUS sends a DACTPU request to DLUR DLUR will deactivate the SSCP PU session However it will not deactivate the link to the DSPU DLUR will attempt to reestablish the SSCP PU session to the DLUS or the backup DLUS until it is successful or until the DSPU no longer needs this session If the link to the DSPU was activated by the DLUS and the session count goes to zero the link is deactivated by APPN DLUR only if the DLUS sends a DAC
113. name cannot be mapped to the network IP address mapping Note When a client connects while mapping is enabled the server will begin ANDing the client s IP address with the subnet mask of each sequential map The longest match between the incoming client IP address and the map definition determines which map definition is tried first If all eligible resources in the map definition are in use the map definitions are again searched for the next most specific match Table 43 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Map Parameter Information Parameter Client IP address or Network address Valid Values Any valid IP address Default Value 0 0 0 0 Description This parameter specifies the IP address of the client or network map definition to be added Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 203 APPN Configuration Commands Table 43 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Map continued Parameter Information Parameter Client IP address or Network address Mask Valid Values Any valid IP address mask Default Value 0 0 0 0 Description This parameter specifies the IP address mask of the client or network map definition to be added Parameter Pool name LU name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies an LU name or a Pool name to be mapped to
114. node e Define the DLSw ports with the following parameter Define a locally administered MAC address for DLSw Disable the Service any node parameter Enable APPN routing on the port Define APPN link stations on the selected DLC ports for the adjacent nodes e that may initiate a connection to this network node e which you desire this router network node to initiate a connection Specify the following link station parameters e Fully Qualified CP name of adjacent node required e Any required addressing parameters for adjacent node e And optionally CP CP Session Level Security Security Encryption Key Enable the APPN network node Configure the following parameters for the APPN network node e Network ID e Control point name Define the XID number for subarea connections parameter for the APPN network node optional Accept all other defaults Optional Configure the following router network node options e Modify High Performance Routing parameters e Configure Dependent LU Requester e Define connection networks e Define new COS names or mode name mappings e Tune the performance of this node e Perform node service trace diagnostics e Collect statistics for this network node Configuring Branch Extender To configure Branch Extender set the following configuration parameters as appropriate for your network 1 2 Use the set node command to a Answer 1 for Branch Extender to the Enable Branch Extender or
115. o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt ex APPN config gt 1i all NODE NETWORK ID STFNET CONTROL POINT NAME NN21 XID 00000 APPN ENABLED YES MAX SHARED MEMORY 4096 MAX CACHED 4000 DLUR DLUR ENABLED YES PRIMARY DLUS NAME NETB MVSC CONNECTION NETWORK CN NAME LINK TYPE PORT INTERFACES COS COS NAME BATCH BATCHSC CONNECT INTER INTERSC CPSVCMG SNASVCMG USRBAT USRNOT MODE MODE NAME COS NAME USRBAT USRBAT USRNOT USRNOT PORT INTF PORT LINK HPR SERVICE PORT NUMBER NAME TYPE ENABLED ANY ENABLED 0 TROOO IBMTRNET YES YES YES 1 SDLCOO1 SDLC NO YES YES 254 DLS254 DLS NO YES YES 6 FROO6 FR YES YES YES STATION STATION PORT DESTINATION HPR ALLOW ADJ NODE NAME NAME ADDRESS ENABLED CP CP TYPE 50 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN TONN25 TROOO 0004ACA2A407 YES YES 0 TONN31 TROOO 4FFFQ0001031 YES NO 0 SDLC1 SDLCO01 C1 NO NO 2 TONN103 DLS254 400000000103 NO NO 0 TONNIIS FROOQ6 16 YES YES op LU NAME LU NAME STATION NAME CP NAME APPN config gt Note J Idle timer 0 gives a fixed circuit Frame relay PVC is defined This is the ISDN port y This is the link station Configuring APPN Over Dial on Demand Circuits APPN is supported over dial on demand circuits for the follo
116. of netiID CPname where e netID is a network ID from 1 to 8 characters e CPname is a control point name from 1 to 8 characters Each name must conform to the following rules e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing fully qualified CP name using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new CP names Default Value The value specified in the default fully qualified CP name of primary dependent LU server parameter Description This parameter specifies the fully qualified CP name of the dependent LU server DLUS that is to be used for incoming requests from the downstream PU associated with this link station Parameter fully qualified CP name for backup DLUS Valid Values A string of up to 17 characters in the form of netiID CPname where e netID is a network ID from 1 to 8 characters e CPname is a control point name from 1 to 8 characters Each name must conform to the following rules e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing fully qualified CP name using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new CP names Default Value The value specified in the default fully qualified CP name of backup dependent LU server parameter Description
117. on an NHRP VCC it will assume that an error condition has occurred and will shut down that VCC preventing any further shortcuts to that network device Note By default the router enables IBM LAN Emulation Extensions on NHRP so you must either disable the extensions or configure the unique locally administered MAC address for each LEC 358 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP This chapter describes how to configure and monitor the Next Hop Resolution RP For a description of this protocol refer to flag Hap Keia Accessing the NHRP Configuration Process To access the NHRP configuration 1 At the operator monitoring prompt type talk 6 and press enter 2 At the config gt prompt type protocol nhrp and press enter 3 The NHRP config gt prompt is displayed NHRP Configuration Commands This section explains all of the NHRP configuration commands as shown in Enter the commands at the NHRP config gt prompt Table 62 NHRP Configuration Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the a for specific commands if available See Enable NHRP Turns on NHRP for all interfaces that are not explicitly defined Disable NHRP Turns off NHRP for all interfaces that are not explicitly defined List Displays the NHRP configuration Advanced Gets you to the NHRP Advanced config gt prompt from which you ca
118. on any link Configuring Extended Border Nodes To configure extended border node you must configure one or more of these parameters e Set node e Add port e Add link e Add routing_list e Add cos_mapping_table Set node The previously existing prompt used to enable branch extender has been expanded to allow you to choose the branch extender function the extended border node function or neither Only if you enable the extended border node function will any of the other extended border node prompts appear Subnetwork visit count is the first prompt This parameter defines the maximum number of topology subnetworks a session may span The value defined here is used as the default value for the extended border node You can specify different values for the subnetwork visit count when adding ports links or routing lists Cache search time is the next node level prompt This specifies the number of minutes the extended border node will retain information on multi subnetwork searches The intention is for this to be the primary mechanism for limiting the size of this cache However the next parameter can also be used to control the size of this cache Maximum search cache size is next This controls the same data structure controlled by the previous parameter If set to zero the maximum size is unlimited Entries will be discarded only after the search cache time has expired If you prefer to have a fixed maximum size for the search
119. on link determination When set to no the advertisement will make no statement about on link or off link properties of the prefix Valid Values yes or no Default Value yes Use this prefix for autonomous address configuration Specifies the value to be placed in the autonomous address configuration flag in the prefix information option When set to yes the prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration Valid Values yes or no Default Value yes valid lifetime for prefix Specifies the amount of time in seconds to be placed in the valid lifetime in the prefix information option This value represents the length of time relative to the time that the packet is sent that the prefix is valid for the purpose of on link determination Valid Values A 32 bit unsigned integer where X FFFFFFFF represents unlimited lifetime Default Value 259200 which is 30 days Preferred lifetime for prefix Specifies the amount of time in seconds to be placed in the preferred lifetime in the prefix information option This value represents the length of time relative to the time that the packet is sent that addresses generated from the prefix via stateless address autoconfiguration remain preferred Valid Values A 32 bit unsigned integer where X FFFFFFFF represents unlimited lifetime Default Value 604800 delete command to remove a configured route advertisement 408 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Disable Enable
120. options include the following active circuits Specifies all circuits who are up and whose state is on set only all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name The name of the circuit For example Eth 0 TKR 0 PPP 1 known circuits set only Specifies all circuits on the router The arguments include the following call userdata Used during circuit initialization of static X 25 circuits When a circuit is defined as an outgoing SVC the initial and all subsequent call requests contain the defined call userdata when the circuit is enabled When a circuit is defined as an incoming SVC one of the criteria for accepting an incoming call request is a match of the defined call userdata Currently the call userdata must be set to the DTE of your local router for both incoming and outgoing SVCs Enter an even number of hexadecimal characters octets up to a maximum of 14 characters 266 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands cost range Sets the cost to receive a packet on this circuit This is used by the routing algorithm to determine the cost of a circuit in choosing routes cost is not the same as an IP metric Range 1 to 25 Default 4 The following values are suggested starting points Circuit type Cost Ethernet 4 Token Ring 4 16 4 Sync 56 Kb 6 Sync T1 5 X 25 25 Example define circuit tkr 0 cost 5 DTE Address Specifies the address of th
121. other parts of the network by means of bridges 2 A ring or bus network without bridges layer 1 In network architecture a group of services that is complete from a conceptual point of view that is one out of a set of hierarchically arranged groups and that extends across all systems that conform to the network architecture T 2 In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model one of seven conceptually complete hierarchically arranged groups of services functions and protocols that extend across all open systems T 3 In SNA a grouping of related functions that are logically separate from the functions in other groups Implementation of the functions in one layer can be changed without affecting functions in other layers LE LAN Emulation An ATM Forum standard that supports legacy LAN applications over ATM networks LEC LAN Emulation Client ALAN Emulation component that represents users of the Emulated LAN LECS LAN Emulation Configuration Server A LAN Emulation Service component that centralizes and disseminates configuration data Glossary 457 LES LAN Emulation Server ALAN Emulation Service component that resolves LAN Destinations to ATM Addresses line switching Synonym for circuit switching link The combination of the link connection the transmission medium and two link stations one at each end of the link connection A link connection can be shared among multiple links in a multipoint or
122. p appn APPN user configuration Chapter 1 APPN 49 APPN APPN config gt add p APPN Port Link Type P PP F RAME RELAY I HERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A TM 12 Port name Max 8 characters FROO Enable APPN on this port Y es N Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Limited resource Y es N o N High performance routing Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2044 2044 Maximum number of link stations 1 976 512 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 100 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outcoming calls 0 100 0 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 Support bridged formatted frames Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt add 1i APPN Station Port name for the link station fr006 Station name Max 8 characters tonnlisdn Station name Max 8 characters tonnlis Limited resource Y es N o N Activate link automatically Y es N o Y DLCI number for link 16 1007 16 Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 High performance routing Y es N o Y Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N
123. pnt to pnt hellos sent 0 evel 1 LSPs rcvd 0 level 1 LSPs sent 40 evel 2 LSPs rcvd 0 level 2 LSPs sent 0 evel 1 CSNPs rcvd 0 level 1 CSNPs sent 0 evel 2 CSNPs rcvd 0 level 2 CSNPs sent 0 evel 1 PSNPs rcvd 0 level 1 PSNPs sent 0 evel 2 PSNPs rcvd 0 level 2 PSNPs sent 0 no of level 1 level 2 LSPs Indicates the number of L1 and L2 link state packets that are in the database no of L1 L2 Dijkstra runs Indicates the number of times the router computed the L1 and L2 routing tables no of L1 L2 LSPs deleted Indicates the number of L1 and L2 link state packets that were deleted from the database no of routing table entries allocated Indicates the number of entries the routing able currently holds level 1 level 2 lan hellos rcvd Indicates the number of LAN hellos the router has received level 1 level 2 hellos sent Indicates the number of LAN hellos that router has sent pnt to pnt hellos revd Indicates the number of point to point hellos that the router has received pnt to pnt hellos sent Indicates the number of point to point hellos that the router has sent level 1 level 2 LSPs rcvd Indicates the number of L1 and L2 link state packets LSPs that the router has received level 1 level 2 LSPs sent Indicates the number of L1 and L2 LSPs that the router has sent level 1 level 2 CSNPs rcvd Indicates the number of L1 and L2 complete sequence number PDUs CSNPs that the router has received level 1 level 2 CSNPs sent
124. prompts appear Recall Timer 0 65535 60 Max Call Attempts 0 255 10 Initial Min Timer 1 65535 55 Enable IS IS YES Level 2 only NO External Domain NO Default Metric 20 ISIS Hello Timer 3 Enable DECnetV Link Initialization YES Modify Receive Verifier YES NO NO Transmit Verifier YES NO NO Explicit Receive Verification TRUE FALSE TRUE If you select STATIC and IN the following additional prompts appear Initial Min Timer 1 65535 55 Enable IS IS YES Level 2 only NO External Domain NO Default Metric 20 ISIS Hello Timer 3 Enable DECnetV Link Initialization YES Modify Receive Verifier YES NO NO Modify Transmit Verifier YES NO NO Explicit Receive Verification TRUE FALSE TRUE If you select DA for the circuit type the following additional prompts appear Recall Timer 0 65535 60 Reserve Timer 1 65536 600 Idle Timer 1 65536 30 Max SVCs 1 65535 1 Interface Number Specifies the logical X 25 interface for this routing circuit Circuit Name Sets up the alphanumeric name of this routing circuit record Circuit Type Specifies whether this routing circuit is either a STATIC circuit or a DYNAMICALLY ALLOCATED circuit Circuit Direction Specifies IN or OUT to determine whether the SVC of the static circuit will be established with an incoming call request or an outgoing call request In both cases the SVC is initiall
125. restarting the routers when additional nodes are added The increase in this number depends on the size of your network and the amount of anticipated growth As a rule set client node neighbors 25 higher than the actual number of client stations on LANs that are local to the router Example set client node neighbors 20 network address hex Assigns a network address to each router in the VINES network Hex is a 32 bit hexadecimal value from 30900000 to 3097FFFF Example set network address 30922222 routing table size Specifies the maximum number of service nodes and routers in the VINES network The range is 1 to 65535 and the default is 300 Note Make sure that the number you specify is large enough to accommodate additional VINES servers and 2210s as your network grows Example set routing table size 250 service node neighbors Specifies the maximum number of physical neighbor service nodes This 244 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 VINES Configuration Commands Talk 6 number includes VINES servers and 2210s that are the first point of contact after crossing a WAN The range is 1 to 65535 and the default is 50 Example set service node neighbors 100 Accessing the VINES Monitoring Environment To access the VINES monitoring environment t5 Then enter the following command at the prompt protocol vin VINES gt VINES Monitoring Commands Counters This section describes the VINES monitoring
126. routing database It ignores packets that are addressed to the router that are not hello packets or routing packets DNA IV supports the following Multiple areas on an Ethernet or Token Ring network Basic MOP operations DNA IV responds to a MOP Request ID message with a MOP System ID message DNA IV also sends a MOP system ID Message when a circuit comes up You can monitor MOP messages using the Ethernet configuration module under DECnet VAX NCP The router NCP does not include an Ethernet configuration module LAT Protocol LAT protocol is not part of the DNA IV protocol family It is an Ethernet only protocol intended only for short distance limited round trip time communications CTERM protocol provides wide area terminal support using DNA IV protocols across routers The set host command in DECnet VAX provides the CTERM protocol Special consideration should be given to the following DNA IV restrictions DNA IV does not support the NSP Session or NICE protocols DNA IV does not support the DDCMP line protocol on its directly connected synchronous lines Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 249 Using DNA IV e DNA IV does not provide any Phase III compatibility features because it does not support the DDCMP data link protocols used by all Phase III nodes e NCP the router s implementation of the DECnet Network Control Program implements a subset of the original NCP commands and functions DNA IV Terminology and Con
127. security features discussed in Provides additional security by limiting access within routers in the network Limits access to group of areas from other areas Allows blending of two DECnet address spaces If you already are familiar with these topics skip these two sections and begin Managing Traffic Using Access Control Access control protects one group of nodes from other nodes on the network Routers make all nodes on a network accessible to each other Usually the main forms of security are passwords and conservative use of DNA IV proxy access at the host level However due to differences in the security level of machines you might need to provide additional security by limiting access within the routers in the network The DNA forwarder enables you to do this using access controls Generally access controls are not recommended due to the following liabilities e Access controls affect performance of the router because every packet is tested The more complicated the access control configuration the greater the performance impact e Access controls are difficult to configure and errors in configuration are difficult to diagnose e Access controls cannot hide a node from the routing protocols The node remains visible from all routers in its area Note Access controls do not guarantee security they only make intrusion more difficult The DNA IV routing protocols used on Ethernet and othe
128. selected activities within a data processing system for analysis Possible uses are to indicate significant departure from the norm or to determine levels of utilization of particular functional units T 2 Software or hardware that observes supervises controls or verifies operations of a system A 3 The function required to initiate the transmission of a token on the ring and to provide soft error recovery in case of lost tokens circulating frames or other difficulties The capability is present in all ring stations multicast 1 Transmission of the same data to a selected group of destinations T 2 A special form of broadcast in which copies of a packet are delivered to only a subset of all possible destinations multiple domain support MDS A technique for transporting management services data between management services function sets over LU LU and CP CP sessions See also multiple domain support message unit MDS MU multiple domain support message unit MDS MU The message unit that contains management services data and flows between management services function sets over the LU LU and CP CP sessions used by multiple domain support This message unit as well as the actual management services data that it contains is in general data stream GDS format See also control point management services unit CP MSU management services unit MSU and network management vector transport NMVT N Name Binding Pr
129. significant changes are IPv6 Addressing Address Header format Minimum MTU Mandatory Path MTU discovery Mandatory IP security Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP IPv6 addressing increases the address from 32 bits to 128 bits This increase allows more degrees of hierarchy than the basic layers of network subnet and host IPv6 addresses belong to one of three categories Copyright IBM Corp 1994 Unicast A packet is delivered to the interface identified by the address Multicast A packet is sent to all members of the multicast group identified by the address Anycast A packet is sent to only the nearest member of the group identified by the address 1998 377 Using IPv6 Broadcast addressing has been replaced by multicast addressing in IPv6 IPv6 Address Format The IPv6 address is composed of 128 bits These bits are written as eight 16 bit integers separated by colons Example ABCD 1234 0000 1234 5555 FFEE 7777 0123 You can use the following simplifying rules e Skip leading zeroes Example ABCD 1234 0 1234 0 FFEE 7777 123 e Inside an address a set of consecutive null 16 bit numbers can be replaced by two colons Example ABCD 1234 1234 5555 FFEE 7777 123 1234 7899 The double colon can be used only once inside the address e When dealing with a mixed environment of IPv4 and IPv6 nodes you can use the form x x x x x x d d d d where the x s are hexadecimal values of the six high ord
130. static configuration and uses it during the router s runtime Display Use the display command to display the current NHRP and Route Switching configuration parameters Syntax display nhrp nhrp Displays NHRP configuration parameters including general parameters cache sizes extensions usage exclude list and disallowed router to router shortcuts Change Use the change command to change the current NHRP configuration parameters See Saran page 365 for a description of these configuration parameters Syntax change protocol_access_control_usage attempt_shortcuts holding_time data rate_threshold cache_size extensions shortcuts_to_atmarp_clients Reset Use the reset command to reset the dynamic configuration parameter value to the value in the static configuration See g for a description of these configuration parameters Syntax reset protocol_access_control_usage attempt_shortcuts Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 373 NHRP Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Reset holding_time data rate_threshold cache_size extensions shortcuts_to_atmarp_clients exclude_list disallowed_router to router Use the reset command to dynamically reconfigure NHRP protocol or an interface A reset causes the applicable static configuration values to be used Syntax reset interface nhrp nhrp Resets NHRP statistics interfaces and configuration parameters to the static configuration values This is
131. takes for a signal to propagate from one end of the TG to the other Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 143 APPN Configuration Commands Table 20 Configuration Parameter List Port Default TG Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Effective capacity Valid Values 2 hexadecimal digits in the range X 00 to X FF Default Value FR X 45 PPP X 45 DLSw X 75 SDLC X 45 X 25 X 45 TR X 85 TR X 75 ENET X 80 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 4 Mbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 16 Mbps 4 Mbps 10 Mbps OTF Oe Cee em For ATM SVCs 25 Mbps and ATM PVCs 25Mbps Campus ATM best effort X 8A Campus ATM reserved X 8A WAN ATM best effort X 8A WAN ATM reserved X 8A For IP Campus X 75 WAN X 43 Description This parameter specifies the effective capacity TG characteristic for all associated connections TGs on this port This parameter specifies the maximum bit transmission rate for both physical links and logical links Note that the effective capacity for a logical link may be less than the physical link speed The rate is represented in COS files as a floating point number encoded in a single byte with units of 300 bps The effective capacity is encoded as a single byte representation The values X 00 and X FF are special cases used to denote minimum and maximum capacities The range of the encoding is very large however only 256 values in the range may be
132. the right index Example del dis Disallowed shortcuts index 1 Use the change command to modify NHRP interface definitions Syntax change interface definition nhrp lane shortcut interface interface definition for NHRP Change an explicit interface definition to either enable or disable an NHRP interface Example ch int Interface Number 0 Enable NHRP Yes NHRP LANE shortcut Interface Change a LANE shortcut interface definition Example ch nhrp Interface Number of NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface 0 1 Use burned in ESI Select ESI 1 Use internally assigned selector Yes Use Best Effort Service for Data VCCs Yes Peak Cell Rate of outbound Data VCCs Kbps 0 Sustained Cell Rate of outbound Data VCCs Kbps 0 Use ATM adapter s burned in MAC address for source Interface Number of NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface Use the interface number assigned to the LSI The interface number can be determined by using the list interface command 1 Use burned in ESI Use universally administered ESI as part of the ATM address You may be given other choices depending upon your configuration Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 363 NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Talk 6 Select ESI Specify the ESI Use internally assigned selector Use internally assigned selector or assign a selector in the range 00 to FF Use Best Effort Service for Data VCCs Specifies the type of traffic character
133. the VINES configuring and monitoring commands and includes the following sections Accessing the VINES Configuration Environment To access the VINES configuration environment enter the following command at the Config gt prompt Config gt protocol vin VINES Protocol user configuration VINES Config gt VINES Configuration Commands This section summarizes and then explains the VINES configuration commands Enter these commands at the VINES config gt prompt Table 55 VINES Configuration Commands Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for specific commands if available See FGettind Add A Delete Deletes an X 25 address translation Disable Disables the VINES protocol on all interfaces or a single interface and disables checksumming Enable Enables the VINES protocol on all interfaces or a single interface and enables checksumming List Displays the current VINES configuration Set Assigns the network addresses to routers in the VINES network and sets the maximum number of physical neighbor client and service nodes Exit Returns you to the previous command level See FExiting a lowed Add Adds an X 25 address translation Syntax add interface Specifies the interface number remote X 25 addr Can include up to 15 digits If the virtual circuit connection has been configured as PVC the VINES remote X 25 addr must
134. the following procedure to access the IPV6 monitoring commands This process gives you access to the IPV6 monitoring process 1 At the OPCON prompt enter talk 5 For more detail on this command refer to the chapter entitled The OPCON Process and Commands in the Software User s Guide For example talk 5 4 After you enter the talk 5 command the GWCON prompt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again 2 At the prompt enter the p ipv6 command to get you to the ipv6 gt prompt Example p ipv6 ipv6 gt Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPV6 397 IPV6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 IPV6 Monitoring Commands Cache Counters This section describes the IPV6 monitoring commands Table 68 IPv6 Monitoring Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for specific commands if available See cache Displays cache entries counters Display counters dump routing Dumps the configured routing tables tables interface Displays the addresses defined on the interface addresses mcast Displays a list of registered multicast addresses mid Displays MLD counters or parameters route sizes Displays buffer sizes static routes Displays static routes packet filter Displays configured packet filters path mtu ping6 Activates Ping traceroute6 Dyn
135. the rest without defining values for all TGs Parameter Second user defined characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 128 Description This parameter specifies the second of three additional characteristics that users may define to describe the TGs in the network The default value of 128 allows a subset of TGs to be defined as more or less desirable than the rest without defining values for all TGs 182 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 32 Configuration Parameter List TG Characteristics Connection Network continued Parameter Information Parameter Third user defined characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 128 Description This parameter specifies the third of three additional characteristics that users may define to describe the TGs in the network The default value of 128 allows a subset of TGs to be defined as more or less desirable than the rest without defining values for all TGs Syntax add mode You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 33 Configuration Parameter List APPN COS Mode Name to COS Name Mapping Detail Parameter Information Parameter Mode name required Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth
136. the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit known circuits Specifies all circuits on the router Example zero all circuits executor Sets all global counters in the volatile database to a zero value There are no options Example zero executor module access control circuit specifier all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit Example zero module access control all circuits Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 283 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands 284 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V This chapter describes the router s implementation of the International Standards Organization s ISO Open Systems Interconnection OSI Connectionless Network Layer DECnet Phase V supports OSI hereafter called DECnet V OSI and users of DNA V networks can use this chapter for information about the ISO OSI protocols This chapter contains the following sections OSI Overview An OSI network consists of interconnected subnetworks A subnetwork consists of connected hosts referred to as end systems ESS and routers referred to as intermediate systems ISs as shown in ES Adjacent ES Va T AN R Adjacent IS l ES l l SNPA l SNPA p ee ES Adjacent ES Subnetwork Subnetwork Subnetwork Figure 20 OSI Network ESs contain all the layers of the OSI reference model and contain the host applica
137. the router can operate with both Classic IP and ELAN interfaces in the same network In this example the NHRFP client supports the IBM extensions and can shortcut directly to the LEC destination for traffic in that direction 350 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using NHRP Device 1 Device 2 NHRP Server NHRP Server IP Router IP Router aN ELAN IP subnet 9 1 2 0 Classical IP subnet 9110 ELAN IP scene a ATM l IP Host A N oae IP Host B NHRP Client gt LEC NON NHRP Shortcut VC memm part of routed path that isn t bypassed Figure 32 NHRP in a Mixed Classical IP and ELAN Environment NHRP to an Egress Router The source and or destination stations of protocol traffic do not have to belong to subnets served by NHRP participants They may access the ATM network via routers that communicate with the NHRP devices In this case the 2210 provides shortcuts through the ATM network to eliminate as many hops as possible NHRP Server NHRP Server IP Router IP Router ATM 7 Ae IP subnet Qe A Subnet C 7 K LAN switch O OOO LAN switch I ELAN E IP subnet IP router E os Pen Shortcut VC part of routed path that is not bypassed ELAN A IP subnet Figure 33 NHRP to an Egress Router Chapter 11 Using NHRP 351 Using NHRP NHRP Implementation NHRP interacts with the router function in the router When the router function in the router is forward
138. the terminal area area adar Adds additional area addresses 18 byte maximum that the node supports An L1 node that supports other areas considers those synonymous areas One area address is the area portion of the configured NET If you try to add a duplicate area address the router will display an error message Example add area 47000580999999000012341234 Note When adding synonymous areas to an L1 node use the set globals command to configure the maximum number synonymous areas allowed for this node All routers within an area must use the same maximum number of synonymous areas Adjacencies can not be established if they are different filter filter name routing circuit name calling DTE call UserData priority Adds parameters upon which the router bases its acceptance of incoming X 25 calls on an routing circuit either a static incoming or dynamically assigned DA circuit The filter name is the name you give the filter The routing circuit name is the name of the routing circuit with which the filter is associated 306 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 The calling DTE is the address of the calling router The local router checks the DTE address of an incoming call against a prioritized list of filters for all circuits A higher filter priority in the list means that a connection to that filter s calling DTE address is made first It is recommended that you assign a higher prio
139. the two domains Because area filtering is not simple to administer and is restrictive you should not consider using it if there are enough area numbers available for the union of the domains To configure the overlap of two domains first you must decide which areas to intersect These areas are the ones that will be able to participate in both domains These area numbers must not be used elsewhere in the two domains 258 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using DNA IV Figure 19 on page 260 shows the areas that intersect are areas 1 and 2 The remainder of the areas can be duplicated between the two domains In the example there are two areas 3 4 and 5 one in each domain Note that it is never possible to allow direct connection between a node in area 3 in domain A and area 3 in domain B The best that you can do is give the areas in the intersection the ability to talk to portions of each domain In designing the intersection be careful that neither domain relies on routes through the intersection to maintain connectivity between areas that are not in the intersection Because the routes in and out of the intersection are filtered they probably do not offer normal reachability between all areas in the domain To decide how to configure the routing filters draw a concise map of the configuration On this map locate all of the areas and outline the two domains Then decide upon the filtering fence that you need to establish Carefull
140. this address for Specifies the net to which the IPv6 address is to be added Valid Values A numeric value identifying a network interface Default Value 0 New address Specifies the new IPv6 address to be added Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Prefix length Decimal value specifying how many of the leftmost contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix Valid Values 8 128 384 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Default Value 128 leaked routes Adds a leaked route IPV4 destination Specifies the IPv6 address of the destination for the leaked route Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None packet filter route Adds a packet filter packet filter name Specifies an alphanumeric name used to identify the packet filter Valid Values Any alphanumeric character string up to 16 characters in length Default Value None which interface is this filter for Specifies the network interface number to which the packet filter is to be added Valid Values A numeric value identifying any interface for which IPv6 is a valid protocol Default Value 0 Adds a route IPV6 destination Specifies the IPv6 address of the target for the route Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Prefix length Specifies the mask to be applied to the destination address Valid Values 8 128 0 is allowed if the IPV6 destinati
141. this node 128 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 17 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration continued Parameter Information Parameter Adjacent node subnet affiliation Valid Values e 0 native e 1 non native e 2 negotiable Default Value 2 Description This parameter specifies the default for all links through this port as to whether the adjacent node is in this node s native APPN subnetwork or in a non native APPN subnetwork A value of 2 instructs the node to negotiate at link activation time to determine whether the adjacent link station is native or non native Note This question is asked only if the border node function is enabled on this node Table 18 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration for ATM Parameter Information Parameter Local ATM Address Valid Values Any 14 hexadecimal character string Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the 7 byte string that comprises the user part of the local ATM address The user part is the 6 byte ESI and the 1 byte selector field This user part must be unique with respect to the network part of the ATM address which is retrieved from the ATM adapter The selector must be unique for each protocol type Parameter Enable incoming calls Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description This parameter determines whether calls will be rejected at the ATM level
142. to that neighbor Use the I2 summary command to display a summary of the level 2 link state database Syntax 12 summary Example 12 summary Link State Database Summary Level Two LSP ID Lifetime Sequence Checksum Flags Cost 0000 9310 04F0 0000 33E 12 EF19 3 0 0000 5000 FB06 0000 455 4 2BB1 3 20 0000 5000 FB06 0100 469 12 DE32 3 20 Total Checksum 0 The description of the L2 summary output is the same as the I1 summary command Use the I1 update command to display a link state update for the specified level 1 IS Syntax I1 update Example 1 update LSP ID 0000931004F0000 Link State Update For ID 0000931004F00000 Area Addresses 470005001 Intermediate System Neighbors Metric Two Way 0000931004F002 20 N 0000931004F001 20 y 340 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 L2 Update Ping 1139 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 End System Neighbors Metric 00009310004F0 LSP ID Indicates the system ID of the source of the link state PDU plus two additional bytes The first byte designates the type of update 00 represents a non pseudonode update 01 FF represents a pseudonode update The second byte represents the LSP number This number is attached to the packet when the data is contained in more than one packet Area Addresses Indicates the area addresses in which this router is configured to route packets Intermediate System Neighbors Indicates adjacent neighbor ISs Metric Indica
143. token ring configuration link access protocol balanced LAPB A protocol used for accessing an X 25 network at the link level LAPB is a duplex asynchronous symmetric protocol used in point to point communication link attached 1 Pertaining to devices that are connected to a controlling unit by a data link 2 Contrast with channel attached 3 Synonymous with remote link connection 1 The physical equipment providing two way communication between one link station and one or more other link stations for example a telecommunication line and data circuit terminating equipment DCE 2 In SNA synonymous with data circuit link level 1 A part of Recommendation X 25 that defines the link protocol used to get data into and out of the network across the full duplex link connecting the subscriber s machine to the network node LAP and LAPB are the link access protocols recommended by the CCITT 2 See data link level link state In routing protocols the advertised information about the usable interfaces and reachable neighbors of a router or network The protocol s topological database is formed from the collected link state advertisements link station 1 The hardware and software components within a node representing a connection to an adjacent node over a specific link For example if node A is the primary end of a multipoint line that connects to three adjacent nodes node A will have three link stations re
144. trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the session manager component Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 111 APPN Configuration Commands Table 11 Configuration Parameter List Inter process Signals Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Session services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the session services component Parameter Topology and routing services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the topology and routing services component Table 12 Configuration Parameter List Module Entry and Exit Traces Parameter Information Parameter Attach manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about module entry and exit information from the attach manager component Parameter Half session Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When ena
145. traceroute 422 traceroute6 402 tunnels 403 IPV6 update packet filter configuration commands add 395 change 395 delete 396 list 397 move 396 is adjacencies OSI DECnet V monitoring command 336 IS IS messages IS to IS hello IIH messages 292 point to point 293 IS IS protocol description 289 IS IS areas 289 IS IS domain 290 IS to IS hello IIH messages Li 292 IS to IS Hello IIH messages L2 293 overview 286 is is stats OSI DECnet V monitoring command 336 ISDN Permanent Circuit APPN using 49 ISDN permanent connection 49 Index 473 join PIM monitoring command 417 L 11 routes OSI DECnet V monitoring command 338 11 Summary OSI DECnet V monitoring command 339 11 Update OSI DECnet V monitoring command 340 I2 Routes OSI DECnet V monitoring command 338 12 Summary OSI DECnet V monitoring command 340 I2 Update OSI DECnet V monitoring command 341 lane shortcut interface LSI NHRP 352 leave PIM monitoring command 418 link level parameter lists 48 list AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration command 226 APPN configuration command 193 APPN monitoring command 210 IPV6 configuration command 389 IPV6 update packet filter configuration command 397 NDP configuration command 409 NDP monitoring command 410 OSI configuration command 317 PIM configuration command 412 RIP6 configuration command 430 RIP6 monitoring command 431 VINES configuration command 243 Local Area Terminal LAT protocol 249 LSI 352 LU paramete
146. type parameter to APPN end node or LEN end node when defining a link station to a T2 1 adjacent node containing dependent LUs See Table 2 on page 25 for the types of ports providing connection to the downstream PU DSPU that are supported Functions Supported The APPN DLUR option includes the following functions e Support for SDLC attached downstream T2 0 nodes containing dependent LUs that do not support XID exchange e Support for downstream T2 0 nodes containing dependent LUs that respond with XID type 0 and XID type 1 e Support for downstream T2 1 nodes containing dependent LUs that respond with XID type 3 e Support for dependent LUs that is equivalent to the support provided by the Subarea environment for Activating PUs and their LUs Locate and be located by other LUs in an APPN or subarea network Determine LU s characteristics Allow terminal operators to logon to applications both in APPN and subarea networks SSCP takeover Chapter 1 APPN 9 APPN Uninterrupted LU LU sessions if the supporting DLUS SSCP fails SLU init PLU init and Third party init Restrictions The DLUR option as implemented on the router network node has the following functional restrictions e Only secondary LUs SLUs can be supported by the DLUR function An LU supported by DLUR cannot function as a primary LU PLU Therefore the downstream physical unit DSPU should be configured as secondary
147. understand how DECnet routing works especially at the area level do not try to use routing filters Documentation on the DECnet routing protocol can be found in DECnet Digital Network Architecture Phase IV Routing Layer Functional Description Order Number AAX435ATK December 1983 Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts 256 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using DNA IV Area routing filters allow you to configure a router to control the information about DECnet areas that are sent or accepted in level 2 routing messages You may configure separate incoming and outgoing filters for each interface Each filter specifies which areas routing information will be passed to or accepted from When a network sends a level 2 routing update and there is a routing filter the entry RTGINFO for any area not in the filter has the cost of 1023 and a hop count of 63 Any area in the filter has the correct cost and hops placed in the entry When the network receives a level 2 routing message and there is a routing filter any entry for an area not in the filter is treated as if the cost is 1023 and the hop count is 63 unreachable Any routing entry from the packet that is in the filter is processed normally The routing filters affect the processing of level 2 routing messages only There are no filters for level 1 routing messages Routing filters have no effect on router hello processing and do not prevent area routers from developi
148. upon availability of configuration memory Case is respected Parameter Non native NETID or CP name Valid Values A fully qualified CP name with optional trailing wildcard Legal characters for the CP name are A Z 0 9 The first character of the NETID part and of the CP name part must be non numeric Any of the fully qualified CP names may be terminated with a wildcard character to designate a range of CPs For example eo NET1 NET1 LUA Default Value Blank Description This parameter specifies a list of one or more non native networks that this mapping table applies to This question is repeated until terminated with a null entry Notes 1 Only a single entry among all the routing lists may have a standalone This will match all non native networks and is known as the default routing list 2 Any given CP name may not be duplicated in another COS mapping table 3 Maximum number of CP names that may be specified e 2210 12x not supported e 2210 14x or 24x 98 Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 191 APPN Configuration Commands Table 38 Configuration Parameter List COS Mapping Table Configuration continued Parameter Information Parameter Native and non native COS name pair Valid Values A pair of COS names separated by a blank Legal characters are A Z 0 9 The first character of each name must be non numeric Default Value Blank
149. will have knowledge of all the LUs owned by the branch extender if the branch extender is configured to register resources This serves to reduce the number and size of broadcast searches and topology updates An extended border node is the appropriate choice when you have multiple networks you want to tie together or when you have a large network you want to subdivide without restriction on what node types are allowed in the subdivided pieces There is no concept of upstream or downstream and you can have additional extended border nodes network nodes end nodes DLUR VTAM or VTAM end nodes located anywhere in your network Unlike the branch extender an extended border node cannot register resources with another network Managing a Network Node The router network node can act as an APPN entry point that forwards APPN related alerts to an APPN focal point APPN focal points may be defined explicitly or implicitly You can use SNMP to access these IETF standardized MIBs e APPC RFC 2051 e APPN RFC 2155 e HPR RFC 2238 e DLUR RFC 2232 You can also use SNMP to access these enterprise specific MIBs e IBM APPN Memory e IBM Accounting e IBM HPR NCL IBM HPR Route Test e IBM Branch Extender Node e IBM Extended Border Node EBN Entry Point Capabilities for APPN related Alerts The router network node can serve as an APPN entry point for alerts related to the APPN protocol As an entry point the router is responsible f
150. yet Not Elected will be displayed instead of a LAN ID Use the dnav info command to display the routing algorithm that is currently running on the router Syntax dnav info Example dnav info DNA V Level 1 Routing Algorithm Distance vector DNA V Level 2 Routing algorithm Distance vector Note Depending on whether or not DNA IV is enabled or disabled the routing algorithm displayed here may differ from what is configured in memory using the set algorithm command at the OSI DECnet V config gt prompt If DNA IV is enabled the routing algorithm is the one configured in memory If DNA IV is disabled the routing algorithm is set to link state and may differ from that set in memory Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 333 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 ES Adjacencies ES IS Stats Use the es adjacencies command to display all the End System ES adjacencies that are either configured or learned through the ESIS protocol Syntax es adjacencies Example es adjacencies End System Adjacencies System ID MAC Address Interface Lifetime Type 6666 6666 6666 1234 FEAA 041C 0 50 DNAIV System ID The system ID of the ES adjacency MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the ES on the subnet Interface Indicates the router s interface number where the ES adjacency was learned Lifetime Indicates the amount of time in seconds that the router has left before the information received i
151. your machine readable documentation Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 xvii XViii MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both Advanced Peer to Peer Networking IBM PS 2 AIX Micro Channel RS 6000 AlXwindows NetView System 370 APPN AS 400 Nways VTAM BookManager UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Microsoft Windows Windows NT and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other company product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 xix XX MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 This manual contains the information you will need to configure bridging and routing functions on an Nways device The manual describes all of the features and functions that are in the software A specific Nways device might not support all of the features and functions described If a feature or function is device specific a notice in the relevant chapter or section indicates that restriction This manual supports the IBM 2210 and refers to this product as either the router or the device The examples in the manual represent the configuration of an IBM 2210 but the actual output you see may vary Use the examples as a guideline to what you migh
152. 0 Detailed information for subnet 0 ISIS Level 1 Multicast 018002B000014 ISIS Level 2 Multicast 018002B000015 All ISs Multicast 009002B000005 All ESs Multicast 009002B000004 Level 1 Priority 64 Level 2 Priority 64 ISIS Level 1 Multicast Indicates the multicast address to use when transmitting and receiving L1 IS IS PDUs ISIS Level 2 Multicast Indicates the multicast address to use when transmitting and receiving L2 IS IS PDUs All ISs Multicast Indicates the multicast address to use when receiving ES hellos All ESs Multicast Indicates the multicast address to use when transmitting IS hellos Level 1 Priority Level 2 Priority Indicates the router s priority for becoming the designated router on templates timers the LAN Displays a list of templates defined on this router Example list template Route Cir Name Template Name DTE Addr Call UserData routetest2 temptest2 25 81 Displays the OSI DNA V timer configuration what is running on the router OSI or DNA V 322 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Set DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Example list timers Timers Complete SNP sec 10 Partial SNP sec 2 Min LSP Gen sec 30 Max LSP Gen sec 900 Min LSP Xmt sec 30 Min Br LSP Xmt msec 33 Waiting Time sec 60 DR ISIS Hello sec 1 ES Config Timer sec 10 Timers Indicates the configuration of the OSI timers excluding any per circuit timers Complete SNP
153. 0 node 1 Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written Boats APPN config gt list port x25002 PORT Interface number DLSw 254 2 PORT enable YES Service any node YES Link Type X25 MAX BTU size 2048 MAX number of Link Stations 239 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls 0 Cost per connect time 0 Cost per byte 0 Security Nonsecure 1 Public Switched Network Underground Cable 3 Secure Conduit APPN Guarded Conduit 5 Encrypted 6 Guarded Radiation 0 Propagation delay 0 Minimum 1 Lan 2 Telephone 3 Packet Switched Network 4 Satellite 5 Maximum 3 Effective capacity 45 First user defined TG characteristic 128 Second user defined TG characteristic 128 Third user defined TG characteristic 128 Boats APPN config gt list link x25svcl STATION Port name X25002 Interface number DLSw 254 2 Link Type X25 Link Type 0 PVC 1 SVC 1 DTE Address 2222 Activate link automatically YES Allow CP CP sessions on this link YES CP CP session level security NO Fully qualified CP name of adjacent node Encryption key 0000000000000000 Use enhanced session security only NO Cost per co
154. 0 seconds the value of Long retry timer Then retry the primary DLUS If this retry attempt fails retry the backup DLUS As long as the retry fails continue to retry the primary and the backup DLUS waiting 300 seconds between retry sequences for as long as the DSPU is requesting ACTPU APPN Implementation on the Router Using DLSw The router also supports APPN over DLSw for connectivity to nodes through a remote DLSw partner An example is shown in This support allows customers with DLSw configurations to migrate their networks to 2210 Note It is recommended to use APPN over direct DLCs when available instead of APPN over DLSw DLSw Router j Bridged Frames rng DLSw Router Figure 3 Data Flow in an APPN Configuration Using DLSw Port APPN configuration restrictions using DLSw e Connectivity through remote DLSw partners only e Only 1 DLSw port per router e Use of a locally administered MAC address e HPR is not supported on DLSw ports e DLSw ports cannot be members of connection networks e Parallel TGs are not supported on DLSw ports ofig g A to configure APPN using DLSw How APPN Uses DLSw ports to Transport Data When APPN is configured on the router to use Data Link Switching DLSw port DLSw is used to provide a connection oriented interface 802 2 LLC type 2 between the AP
155. 023 NCP gt def mod access cont circ eth 0 filter 0 0 0 0 1 9 63 1023 NCP gt def mod access cont circ eth 0 state on Exclusive Access Control g on page 1 shows how exclusive access control isolates node 4 4 from the rest of the campus Chapter 7 Using DNA IV 255 Using DNA IV Exclusive Filter Information Source Source Destination Destination Result Mask Result Mask 0 0 0 0 4 4 63 1023 Figure 17 Example of Exclusive Access Control Configure the desired access control for this example by building an exclusive filter on the PPP O interface of router 4 3 as shown in Egue 1d To configure the example given for router 4 3 in igure 17l enter the following NCP commands and parameters NCP gt def mod access cont circ ppp 0 type exclusive NCP gt def mod access cont circ ppp 0 filter 0 0 0 0 4 4 63 1023 NCP gt def mod access cont circ ppp 0 state on Managing Traffic Using Area Routing Filters Area routing filters allow special configurations of your DNA network Because this is an advanced topic very few DNA IV networks need routing filters There are two primary applications for area filtering in DNA IV e Security limiting access to some group of areas from other areas e Allowing the blending of two DECnet address spaces Note Area Routing Filters are very tricky and subtle to configure It is very easy to completely break your area routing If you do not
156. 1 octet field that acts as a selector for the entity that is to receive the PDU for example the transport layer or the IS network layer itself The router sets this field to 0 Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 287 Using OSI DECnet V GOSIP Version 2 NSAPs Government Open Systems Interconnection Profile GOSIP Version 2 provides for government use the NSAP addressing format illustrated in Poe od The authorities responsible for the address have clearly defined the fields and specified the addressing format under the DSP set by the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST IDP DSP AFI IDI Ver Auth Reserved Domain Area Sys ID Selector 47 0005 80 2 2 6 1 Figure 23 GOSIP Address Format AFI This 1 octet field has a 47 hexadecimal designation This value signifies that the address is based on the ICD format and that the DSP uses a binary syntax IDI This 2 octet field has a 0005 hexadecimal designation This value is assigned to the U S Government and the format has been established by NIST VER This 1 octet field has designation of 80 hexadecimal This value identifies the DSP format Auth Authority This 3 octet field identifies the authority that controls the distribution of the NSAP addresses Reserved This 2 octet field is provided to accommodate future growth Domain This 2 octet field contains the routing domain identifier Area This 2
157. 16 1007 16 121 Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 0 High performance routing Y es N o Y Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt 1i all NODE NETWORK ID STFNET CONTROL POINT NAME NN22 XID 00000 APPN ENABLED YES MAX SHARED MEMORY 4096 MAX CACHED 4000 DLUR DLUR ENABLED NO PRIMARY DLUS NAME CONNECTION NETWORK CN NAME LINK TYPE PORT INTERFACES 56 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN COS COS NAME BATCH BATCHSC CONNECT INTER INTERSC CPSVCMG SNASVCMG MODE NAME COS NAME PORT INTF PORT LINK HPR SERVICE PORT NUMBER NAME TYPE ENABLED ANY ENABLED 0 TROOO IBMTRNET YES YES YES xxx lt this is the Primary port 1 FROO1 FR YES YES YESH xxxx lt this is the alternate port 4 PPPQ04 PPP YES YES YES l STATION STATION PORT DESTINATION HPR ALLOW ADJ NODE NAME NAME ADDRESS ENABLED CP CP TYPE TONN25 FR001 132 YES YES 0 TONN31 FROO1 141 YES NO 0 TONN103 FR001 153 YES NO 0 xxxx lt this is the alternate to NN6 TONN6WRR PPPO04 000000000000 YES YES oY xxxx lt this is the Primary to NN1 TONN1PRI FR001 121 YES YES o wy LU NAME LU NAME STATION NAM
158. 2 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 ap2config gt add nfilter out Interface 0 0 First Network range number decimal 0 11 Last Network range number decimal 0 20 zfilter in interface zone name Adds a zone name filter to the input or output of the interface Example ap2config gt add zfilter in Interface 0 1 Zone name Marketing zfilter out interface zone name Adds a zone name filter to the output of the interface Example ap2config gt add zfilter out Interface 0 0 Zone name Corporate Delete Use the delete command to delete a zone name from the interface zone list network or zone name filters or all AppleTalk Phase 2 information from an interface Syntax delete zone nfilter in nfilter out zfilter in zfilter out interface zone interface zonename Deletes a zone name from the interface zone list Example ap2config gt delete zone 2 newyork nfilter in interface first network last network Deletes a network filter from the input of the interface You must enter the same network range numbers you set using the add nfilter in command Example ap2config gt delete nfilter in Interface 0 0 First Network range number decimal 0 1 Last Network range number decimal 0 12 nfilter out interface Deletes a network filter from the output of the interface You must enter the same network range numbers you set using the add nfilter out
159. 2 VINES Monitoring Commands Talk 5 seconds 6 minutes the router removes the entry for that neighbor from the neighbor table and if the neighbor is a service node from the routing table H W Addr RIF routing tables The node s LAN address if the neighbor is connected to a LAN If the frame relay protocol is running the H W Addr is the Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI For X 25 interfaces the H W Addr is the X 25 address of the neighbor Routing Information Field A sequence of segment and bridge numbers in hexadecimal which indicate a path through the network between two stations RIF is required for source routing Displays information about each service node known by the router Example dump routing table Net Address Next Hop Nbr Addr Nbr Intf Metric Age secs S 30622222 30622222 0001 Eth 0 20 30 H 0027AA21 0027AA21 0001 Eth 1 2 120 P 0034CC11 0034CC11 0001 X 25 0 45 0 3 Total Routes S gt Entry is suspended H gt Entry is Holdown P gt Entry is permanent Net Address The Net Address is a unique configurable 32 bit hexadecimal value from 30900000 to 3097FFFF This range of numbers is assigned to IBM by Banyan It is very important that no two routers on a network are assigned the same Net Address The Net Address for a Banyan service node is the 32 bit hexadecimal serial number of the service node An S H or P preceding the Net Address field indicates the following S The serv
160. 2 ee ee ee ee 485 Network Specific Size Limits 2 2 485 Protocol Specific Size Limits 486 IP PacketLengths s 2 4 2 436 Changing Maximum Packet Sizes 2 486 List of Abbreviations 2 0 2 2 487 Glossary a ee 447 Index s a ee we eee ee ee ee Eee he ee ee oe 2 APT Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You 479 X MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Figures 1 Extended Border Node Connectivity Eeg ae ke Ska ie TS 2 Multiple PUs for Subarea Connected SNA Nodes oo fo we em bee ae 24 3 Data Flow in an APPN Configuration Using DLSw Port 43 4 Logical View with Frame Relay Bridged Frame BAN Connection Network Support 2 44 5 APPN Frame Relay Bridged Frame BAN Connection Network poo a ee 45 6 Single Connection Network using BAN with 1 Frame Relay Port 45 7 Single Connection Network using BAN with Multiple Frame Relay Ports 46 8 Multiple Connection Networks using BAN 46 9 Single Connection Network using Bridging with One Frame Relay Port 47 10 Single Connection Network Using Bridging with seas Frame Ports 47 11 Multiple Connection Networks Using Bridging Sich aah ok hag a Ae 12 Example of Zone Filtering Mag ee amp ew 4 Ale 13 Example of Network Filtering 0 2 2 219 14 Sample Routing Table 2
161. 210 to create an L2TP tunnel between itself and another router The tunnel can be used for any traffic entering the 2210 The L2TP Network Server LNS function has also been enhanced to initiate outgoing calls to the L2TP Network Access Concentrator LAC Network Dispatcher items Support for stateless UDP applications New protocol advisors for Network News Transfer Protocol NNTP Post Office Protocol POP3 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP and Telnet While you are balancing TN3270 servers one of the TN3270 servers may be in the same 2210 as the Network Dispatcher function Support for PPP authentication using an ACE Server Security Enhancements IPsec tunnel in tunnel support for creating up to two nested levels of security associations IPsec ESP NULL algorithm support IPsec support for setting the don t fragment bit and propogation of Path MTU Improved dynamic reconfiguration for IPsec Mixed media multi link PPP support for bundling PPP leased line ISDN V 25bis and V 34 connections APPN enhancements APPN SDLC Secondary multipoint support Configuration of the APPN transmission group TG number for all link station types Support for the APPN Ping APING command in Talk 5 New trace options TN3270 Enhancements Note These TN3270 enhancements will not be available in the initial release of V3 2 but will be available on the 2210 Web server by 12 31 98 XXV Summary of Changes TN
162. 234 7234 8234 128 1P64 0 FE80 486F 65FF FE69 7 64 Use the mcast command to display configured multicast addresses Syntax Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPV6 399 IPV6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Mid Route Sizes mcast Example IPV6 gt mcast List of IPV6 registered multicast addresses Interface TKR 0 Interface TKR 1 Interface FR 0 Interface PPP 0 Interface IP64 0 IPV6 gt Use the mid command to display configured Syntax mid Example IPV6 gt mld counters Net Querier IPV6 gt mld parameters Net Robustness Variable counters parameters Polls Sent Polls Rcvd Reports Rcvd Query Interval Response Interval Leave Query Interval secs secs secs Use the route command to show the route to the IPv6 address Syntax route Example IPV6 gt route 6 9 IPV6 gt address Use the sizes command to display configured buffer sizes Syntax 400 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Static routes Packet filter Path mtu IPV6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 sizes Example IPV6 gt sizes Routing table size 768 Table entries used 3 Reassembly buffer size 12000 Largest reassembled pkt 0 Size of routing cache 64 cache entries in use 0 IPV6 gt Use the static command to display configured static routes Syntax static Example IPV6 gt static Net Mask_len Cost Next hop 1234 1223 128 100 1234 0 9 8 PPP O 232 1234 0 9 8 8 7 6 8 PPP O 8 39 1
163. 28 N A filter IPV6 gt Use the packet filter command to display a summary of configured packet filters Syntax packet filter Example IPV6 gt pac Name Dir Intf State Access Controls packet01 Out 0 On 0 pack01 Out 5 On 2 IPV6 gt Use the path mtu command to show the paths that have been identified as having an MTU that is less than the size of a packet sent along that path Syntax path mtu Example Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPve 401 IPV6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Ping6 Traceroute6 Use the ping6 command to ping an IPv6 address Syntax ping6 Example IPV6 gt ping Destination IPv6 address 8 9 Source IPv6 Address 1 8 Ping data size in bytes 56 Ping TTL 64 Ping rate in seconds 1 PING6 1 8 gt 8 9 56 data bytes ttl 64 every 1 sec 8 9 PING6 Statistics 36 packets transmitted 36 packets received Destination IPv6 address Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Source IPv6 address Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Ping data size in bytes Valid Values 0 to size of global buffer Default Value 56 Ping ttl Specifies the time to live for the ping Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 64 Ping rate in seconds Specifies the ping frequency Valid Values 1 60 Default Value 1 Use the traceroute6 command to dynamically trace a route Syntax traceroute6 Example IPV6 gt trace
164. 299 X 25 Circuits for DECnet V OSI 2 aa aa 299 Routing Circuits s s s x s a rA ee ee ee ee 800 PIRES e co s OO Re ee we Ee ee ee ew we Re es BOD Templates pie a a ke A ee he e Bea a a ae we BOT Link Initialization Bob ee oboe bh do ee oe a amp Ae BOT OSI DECnet V Configuration oe a ee eo ee ee a a oe OT Basic Configuration Procedure edo oe o woe 4 B0T Configuring OSI Over an Ethernet or a Token Ring LAN koe aa eR a 2 802 Configuring OSI Over X 25 or Frame Relay fee amp ew amp a O02 Configuring a DNA V Router for a DNA IV Environment i o in a amp ot Re B02 DNA IV and DNA V Algorithm Considerations 303 Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnetV 305 Vi MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Accessing the OSI Configuration Environment DECnet V OSI amas Commands Add si Change Clear Delete Disable Enable List Set Accessing the OSI DECnet V Monitoring Environment OSI DECnet V meena Commands Addresses Change Metric CLNP Stats Designated router DNAV info ES Adjacencies ES IS Stats IS Adjacencies IS IS Stats L1 Routes L2 Routes L1 Summary L2 Summary L1 Update L2 Update Ping 1139 Route Send Echo Packet Subnets Toggle Alias No Alias Traceroute Chapter 11 Using NHRP Next Hop Resolution Protocol NHRP Overview Benefits of NHRP and the IBM ne een Performance Characteristi
165. 3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Adjacent node subnet affiliation Valid Values 0 native 1 non native 2 negotiable Default Value Default is taken from the equivalent port level parameter Description This parameter specifies whether the adjacent node is in this node s native APPN subnetwork or in a non native APPN subnetwork A value of 2 instructs the node to negotiate at link activation time to determine whether the adjacent link station is native or non native Note This question is asked only if the border node function is enabled on this node Table 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configuration for ATM Parameter Information Parameter Virtual Channel Type Valid Values SVC PVC Default Value SVC Description This parameter identifies the ATM channel type as switched virtual circuit SVC or permanent virtual circuit PVC Note The following parameters are common for SVCs and PVCs Parameter Destination ATM Address Valid Values A 40 hexadecimal character string Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the 20 byte string that comprises the entire destination ATM address Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 159 APPN Configuration Commands Table 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configurati
166. 3270 LU pooling support that allows SNA LUs to be grouped into named pools TN8270 IP address to LU name mapping Self Defining Dependent LUs SDDLU and Dynamically Defined Dependent LUs DDDLU support Multiple TCP port support DLSw enhancements Support for duplicate MAC addresses Support to delay polling of SDLC devices until contacted by the remote SDLC device X 25 enhancements Configuration support for a defining a range of PVCs Frame Relay support for switched virtual circuits IPXWAN support on Frame Relay permanent virtual circuits PVCs including support for numbered RIP unnumbered RIP and static routing e Clarifications and corrections The technical changes and additions are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change Editorial Changes Getting Help This edition continues a number of editorial changes to this book and the other software books that will e Reorganize the material e Remove any unnecessary and redundant information e Improve retrievability e Add additional clarification to some information The first step in reorganization has been completed as follows e The part titted Understanding Using and Configuring Features has been moved into the IGuidd e The chapters on using configuring and monitoring the DIALs feature have been moved into the This reorganization will take place over a number of editions If you would like to comment on these c
167. 35 seconds 60 Automatic Logoff Y N N Write this record Y The record has been written TN3270E config gt exit APPN config gt Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt tn3270 TN3270E config gt add im TN3270E Server Implicit definitions Pool name Max 8 characters lt DEFLT gt Station name Max 8 characters subal LU Name Mask Max 5 characters 01LU Specify LU Address Range s y n N Number of Implicit LUs in Pool 1 253 50 Write this record Y The record has been written TN3270E config gt TN3270E config gt add lu TN3270E Server LU Definitions LU name Max 8 characters printer1 NAU Address 2 254 2 Station name Max 8 characters subal Class 1 Explicit Workstation 2 Implicit Workstation 3 Explicit Printer 4 Implicit Printer 3 LU Type 5 3270 printer 6 SCS printer 5 Write this record Y The record has been written TN3270E config gt TN3270E config gt list all TN3270E Server Definitions TN3270E enabled YES TN3270E IP Address 4 3 2 1 TN3270E Port Number 23 Keepalive type NOP Frequency 60 Automatic Logoff N Timeout 30 Enable IP Precedence N Link Station subal Local Node ID 12345 78 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Auto activate YES Implicit Pool Informationg Number of LUs 50 LU Mask Q1LU LU Name NAU addr Class Assoc LU Name Assoc NAU addr printerl 2 Explicit Printer TN3270E config gt exit
168. 4 Adjacent node type APPN network node 1 APPN end node or Unknown node type 2 LEN end node 0 TG Number 0 20 0 Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N LDLC Retry Count 1 255 3 LDLC Timer Period 1 255 seconds 1 Would you like TG characteristics updated to recommended values based on config changes Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written nada205 APPN config gt Notes J Define an APPN port with link type ATM Define an APPN link station Define a PVC u Define an SVC Configuring APPN Using SDLC APPN supports the following SDLC stations e Primary point to point e Secondary point to point e Negotiable point to point e Primary multipoint e Secondary point to point multi APPN link stations Using the talk 5 command interface for SDLC you can e Enable disable a SDLC link e Update SDLC station parameters In order to activate an APPN connection to the remote SDLC link station you must configure and activate the APPN SDLC link station in the router This enables the APPN link station in the router to receive an activation XID from the remote SDLC link station This is different from other DLC types such as Token ring or Ethernet whose APPN link stations do not need to be explicitly defined for APPN in the router since AP
169. 4 tunneling allows IPv6 frames to cross an IPv4 network and reach an IPv6 destination The IPv6 frame is encapsulated in an IPv4 frame and this encapsulated frame is forwarded through the IPv4 network to a specific IPv4 destination called the endpoint of the tunnel At this endpoint the packet is decapsulated and forwarded to the final IPv6 destination Use the add tunnel command at the IPv6 Config gt prompt to add an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel Protocol Independent Multicast PIM Protocol Independent Multicast PIM is a broadcast and prune multicast protocol used by IPv 6 It works well in campus networks where bandwidth is plentiful and users are closely grouped not dispersed over a wide area of networks PIM uses a broadcast and prune approach for the multicast forwarding of datagrams and is used when multicast groups are densely distributed across the internet It assumes that all downstream systems want to receive multicast datagrams and prunes back branches from those systems which do not PIM is based on PIM sparse mode PIM SM which employs the same packet formats Unlike DVMRP PIM forwards on all outgoing interfaces until pruning and truncating occurs This means that PIM does not maintain its own routing tables as does DVMRP which uses parent child information to reduce the number of interfaces used before pruning Once pruning has occurred the pruning state is maintained and datagrams are only forwarded to downstream members P
170. 417 leave 418 mcache 418 mgroup 418 mstats 419 neighbor 420 pim 421 ping 422 summary of 416 summary pim 422 variables 423 ping PIM monitoring command 422 ping 1139 OSI DECnet V monitoring command 341 ping6 IPV6 monitoring command 402 NDP monitoring command 410 RIP6 monitoring command 432 Point to Point Protocol PPP AppleTalk Control Protocol 214 port level parameter lists 48 port types supported 25 Protocols BGP 433 comparison table 433 protocols Digital Network Architecture DNA Phase IV 249 Protocols FTP 433 ICMP 433 IP 433 IPX 433 476 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Protocols continued key to 433 RIP 433 SGMP 433 SNMP 433 TCP 433 TFTP 433 R restart APPN monitoring command 211 restrictions 43 RIP6 configuring 425 RIP6 command 425 RIP6 configuration commands add 425 change 426 delete 427 disable 427 enable 428 list 430 set 430 summary 425 RIP6 monitoring commands accessing 431 dump 431 list 431 ping6 432 summary of 431 route IPV6 monitoring command 400 OSI DECnet V monitoring command 342 routing list 33 RU size 39 101 S SDLC 65 APPN using 65 Seed router AppleTalk Phase 2 213 216 send Echo Packet OSI DECnet V monitoring command 342 set AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration command 227 APPN configuration command 83 IPV6 configuration command 391 OSI configuration command 323 PIM configuration command 413 RIP6 configuration command 430 VINES configuration c
171. 5 days it discards the entry for that resource from the database If there is more than one least weight route from an origin LU to a destination LU for a given class of service the router randomly selects one of these routes for the session This practice helps distribute the flow of traffic in the network The router maintains a copy of the network topology database The database identifies the available routes to other network nodes for a particular class of service When the router needs to calculate a route to a network node or to an end node adjacent to that network node it uses information in the topology database to generate a routing tree for that network node The routing tree identifies the optimal routes to the network node for the class of service required When the router generates a new routing tree it stores that tree in a cache When the router receives a service request it checks this cache first to see if a route has been computed Use of the cache reduces the number of route calculations required When the router receives topology information that invalidates a routing tree it discards the tree The router recalculates the tree as needed and caches the new tree The router can be defined as a member of a connection network on Ethernet ports Token Ring ports Frame Relay BAN ports Enterprise Extender Support for HPR over IP and ATM ports Chapter 1 APPN 5 APPN APPN Network Node Optional Features In addition to
172. 56000 seconds 120 Perform short retries to restore disrupted pipe Y Short retry timer 0 2756000 seconds 120 Short retry count 0 65535 5 Perform long retry to restore disrupted pipe Y Long retry timer 0 2756000 seconds 300 Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt APPN config gt tn3270e TN3270E config gt set TN3270E Server Parameters Enable TN3270E Server Y N Y TN3270E Server IP Address 4 3 2 1 Port Number 23 Enable Client IP Address to LU Name Mapping Y N N Default Pool Name PUBLIC NetDisp Advisor Port Number 10008 Keepalive type 0 none 1 Timing Mark 2 NOP 2 Frequency 1 65535 seconds 60 Automatic Logoff Y N N Write this record Y The record has been written TN3270E config gt exit APPN config gt APPN config gt add loc Local PU information Station name Max 8 characters link1 Fully qualified CP name of primary DLUS STFNET MVS8 Fully qualified CP name of a backup DLUS Local Node ID 5 hex digits 11111 Autoactivate y n Y Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt tn3270 TN3270E config gt add im TN3270E Server Implicit definitions Pool name Max 8 characters lt DEFLT gt Station name Max 8 characters link1 LU Name Mask Max 5 characters 01LU Chapter1 APPN 75 APPN LU Type 3270 mod 2 display 3270 mod 3 display 3270 mod 4 display 4 3270 mod 5 display 1 Speci
173. 6 302198223344 lfc Indicates the interface number where the address can be reached Type Indicates the type of metric either internal INT or external EXT Metric Indicates the cost of the reachable address Address prefix Indicates the destination NSAP prefix This prefix may be 20 bytes long Dest Phys Address Indicates the destination DTE address if this interface is X 25 and the configured mapping is manual routing circuits Displays a summary of all routing circuits or details of each routing circuit Example list routing circuits Summary or Detailed Summary Summary Ifc Name Type Enabled 0 routecirl STATIC OUT YES 0 routecir2 STATIC IN YES 0 routecir3 DA YES Summary or Detailed Summary Detailed Routing Circuit Name routecir2 0 nterface Enabled YES Type STATIC Direction Incoming nitial Minimum Timer 55 Enable IS IS YES L2 Only NO External Domain NO Metric 20 S IS Hello Timer 3 DECnetV Link Initialization YES Receive Verifier Transmit Verifier Explicit Receive Verification TRUE Interface lfc The logical X 25 interface for this routing circuit Name The alphanumeric name of this routing circuit record Enabled Indicates the state of the routing circuit YES for enabled NO for disabled 320 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Type Indicates whether the circuit is STATIC IN STATIC OUT or DA dynamically allocated
174. 6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 RIP6 input Metric Changes the value of the RIP6 metric on incoming RIP6 updates Valid Values 1 15 Default Value 1 rip6 out metric Changes the RIP6 metric on the outgoing RIP6 updates Change RIPng metric on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 output metric is to be changed Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 RIP6 output Metric Specifies the value of the RIP6 metric on outgoing RIP6 updates Valid Values 0 15 Default Value 0 426 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Delete Disable RIP6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Use the delete command to remove RIP6 from the specified interface Syntax delete interface interface Specifies the interface from which RIP6 protocol is to be removed Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value None Use the disable command to disable RIP6 Syntax disable rip6 override sending rip6 Disables RIP6 on the specified interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be disabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 override static routes Overrides RIP6
175. 8 configuration for X 25 262 configuring over ATM LAN Emulation 250 designated router for 251 LAT protocol 249 MOP support of 249 Network Control Program NCP 252 See NCP 249 routing 251 routing parameters 252 routing tables 251 472 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNA IV continued special considerations and limitations 249 terminology and concepts 250 DNA IV configuration commands define circuit 266 executor 269 module access 272 module routing 273 node 273 help 266 purge module access 274 module routing 274 show area 275 node 276 show list circuit 277 executor 280 module access 282 module routing 282 zero circuit 283 executor 283 module access 283 DNA IV monitoring commands define circuit 266 executor 269 module access 272 module routing 273 node 273 help 266 purge module access 274 module routing 274 show area 275 node 276 show list circuit 277 executor 280 module access 282 routing 282 zero circuit 283 executor 283 module access 283 module_access 283 DNA V networks 261 X 25 configuration Count 2 262 DNAV info OSI DECnet V monitoring command 333 dump AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring command 231 APPN monitoring command 210 IPV6 monitoring command 399 NDP monitoring command 410 dump continued PIM monitoring command 416 RIP6 monitoring command 431 VINES 246 Dynamic Definition of Dependent LUs 20 TN3270E Server and 23 E enable AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration command 225
176. 80 seconds Description This parameter specifies RTP s inactivity interval for HPR connections that carry traffic with ow transmission priority This is an end to end version of the LLC inactivity timer Ti If no receptions occur during this interval RTP transmits a poll Idle periods are monitored to ensure the integrity of the connection Parameter Maximum RTP retries Valid Values 0 to 10 Default Value 6 Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of retries before RTP initiates a path switch on an HPR connection that carries traffic with low transmission priority Parameter Path switch timer Valid Values 0 to 7200 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter specifies the maximum amount of time that a path switch may be attempted on an HPR connection carrying traffic with low transmission priority A value of zero indicates that the path switch function is to be disabled and a path switch will not be performed Medium transmission priority traffic Parameter RTP inactivity timer Valid Values 1 to 3600 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter specifies RTP s inactivity interval for HPR connections that carry traffic with medium transmission priority This is an end to end version of the LLC inactivity timer Ti If no receptions occur during this interval RTP transmits a poll Idle periods are monitored to ensure the integrity of the connection
177. 9 APPN Configuration Commands Table 37 Configuration Parameter List Routing List Configuration continued Parameter Information Parameter Routing CP and optional subnet visit count Valid Values A fully qualified CP name consisting of 1 to 17 characters followed by an optional numeric subnet visit count Legal characters for the CP name are A Z 0 9 The first character of the NETID part and of the CP name part must be non numeric The optional subnet visit count range is 1 to 255 and should be separated from the fully qualified CP name by one or more spaces Default Value Blank for fully qualified CP name and node level setting for subnet visit count Description This parameter specifies a list of one or more fully qualified CP names of CPs that might know how to reach one or more of the previously configured destination LUs Each of the following special keywords may be used once in any given routing list e _ equivalent to specifying all native BNs all adjacent non native BNs and all adjacent non native NNs e SELF equivalent to specifying the local node s fully qualified CP name e EBNS equivalent to specifying all native BNs This question will be repeated until terminated with a null entry Notes 1 All the editing shortcuts described at the beginning of this table are available to speed modification of a previously configured routing CP list 2 If you configure SELF
178. 9 2 Kbps link To ensure that the higher speed connection from router A to router B is viewed as the more desirable path for routing APPN interactive traffic the effective capacity TG characteristic for the link station associated with this path would be modified In this case the default value for effective capacity is X 38 which correctly represents a link speed of approximately 19 2 Kbps However the effective capacity would be changed to X 45 to properly represent the 64 Kbps link Since the effective capacity for the TG from router A to router B is now X 45 this path is assigned a lower weight in the COS file for interactive traffic Consequently the connection from router A to router B is represented as more desirable than the connection from router A to router C You can also change the TG characteristics if you purposefully want to favor certain TGs for route selection In addition to the five architected TG characteristics there Chapter 1 APPN 37 APPN COS Options are also three user defined TG characteristics You may define these user defined TG characteristics in order to bias the route selection calculation in favor of certain paths Note For DLSw ports the TG characteristics that you define effect only the selection of routes between APPN nodes over these DLSw ports These characteristics have no direct effect on any intermediate routing performed by DLSw on APPN s behalf You can use a template to create new us
179. A ao eel a Soe ee we Ee es 270 ZENO ws ae ee OE GR we aes OR ee as OR eB at 283 Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnetV 2 2 2 285 OSI Overview 2 Ble Be wR oe cho ee Bie om Boe te oe 2 269 NSAP falta e o 2 0 GS A ee ae u ER he amp Ae eee Ge286 IDPs es a eo ee ek ee ee Te A eee dk gb we 2 de a 1 286 DSP bow oh oo ee Ne Be owe 4 287 IS IS Addressing Format bot th ee he ee Ce A le OP GOSIP Version 2 NSAPs 1 ee ee ee 288 Multicast Addresses 2 2 2 ee a a ee ee 288 OSI Routing 2 ee ee ee ee ee 289 IS IS Protocol s i a a aopn aob a iom io o a i e w d egg IS ISAreas 2 s d o doos a m oo a e pod ao omoa aa a i ae 289 IS IS Domain ook aa a a ee a es ee a IS to IS Hello IIH Message oe ey ew cm a a aA L1 IIH Message co me Row osodid Gee a we a amp os as 2 292 L2 IIH Message we ae Se A wag ce ee ey Jd ec gp ao AOS Point to Point IIH Message ek e eA Ee ee a we 29 Designated IS 2 2 we ee ee a a a 293 Link State Databases 2 2 2 294 Routing Tables me SR Ga SSS Sg ch a Bytes Gr ot a ee Address Prefix Encoding Woe ge Oe OE ae ee i es de ee 297 Authentication Passwords 2 2 2 298 ESIS Protocol s ce a oe os 2 ee ee eee ee ee 299 Hello Message BB eG es ye Se oh He ee ie ot oe 29 End System Hello ESH Message eh OO ew ee ck ae ce a ZOD Intermediate System Hello ISH Messages
180. AN The following example shows configuration of APPN over Frame Relay BAN nada207 Config gt p appn APPN user configuration nada207 APPN config gt add port APPN Port Link Type P PP F RAME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A T IP f Interface number Default 0 0 4 Port name Max 8 characters FRO04 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y High performance routing Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2048 2048 Maximum number of link stations 1 976 512 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 100 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls 0 100 0 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 Support bridged formatted frames Y es N o N y Boundary node identifier hex noncanonical 4FFFO0000000 41235fad Local HPR SAP address 04 EC C8 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written nada207 APPN config gt add link APPN Station Port name for the link station fr004 Station name Max 8 characters tonn Activate link automatically Y es N o Y DLCI number for link 16 1007 16 Support bridged formatted frames Y es N o N y MAC address of adjacent node hex noncanonical 000000000000 3456 Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node
181. AN and wide area network WAN MIB 1 MIB module 2 Management Information Base MIB object Synonym for MIB variable MIB variable In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a specific instance of data defined in a MIB module Synonymous with MIB object MIB view In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the collection of managed objects known to the agent that is visible to a particular community MILNET The military network that was originally part of ARPANET It was partitioned from ARPANET in 1984 MILNET provides a reliable network service for military installations modem modulator demodulator 1 A functional unit that modulates and demodulates signals One of Glossary 459 the functions of a modem is to enable digital data to be transmitted over analog transmission facilities T A 2 A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog signal that can be transmitted on a telecommunication line and converts the analog signal received to data for the computer modulo 1 Pertaining to a modulus for example 9 is equivalent to 4 modulo 5 2 See also modulus modulus A number such as a positive integer in a relationship that divides the difference between two related numbers without leaving a remainder for example 9 and 4 have a modulus of 5 9 4 5 4 9 5 and 5 divides both 5 and 5 without leaving a remainder monitor 1 A device that observes and records
182. Accessing the IPV6 Configuration Environment Use the following procedure to access the IPV6 configuration process 1 At the OPCON prompt enter talk 6 For more detail on this command refer to The OPCON Process and Commands in the Software User s Guide For example talk 6 Config gt After you enter the talk 6 command the CONFIG prompt Config gt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again 2 At the CONFIG prompt enter the p ipv6 command to get to the IPV6 Config gt prompt IPV6 Configuration Commands To configure IPV6 enter the commands at the IPV6 Config gt prompt Table 66 IPV6 Configuration Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the pens for specific commands if available See add Adds an address leaked routes packet filter route or tunnel change Changes an address leaked routes packet filter route or tunnel delete Deletes an address leaked routes packet filter route or tunnel disable Disables icmp redirects packet filter or path MTU discovery enable Enables ICMP redirects packet filters or path MTU discovery list Lists the configuration set Sets configuration values associated with automatic tunnels fast forwarding path cache buffer size default gateway MLD path MTU aging timer packet reassembly buffer size routing table size ro
183. Banyan servers is the 32 bit hexadecimal serial number of the service node This number is automatically read from the node server key 2 Globally enable the VINES protocol using the enable VINES command 3 Enable the interface cards that are to transmit and receive the VINES packets using the enable interface interface command For configuration changes to take effect you must restart the router Enter restart after the OPCON prompt and answer yes to the following prompt Are you sure you want to restart the router Yes or No yes To view the configuration enter the list command after the VINES config gt prompt Running Banyan VINES on the Bridging Router Banyan VINES servers must have this Banyan option to communicate with other servers or routers Server to server LAN Chapter 5 Using VINES 239 Using VINES To communicate across X 25 WANs VINES servers directly connected to the WAN need these two options Server to server WAN X 25 support on the server hardware and software Running Banyan VINES over WAN Links When you set up a PPP Frame Relay or X 25 link for use with VINES you must set the HDLC speed of the link even if you set the clocking to external If you set the HDLC speed to zero VINES assumes that the speed is 56 Kbps Do not set the speed to a value that is faster than the line 240 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 6 Configuring and Monitoring VINES This chapter describes
184. Be eo ge we 2 BBB LiSts 2 do Be eH OR SS 8 ES ee a ek Se ae SG me 4 O89 Sela ae ot BS ee eee st a Pe ce ee ey fe a a ee ee pt 89 Update BS doe a PO a a eG we ok a BO Update Packet filter Commands Og Ge ee Bes Ee ee ae a ee OE Accessing the IPV6 Monitoring Environment 897 IPV6 Monitoring Commands 2 2 898 Cache s fo a fuk hea Ro foe amp Ea woe oe aw we Pk a Boe BOB Counters ee dn a oR se OR ae ee He ee OS Dump routing tables i oe ak ae oe hy BO a ee we a99 Interface addresses 2 1 ew ee ee BOD Measte e ae m w oa ee he eB me ewe 2 BOG Midis se ele ee we A eG eae a Sek ew Sada we we ee amp 7400 ROUIGO aae a a ee OU a ee ea oe Be ow amp cg ww a e 400 SIZOS eek om Ce Re wR Re Beek ee ead Se ee me eh 400 Static fouteS see ee ee we ea a ee we e ce 4OT Packet filter 2 2 s s se sos aoa w ee eee a 401 Path mtu s e s e we ee ee 407 viii MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Ping6 Traceroute6 Tunnels Chapter 15 Configuring and Monitoring Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP Soe Accessing the NDP Configuration Environment NDP Configuration Commands Add Change Delete Disable Enable List Accessing the NDP Monitoring Environment NDP Monitoring Commands Dump Ping6 List Chapter 16 Configuring and Monitoring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM Be es ate dk ake Accessing the PIM Configuration Environment PIM C
185. CC10 8000 is a client node Intf The medium to which the neighbor node is attached Metric An estimated cost in 200 millisecond increments to route the VINES packet to the neighbor node Age secs The current age in seconds for the entry If a router does not receive a routing update from a neighbor at least every 360 seconds 6 minutes the router removes the entry for that neighbor from the neighbor table and if the neighbor is a service node from the routing table H W Addr The node s LAN address if the neighbor is connected to a LAN If the frame relay protocol is running the H W Addr is the Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI For X 25 interfaces the H W Addr is the X 25 address of the neighbor RIF Routing Information Field A sequence of segment and bridge numbers in hexadecimal which indicate a path through the network between two stations RIF is required for source routing RTP Implementation RTP entities issue the following packets e RTP request packets Requests to the service nodes to obtain the current network topology On initialization an X 25 interface generates routing request packets every 90 seconds to each X 25 destination on the X 25 interface When the X 25 interface receives a routing response packet three full routing database Chapter 5 Using VINES 237 Using VINES updates spaced 90 seconds apart are sent to the services nodes that sent the routing response packets Once the X 25 in
186. CP implements new entities module access control and module routing filter e NCP has no set executor buffer size command because the router does not originate any DECnet traffic The router can forward the largest packet any DECnet implementer can generate It honors the buffer size restrictions of all adjacent nodes e NCP allows an all qualifier on the node area and circuit subcommands The router NCP is similar to NCP on DECnet VAX with the following differences e Router NCP does not include the set node name command and therefore cannot assign names to nodes or display node names with addresses 252 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using DNA IV e Router NCP does not include the clear or purge commands nor do the set commands have an all argument The permanent database is always copied to the volatile database when the router starts restarts or boots A router NCP command can have only one argument e NCP does not have the concept of lines To see the data that a DECnet VAX NCP show line command displays use the GWCON interface and network commands e Router NCP does not support cross network commands Router NCP does not include the tell command which requests NCP commands on other nodes Similarly router NCP does not support protocol requests from other DNA routers to execute NCP commands at the router on their behalf m Important Before configuring DNA IV you need to be aware of the optional
187. CP name of adjacent node Valid Values A string of up to 17 characters in the form of netID CPname where e netlD is a network ID from 1 to 8 characters e CPname is a control point name from 1 to 8 characters Each name must conform to the following rules e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing fully qualified CP name using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new CP names Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the fully qualified CP name of the adjacent node For the cases where this parameter is not required the adjacent node s CP name may be learned dynamically during XID exchange however if a CP name is specified it must match the adjacent node s definition for the link to be successfully activated Note This parameter is required when any of the following occur e The Service any node parameter is set to Disable e The Adjacent node type parameter is set to LEN end node e The CP CP session level security parameter is set to Enable e The link is a limited resource Parameter Activate link automatically If limited resource then this parameter is set to No and is not configurable Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes Description When this parameter is enabled the router network node automatically activates the link to the adjacent node
188. CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Remote SAP 04 EC 4 IP Network Type CAMPUS 1 WIDEAREA 0 LDLC Retry Count 1 255 3 LDLC Timer Period 1 255 seconds 15 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt Chapter 1 APPN 79 APPN Configuring Connection Networks over HPR over IP t 6 Config gt p appn APPN config gt add connection network Fully qualified connection network name netID CNname supernet cnl Port Type E thernet T okenRing FR A TM FD DI 1 P ip Limited resource timer for HPR 1 2160000 seconds 180 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt add additional port APPN Connection Networks Port Interface Fully qualified connection network name CPname CNname supernet cnl Port name en000 Write this record Y The record has been written Configuring an Extended Border Node Spurs APPN config gt p app Spurs APPN config gt set node Enable APPN Y es N o N y Network ID Max 8 characters STFDDD3 Control point name Max 8 characters SPURS Enable branch extender or extended border node O Neither 1 Branch Extender 2 Border Node 2 Subnet visit count 1 255 3 Cache searches for 0 255 minutes 8 Maximum number of searches to cache 0 unlimited 32765 0 Dynamic routing list updates 0 None 1 Full 2
189. DCE to request that a virtual call or a permanent virtual circuit be reset The reason for the request can also be specified in the packet ring See ring network ring network 1 A network in which every node has exactly two branches connected to it and in which there are exactly two paths between any two nodes T 2 A network configuration in which devices are connected by unidirectional transmission links to form a closed path ring segment A section of a ring that can be isolated by unplugging connectors from the rest of the ring See LAN segment Glossary 463 rlogin remote login A service offered by Berkeley UNIX based systems that allows authorized users of one machine to connect to other UNIX systems across an internet and interact as if their terminals were connected directly The rlogin software passes information about the user s environment for example terminal type to the remote machine RNR packet A packet used by a data terminal equipment DTE or by a data circuit terminating equipment DCE to indicate a temporary inability to accept additional packets for a virtual call or permanent virtual circuit root bridge The bridge that is the root of a spanning tree formed between other active bridges in the bridging network The root bridge originates and transmits bridge protocol data units BPDUs to other active bridges to maintain the spanning tree topology It is the bridge with the highest prior
190. DR 1 C TR DLCADDR 2 X 5452303030 port name DLCADDR 3 X 04 k SAP address DLCADDR 4 X 400000011088 j MAC address kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xx Below is Ethernet kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xPATHE20 PATH PID 1 DLURNAME PURPLE DLCADDR 1 C ETHERNET DLCADDR 2 X 454E303030 port name 3 FF DLCADDR 3 X 20 SAP address DLCADDR 4 X 400000011063 MAC address kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Below is X25 SVC kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A20RT PATH PID 3 DLURNAME GREEN DLCADDR 1 C X25SVC DLCADDR 2 X 583235303033 port name DLCADDR 4 X C3 stoic enced identifier DLCADDR 21 X 000566660 y Destination DTE address kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Below is X25 PVC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xA20RT PATH PID 3 FF DLURNAME GREEN DLCADDR 1 C X25PVC DLCADDR 2 X 583235303033 port name DLCADDR 3 X 0001 j Logical channel number kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LU statements kkkkkkkkkkkkk
191. DTE Address currentvalue Call UserData OSI DEC USER currentvalue If you select user this additional prompt appears for you to enter your user data followed by a Priority prompt max 16 octets currentvalue Priority 1 10 currentvalue Use the clear command to erase SRAM or to remove the receive or transmit password Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 313 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Delete Syntax clear receive password sram transmit password receive password SRAM Transm Use the Removes all of the receive passwords previously configured using the add receive password command Note You will receive an error message if you use an invalid password type Example clear receive Password Type Domain Password Type Specifies the type of password being used Domain or Area Refer to the add receive password command for description of these passwords Use this parameter to erase the OSI configuration from SRAM Attention Use this command only if you intend to erase the configuration Example clear sram Warning All OSI SRAM Information will be erased Do you want to continue Y N N it password Removes the transmit password previously configured using the set transmit password command The output for this parameter is the same as that of the receive password parameter Note You will receive an error message if you use an invalid password
192. Disables all AP2 functions on the specified network interface The network continues to remain available for all other protocols Example ap2config gt disable interface 2 nfilter in interface Disables but does not delete the input network filters on this interface 224 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Enable AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Example ap2config gt disable nfilter in Interface 0 2 nfilter out interface Disables but does not delete the output network filters on this interface Example ap2config gt disable nfilter out Interface 0 2 zfilter in interface Disables but does not delete the input zone filters on this interface Example ap2config gt disable zfilter in Interface 0 1 zfilter out interface Disables but does not delete the output zone filters on this interface Example ap2config gt disable zfilter out 0 Interface 0 1 split horizon routing interface Disables split horizon routing on this interface You need to disable split horizon routing only on Frame Relay interfaces that are on a hub ina partially meshed Frame Relay network Disabling split horizon routing causes all of the routing tables to be propagated on this interface Example ap2config gt disable split horizon routing 0 Use the enable command to enable the checksum function to enable a specified interface to enable AppleTalk 2 gateway function or to globally enable the AppleTa
193. Displays a table of all defined active ISR transmission groups List session_info Displays origin CP Name primary LU Name and secondary LU Name if Save RSCV information for intermediate sessions is Yes 210 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Memory Restart Stop TN3270E APPN Monitoring Commands List rtp Displays a table of all RTP connections List port Displays a summary table of all ports List port port name Displays detailed information about the requested port List link Displays a summary table of all links List link station name Displays detailed information about the requested link station List focal Displays currently active focal point if there is one List appc Displays information about APPC sessions List local_link_information Displays information about local links List routing _list Displays information about all configured routing lists log Displays the last 20 log entries incomplete_locates Displays information on locates waiting for replies Use the Memory command to display APPN memory usage information Syntax memory Use the Restart command to restart APPN after it has been stopped Syntax restart Use the Stop command to cause APPN to stop Syntax stop Use the tn3270e command to access the TN3270E gt command prompt from which can display information about the TN3270E configuration See Hable 50 ad Syntax tn3270e Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitor
194. E CP NAME APPN config gt ex kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxxx The configuration is NN22 primary FR KK Alternate WRR to NN6 KKK xx This is the NN6 configuration which is the destination side for the NN22 Wan Reroute interface 17 has the ISDN lid for 2210 22 so when NN22 calls into NN6 x jt will map to interface 17 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Mirig n 17 Circuit configuration FR Config gt fea li all Base net 6 Destination name 2210 22 Circuit priority 8 Inbound destination name 2210 22 Inbound calls allowed Idle timer 0 fixed circuit SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms FR Config gt ex xxxx on this side the interface must be ENABLED all the time Config gt ena in 17 Interface enabled successfully kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Define the APPN PORT NN22 will call into NN6 and dynamically create the linkstation when NN22 does a Wan Reroute kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt p appn APPN user configuration Chapter 1 APPN 57 APPN APPN config gt add p 12 APPN Port Link Typ
195. ECnet V OSI Configuration Commands This section summarizes and then explains the OSI configuration commands The OSI configuration commands enable you to create or modify an OSI configuration Enter all the OSI configuration commands following the OSI Config gt prompt Defaults for any command and its parameters are enclosed in brackets immediately following the prompt The configuring commands manipulate the permanent OSI database SRAM Table 60 OSI Configuration Commands Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the m for specific commands if available See Add Adds areas this node supports receive passwords for authentication purposes prefix addresses for other domains and aliases Change Modifies some parameters set up with the add command Clear Clears a receive password transmit password or SRAM Delete Deletes areas PVCs prefix addresses adjacencies aliases subnets and X 25 routing circuit parameters Disable Disables a subnet the OSI protocol or an X 25 routing circuit Enable Enables a subnet the OSI protocol or an X 25 routing circuit List Displays the current configuration of adjacencies aliases passwords pvcs prefix addresses subnets algorithm phaseivpfx global information or X 25 routing circuits Set Configures the properties associated with OSI parameters switches globals NETs timers subnets transmit password prefix addres
196. EP In SNA a type 2 0 type 2 1 type 4 or type 5 node that provides distributed network management support It sends network management data about itself and the resources it controls to a focal point for centralized processing and it receives and executes focal point initiated commands to manage and control its resources Ethernet A 10 Mbps baseband local area network that allows multiple stations to access the transmission medium at will without prior coordination avoids 454 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 contention by using carrier sense and deference and resolves contention by using collision detection and delayed retransmission Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CSMA CD exception An abnormal condition such as an I O error encountered in processing a data set or a file exception response ER In SNA a protocol requested in the form of response requested field of a request header that directs the receiver to return a response only if the request is unacceptable as received or cannot be processed that is a negative response but not a positive response can be returned Contrast with definite response and no response exchange identification XID A specific type of basic link unit that is used to convey node and link characteristics between adjacent nodes XIDs are exchanged between link stations before and during link activation to establish and negotiate link and node charac
197. Example 2 The following example shows how to filter the Manufacturing zone from Network 11 15 but still allow the Manufacturing zone to be visible on Network 1 5 To do this you would set up an output filter on Interface 3 of Router A to exclude Manufacturing zone information from being forwarded out of Interface 3 The interface will continue to advertise Manufacturing zone information over interfaces 1 and 2 on Router A making it visible on Network 1 5 1 Add an output zone filter to Interface 3 AP2 config gt add zfilter out Interface 0 3 Zone name Manufacturing 2 Enable the output zone filter and make the filter exclusive AP2 config gt enable zfilter out exc Interface 0 3 This filter excludes Manufacturing zone information from the output of Interface 3 Example 3 The next example shows how to set up a filter so that the Admin zone is visible on all networks but the Finance zone is not visible to the rest of the internet 1 Add an input zone filter to Interface 2 on Router A AP2 config gt add zfilter in Interface 0 2 Zone name Admin 2 Enable the input zone filter and make it inclusive AP2 config gt enable zfilter in inc Interface 0 2 By setting up this input filter as inclusive only Admin zone information is forwarded through Interface 2 to the rest of the internet Setting Up Network Filters Network filters are similar to zone filters except they let you filter an entire n
198. I DECnet V 289 Using OSI DECnet V IS IS Domain An IS IS domain is a set of rules administered by the same authority that all ESs and ISs must follow to ensure compatibility There are two types of domains that require discussion administrative domain and routing domain Administrative Domain An administrative domain controls the organization of ISs into routing domains as well as the NSAP and subnetwork addresses that those routing domains use Routing Domain A routing domain is a set of ISs and ESs governed by the following rules e All devices use the same type of routing metric All devices use the same routing protocol such as IS IS 290 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using OSI DECnet V Domain 1 backbone Inter Domain backbone Domain 2 Figure 24 OSI Domain Synonymous Areas When an L1 IS services more than one area these additional areas are called synonymous areas A router can support any number of synonymous areas as long as there is an overlap of at least one area address between adjacent routers For example in Area 1 and Area 2 are synonymous areas to each other and Areas 3 and 4 are also synonymous to each other Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 291 Using OSI DECnet V Synonymous Area Synonymous Area Figure 25 Synonymous Areas L1_A IS in area 2 must have area 1 s address added to its configuration and the L1 IS in ar
199. IA 232 In data communication a specification of the Electronic Industries Association EIA that defines the interface between data terminal equipment DTE and data circuit terminating equipment DCE using serial binary data interchange Electronic Industries Association EIA An organization of electronics manufacturers that advances the technological growth of the industry represents the views of its members and develops industry standards EIA unit A unit of measure established by the Electronic Industries Association equal to 44 45 millimeters 1 75 inches encapsulation 1 In communications a technique used by layered protocols by which a layer adds control information to the protocol data unit PDU from the layer it supports In this respect the layer encapsulates the data from the supported layer In the Internet suite of protocols for example a packet would contain control information from the physical layer followed by control information from the network layer followed by the application protocol data 2 See also data link switching encode To convert data by the use of a code in such a manner that reconversion to the original form is possible T end node EN 1 See Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN end node and low entry networking LEN end node 2 In communications a node that is frequently attached to a single data link and cannot perform intermediate routing functions entry point
200. IM DM is a soft state protocol This means that the prune states if not removed by some other activity such as grafting or joining are removed after a period of time configurable and the multicast data is once again broadcast to all downstream systems where pruning once again occurs PIM DM establishes adjacency to neighboring PIM routers by exchanging Hello messages with all neighbors It keeps the adjacency active until it is timed out As long as the neighboring routers are active and running new Hello messages are sent to refresh the Hello state and prevent the adjacency from timing out How often Hello messages are sent is configurable Through this mechanism a designated router is also chosen For PIM DM since it is a broadcast and prune protocol the designated router has no real function The designated router is used mainly for PIM SM operation PIM DM is completely independent of the under lying unicast protocol It uses the unicast routing table regardless which unicast protocol owns an entry to perform Chapter 13 Using IP Version 6 IPv6 381 Using IPv6 the reverse path forwarding calculation on a received multicast datagram Reverse path forwarding rpf is used to validate whether the received multicast datagram arrived on an interface that would be valid for forwarding to the source address contained in the multicast datagram If this is an incorrect interface the datagram is discarded else a new multicast entry is bu
201. IPv6 address comprise the prefix Valid Values 0 128 Default Value 128 Internet destination Specifies the IPv6 address of the packet destination Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Prefix length Decimal value specifying how many of the leftmost contiguous bits of the IPv6 address comprise the prefix Valid Values 0 128 Default Value 128 Change Use the update packet filter change command to change access control Syntax change access control type sourceadar sourceprefix destadar destprefix access control Changes an access control item Type Specifies whether the access control item is inclusive or used to identify packets to be secured Valid Values or S Default Value Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPve 395 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Internet source Specifies the IPv6 address of the packet source Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Prefix length Decimal value specifying how many of the leftmost contiguous bits of the IPv6 address comprise the prefix Valid Values 0 128 Default Value 128 Internet destination Specifies the IPv6 address of the packet destination Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Prefix length Decimal value specifying how many of the leftmost contiguous bits of the IPv6 address comprise the prefix Valid Values 0 128 Default Value 128 Delete Use the update packet filter
202. IR variable information rate VL virtual link VNI Virtual Network Interface VR virtual route WAN wide area network WRS WAN restoral reroute X 25 packet switched networks X 251 X 25 physical layer X 252 X 25 frame layer X 253 X 25 packet layer XID exchange identification 444 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 XNS XSUM ZIP ZIP2 ZIT Xerox Network Systems checksum AppleTalk Zone Information Protocol AppleTalk Zone Information Protocol 2 Zone Information Table List of Abbreviations 445 446 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Glossary This glossary includes terms and definitions from e The American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems ANSI X3 172 1990 copyright 1990 by the American National Standards Institute ANSI Copies may be purchased from the American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street New York New York 10036 Definitions are identified by the symbol A after the definition e The ANSI EIA Standard 440 A Fiber Optic Terminology Copies may be purchased from the Electronic Industries Association 2001 Pennsylvania Avenue N W Washington DC 20006 Definitions are identified by the symbol E after the definition e The Information Technology Vocabulary developed by Subcommittee 1 Joint Technical Committee 1 of the International Organization for Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission ISO IEC JTC1 SC1 Definitions of publish
203. If communication between DLUR and DLUS is broken the following algorithm is used to reestablish communication If Perform retries to restore disrupted pipe is No If DLUR receives a non disruptive UNBIND sense code of X 08A0 000A DLUR waits indefinitely for a DLUS to reestablish the broken pipe If the pipe fails for any other reason than a non disruptive UNBIND DLUR attempts to reach the primary DLUS once If this is unsuccessful DLUR attempts to reach the backup DLUS If DLUR is unable to reach the backup DLUS it waits indefinitely for a DLUS to reestablish the broken pipe If Perform retries to restore disrupted pipe is Yes DLUR will attempt to reestablish the pipe based on the following configuration parameters Delay before initiating retries Perform short retries to restore disrupted pipe Short retry timer Short retry count Perform long retries to restore disrupted pipe Long retry timer There are two cases that determine the retry algorithm For the case of receiving a non disruptive UNBIND 1 Wait for the amount of time specified by the Delay before initiating retries parameter This delay allows time for an SSCP takeover where the pipe would be reestablished by a new DLUS without action on the DLUP s part 2 Attempt to reach the primary DLUS If unsuccessful attempt to reach the backup DLUS 4 lf the attempt to reach the backup DLUS is unsuccessful DLUR will retry as described in steps 5 7 as long a
204. Indicates the X 25 or Frame Relay interface over which the virtual circuit is configured DTE Address Indicates the destination DTE address for X 25 or the DLC Data Link Control Identifier for Frame Relay This address must be the same as the one defined for the virtual circuit in the X 25 configuration or the Frame Relay configuration Default Metric Indicates the cost of the circuit Enable IS IS Indicates whether the IS IS protocol is going to run over the interface yes Y or no N L2 only Indicates whether the circuit should run at level 2 only yes Y or no N Ano designation allows the router to route at both level 1 and level 2 External Domain Indicates whether the circuit is operating outside the IS IS routing domain Accessing the OSI DECnet V Monitoring Environment For information on how to access the OSI DECnet V monitoring environment refer to Getting Started Introduction to the User Interface in the Software User s Guide OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands This section describes the OSI DECnet V Monitoring commands Use these commands to gather information from the database Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 329 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 The monitoring commands either display or modify the volatile database Addresses Table 61 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Summary Command Help Addresses Change Metric CLNP Stats DNAV info Designated rou
205. Indicates the number of L1 and L2 CSNPs that the router has sent Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 337 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 L1 Routes L2 Routes level 1 level 2 PSNPs rcvd Indicates the number of L1 and L2 partial sequence number PDUs PSNPs that the router has received level 1 level 2 PSNPs sent Indicates the number of L1 and L2 PSNPs that the router has sent Use the I1 routes command to display all the level 1 routes that are in the L1 routing database Syntax I1 routes Example 1 routes Level 1 Routes Destination System ID Cost Source Next Hop 0000 9300 0047 0 LOCArea AAQO 0400 080C 1 ESIS AAQ0 0400 0004 Ifc 7 7777 7777 7777 0 ISIS 3455 6537 2215 Destination System ID Indicates the system ID of the destination host Cost Indicates the cost of this route Source Indicates the one of three sources where the router learned of the route LOCAREA ESIS or ISIS Next Hop Indicates the next hop a packet would take on its route An asterisk designation refers to the router itself as the packet s destination An address with an interface number is either the MAC address of a directly connected ES or the DTE address if the next hop is an X 25 switch or a DLCI if the next hop is Frame Relay switch A system ID 34555372215 refers to the next hop to destination Use the I2 routes command to display all the level 2 routes in the L2 database Syntax 12 routes
206. L POINT NAME BOATS XID 00000 APPN ENABLED YES MAX SHARED MEMORY 4096 MAX CACHED 4000 DLUR DLUR ENABLED NO PRIMARY DLUS NAME CONNECTION NETWORK CN NAME LINK TYPE PORT INTERFACES COS COS NAME BATCH BATCHSC CONNECT INTER INTERSC CPSVCMG SNASVCMG MODE NAME COS NAME PORT INTF PORT LINK HPR SERVICE PORT NUMBER NAME TYPE ENABLED ANY ENABLED 2 X25002 X25 NO YES YES 5 TROO5 IBMTRNET YES YES YES STATION STATION PORT DESTINATION HPR ALLOW ADJ NODE NAME NAME ADDRESS ENABLED CP CP TYPE X25SVC1 X25002 2222 NO NO 1 X25PVC1 X25002 1 NO YES 1 LU NAME LU NAME STATION NAME CP NAME Boats APPN config gt ex Boats Config gt n 2 X 25 User Configuration Boats X 25 Config gt li all X 25 Configuration Summary Node Address 1111 Max Calls Out 4 Inter Frame Delay 0 Encoding NRZ Speed 64000 Clocking External MTU 2048 Cable V 35 DTE Lower DTR Disabled Default Window 2 SVC idle 30 seconds National Personality GTE Telenet DCE PVC low 1 high 4 Inbound low 0 high 0 Two Way low 10 high 20 Outbound low 0 high 0 Throughput Class in bps Inbound 2400 Throughput Class in bps Outbound 2400 72 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN X 25 National Personality Configuration Follow CCITT on OSI 1984 on OSI 1988 off Request Reverse Charges off Accept Reverse Charges off Frame Extended seq mode off Packet Extended seq mode off Incoming Calls Barred off Outgoing Calls Barred off Throughput Negot
207. Limited 1 Enable routing list optimization Y es N o Y Route addition resistance 0 255 128 XID ID number for subarea connection 5 hex digits 00000 Use enhanced BATCH COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced BATCHSC COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced INTER COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced INTERSC COS Y es N o Y Write this record Y The record has been written Spurs APPN config gt act APPN is not currently active Spurs APPN config gt add rout Routing list name list1 Subnet visit count 1 255 3 Dynamic routing list updates None 1 Full 2 Limited 1 Enable routing list optimization Y es N o Y Destination LUs found via this list netID LUname net1 netID LUname Routing CPs with optional subnet visit count netID CPname 7 3 net2 router2 netID CPname 7 3 Write this record Y es N o Y The record has been written Spurs APPN config gt add cos COS mapping table name cos1 Non native network netID CPname net2 router2 Non native network netID CPname Native and non native COS name pair inter Native and non native COS name pair Write this record Y es N o Y The record has been written 80 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN This chapter describes the APPN configuration and monitoring commands It includes the following sections Accessing the APPN Configuration Process Use the followin
208. M6 gt PIM on off This indicates whether PIM DM is currently enabled or disabled Graft Timeout The number of seconds that grafts are retransmitted if no graft acknowledgement has been received Assert Timeout The number of seconds that assert information learned by upstream routers is retained before reverting back to local routing information PIM Unicast Metric Preferences Displays current configured routing type metric preferences Each route type supported is listed with a hex value displaying the currently configured metric preference Chapter 16 Configuring and Monitoring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM 423 PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 424 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 17 Configuring and Monitoring Routing Information Protocol RIP6 RIP6 is a distance vector routing protocol Configuration for RIP6 is done for each interface This chapter describes how to use the RIP6 configuration and operating commands and includes the following sections Accessing the RIP6 Configuration Environment Use the following procedure to access the RIP6 configuration process 1 Atthe OPCON prompt enter talk 6 For more detail on this command refer to FThe OPCON Process in Software User s Guide For example talk 6 Config gt After you enter the talk 6 command the CONFIG prompt Config gt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configurati
209. Maximum Number of Neighbor Service Nodes A configured value specifying the maximum number of neighbor service nodes connected to the router Maximum Number of Neighbor Client Nodes A configured value specifying the maximum number of client nodes connected to the router List of interfaces configured for VINES Displays the interfaces that have VINES enabled and whether checksumming is enabled or disabled Chapter 6 Configuring and Monitoring VINES 243 VINES Configuration Commands Talk 6 VINES X 25 Configuration This information represents the following Interface The interface that is configured for X 25 Remote X 25 Address The DTE address of the remote server Remote Handle A user configurable name that uniquely identifies the remote server Set Use the set command to assign network addresses to routers in the VINES network and to specify the maximum number of client and service nodes Syntax set client node neighbors network address routing table size service node neighbors client node neighbors Specifies the maximum number of client nodes on your network Client node neighbors includes all of the nodes on each network directly connected through the router The range is 1 to 65535 and the default is 25 Note It is recommended that you set this number significantly higher than the number of nodes in your network This will enable your network to continue functioning without reconfiguring and
210. N accomplishes e Reduction of the number of network nodes in a large APPN network e Hidden branch office topology from the WAN e Direct peer to peer communication between defined branches connected to the same connection network e Reduces CP CP session traffic on the WAN link The following are limitations of Branch Extender e Network nodes are allowed to connect only over links that a BrNN defines as uplinks e Only end nodes or cascaded BrNNs may be attached to a BrNN downlink Border nodes acting as end nodes and DLUR nodes may not be attached to a BrNN downlink e Anode cannot connect to a Branch Extender over an uplink and a downlink at the same time e A BrNN can have CP CP sessions with only one network node at a time Extended Border Nodes Extended Border Nodes BNs allow networks with different network IDs to connect to one another CP CP sessions will be established across the network boundaries and directory services flows and session establishment will be allowed to span the interconnected networks Topology information will not be exchanged across the network boundary This allows networks with different network IDs to establish CP CP sessions and provides topology isolation between different networks In addition to allowing networks with different network IDs to interconnect BNs provide a mechanism to subdivide networks with the same network ID into smaller topology subnetworks This subdivision provides t
211. N monitoring commands for monitoring APPN interfaces Enter the commands at the APPN gt prompt Table 49 APPN Monitoring Command Summary Command Help Aping List Memory Restart Stop TN3270 Exit Function Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for specific commands if available See Pings an address Lists e CP CP_sessions displays information on CP CP sessions e ISR_sessions displays information on active ISR transmission groups e Session_information If Save RSCV information for intermediate nodes is Yes displays origin CP Name primary LU Name and secondary LU Name e RTP_connections displays information on RTP connections e Port_information displays information on all ports unless a particular interface is requested e Link_information displays information on all links unless a particular interface is requested e Focal_point displays currently active focal point e Appc displays information about APPC sessions e Local link e Log Incomplete_locates Obtains and displays APPN memory usage information Restarts APPN Stops APPN Accesses the TN3270 command prompt from which you can display TN3270 configuration information See liable Sion page 21A Returns you to the previous command level See FExiting a Lowel Aping Use the aping command to send a message to another address and watch for a response Note
212. NetB with NNc e Any LU in networks NetA NetB NetC NetD or NetE can get to any other LU in any of those networks Both NetC and NetE are connected using conventional non BN network nodes e Network NetE is connected using conventional non BN network node NNe to BNs in NetA2 and NetF You can not have a network node interconnecting non peripheral networks so it is not possible to get from NetF to any network other than NetE e You can get from NetA2 to NetE and from NetE to NetA2 since NNe is in a peripheral network Similarly you can get from NetF to NetE and from NetE to NetF Session Services Extensions SSE for NNS Support The SSE function of a router is enabled when the router is enabled for APPN This is true even if the Extended Border Node function is not enabled This means that the router may act as the network node server for a VTAM end node As such it can handle NNS functions for end nodes requesting SLU initiated sessions third part initiated sessions session request queuing automatic login session release requests and EN TG vector registration The SSE function is not used when the router is acting as a Branch Extender since down stream VTAMs are not allowed in that configuration Network Requirements There are no requirements for other APPN nodes in a network as long as they are not directly connected to a BN across a topology boundary APPN nodes that are connected to a BN across a topology boundary across
213. Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services Protocol Configuration and Monitoring Reference Volume 2 Version 3 2 SC30 3865 04 Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services Protocol Configuration and Monitoring Reference Volume 2 Version 3 2 SC30 3865 04 Note Before using this document read the general information under Notices on page xl Fifth Edition November 1998 This edition applies to Version 3 2 of the IBM Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions or technical newsletters Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality Publications are not stocked at the address below IBM welcomes your comments A form for readers comments is provided at the back of this publication If the form has been removed you may address your comments to Department CGF Design amp Information Development IBM Corporation P O Box 12195 RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NC 27709 USA When you send information to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1994 1998 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP
214. OS based least weight route calculation and transmission priority HPR interoperates seamlessly with APPN ISR e The network automatically adapts to the presence of HPR capable nodes and HPR enabled links e An APPN network can have any mix of ISR and HPR links although the greatest benefit of HPR is realized when the network has three or more HPR enabled nodes with two or more HPR capable links back to back This allows the middle HPR node to be an HPR intermediate node and use only ANR routing allowing session data to be routed through the middle node using only NCL e A given session route can be made up of a combination of ISR and HPR links e HPR uses the same TG and node characteristics for least weight route calculation as APPN ISR No special consideration is given to HPR capable nodes or links other than their potentially improved characteristics such as higher effective capacity if a higher speed link Traffic types APPN ISR uses the QLLC protocol for X 25 direct data link control the IEEE 802 2 LLC Type 2 protocol for token ring Ethernet PPP and frame relay and SDLC protocol for the SDLC data link control APPN HPR which is supported on token ring Ethernet PPP and frame relay does not use LLC Type 2 protocol but does use some functions of an APPN link station for XID and inactivity timeout A single APPN link station is therefore used for ISR or HPR Different mechanisms are used to distinguish between ISR and HPR tr
215. OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 list adjacencies Ife Area Address System ID MAC Address 0 0001 0203 0405 0001 0203 0405 1 0002 4000 0000 0000 0019 3004 lfc Indicates the interface number that connects to the adjacency Area Address Indicates the area address of this ES adjacency System ID Indicates the portion of the NET that identifies the adjacency MAC Address Indicates the MAC address SNPA of the adjacency algorithm Displays the routing algorithm that is configured in SRAM for the DNA V protocol If you are running the OSI protocol only this parameter is unsupported Example list algorithm Level 1 algorithm LINK STATE Level 2 algorithm DISTANCE_VECTOR Level 1 Algorithm Indicates the current configuration of the routing algorithm for level 1 Link State default or Distance Vector Level 2 Algorithm Indicates the current configuration of the routing algorithm for level 2 Link State or Distance Vector default Note Depending on whether DNA IV is enabled or disabled the routing algorithm displayed here may be different from what is running on the router alias Displays the configured aliases and their corresponding address segments Example list aliases Alias Segment Offset joplin AA0004000104 1 moon 0000931004F0 1 trane 000093E0107A 1 filter Displays the defined filters for X 25 circuits Example list filters Rout Cir Name Filter Name DTE Addr Pri Call Data routeCir2 filterl 25 5
216. P initiates a path switch on an HPR connection that carries traffic with high transmission priority Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 91 APPN Configuration Commands Table 6 Configuration Parameter List HPR Timer and Retry Options continued Parameter Information Parameter Path switch timer Valid Values 0 to 7200 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter specifies the maximum amount of time that a path switch may be attempted on an HPR connection carrying traffic with high transmission priority A value of zero indicates that the path switch function is to be disabled and a path switch will not be performed Network transmission priority traffic Parameter RTP inactivity timer Valid Values 1 to 3600 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter specifies RTP s inactivity interval for HPR connections that carry traffic with network transmission priority This is an end to end version of the LLC inactivity timer Ti If no receptions occur during this interval RTP transmits a poll Idle periods are monitored to ensure the integrity of the connection Parameter Maximum RTP retries Valid Values 0 to 10 Default Value 6 Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of retries before RTP initiates a path switch on an HPR connection that carries traffic with network transmission priority Parameter Path switch timer Valid Va
217. P session Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No If the link station name is the same as the CP name then the default is yes Description This parameter indicates whether this link is to solicit SSCP sessions Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 157 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Local Node ID Valid Values 5 hexadecimal digits Default Value X 00000 Description This parameter specifies the local node identifier This question is asked only if solicit sscp session is yes The local node id must be unique Parameter Local SAP address Valid Values Any valid SAP address between X 04 and X EC Default Value Value taken from port Description This parameter specifies local SAP address Notes 1 This question is displayed only if there are multiple PUs defined on the port 2 If the local SAP address is not the main local SAP address on the port 3 the port name and SAP name will display in monitoring and SNMP display output Parameter Subnet visit count Valid Values 1 255 Default Value Default taken from the equivalent port level parameter Description This parameter specifies the default for the maximum number of subnetworks that a multi subnet session may traverse Note This question is asked only if the border node function is enabled on this node 158 MRS V
218. PN component in the router and APPN nodes and LEN end nodes attached to a remote DLSw partner Chapter 1 APPN 43 APPN When configuring a DLSw port for APPN on the router you assign the network node a unique MAC and SAP address pair that enables it to communicate with DLSw The MAC address for the network node is locally administered and must not correspond to any physical MAC address in the DLSw network APPN Frame Relay BAN Connection Network Implementation The implementation of an APPN Frame Relay BAN connection network allows you to define an APPN frame relay port that supports the bridged frame relay format BAN to a connection network A shared access transport facility SATF is a transmission facility such as token ring or Ethernet in which nodes attached to the SATF can achieve any to any connectivity This any to any connectivity allows direct connections between two nodes eliminating routing through intermediate network nodes and the corresponding data traversing the SATF many times TGs must be defined on each node to all other nodes in order to achieve this direct connectivity The SATF shown in Figure 4 illustrates that the APPN NN in the router must define a link station to each node on the token ring in order to initiate a connection to each node on the token ring The APPN NN must know the DLCI address for the frame relay link and the MAC address of each node on the token ring If the nodes on the token ring want to in
219. PN has the capability to dynamically define these types of link stations Refer to the Software User s Guide for additional information about SDLC network layer configuration Chapter1 APPN 65 APPN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k The following examples show how to configure different SDLC stations kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xConfiguring a Primary Point To Point SDLC Station kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt set data sdlc 1 Config gt n 1 SDLC user configuration SDLC 1 Config gt set link role primary SDLC 1 Config gt list link list link Link configuration for LINK_1 ENABLED Role PRIMARY Type POINT TO POINT Duplex FULL Modulo 8 Idle state FLAG Encoding NRZ Clocking INTERNAL Frame Size 2048 Speed 64000 Group Poll 00 Cable RS 232 DCE Timers XID TEST response 2 0 sec SNRM response 2 0 sec Poll response 0 5 sec Inter poll delay 0 2 sec RTS hold delay DISABLED Inter frame delay DISABLED Inactivity timeout 30 0 sec Counters XID TEST retry 8 SNRM retry 6 Poll retry 10 SDLC 1 Config gt ex Config gt CTRL p restart Are you sure you want to restart the gateway Yes or No yes t 6 Config gt p appn APPN user configuration APPN config gt add port sdic APPN Port Interface number Default 0 0 1 Port name Max 8 characters SDLC001 Enabl
220. PPP 2044 bytes for frame relay or PPP over ISDN and V 25bis 2048 bytes for SDLC X 25 will take value from network level Description This parameter specifies the number of bytes in the largest basic transmission unit BTU that can be processed transmitted or received by a link station defined on this port Note If a negotiable BIND with an RU size greater than 2048 is received the device will normally choose a maximum RU size of 2048 If a non negotiable BIND with an RU size greater than 2048 is received the device will support the larger RU size up toa maximum size of 4096 Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 135 APPN Configuration Commands Table 19 Configuration Parameter List Port Definition continued Parameter Information Parameter Maximum number of link stations Valid Values 1 to 127 for SDLC ports 1 to 239 for X 25 ports 1 to 976 for all other ports cannot be configured for PPP ports Default Value 1 for PPP ports cannot be changed If SDLC is configured as multipoint and primary then this parameter defaults to 127 Otherwise it is set to 1 and is not configurable 239 for X 25 ports 512 for all other ports Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of link stations that will be allowed to use this port This parameter allows the resources for the APPN node and this port to be constrained Parameter Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls Ethernet
221. PVCs are configured the link station must be defined on both APPN nodes wanting to use the PVC The link station must be defined with Activate link automatically yes 2 When parallel TGs over ATM are configured the adjacent node name and TG number must be defined in both nodes for each link station add po APPN Port Link Type P PP FR AME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A TM IP atm J Chapter1 APPN 63 APPN Interface number Default 0 0 6 Port name Max 8 characters ATM006 WARNING You are changing an existing record Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2048 2048 Maximum number of link stations 1 976 512 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 100 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls 0 100 0 Local ATM Address hex 99998888777766 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 Enable Incoming Calls Y es N o N ATM Network Type CAMPUS 1 WIDEAREA 0 Shareable Connection Network Traffic Y es N o N Shareable Other Protocol Traffic Y es N o N Broadband Bearer Class 0 CLASS A 1 CLASS C 2 CLASS X 2 Best Effort Indicator Y es N o N Forward Traffic Peak Cell Rate 1 16777215 131750 Forward Traffic Sustained Cell Rate 1 16777215 131750 Forward Traffic Tagging Y es N o Y Forward Traffic QOS Class 0 CLASS 0 1 CLASS 1 2 CLA
222. Phase 2 231 AppleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Interface Example dump 0 View for interface 0 Dest net Cost State Next hop Zone 214 214 1 Good 152 152 eth 214 153 153 0 Dir eth153 152 152 0 Dir ser152 3 entries Dest Net Specifies the destination network number in decimal Cost Specifies the number of router hops to this destination network State Specifies the state of the entry in the routing table It includes the following Next hop Specifies the next hop for packets going to networks that are not directly connected For directly connected networks this is node number 0 Zone s Specifies the human understandable name for that network The zone name s is enclosed in double quotes in case there are embedded spaces or non printing characters If the zone name contains characters beyond the 7 bit ASCII character set they are 8 bit the zone name that displays will depend on the characteristics of your monitoring terminal Use the interface command to display the addresses of all the interfaces in the router on which AppleTalk Phase 2 is enabled If the interface is present in the router but is disabled this command shows that status Note interface interface displays the active filtering for that interface It displays net node default zone and active filters for one interface Syntax interface Example interface Interface Addresses PPP O 0 1 on net 1000 1000 default zone SerialL i
223. RIP6 on the specified interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes 428 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 RIP6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be enabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 override static routes Overrides RIP6 static routes on an interface Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be enabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 default Overrides RIP6 default routes on an interface Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be enabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 sending Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be enabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 all routes Enables advertisement of all RIP6 routes on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes default routes Enables advertisement of RIP6 default routes on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Chapter 17 Configuring and Monitoring Routing Information Protocol
224. ROOO 0004AC4E951D YES YES 1 TOPC4 TROOO 0004AC9416B4 YES YES 1 TOVTAM1 TROOO 400000003888 YES YES 1 xxxx lt this linkstation will get backed up TONN35 PPPQO1 000000000000 YES YES og TO15D0D PPP009 000000000000 YES NO 0 LU NAME LU NAME STATION NAME CP NAME APPN config gt ex Config gt logout Connection closed Note J WAN restoral is enabled on both sides Port that will get backed up g Link station that will get backed up Configuring V 25bis The following is a sample V 25bis configuration that could be used when APPN traffic uses PPP over V 25bis Config gt list device Ifc 0 Token Ring CSR 6000000 vector 28 Ifc 1 WAN PPP CSR 81620 CSR2 80D00 vector 93 Ifc 2 WAN V 25bis CSR 81640 CSR2 80E00 vector 92 Config gt set data v25 2 Config gt list device Ifc 0 Token Ring CSR 6000000 vector 28 60 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Ifc 1 WAN PPP CSR 81620 CSR2 80D00 vector 93 Ifc 2 WAN V 25bis CSR 81640 CSR2 80E00 vector 92 Config gt add v25 Assign address name 1 23 chars brown Assign network dial address 1 30 digits 555 1211 Assign address name 1 23 chars gray Assign network dial address 1 30 digits 555 1212 Config gt list v25 Address assigned name Network Address brown 555 1211 gray 555 1212 Config gt add device dial Adding device as interface 3 Defaulting Data link protocol to PPP Use net 3 command to configure circuit parameters Config gt net 3 Circuit configura
225. RS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 13 Configuration Parameter List General Component Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Path control Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the path control component Parameter Problem determination services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the problem determination component Parameter Rapid transport protocol Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the rapid transport control component Parameter Session connector manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the session connector manager component Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 117 APPN Configuration Comman
226. S CONT USSTAB AUSSTAB ISTATUS ACTIVE MAXDATA 521 IRETRY YES MAXOUT 7 PASSLIM 5 IDBLK 017 IDNUM 00035 MODETAB AMODETAB LOGAPPL ECHO71 DLOGMOD M23278 I kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk x Path statements are not required if the DSPU is initiating the connection to VTAM kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xPU20LU1 LU LOCADDR 2 11 PUZOLU2 LU LOCADDR 3 xPU20LU3 LU LOCADDR 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 2 1 PU STATEMENT kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xPU2ZIRT PU ADDR 06 PUTYPE 2 CPNAME PU21RT ANS CONT MAXPATH 8 ISTATUS ACTIVE USSTAB AUSSTAB MODETAB AMODETAB LOGAPPL ECHO71 DLOGMOD M232781 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Following are examples of path statement coding for various DLC types There is no difference in the path statement definitions between a PU 2 0 and a PU 2 1 x Path statements are required if VTAM is initiating the connection to the DSPU kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 10 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Below is SDLC kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
227. SS 2 3 CLASS 3 4 CLASS 4 0 Backward Traffic Peak Cell Rate 1 16777215 460800 Backward Traffic Sustained Cell Rate 1 16777215 39168 Backward Traffic Tagging Y es N o Y Backward Traffic QOS Class CLASS 1 CLASS 1 2 CLASS 2 3 CLASS 3 4 CLASS 4 0 Call out anonymously Y es N o N LDLC Retry Count 1 255 3 LDLC Timer Period 1 255 seconds 1 Limited resource timer for HPR 1 2160000 seconds 180 Would you like TG characteristics updated to recommended values based on config changes Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written nada205 APPN config gt add 1i atm006 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters tograya WARNING You are changing an existing record Limited resource Y es N o N Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Virtual Channel Type 0 PVC 1 SVC 0 Destination ATM Address 3999999999999900009999010103168902259411 VPI 0 255 0 VCI 0 65535 70 34 ATM Network Type CAMPUS 1 WIDEAREA 0 Shareable Connection Network Traffic Y es N o N Shareable Other Protocol Traffic Y es N o N Remote SAP 04 EC 4 Adjacent node type APPN network node 1 APPN end node or Unknown node type 2 LEN end node 0 Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N LDLC Re
228. Specifies the IPv6 time to live value Valid Values Default Value 64 Use the update command to update the packet filter Syntax update packet filter packet filter Use this command to access the Packet filter xx Config gt command prompt from which you can configure packet filters Update Packet filter Commands Table 67 Update Packet filter Configuration Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the pens for specific commands if available See Add Adds access control Change Changes access control Delete Deletes access control Move Reorders the access control list applied to the packet filter List Exit Returns you to the previous command level See FExiting a lower Level 394 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Add Use the update packet filter add command to add an access control list Syntax add access control type sourceadar sourceprefix destadar destprefix access control Adds an access control item to the access control list Type Specifies whether the access control is inclusive or used to identify packets to be secured Valid Values or S Default Value Internet source Specifies the IPv6 address of the packet source Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Prefix length Decimal value specifying how many of the leftmost contiguous bits of the
229. Standardization Sector of the Telecommunication Union ITU TS CCITT continues to be used for recommendations that were approved before the reorganization 450 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 channel 1 A path along which signals can be sent for example data channel output channel A 2 A functional unit controlled by the processor that handles the transfer of data between processor storage and local peripheral equipment channel service unit CSU A unit that provides the interface to a digital network The CSU provides line conditioning or equalization functions which keep the signal s performance consistent across the channel bandwidth signal reshaping which constitutes the binary pulse stream and loopback testing which includes the transmission of test signals between the CSU and the network carrier s office channel unit See also data service unit DSU checksum 1 The sum of a group of data associated with the group and used for checking purposes T 2 In error detection a function of all bits in a block If the written and calculated sums do not agree an error is indicated 3 On a diskette data written in a sector for error detection purposes a calculated checksum that does not match the checksum of data written in the sector indicates a bad sector The data are either numeric or other character strings regarded as numeric for the purpose of calculating the checksum circuit switching 1
230. TE transmits to ask that a connection for a call be established throughout the network 2 In X 25 communications a call supervision packet transmitted by a DTE to ask for a call establishment through the network canonical address In LANs the IEEE 802 1 format for the transmission of medium access control MAC addresses for token ring and Ethernet adapters In canonical format the least significant rightmost bit of each address byte is transmitted first Contrast with noncanonical address carrier An electric or electromagnetic wave or pulse train that may be varied by a signal bearing information to be transmitted over a communication system T carrier detect Synonym for received line signal detector RLSD carrier sense In a local area network an ongoing activity of a data station to detect whether another station is transmitting T carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CSMA CD A protocol that requires carrier sense and in which a transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting stops sending sends a jam signal and then waits for a variable time before trying again T A CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee This was an organization of the International Telecommunication Union ITU On 1 March 1993 the ITU was reorganized and responsibilities for standardization were placed in a subordinate organization named the Telecommunication
231. TFTP Server enabled Directed broadcasts enabled ARP subnet routing disabled 76 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN ARP network routing disabled Per packet multipath disabled OSPF disabled BGP disabled RIP disabled IP config gt Configuring TN3270E Using a Subarea Connection Config gt p appn APPN config gt add port APPN Port Link Type P PP FR AME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 FD DI D LSw A T I P fr Interface number Default 0 0 2 Port name Max 8 characters F00002 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Support multiple subarea Y es N o N y All active port names will be of the form lt port name sap gt Service any node Y es N o Y High performance routing Y es N o Y n Maximum BTU size 768 8136 2048 Maximum number of link stations 1 976 512 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 100 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls 0 100 0 Local SAP address 4 EC 4 Support bridged formatted frames Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt add link APPN Station Port name for the link station f00002 Station name Max 8 characters subal Activate link automatically Y es N o Y DLCI number for link 16 1007 16 23 A
232. TGs based on cost speed and delay For ATM the order of preference is e Campus Best Effort SVC or PVC Reserved PVC WAN or Campus e Campus Reserved SVC e WAN Best Effort SVC or PVC e WAN Reserved SVC Parameter Use enhanced BATCHSC COS Valid Values Yes or No Default Yes Description This parameter specifies whether to use the enhanced COS tables The enhanced tables assign reasonable weights to ATM TGs based on cost speed and delay For ATM the order of preference is e Campus Best Effort SVC or PVC Reserved PVC WAN or Campus Campus Reserved SVC e WAN Best Effort SVC or PVC e WAN Reserved SVC Parameter Use enhanced INTER COS Valid Values Yes or No Default Yes Description This parameter specifies whether to use the enhanced COS tables The enhanced tables assign reasonable weights to ATM TGs based on cost speed and delay For ATM the order of preference is e Campus Reserved SVC or PVC e Campus Best Effort SVC or PVC WAN reserved PVC e WAN Reserved SVC e WAN Best Effort SVC or PVC 88 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 4 Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing continued Parameter Information Parameter Use enhanced INTERSC COS Valid Values Yes or No Default Yes Description This parameter specifies whether to use the enhanced COS tables The enhanced tables assign reasonable weights to ATM TGs based on cost spe
233. TPU request to DLUR The following is a dial on demand configuration example This configuration is similar to the ISDN permanent connection except e You must specify that the link is a limited resource e You must define the adjacent CP name e You must specify a TG number You configure both sides of the communication link the same way Note If you allow CP CP sessions on this link the link will not disconnect xt 6 Gateway user configuration Config gt kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxx This is the NN6 configuration for a NN6 NN15 dial on demand link xxxx The NN15 config will look just like this xxxx interface 9 is a Dial On Demand link with destination NN15 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt n 9 Circuit configuration FR Config gt li all Base net 6 Destination name 2210 15 Circuit priority 8 Inbound destination name 2210 15 Inbound calls allowed Idle timer 60 sec SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms FR Config gt ex kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxx Configure APPN Port for the Interface kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt p appn APPN user configuration 52 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN config gt add p APPN Port Link Type P PP F RAME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A TM
234. TT Standard Q 922 indicates the functions associated with certain DLCI values DLCI Values Function 0 in channel signaling 1 15 reserved 16 991 assigned using frame relay connection procedures 992 1007 layer 2 management of frame relay bearer service 1008 1022 reserved 1023 in channel layer management data link control DLC A set of rules used by nodes on a data link such as an SDLC link or a token ring to accomplish an orderly exchange of information data link control DLC layer In SNA the layer that consists of the link stations that schedule data transfer over a link between two nodes and perform error control for the link Examples of data link control are SDLC for serial by bit link connection and data link control for the System 370 channel Note The DLC layer is usually independent of the physical transport mechanism and ensures the integrity of data that reaches the higher layers data link layer In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model the layer that provides services to transfer data between entities in the network layer over 452 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 a communication link The data link layer detects and possibly corrects errors that may occur in the physical layer T data link level 1 In the hierarchical structure of a data station the conceptual level of control or processing logic between high level logic and the data link that maintains control of the data link The
235. Table 41 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Implicit continued Parameter Information Parameter LU type Valid Values e 1 3270 Mod 2 display e 2 3270 Mod 3 display e 3 3270 Mod 4 display e 4 3270 Mod 5 display e 5 3270 printer e 6 SCS printer Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies the type of dependent LU for the LU being added Parameter Specify LU address range Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether you want to define an LU address range Parameter LU address range Valid Values Any range of values within 2 253 Default Value none Description This parameter specifies LU address range The LU address range can be specified by using the following format lower_address_bound upper_address_bound If no hyphen follows the first value that value is assumed to be a single LU address Multiple ranges can be entered separated by commas For example the following string specifies 2 address ranges and 2 specific LU addresses 2 40 56 58 100 250 Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 199 APPN Configuration Commands Table 41 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Implicit continued Parameter Information Parameter Number of implicit workstation definitions Valid Values 1 to 253 Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies the number of dependent LUs to be added to the impl
236. Talk 5 Syntax mgroup Example PIM6 gt mgroup Local Group Database Group Interface Lifetime secs FFO5 42 101 1 2 3 4 25 TRK O 176 FFQ5 4 23 122 23 2 113 45 23 Eth 1 170 FFO5 4 23 122 Internal 1 PIM6 gt Group Displays the group address as it has been reported via MLD on a particular interface Interface Displays the interface address to which the group address has been reported via MLD The router s internal group membership is indicated by a value of internal For these entries the lifetime field see below indicates the number of applications that have requested membership in the particular group Lifetime Displays the number of seconds that the entry will persist if Membership Reports cease to be heard on the interface for the given group Use the mstats command to display various multicast routing statistics The command indicates whether multicast routing is enabled and whether the router is an inter area and or inter AS multicast forwarder Syntax mstats Example PIM6 gt mstats Datagrams received 2496 Datagrams fwd multicast Locally delivered Datagrams fwd unicast 0 OOU Unreachable source Unallocated cache entries 0 Off multicast tree Unexpected DL multicast 0 Buffer alloc failure TTL scoping 0 fwd cache alloc 1 fwd cache freed 0 fwd cache GC 0 local group DB alloc 0 local group DB free 1 PIM6 gt Datagrams received Displays the number of multicast da
237. Token Ring Data Link and Node Product Functional Specification Version 1 0 0 that includes support for Arbitrary MAC Addresses AMA There are two types of MAC addressing conventional DNA IV addressing which is the concatenation of a 32 bit prefix AA 00 04 00 and the 16 bit DNA IV area node address or AMA that allows the DNA protocol to run on IEEE 802 5 nodes without their MAC addresses being changed by the DNA protocol This is necessary if you follow certain IBM protocol conventions You can select the type of addressing that you are using through the DNA configuration process NCP gt Another type of addressing representation is native bit order This type of address is byte flopped when sent over the physical layer For example the canonical 32 bit prefix shown above using dashes is expressed as 55 00 20 00 in native bit order with colons separating each byte Note When configuring DNA IV to run over ATM LAN Emulation the AMA must be used 250 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using DNA IV X 25 Data Link Addressing The router supports DECnet Phase IV over X 25 and can interoperate with routers running Digital s implementation of DECnet Phase IV over X 25 You set up the local and the remote DTE address with the set define circuit command when you set up a DECnet circuit In the call userdata parameter you specify the local DTE address in hexadecimal octets characters In the DTE address parameter you specify the re
238. Valid Values A fully qualified CP name Default Value Blanks Description This parameter specifies the fully qualified CP name representing this focal point The first focal point added is the primary implicit focal point Up to 8 additional backup implicit focal points may be added by invoking Add focal_point multiple times If the primary implicit focal point is taken off the focal point list with Delete focal_point the first backup implicit focal point if there is one becomes the primary implicit focal point Syntax add local pu You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 36 Configuration Parameter List APPN Local PU Parameter Information Parameter Station name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name representing the link between the DLUR and the PU 186 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 36 Configuration Parameter List APPN Local PU continued Parameter Information Parameter Primary DLUS name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter sp
239. a telecommunication line in a given time collision An unwanted condition that results from concurrent transmissions on a channel T collision detection In carrier sense multiple access with collision detection CSMA CD a signal indicating that two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously Committed information rate The maximum amount of data in bits that the network agrees to deliver community In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP an administrative relationship between entities community name In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a string of octets identifying a community compression 1 The process of eliminating gaps empty fields redundancies and unnecessary data to shorten the length of records or blocks 2 Any encoding to reduce the number of bits used to represent a given message or record configuration 1 The manner in which the hardware and software of an information processing system are organized and interconnected T 2 The devices and programs that make up a system subsystem or network configuration database CDB A database that stores the configuration parameters of one or several devices It is prepared and updated using the configuration program configuration file A file that specifies the characteristics of a system device or network configuration parameter A variable in a configuration definition the values of which can characterize the rela
240. a terminal equipment DTE and data circuit terminating equipment DCE at various data rates V 36 In data communication a specification of the CCITT that defines the list of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment DTE and data circuit terminating equipment DCE at rates of 48 56 64 or 72 kilobits per second version A separately licensed program that usually has significant new code or new function VINES Virtual NEtworking System virtual circuit 1 In packet switching the facilities provided by a network that give the appearance to the user of an actual connection T See also data circuit Contrast with physical circuit 2 A logical connection established between two DTEs virtual connection In frame relay the return path of a potential connection virtual link In Open Shortest Path First OSPF a point to point interface that connects border routers that are separated by a non backbone transit area Because area routers are part of the OSPF backbone the virtual link connects the backbone The virtual links ensure that the OSPF backbone does not become discontinuous Virtual NEtworking System VINES The network operating system and network software from Banyan Systems Inc In a VINES network virtual linking allows all devices and services to appear to be directly connected to each other when they may actually be thousands of miles apart See also StreetTalk virtual route
241. able checksumming interface 242 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 List VINES Configuration Commands Talk 6 vines checksumming interface Enables checksumming on packets that the specified interface generates Example enable checksumming interface interface Enables the VINES protocol on the specified interface Example enable interface 1 vines Globally enables the VINES protocol If you receive an error message after entering this command contact your customer service representative The VINES software may not be in your software load Example enable vines Use the list command to display the current VINES configuration Syntax list Example list VINES enabled disabled VINES network number hex Maximum Number of Routing Table Entries Maximum Number of Neighbor Service Nodes Maximum Number of Neighbor Client Nodes List of interfaces configured for VINES intf 0 checksumming enabled disabled intf 1 checksumming enabled disabled intf 2 checksumming enabled disabled VINES X 25 Configuration Interface Remote X 25 Address Remote Handle 0 4508907898 test VINES config gt VINES Indicates whether VINES is globally enabled or disabled VINES network number hex A configurable 32 bit hexadecimal address for routers in the VINES network Maximum Number of Routing Table entries A configured value specifying the maximum number of entries allowed in the VINES routing table
242. ach link between nodes and moves the error recovery and flow congestion control procedures to the end points of an HPR connection A transport layer using a new error recovery procedure called Rapid Transport 6 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Protocol RTP is used by the endpoints of the HPR connection HPR intermediate nodes have no session or RTP connection awareness This new transport layer features e Selective retransmission error recovery procedure e Segmentation and reassembly e Adaptive Rate Based ARB flow and congestion control mechanism that meters data onto a route that allows efficient utilization of network resources while minimizing congestion ARB uses a preventative rather than reactive approach to flow and congestion control e Non disruptive Path Switch NDPS function that automatically reroutes traffic around node or link failures without disrupting end user sessions e Detection of Forward Explicit Congestion Notification FECN bit set allowing RTP s adaptive rate based flow and congestion control algorithm to adjust the data send rate This algorithm prevents traffic bursts and congestion maintaining a high level of throughput The router implements both ANR routing and Rapid Transport Protocol Therefore the router can function both as an intermediate routing HPR node and as an HPR connection endpoint node Interoperability HPR uses APPN network control functions including class of service C
243. active areas Active Area Volatile Summary Area State Circuit Next Node 1 reachable Eth O 1 22 2 reachable 2 26 3 reachable X25 0 2 30 Example show active areas status Active Area Volatile Status Area State Cost Hops Circuit Next Node 1 reachable 3 1 Eth O 1 22 2 reachable 0 0 2 26 3 reachable 2 1 PPP O 3 9 6 reachable 12 3 PPP O 3 9 3 reachable 11 1 X25 0 2 30 Area Volatile Status Area State Cost Hops Circuit Next Node 5 unreachable 1023 31 The following items define the information displayed when you use the show command area Indicates the area for this line of the display circuit Indicates which circuit the next hop to this node will go over No circuit is given for the router s own area cost Indicates the cost to this area hops Indicates the hops to this area Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 275 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands next node Indicates the router that will be the next hop intermediate destination to the specified area state Indicates that this will be reachable or unreachable node specifier argument Shows the status of the volatile node routing database this includes information on the reachable nodes and the routes to them The node specifiers can be any of the following active nodes Provides information on all nodes that are currently reachable all nodes Provides information on all nodes up to the executor maximum address An all nodes di
244. acy LAN attached devices that connect to ATM through LAN switches the NHRFP server in the router replies to the client with ATM addressing information for the LAN switch allowing the client to shortcut directly to that switch For examples of these one hop routing eases and Eigure 28 on page adal Note A hop is an operation performed by a traditional router when forwarding packets from one subnet to another In particular those operations are 1 doing a lookup on a Layer 3 subnet identifier 2 determining the outbound next hop for the packet 3 stripping and replacing the Layer 2 packet header removing ingress link information and adding egress link 346 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using NHRP information So for one hop routing this operation happens once during transfer of a packet from its source to its destination e The IBM implementation can operate in networks where some routers do not support NHRP If the next hop router is not capable of providing NHRP super shortcut VCs can be established to the last server in the path See e The customer may configure the 2210 to establish shortcuts only when traffic to a destination exceeds a given data rate This can eliminate the creation of VCs for low volume or one time traffic for example SNMP traps See data rate parameter on page and attempt shortcuts parameter on page l e The router provides solutions for the domino effect th
245. address associated with the entry Source The source address of the originator of the multicast datagram States Displays the interfaces and states associated to the source group pair P identifies a prune state Use the ping command to dynamically ping another destination IPv6 address Syntax ping Example PIM6 gt ping Destination IPv6 address 8 9 Source IPv6 Address 1 8 Ping data size in bytes 56 Ping TTL 64 Ping rate in seconds 1 PING6 1 8 gt 8 9 56 data bytes ttl 64 every 1 sec 8 9 PING6 Statistics 36 packets transmitted 36 packets received See Pinga on page 402 for a description of the parameters Use the traceroute command to dynamically trace a route Syntax traceroute Example 422 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Variables PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 IPV6 gt traceroute Destination IPv6 address 7 8 Source IPV6 address 6 9 Data size in bytes 56 Number of probes per hop 3 Wait time between retries in seconds 3 Maximum TTL 32 TRACEROUTE6 7 8 56 data bytes E E E IPV6 gt for a description of the parameters Use the variables command to display information about the PIM configuration variables Syntax variables Example PIM6 gt v PIM on Graft Timeout 3 seconds Assert Timeout 210 seconds PIM Unicast Metric Preferences hex RIP FFFF Default FFFF Direct FFFF Fixed FFFF Filter FFFF PI
246. address is in the exclude list In processing the request the router does not forward the Resolution Request on to the next hop address but responds to the client with addressing information that allows the client to establish a shortcut VC to the next hop router Note If the next hop router is one of the Disallowed R2R Shortcuts the router sends a NAK to the Resolution Request instead of a positive reply In general if the next hop router is on the exclude list the router does not send it any NHRP packets that would only be handled by an NHRP server Destination Devices The exclude list can also be used to prevent shortcut VCs to a given protocol address for example a device on a CIP or ELAN subnet that can support only a small number of VCs When processing a Next Hop Resolution Request for a destination device the server responds to the client with addressing information that allows the client to establish a shortcut VC to the router itself when all of the following are true e The next hop address equals the destination address e The router interface to the destination is either an ATM classical IP or an ELAN subnet e The destination address is in the exclude list 354 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using NHRP Extensions The NHRP protocol includes Extensions Extensions are appended to NHRP packets Extensions are used to request additional functions from the NHRP participants The use of the extensions paramet
247. affic depending upon the DLC type e For token ring and Ethernet LAN ports Each protocol that uses a port must have a unique SAP address with the exception of DLSw which may use the same SAP address as other protocols because DLSw frames will not be destined for the local MAC address but rather a DLSw MAC address A unique SAP address identifies the APPN link station for HPR traffic Local HPR SAP address parameter If ISR traffic is destined for a link station then a different SAP address Local APPN SAP address Chapter1 APPN 7 APPN parameter must be used The ISR traffic uses LLC Type 2 LAN frames The HPR traffic is handled in similar fashion to LLC Type 1 LAN frames and must have a different SAP address The default SAP address for HPR traffic is X C8 If X C8 has already been used by another protocol on a port the default must be overridden Note There is only one APPN link station even though APPN ISR and HPR traffic use different SAP addresses For Frame Relay ports APPN ISR traffic and APPN HPR traffic transferred over a frame relay data link connection supports both the RFC 1490 bridged frame format and the RFC 1490 routed frame format RFC 1490 routed frame format APPN ISR traffic will be transferred over a frame relay data link connection using the connection oriented multiprotocol encapsulation method defined in RFC 1490 using NLPID X 08 Q 933 encoding L2PID X 4C80 Layer 2 protocol id
248. age and flushes the packet e Delay metric packet A request packet from a source node for the routing metric from the destination service node to the destination client node VINES Address Resolution Protocol VINES ARP The VINES ARP protocol assigns unique VINES IP addresses to the client nodes VINES ARP includes the following packet types e Query request packet Packets the client nodes broadcast on initialization e Query response packet The service node s response to a query request packet e Assignment request packet The client node s response to a query response packet e Assignment response packet Includes the network and subnet addresses the service node assigned to a client node To assign a VINES IP address to a client node VINES ARP implements the following algorithm 1 The client node broadcasts a query request packet 2 Service nodes respond with a query response packet containing the destination MAC address of the client node and a broadcast VINES IP address 3 The client node issues an assignment request packet to a service node that responded with a query response packet 4 The service node responds with an assignment response packet that contains the VINES network and subnetwork addresses 238 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using VINES Each client node maintains a timer that has a default setting of two seconds The timer starts when a client node transmits a query request or assignment r
249. agmentation address Changes an address leaked routes Changes a leaked route configuration packet filter Changes a packet filter configuration route Changes a route configuration tunnel Changes a tunnel configuration See Add on page 383 for a description of the parameters associated with the change command Use the delete command to remove an address leaked routes packet filter route or tunnel Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPV6 387 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Disable Enable Syntax delete address address leaked routes destination packet filter name route destination mask gateway tunnel tunnel Use the disable command to disable ICMP redirect packet filters and path MTU discovery Syntax disable icmp redirect address packet filter packet filter name path mtu discovery icmp redirect Disables ICMP redirects packet filter Disables a packet filter packet filter name Specifies the name of the packet filter to be disabled Valid Values Any configured packet filter Default Value None path mtu discovery Disables Path MTU Discovery Use the enable command to enable ICMP redirects packet filters or path MTU discovery Syntax enable icmp redirect address packet filter packet filter name path mtu discovery icmp redirect Enables ICMP redirects interface address Specifies the interface address Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value Null s
250. al database LSUs are flooded throughout an area or a backbone Flooding is a mechanism that an L1 or L2 IS uses to propagate an LSU to all L1 or L2 ISs An L1 IS floods LSUs to L1 ISs only An L2 IS floods LSUs to L2 ISs only An L1 L2 IS accepts both L1 and L2 LSUs L1 Link State Update non pseudonode The L1 LSU is flooded to all L1 ISs The L1 IS gives the LSU the following information e Source ID e Any manual area addresses that it services e IS type L1 e System IDs and costs of reaching IS adjacencies e If applicable the system IDs adjacent pseudonodes e System IDs for any manual ES adjacencies L1 Link State Update pseudonode The L1 pseudonode LSU is flooded to all L1 ISs located in the area Any L1 IS located on the same LAN that receives the LSU propagates the LSU to all L1 ISs adjacent on all of its other subnetworks The L1 IS places the following information in its LSU e Source ID e IS type L1 e System IDs and cost of reaching all non pseudonode ISs located on the LAN e System IDs for any ES adjacencies learned through the ES IS protocol L2 Link State Update non pseudonode The L2 LSU is flooded to all L2 ISs The L2 IS places the following information in its LSU 294 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using OSI DECnet V e Source ID e Set of area addresses that it services e IS type L2 e System IDs and the cost of reaching IS adjacencies e If applicable the system ID of the pseudonode e A
251. ame of a port providing connectivity to the shared access transport facility SATF for the connection network being defined All ports defined for a given connection network must be the same type and have the same characteristics Note For a port type of IP additional ports added to an IP connection network can be any port that IP has been defined to use At least one additional port besides the IP port must be added for the connection network to be used Since the IP port is a pseudo port that always comes up when the node is initialized real ports that IP is defined on TR ATM FR must be added to the CN When at least one of these real ports is up the connection network link is assumed active When all of these real ports is down the connection network link is assumed to be inactive Parameter Limited Resource Timer Valid Values 1 to 216000 seconds Default Value 180 Description This parameter specifies the timer value associated with a limited resource Parameter DLCI number Valid Values 16 to 1007 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the DLCI number used by the router to connect to the frame relay network When the router initiates a connection to a link station on the LAN through the connection network it will use this DLCI number to connect to the frame relay network Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 175 APPN Configuration Commands Table 30 Configura
252. ame of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list link toremstn will show link station definitions APPN config gt act kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Configuring a Primary Multipoint SDLC Station y kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt set data sdlc 1 Config gt n 1 SDLC user configuration SDLC 1 Config gt set link role primary SDLC 1 Config gt set link type multipoint SDLC 1 Config gt list link will show link configuration SDLC 1 Config gt ex Config gt CTRL p reload Are you sure you want to reload the gateway Yes or No yes t 6 Config gt p appn APPN user configuration APPN config gt add port sdic APPN Port Interface number Default 0 0 1 Port name Max 8 characters SDLC001 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Maximum number of link stations 1 127 2 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y 68 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN The record has been written APPN config gt list port sd1c001 will show port definitions APPN config gt add link sd1c001 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters TOSTNC1 Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Station address 1 fe C1 Note C1 must match to the remote secondary st
253. ameter List Connection Network Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Shareable other protocol traffic Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether the ATM VC established for this CN TG may be shared with other higher level protocols in the router Note The following parameters are forward traffic parameters Parameter Forward Peak Cell Rate Valid Values 1 to 85 of line speed Default Value Taken from the port definition Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the cell transmission rate Parameter Forward Sustained Cell Rate Valid Values 1 to 85 of line speed Default Value Taken from the port definition Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the average cell transmission rate Parameter Forward Tagging Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description This parameter indicates that cells that are nonconforming to cell loss priority O traffic specification but are conforming to cell loss priority 1 traffic specification are marked and allowed into the ATM network Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 179 APPN Configuration Commands Table 31 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter QoS Valid Values CLASS _0 CLASS _1 CLASS 2 CLASS _ 3 CLASS 4 where CLASS_0 The unsp
254. ameter List Port Configuration continued Parameter Information Parameter Limited Resource PPP and FR over dial circuits only Valid Values Yes No Default Value If the dial circuit is dial on demand the default is Yes Otherwise the default is No Description This parameter specifies whether link stations on this port are a limited resource This value may be overridden on the link station definition Parameter Support bridged formatted frames Frame relay only Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether the frame relay port will support bridged formatted frames If you are configuring frame relay to support bridged format you will also need to configure a boundary node identifier Parameter Boundary node identifier frame relay only Valid Values X 0000 0000 0001 to X 7FFF FFFF FFFF Default Value X 4FFF 0000 0000 Description This parameter specifies the boundary node identifier MAC address The router uses this MAC address to recognize that the frame is a frame relay bridged frame destined for APPN Parameter Subnet visit count Valid Values 1 255 Default Value Default taken from the equivalent node level parameter Description This parameter specifies this port s default for the maximum number of subnetworks that a multi subnet session may traverse Note This question is asked only if the border node function is enabled on
255. ameter List Port Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Best Effort Indicator Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter indicates if a throughput guarantee is required on this SVC If the value of this parameter is yes then VCCs associated with this interface will be allocated based upon the available bandwidth Note The following parameters are forward traffic parameters Parameter Forward Traffic Peak Cell Rate Valid Values 1 85 of line speed Default Value Port s Default Effective Capacity 48 Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the cell transmission rate Parameter Forward Traffic Sustained Cell Rate Valid Values 1 85 of line speed Default Value Port s Default Effective Capacity 48 Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the average cell transmission rate You cannot specify this parameter if you are using a Best Effort connection Parameter Forward Traffic Tagging Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes Description This parameter indicates that cells that are nonconforming to cell loss priority O traffic specification but are conforming to cell loss priority 1 traffic specification are marked and allowed into the ATM network You cannot specify this parameter if you are using a Best Effort connection Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 131 APPN Configuration Command
256. amically traces a route tunnels Displays configured tunnels Exit Returns you to the previous command level See FExiting a Lower Level Use the cache command to display Syntax cache Example IPV6 gt cache Destination Usage Next hop Use the counters command to display the status of counters Syntax counters Example IPV6 gt counters Routing errors Count Type 0 Routing table overflow 0 Net unreachable 0 Bad subnet number 0 Bad net number 398 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 IPV6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Unhandled broadcast Unhandled anycast Unhandled directed broadcast Attempted forward of LL broadcast oooooo None Packets discarded through filter 0 IP multicasts accepted 0 IP input packet overflows Net Count ATM O 0 NHRPL TKR O TKR 1 0 FR O 0 PPP O 0 1P64 0 0 Dump routing tables Use the dump command to display the configured routing tables Syntax dump Example IPV6 gt dump Type Dest net Prefix Cost Age Next hop s Stat 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 128 100 30 1P64 0 IPV6 Routing table size 768 nets 79872 bytes 1 nets known 0 nets hidden 0 nets deleted 0 nets inactive 0 routes used internally 767 routes free Interface addresses Mcast Use the interface command to display addresses configured on the interface Syntax interface Example IPV6 gt interface Interface IPV6 Address Prefix len PPP O 1223 7 1234 8 1234 1234 1234 1234 5234 6
257. apter describes APPN and includes the following sections e Wha APPN What is APPN Advanced Peer to Peer networking APPN extends the SNA architecture by enabling Type 2 1 T2 1 nodes to communicate directly without requiring the services of a SNA host computer Peer to Peer Communications T2 1 nodes can activate connections with other T2 1 nodes and establish LU LU sessions with other nodes The relationship between a pair of T2 1 nodes is referred to as a peer relationship because either side can initiate communication Prior to APPN a T2 1 node could communicate directly with another T2 1 node but required the services of a centralized SNA host to locate its partner and any associated resources All routes between the two nodes were predefined APPN enhanced the T2 1 node function by e Requiring network resources to be defined only at the node where they are located e Distributing information about these resources throughout the network as needed e Dynamically generating routes between nodes using current information about the network s topology and the desired class of service APPN Node Types The APPN architecture allows four types of nodes in a network e APPN network nodes e APPN end nodes e Low entry networking LEN end nodes e PU 2 0 nodes supported by DLUR The router can be configured as an APPN network node that supports connections with all four node types The router cannot function as an end node fo
258. arameter Topology and routing services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the topology and routing services component Table 14 Configuration Parameter List Miscellaneous Traces Parameter Information Parameter Data link control transmissions and receptions Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will trace all XIDs and PIUs transmitted and received by the APPN node Parameter Filter the Data Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will filter the trace data according to the way you answer the following questions Parameter Truncate the data Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description If this parameter is enabled the APPN trace facility will truncate the trace data You will be asked to specify the ength to trace Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 119 APPN Configuration Commands Table 14 Configuration Parameter List Miscellaneous Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Length to trace Valid Values 1 3600 Default Value 100 Description This parameter specifies the number of bytes of trace data to accumulate
259. ard 1500 bytes of an Ethernet packet less the 2 byte length field used with DECnet circuit Circuits to which this data applies designated router Displays what this node believes to be the designated router for this area on this circuit There may be some transient disagreements when a new router starts up This normally will be the same for all routers on the circuit End nodes send all packets for destinations not on the local circuit to their designated router hello timer Hello timer for this circuit Router hello messages are sent this often on the circuit listen timer Amount of time designating how often router or end node hellos must be received from this adjacency on this circuit It is three times the hello timer set for this circuit on the adjacent machine Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 279 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands router priority Router priority for this circuit used in vying for designated router status router type Router type for this circuit standard phase IV with AMA or Bilingual maximum routers Maximum number of routers allowed on this circuit state Either ON or OFF In the volatile database the state will be ON if the circuit is enabled and is passing self test If the circuit has failed self test or the device is not present the state will be OFF In the permanent database this tells if DNA will try to enable the circuit executor argument Retrieves
260. arting Node Number Use the set node command to assign the starting node number for the router The router will AARP for this node but if it is already in use a new node will be chosen e Add a Zone Name You can add one or more zone names for each network in the internetwork You can add a zone name for a given network in any router connected to that network however only the seed router needs to contain the zone name information for a connected network Attached routers dynamically acquire the zone name from adjacent routers using the ZIP protocol Apple recommends that for a given network you choose the same seed router for the network number and the zone name The zone name cannot be configured for a network unless the network number is also configured To add a zone name for each network number use the AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration add zone name command AppleTalk over PPP There are two modes for AppleTalk over PPP full router and half router In full router mode the point to point network is visible to other AppleTalk routers In half router mode the point to point network is invisible to other routers but it still transmits AppleTalk routing information and data packets To set up your network for full router mode give each router on the PPP link a common network number a common zone name and a unique node number If you configure one end of the PPP link with a non zero network number you must also configure that end to ha
261. ask Force IETF The task force of the Internet Architecture Board IAB that is responsible for solving the short term engineering needs of the Internet Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX 1 The network protocol used to connect Novell s servers or any workstation or router that implements IPX with other workstations Although similar to the Internet Protocol IP IPX uses different packet formats and terminology 2 See also Xerox Network Systems XNS Internet Protocol IP A connectionless protocol that routes data through a network or interconnected networks IP acts as an intermediary between the higher protocol layers and the physical network However this protocol does not provide error recovery and flow control and does not guarantee the reliability of the physical network interoperability The capability to communicate execute programs or transfer data among various functional units in a way that requires the user to have little or no Knowledge of the unique characteristics of those units T intra area routing In Internet communications the routing of data within an area Inverse Address Resolution Protocol InNARP In the Internet suite of protocols the protocol used for locating a protocol address through the known hardware address In a frame relay context the data link connection identifier DLCI is synonymous with the known hardware address IPPN The interface that other protocols can use to
262. asts Topology database maintenance Topology awareness of CP CP sessions Randomized route computation Cached routing trees Safe storage of topology database X Garbage Collection Enhancements Connectivity 10 11 XxX XK KKK X x lt Connection network definition 12 Multiple transmission groups Parallel transmission groups Management services x Xx Xx Multiple domain support MDS Explicit focal point Implicit focal point Held alerts SSCP PU sessions with focal points X SNA MS problem diagnosis data in alerts x Xx Xx Xx x lt Notes 1 New mode names can be defined on the router using the Command Line interface These new mode names can be mapped to existing Class of Service COS definition names or to new COS definitions which may be defined using the Configuration tool 2 Limited resource link stations are supported for e connection network links 4 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN e X 25 SVC links e PPP links running over ISDN V 25bis or V 34 e Frame relay links running over ISDN e ATM SVC When the router activates a TG to an adjacent node it negotiates with that node the maximum message size that can be sent across the TG If a BIND message is larger than the negotiated message size the router segments the BIND Segmentation only occurs if the adjacent node is capable of reassembling the BIND The router supports BIND reassembly A session level security feature can be
263. at any given time Parameter Receive window size Valid Values 1 to 127 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of unacknowledged sequentially numbered l format LPDUs that the LLC link station can receive from the remote link station RW is advertised in SNA XID frames and IEEE 802 2 XID frames The XID receiver should set its effective TW to a value less than or equal to the value of the received RW to avoid overruns Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 169 APPN Configuration Commands Table 27 Configuration Parameter List Modify LLC Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Inactivity timer Ti Valid Values 1 to 254 seconds Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description A link station uses Ti to detect an inoperative condition in either the remote link station or in the transmission media If an LPDU is not received in the time interval specified by Ti an S format command LPDU with the poll bit set is transmitted to solicit remote link station status Recovery is then based on the reply timer T1 Parameter Reply timer T1 Valid Values 1 to 254 half seconds Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description A link station uses T1 to detect a failure to receive a required acknowledgment or response f
264. at is described in the NHRP draft See attempt shortcuts parameter on page e All ATM attached routers on the routed path should support NHRP for the optimal benefit although the 2210 can still operate and provide shortcuts in a mixed network Performance Characteristics NHRP is used during initial contact from a source device to a destination Once a shortcut VC has been established NHRP is not involved in actual data transfer Safeguards ensure that NHRP traffic is not retried for every packet Also the IBM implementation provides an option for NHRP shortcuts to be requested only when traffic to a certain destination exceeds a configurable data rate threshold This can prevent for example the establishment of virtual circuits that would only be used for one SNMP trap frame that is generated by an IP host NHRP operation does not affect the performance of the router fastpath and will not significantly affect the slowpath When shortcuts are available the performance is improved by the elimination of extraneous hops over the ATM network Also the performance of intermediate routers that are bypassed by NHRP shortcuts should be improved as they handle less traffic Note If a configuration does not include a 1577 interface that is the router is configured only for ELANs shortcut VCs can be established to the router only from clients that support the IBM extensions This limitation can be avoided simply by defining a 1577 interfa
265. ation Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list link tostncl will show link station definitions APPN config gt add link sd1c001 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters TOSTNC2 Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Station address 1 fe C2 Note C2 must match to the remote secondary station Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list link tostnc2 will show link station definitions APPN config gt act kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Configuring a Secondary point to point Multi APPN link station kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt set data sdic 1 Config gt n 1 SDLC user configuration SDLC 1 C
266. ault Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about messages exchanged between processes in the APPN network node including the queuing and receipt of such messages Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 103 APPN Configuration Commands Table 10 Configuration Parameter List Node Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Locking Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about locks that were obtained and released on processes in the APPN network node Parameter Miscellaneous tower activities Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about miscellaneous activities within the APPN network node Parameter I O to and from the system Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about the flow of messages entering and exiting the APPN network node Parameter Storage management Valid Values Yes No Default Value N
267. be deleted Parameter Station name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of the station to be deleted Syntax delete map This command removes a client IP address to LU name mapping You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets 206 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 47 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E Map Parameter Information Parameter Client IP address or Network address Valid Values Any valid IP address Default Value 0 0 0 0 Description This parameter specifies the IP address of the client or network map definition to be deleted Parameter Client IP address or Network address Mask Valid Values Any valid IP address mask Default Value 0 0 0 0 Description This parameter specifies the IP address mask of the client or network map definition to be deleted Parameter Delete all entries for this client Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether the entire pool or a specific name is to be deleted Parameter Pool name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Secon
268. bes some of the NHRP related configuration parameters and their recommended usage See ENH command syntax command parameters valid values and default ae Chapter 11 Using NHRP 353 Using NHRP NHRP Auto Configuration NHRP is enabled by default if IP is present in the box It can be disabled by entering the disable NHRP Sea ak lale from the NHRP config gt prompt See g for additional information When using an existing configuration file NHRP is enabled by default if it was not previously configured The configuration file will be automatically updated at runtime to create NHRP shortcut interfaces You need to save this updated configuration file and reboot in order for the NHRP client to use LANE shortcuts Exclude Lists Configuration allows you to create a list of protocol addresses and associated masks that represent two types of devices e Next hop routers that do not contain an NHRP server function e Destination devices to which shortcut VCs should not be allowed Next hop Routers The exclude list can be used to identify routers that are on the routed path but do not support NHRP server function The server responds to a Next Hop Resolution Request by providing the ATM address of the next hop router when all of the following are true e The next hop address is different from the destination address e The router interface to the next hop router is either an ATM classical IP or an ELAN subnet e The next hop
269. between media attached stations 2 IEEE 802 5 network with a ring topology that passes tokens from one attaching ring station node to another 3 See also ocal area network LAN token ring network 1 A ring network that allows unidirectional data transmission between data stations by a token passing procedure such that the transmitted data return to the transmitting station T 2 A network that uses a ring topology in which tokens are passed in a circuit from node to node A node that is ready to send can capture the token and insert data for transmission topology In communications the physical or logical arrangement of nodes in a network especially the relationships among nodes and the links between them topology database update TDU A message about a new or changed link or node that is broadcast among APPN network nodes to maintain the network topology database which is fully replicated in each network node A TDU contains information that identifies the following e The sending node e The node and link characteristics of various resources in the network e The sequence number of the most recent update for each of the resources described trace 1 A record of the execution of a computer program It exhibits the sequences in which the instructions were executed A 2 For data links a record of the frames and bytes transmitted or received transceiver transmitter receiver In LANs a physical devic
270. bled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about module entry and exit information from the half session component 112 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 12 Configuration Parameter List Module Entry and Exit Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter LUA RUI Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about module entry and exit information from the LUA RUI component Parameter Node operator facility Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about module entry and exit information from the node operator facility component Parameter Presentation services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about module entry and exit information from the presentation services component Parameter Rapid transport protocol Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to
271. ce model A model that describes the general principles of the Open Systems Interconnection as well as the purpose and the hierarchical arrangement of its seven layers T origin An external logical unit LU or application program from which a message or other data originates See also destination orphan circuit A non configured circuit whose availability is learned dynamically P pacing 1 A technique by which a receiving component controls the rate of transmission of a sending component to prevent overrun or congestion 2 See also flow control receive pacing send pacing session level pacing and virtual route VR pacing packet In data communication a sequence of binary digits including data and control signals that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole The data control signals and possibly error control information are arranged in a specific format I packet internet groper PING 1 In Internet communications a program used in TCP IP networks to test the ability to reach destinations by sending the destinations an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request and waiting for a reply 2 In communications a test of reachability Glossary 461 packet loss ratio The probability that a packet will not reach its destination or not reach it within a specified time packet mode operation Synonym for packet switching packet switching 1 The process of routing and transferrin
272. ce on the router Examples of NHRP Configurations The following paragraphs give examples of NHRP configurations NHRP in an RFC 1577 Classic IP Environment with All Devices NHRP capable In this picture the NHRP clients use RFC 1577 connections to communicate with the router They use NHRP protocol to learn from the NHRP server about each other s ATM addresses Then they establish a direct virtual circuit between them for IP traffic Chapter 11 Using NHRP 347 Using NHRP Device 1 Device 2 NHRP Server NHRP Server IP Router IP Router Classical IP subnet 9 1 2 0 S Classical IP subnet 9 1 3 0 _ Classical IP subnet IP Host IP Host NHRP Client NHRP Client Shortcut VC Figure 28 NHRP in a Classic IP Environment NHRP in a Classic IP Environment with non NHRP Device This example shows how NHRP can be used between two 1577 devices when one of them does not support NHRP Here Device2 provides the NHRP client with the ATM address of the non NHRP device and the client can establish a shortcut for traffic to the non NHRP host However when traffic flows from the non NHRP device it flows on the routed path to Device2 then Device2 acts as an NHRP client and establishes a shortcut to the destination Device 1 Device 2 NHRP Server NHRP Server IP Router IP Router Classical IP subnet 9 1 2 0 Classical IP subnet 9 1 1 0
273. cepts This section contains a brief description of DNA IV terminology Addressing Each node has a 16 bit node address which is the same for all interfaces on that node An address consists of 2 fields 6 bits of area number and 10 bits of node number Addresses are printed in decimal with a period separating the area and the node such as 1 7 is node 7 in area 1 If no area is given area 1 is assumed Any address in the range 1 1 to 63 1023 is legal Both nodes and areas should be numbered starting from 1 with few if any gaps This is because the maximum node number and the maximum area numbers are configuration options and control the size of many of the routing data structures There is no direct correlation between addresses and physical cabling Routes are computed to nodes not wires Ethernet Data Link Addressing Each Ethernet interface is set to the same 48 bit physical address which is the concatenation of a 32 bit prefix AA 00 04 00 and the 16 bit DNA IV node address The node address is byte swapped to convert from PDP11 to Ethernet byte order Thus DNA IV node 1 1 has Ethernet Address AA 00 04 00 01 04 Multicast not broadcast is also used in routing The three multicast addresses used by DNA IV are AB 00 00 02 00 00 AB 00 00 03 00 00 and AB 00 00 04 00 00 802 5 Token Ring Data Link Addressing The implementation of DNA over IEEE 802 5 Token Ring conforms to the DECnet Digital Networking Architecture Phase IV
274. characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing mode name for an existing network of which this router network node is to become a member using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new mode names Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the Mode name for the Mode name to COS name mapping being defined See 9 for additional information about Mode name to COS mapping Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 183 APPN Configuration Commands Table 33 Configuration Parameter List APPN COS Mode Name to COS Name Mapping Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter COS name required Valid Values The name of a previously defined COS definition selected from the list of COS names defined for this router network node Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the COS Name to be associated with the Mode name being defined for this mode name to COS name mapping Parameter Session level pacing Command Line option size Valid Values 1 to 63 Default Value 7 Description This parameter specifies the session level pacing Command Line option size This parameter has different definitions depending upon the type of pacing used e For fixed session level pacing The session level pacing Command Line option size parameter specifies the receive pacing Command Line
275. cify this value for individual routing lists when and if you configure individual routing lists None The LU name of the destination resource is compared to the LU name s configured in the routing list s The routing list with the best LU name match is selected and the next hop CP name s from that configured list are placed in the dynamically built list This is the only source of possible next hop CP names when list dynamics is set to none Note that if an LU name does not appear in a routing list the LU will not be reachable by the extended border node when this list dynamics parameter is set to none Limited This augments the list of next hop CP names obtained from the best match configured routing list with CP names obtained from the extended border node s knowledge of existing resources and topology These additional CP names are obtained by e Adding all native extended border nodes e Adding all non native adjacent extended border nodes and network nodes with NETIDs that match the NETID of the destination resource e Examining the table of resources already known to the extended border node due to the receipt of a find or found GDS variable These resources are cached in the Directory Services database For any entries where the Netid of the cached LU is the same as the destination of the current search add the NNs of the cached LU to the list of next hop CPs None of these dynamically obtained next hop CP names are permane
276. cket A packet fragment recognized as an ESIS packet was received Received packet with bad checksum An ESIS packet with a bad checksum was received Received packet with bad version An ESIS packet with a bad or unsupported version was received Received packet with bad type An ESIS packet with a bad or unsupported type field was received No iob available to send hello An attempt to send an ESIS hello failed because of a lack of system I O buffers Cannot send hello due to packet handler error An ESIS hello could not be sent because of a handler error Sent hello An ESIS hello was sent out an interface Received packet with bad header An ESIS hello packet with a bad holding time or received field was received Received hello with nsap An ESIS hello packet with a bad NSAP or an NSAP that over ran the field was received Received hello packet with bad option An ESIS CLNP data packet was received with a bad option parameter Received hello An ESIS hello packet was received on the interface Received hello with unsupported domain source An ESIS hello packet was received from an unspecified domain source No resources to install route An ESIS hello packet was received but there were no resources to install the route Received hello with conflicting route An ESIS hello packet was received but could not be entered into the database A previously defined static or dynamic route in the database conflicts with the route in the
277. client specifies a specific pool name any LU from the pool may be selected There is always at least one implicit workstation pool This pool is referred to as the global default pool The name of this Pool is defined via the TN3270E config gt set command LUs must be added to this pool via the TN3270E config gt add lu or TN3270E config gt add implicit pool command Multiple TN3270E Ports This enhancement allows users to define multiple TCP ports for the TN3270E Server to listen on This support allows clients to specify the SNA resource they want using a port number When the ports are added the user can define an LU pool to be associated with that port number Clients that connect to this port and do not specify an LU name will be assigned an LU from this Pool TN3270E Server ports can also be defined for a particular type of TN3270 Server Base or TN3270E support Since some base TN3270 clients do not negotiate properly with TN3270E Servers a port can now be defined for these clients to connect to There is always at least one port defined for use by the server This port is specified via the TN3270E config gt set command The Pool associated with this port is always the global default pool TN3270E Server Client IP Address to LU Name Mapping The TN3270E Server Client IP Address to LU Name Mapping function provides a mechanism for administrators to control client access to the TN3270E Server s resources ie LUs Ma
278. connections configuration 1 If you are configuring APPN using a DLSw port a Enable bridging on the node b Enable DLSw on the node c Define the DLSw port with a locally administered MAC address for DLSw 2 Select the ports over which to initiate connections to adjacent nodes The following are the DLC port types supported by APPN e Token ring LAN port e Ethernet LAN port e Frame relay serial port e PPP serial port e X 25 e SDLC e DLSw e IP port 3 Enable APPN routing on APPN ports with the enable APPN routing on this port parameter Note Since Service Any is enabled by default the node accepts any request for a connection that it receives from another node 4 Define APPN link stations on the selected DLC ports for the adjacent nodes to which this network node may initiate a connection 28 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Note Link stations do not have to be defined on every port only those over which you want to initiate connections to adjacent nodes 5 Enable the APPN network node 6 Configure the following parameters for the APPN network node e Network ID e Control point name 7 Define the XID number for subarea connections parameter for the APPN network node optional 8 Accept all other defaults 9 Optionally do the following e Modify High Performance Routing parameters e Configure Dependent LU Requester e Define connection networks e Define new COS names or mode name mappings e Tune
279. control data H header 1 System defined control information that precedes user data 2 The portion of a message that contains control information for the message such as one or more destination fields name of the originating station input sequence number character string indicating the type of message and priority level for the message heap memory The amount of RAM used to dynamically allocate data structures Hello A protocol used by a group of cooperating trusting routers to allow them to discover minimal delay routes hello message 1 A message sent periodically to establish and test reachability between routers or between routers and hosts 2 In the Internet suite of protocols a message defined by the Hello protocol as an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP heuristic Pertaining to exploratory methods of problem solving in which solutions are discovered by evaluation of the progress made toward the final result high level data link control HDLC In data communication the use of a specified series of bits to control data links in accordance with the International Standards for HDLC ISO 3309 Frame Structure and ISO 4335 Elements of Procedures high performance routing HPR An addition to the Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN architecture that enhances data routing performance and reliability especially when using high speed links hop 1 In APPN a portion of a route that has no intermediate no
280. cription This parameter specifies the amount of shared memory that APPN will use for buffers You can allow APPN to have a 4K RU size by setting maximum shared memory to at least 1 Megabyte and setting percent of APPN shared memory used for buffers to a sufficiently large value to allow at least 1 Megabyte of memory to be available to the buffer manager This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program and from talk 6 Parameter Maximum cached directory entries Valid Values 0 to 65 535 Default 4000 Description This parameter specifies the number of directory entries to be stored or cached by the router network node If a directory entry for a node is cached the router does not need to broadcast a search request to locate the node This reduces the time it takes to initiate sessions with the node This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program and from talk 6 Syntax set traces Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 101 APPN Configuration Commands You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 9 Configuration Parameter List Trace Setup Questions Parameter Information Parameter Turn all trace flags off Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables trace flags Parameter
281. cs Examples of NHRP eee NHRP Implementation Configuration Parameters Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP Accessing the NHRP Configuration Process NHRP Configuration Commands Enable NHRP Disable NHRP Advanced Config List 2 NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Add f na Delete Change List Set Accessing the NHRP Monitoring Process Contents 305 305 305 311 313 314 316 317 317 323 329 329 330 331 331 333 333 334 334 336 336 338 338 339 340 340 341 341 342 342 343 343 343 345 345 346 347 347 352 353 359 359 359 359 360 360 360 361 361 362 363 364 365 368 vii NHRP Monitoring Commands 2 2 2 369 Box Status Suna ee oe eo ks Se Se A wh ee IO Interface Status s s s e soor di doa ee 46 Ee a ew aoe ce 4 B69 Statistics amp ace s 4 amp a ao Soe Se aia we amp Ae 4 amp e 369 Cache a ee dee et ee a me Se ee oe Se a Server _purge i cache eo Se de GR ee ee OFT MIB eo hese oe eo ee eee ee tk Or LANE Shortcuts ee eee a ee ee ae SE Gk Se arte ore CONFIG Parameters 2 we ee ee ee ee BB Reset Roe oa eee we bee we Se Ge oak we Get aon NHRP Packet Tracing So ke ee BAY be poe od a A Chapter 13 Using IP Version 6 oe on Oe Se ee ee or Se Oe IPv6 Overv
282. cuits additional constraints should be configured for each defined filter This ensures that the selection criteria specified in those filters permit the required distinction to be made between incoming calls Note If a DA circuit should incorrectly connect to a static circuit the architecture makes no attempt to identify the condition or rectify the problem The usual 300 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Templates Using OSI DECnet V initialization failure may be generated on the static side due to non response to its link initialization queries The static SVC is then subsequently cleared A template is a collection of user configurable parameters for outgoing calls It sets the parameters so that the circuit on the remote router accepts the incoming calls The parameters defined in a template include the calling DTE address and the call user data You can define only one template per outgoing static routing circuit Link Initialization Link initialization is a procedure proprietary to Digital Equipment Corporation and is not part of OSI Link initialization immediately follows SVC establishment It is used primarily to establish the DECnet relationship with a remote system on a point to point link On receipt of an Initialization XID message verification can be performed on two levels on a circuit basis or on a system basis Basically the process of verification compares the incoming verification data against data
283. d Nonsecure WAN ATM best effort Public switched network WAN ATM reserved Public switched network For IP Campus Nonsecure WAN Public switched network For all other Nonsecure Description This parameter specifies the security TG characteristic for all link stations defined on this port The security TG characteristic indicates the level of security protection associated with the TG If security attributes other than the architecturally defined ones are needed one of the user defined TG characteristics may be used to specify additional values 142 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 20 Configuration Parameter List Port Default TG Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Propagation delay Valid Values Minimum LAN less than 480 microseconds Telephone between 48 and 49 152 milliseconds Packet switched between 49 152 and 245 76 milliseconds Satellite greater than 245 76 milliseconds maximum Default Value For ATM SVCs and ATM PVCs Campus ATM best effort Telephone Campus ATM reserved Minimum LAN WAN ATM best effort Packet switched WAN ATM reserved Telephone For IP Campus Telephone WAN Packet switched Description This parameter specifies the propagation delay TG characteristic for all link stations defined on this port The propagation delay TG characteristic specifies the approximate range for the length of time that it
284. d Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP use the same well known port number in all TCP IP implementations 5 An abstraction used by transport protocols to distinguish among multiple destinations within a host machine 6 Synonymous with socket port number In Internet communications the identification of an application entity to the transport service private branch exchange PBX A private telephone exchange for transmission of calls to and from the public telephone network problem determination The process of determining the source of a problem for example a program component machine failure telecommunication facilities user or contractor installed programs or equipment environmental failure such as a power loss or user error program temporary fix PTF A temporary solution or bypass of a problem diagnosed by IBM in a current unaltered release of the program protocol 1 Aset of semantic and syntactic rules that determine the behavior of functional units in achieving communication I 2 In Open Systems Interconnection architecture a set of semantic and syntactic rules that determine the behavior of entities in the same layer in performing communication functions T 3 In SNA the meanings of and the sequencing rules for requests and responses used for managing the network transferring data and synchronizing the states of network components Synonymous with line control discipline and line discipline S
285. d and is not meant as a reference Protocol Comparison Table The following table compares the protocols Table 75 Comparison Protocols ISO OSI Model TCP IP IPX Other 7 Application 6 Telnet FTP TFTP Presentation 5 SGMP Session 4 Transport TCP UDP PXP SPX 3 Network IP RIP BGP ICMP RIP SAP 2 Data Link Local Net HDLC 1 Physical Key to Protocols Table zdis a key to the protocols Table 76 Protocol Key Protocol BGP FTP TFTP ICMP IP IPX RIP SGMP SNMP TCP Description Border Gateway Protocol An IP external routing protocol File Transfer Protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol Internet Control Message Protocol Used to send network level error and control messages between routers and hosts Internet protocol IP is a widely used standard transport protocol IP is the 2210 routers basic protocol IP leaves some error checking to higher level end to end protocols Internet Packet Exchange Protocol Routing Information Protocol Routing protocols are used to determine network topology and data paths RIP is the most common IP routing protocol Simple Gateway Monitoring Protocol Used to obtain statistics in machine readable form from 2210 routers Simple Network Management Protocol Used to obtain statistics in machine readable form from 2210 routers Transport Control Protocol An end to end host to host protocol that is often used with IP Useful for sen
286. d as Pool name Explicit name is used as long as the incoming name has been defined Explicit LU or Pool name specified No Pool name defined on port Explicit name is used as long as the incoming name has been defined No resource name specified Pool name defined Name defined on port is used No resource name specified lt DEFLT gt specified as the Pool name Global default Pool is used No resource name specified No resource name specified Connection request rejected TN3270E Server and DDDLU If prompted by VTAM the TN3270E Server function will use DDDLU to create its local LUs in VTAM Instead of sending all of the Reply PSID s when the ACTPU is received the server will wait until the LU actually needs to be defined The LU definition will occur when a TN3270 client connects in and needs an LU that has not been defined to VTAM Support for Subarea SNA Connections from the TN3270E Server to the Connecting to a host for establishing an dependent LU LU session can be accomplished using a traditional subarea connection or using an APPN connection Chapter1 APPN 23 APPN SSCP PU VTAM Sessions i in conjunction with the APPN DLUS DLUR function The APPN DLUS DLUR solution allows the node to appear to VTAM as multiple PU devices each supporting up to 253 dependent LUs A node wishing to provide TN3270E Server services over a subarea connection for more than 253 clients si
287. d to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the LU name or pool name to be deleted Syntax delete port This command deletes port definitions You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 207 APPN Configuration Commands in square brackets Table 48 Configuration Parameter List Delete TN3270E Port Parameter Information Parameter Port number Valid Values 1 to 65536 Default Value none Description This parameter specifies the port number to be added Syntax list al This command lists a TN3270E configuration Monitoring APPN This section describes how to monitor APPN It includes the following sections Accessing the APPN Monitoring Commands Use the following procedure to access the APPN monitoring commands This process gives you access to an APPN s monitoring process At the OPCON prompt enter talk 5 After you enter the talk 5 command the GWCON prompt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again Enter protocol APPN For example talk 5 protocol APPN 208 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Monitoring Commands APPN Monitoring Commands This section describes the APP
288. data from accounting records stored in the router s local memory Notes 1 You can enable collection of active intermediate session data session counters and session characteristics in SNMP MIB variables explicitly or implicitly To enable collection explicitly set the collect intermediate session information parameter to yes 40 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN To enable collection implicitly set create intermediate session records to yes This setting will override the setting of collect intermediate session information Configuration changes to the APPN accounting parameters made using the talk 6 interface will not take effect until the router or the APPN function on the router is restarted You can make changes interactively however by issuing SNMP set commands to modify the APPN MIB variables associated with the configuration parameters Refer to the Software User s Guide for a list of these MIB variables Data on intermediate session RSCVs is obtained by examining the BIND request used to activate a session between two LUs RSCV data is not collected for sessions that have already been established because the BIND information for those sessions is not available Intermediate session data is not collected for HPR sessions since intermediate sessions are not part of HPR If the router contains an ISR HPR boundary intermediate session data is collected when it flows across that boundary DLUR Retry Algorithm
289. ddress is configured Address Prefix Indicates the destination NSAP prefix Interface number Indicates the interface number over which the PVC is configured Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 315 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Disable DTE address Indicates the DTE address of the X 25 network to which you are connecting or the DLCI of Frame Relay network to which you are connecting routing circuit routing circuit name Removes an X 25 routing circuit that was established with add routing circuit from the permanent database Example delete routing circuit p_system2 subnet intfc Removes a subnet that was previously configured with the set subnet command Intfc indicates the interface number of the configured subnet Example delete subnet 1 template femplate name Removes the template for a static outgoing routing circuit by which the router generates outgoing X 25 messages from the permanent database Example delete template x25 5 virtual circuit Removes an X 25 or a Frame Relay virtual circuit that was previously configured with the set virtual circuit command Example delete virtual circuit Interface number 0 DTE address Interface number Interface number over which the virtual circuit is configured DTE address DTE address of the X 25 network to which you are connecting or the DLCI of Frame Relay network to which you are connecting Use the disable command to
290. ddress prefixes for ISs located in an external domain L2 Link State Update pseudonode The L2 pseudonode LSU is multicast over the interface and propagated to all L2 ISs located outside the subnetwork Any L2 non pseudonode IS located on the same subnetwork that receives the LSU relays the LSU to all L2s located outside the subnetwork The L2 IS places the following information in its LSU e Source ID e IS type L2 e System IDs and metrics for non pseudonode ISs located on the same subnetwork Attached and Unattached L2 IS An attached L2 IS is a router that knows of other areas An unattached L2 IS is a router that does not know of any areas other than its own When routing an unattached L2 IS routes packets to the closest attached L2 IS Routing Tables An L1 only IS uses one routing table the level 1 routing table An L2 only IS contains three routing tables an L2 area address routing table an L2 internal metric reachable address prefix routing table and an L2 external metric reachable address prefix routing table An L1 L2 IS contains the L1 routing table and all L2 routing tables The routing table entries are built from information in the link state database L1 Routing The following summarizes L1 routing 1 An L1 IS receives a packet and compares the area address portion of the destination address in the header of the packet to the set of area addresses in the router 2 If the packet is destined for the router s
291. de Y es N o Y High performance routing Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2048 2048 Maximum number of link stations 1 976 512 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 100 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls 0 100 0 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 Support bridged formatted frames Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written nada207 APPN config gt add link APPN Station Port name for the link station fr004 Station name Max 8 characters tonn Activate link automatically Y es N o Y DLCI number for link 16 1007 16 Adjacent node type APPN network node 1 APPN end node or Unknown node type 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 1 0 High performance routing Y es N o Y Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Chapter 1 APPN 73 APPN Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written nada207 APPN config gt act nada207 APPN config gt exit nada207 Config gt write Config Save Using bank B and config number 2 Configuring APPN Over Frame Relay B
292. de in domain B area 5 Configuring DNA IV The DNA IV protocol runs over Token Ring Frame Relay Ethernet PPP Token Ring ATM LAN Emulation clients Ethernet LAN Emulation clients and X 25 interfaces The following sections describe the procedures for configuring the DNA IV protocol to work over Token Ring and X 25 interfaces Note When operating in mixed DNA IV and DNA V networks all DNA IV configuring and monitoring must be done from the process described in this chapter DNA IV and DNA V Algorithm Considerations DNA IV uses a distance vector routing algorithm DNA V can use either a distance vector or a link state routing algorithm The algorithm that the bridging router selects is according to what protocol is enabled and disabled and any combinations that can result from these two protocols See J Table 57 DNA IV and DNA V Algorithm Considerations DECnet IV Status OSI DNA V Status Algorithm Selected Enabled Disabled Distance vector automatically Disabled Enabled Link state automatically Enabled Enabled Use the set algorithm command to configure this information into SRAM Configuring DNA IV For Token Ring The procedure to run the DNA IV protocol over 802 5 Token Ring TR involves commands from the DNA IV and Token Ring configuration processes 1 From the OPCON prompt enter the configuration process talk 6 Config gt 2 Enter list device to see the interface numbers for the Token Ring interfaces
293. de update 01 FF represents a pseudonode update for that circuit number The second byte represents the LSP number This number is attached to the packet when the data is contained in more than one packet Lifetime Indicates the amount of time in seconds that router will maintain the LSP Sequence Indicates the sequence number of the LSP Checksum Indicates the checksum value of the LSP Flags Indicates a one octet value that reflects the flag field of the LSP The eight bits are broken down as follows Bit8 Indicates the P flag When set 1 the issuing IS supports the optional Partition Repair function Bits 7 4 Indicate the ATT flag When set 1 the issuing IS is attached to other areas using one of the following the Default Metric bit 4 the Delay Metric bit 5 the Expense Metric bit 6 or the Error Metric bit 7 Bit 3 Indicates the LSPDBOL flag When set 1 an LSP database overload has occurred An LSP with this bit set is not used by the decision process to calculate routes to another through the originating system Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 339 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 L2 Summary L1 Update Bits 2 1 Indicate the IS Type flag When set to the following values designates the type of IS router level 1 or level 2 Value Description 0 Unused 1 Bit 1 set Level 1 IS 2 Unused 3 Bits 1 and 2 set Level 2 IS Cost Indicates the cost of routing
294. der node Non native Adjacent node is not part of the extended border node s topology subnetwork Negotiable Adjacent node may or may not be in the same topology subnetwork depending upon how the adjacent node is defined The adjacent node is in the extended border node s topology subnetwork unless the adjacent node s corresponding link definition is one of e Non native e Negotiable and the adjacent node has a different network name e Negotiable and the adjacent node has defined the link as non native Add link If extended border node is enabled the same two additional prompts are presented when you invoke the add link menu item as were previously presented under add port Subnetwork visit count and adjacent subnetwork affiliation are the same concept as defined at the port level They are initialized to the corresponding port setting when a link is first configured You change the value here if you want different links to have different values even though they are on the same port Add Routing List s Note Routing lists are not supported for 2210 12x models A configured routing list allows you to explicitly define one or more possible next hop CPs for one or more destination resources LUs A wildcard character may be used when defining the LU names to reduce the amount of configured data You can also vary some of the node level defaults for a given routing list You can define multiple routing lists Typically a
295. des It consists of only a single transmission group connecting adjacent nodes 2 To the routing layer the logical distance between two nodes in a network hop count 1 A metric or measure of distance between two points 2 In Internet communications the number of routers that a datagram passes through on its way to its destination 3 In SNA a measure of the number of links to be traversed in a path to a destination Glossary 455 host In the Internet suite of protocols an end system The end system can be any workstation it does not have to be a mainframe hub intelligent A wiring concentrator such as the IBM 8260 that provides bridging and routing functions for LANs with different cables and protocols hysteresis The amount the temperature must change past the set alert threshold before the alert condition is cleared l frame Information frame information I frame A frame in format used for numbered information transfer input output channel In a data processing system a functional unit that handles transfer of data between internal and peripheral equipment I A Integrated Digital Network Exchange IDNX A processor integrating voice data and image applications It also manages the transmission resources and connects to multiplexers and network management support systems It allows integration of equipment from different vendors integrated services digital network ISDN A digital end t
296. destination node or Direct if the destination node is directly connected to the interface Clear Counters Counters Dump The clear counters command clears all cache usage counters and packet overflow counters Syntax clear counters Use the counters command to display the number of packet overflows on each network that sends and receives AppleTalk Phase 2 packets This command displays the number of times the AppleTalk Phase 2 forwarder input queue was full when packets were received from the specified network Syntax cou nters Example counters AP2 Input Packet Overflows Net Count FR O 0 Eth 0 4 PPP O 22 Use the dump command to obtain routing table information about the interfaces on the router that forwards AppleTalk Phase 2 packets Note dump interface displays the part of the overall network and zone information that is visible on that interface Syntax dump Example dump Dest Net Cost State Next hop Zone 10 19 0 Dir 0 0 Ethertalk Sales 40 49 1 Good 10 13 Marketing CustomerSer TokenTalk 20 29 2 Sspct 10 13 Fuchsia Backbone Engineering MKTING 3 entries You can also use the dump command with a specific interface to display the routes that are visible on that interface You can use this feature to make sure filters are configured correctly because it shows whether or not filtered zones or networks are visible to an interface Chapter 4 Configuring and Monitoring AppleTalk
297. diate nodes where they are checked for bit errors A VINES IP packet can contain up to 1500 bytes including the network layer header and all higher layer protocol headers and data Service and Client Nodes The VINES network consists of service nodes and client nodes A service node provides address resolution and routing services to the client nodes A client node is a physical neighbor on the VINES network All routers are service nodes A Banyan node can be a service node or client node Each service node has a 32 bit network address and a 16 bit subnetwork address The IBM 2210 has a configurable network address This address identifies the Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 233 Using VINES router as a service network node for Vines Banyan has assigned the range30800000 to 309FFFFF to IBM for use in its routers This router uses the range 30900000 to 3097FFFF Note It is extremely important that no two routers be assigned the same network address The network address for a Banyan service node is the 32 bit hexadecimal serial number of the service node The subnetwork address for all service nodes is 1 The network address for each client node is generally the network address of the service node on the same network However if a client node is on a LAN that has more than one service node it is assigned the network address of the service node that responds first to the client node s address assignment request The subnetwork addres
298. dify circuit specifiers global arguments data link modules or nodes in the volatile DNA database Syntax set circuit executor node For a description of the options for these arguments see Define Use the show command to show the status of the volatile database and volatile nodes in the routing database Syntax show area specifier node specifier 274 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands area specifier argument Examines the status of the volatile area routing database This lets you find out what areas are reachable and what the routes are to various areas The options for the area specifiers include the following active areas Provides information on those areas which are currently reachable all areas Provides information on all areas up to the executor maximum area area Provides information on the specified area If the area is not provided you will be prompted for it known areas Provides information on those areas which are currently reachable The following items are the subcommand options you select from after you enter the show command and the area specifier characteristics Shows the current state of the specified area The same as summary status Provides detailed information on the specified areas including cost and hops summary Shows the current state of the specified areas This is the default Example show
299. ding streams of data Uses checksums acknowledgments and timeouts to ensure the correct delivery and sequence of data Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 433 Comparison of Protocols 434 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Appendix B Packet Sizes This appendix discusses the sizes of packets for the various networks and protocols supported Included are the following sections e General Issues e Network Specific Size Limits e Protocol Specific Size Limits e Changing Maximum Packet Sizes General Issues For the purposes of this discussion the packets that the routers handle consist of user data and header information The amount of user data within a packet is limited by the amount of header information on the packet The amount of header information depends on at least e The network types over which the packet must travel e The protocols in use on these networks The following factors affect the size of the packet contents e Length of the Data Link header information that the current network type and interface require the packet to have e Length of the trailer information if any that the current network type and interface require the packet to have On any given network the sum of the maximum data size together with header and trailer sizes will equal the network s maximum packet size When routing between networks of different maximum packet size fragmentation of the packet may result Networ
300. disable those features previously enabled using the enable command Syntax disable osi routing circuit subnet osi Disables the OSI protocol on the router routing circuit routing circuit name Disables the specified routing circuit Use the add routing circuit command to set up routing circuits subnet interface Disables the OSI protocol on the specified subnet interface 316 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Enable List DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Example disable subnet 0 Use the enable command to enable the OSI protocol or an OSI subnet Syntax enable osi routing circuit subnet osi Enables the OSI protocol on the router routing circuit routing circuit name Enables the specified routing circuit Use the add routing circuit command to set up routing circuits Example enable routing circuit p_system2 subnet interface Enables the OSI protocol on the specified subnet interface Example enable subnet 0 Use the list command to display the current configuration of the OSI protocol Syntax list adjacencies algorithm alias filter DEC configuration only globals password phaseivpfx prefix address routing circuits DEC configuration only subnets templates DEC configuration only timers virtual circuits adjacencies Displays all statically configured ES adjacencies Example Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 317 DECnet V
301. displayed in response to a command defaults for an option are enclosed in brackets immediately following the option For example Media UTP STP UTP In this example the media defaults to UTP unless you specify STP Keyboard key combinations are indicated in text in the following ways e Ctrl P e Ctrl The key combination Ctrl indicates that you should press the Ctrl key and the hyphen simultaneously In certain circumstances this key combination changes the command line prompt Names of keyboard keys are indicated like this Enter Variables that is names used to represent data that you define are denoted by italics For example File Name filename ext IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotocol Router Publications xxii The following list shows the books that support the IBM 2210 Information updates and corrections To keep you informed of engineering changes clarifications and fixes that were implemented after the books were printed refer to the IBM 2210 home pages at http www networking ibm com 220 220prod htm1 Operations and Network Management SC30 3681 This book explains how to MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 e Configure monitor and use the IBM Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services software shipped with the router e Use the Multiprotocol Routing Services command line router user interface to configure and monitor the network interfaces and link layer protocols shipped with the router C30 3992
302. djacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node or Unknown node type 2 LEN end node 0 Solicit SSCP Session Y es N o N y Local Node ID 5 hex digits 00000 12345 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 c Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y n Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt act APPN config gt APPN config gt set node Enable APPN Y es N o Y Network ID Max 8 characters STFNET Control point name Max 8 characters VLNN2 Enable branch extender Y es N o N Route addition resistance 0 255 128 XID ID number for subarea connection 5 hex digits 00000 Use enhanced BATCH COS Y es N o Y Chapter1 APPN 77 APPN Use enhanced BATCHSC COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced INTER COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced INTERSC COS Y es N o Y Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt APPN config gt APPN config gt tn3270e TN3270E config gt set TN3270E Server Parameters Enable TN3270E Server Y N Y TN3270E Server IP Address 4 3 2 1 Port Number 23 Enable Client IP Address to LU Name Mapping Y N N Default Pool Name PUBLIC NetDisp Advisor Port Number 10008 Keepalive type none 1 Timing Mark 2 NOP 2 Frequency 1 655
303. dle Timer results in a dial on demand link A zero value results in a leased link Configuring V 34 The following is a sample V 34 configuration that could be used when APPN traffic uses PPP over V 34 Config gt list device Ifc 0 Token Ring CSR 6000000 vector 28 Ifc 1 WAN PPP CSR 81620 CSR2 80D00 vector 93 Ifc 2 WAN PPP CSR 81640 CSR2 80E00 vector 92 Config gt set data v34 2 Config gt list device Ifc 0 Token Ring CSR 6000000 vector 28 Ifc 1 WAN PPP CSR 81620 CSR2 80D00 vector 93 Ifc 2 V 34 Base Net CSR 81640 CSR2 80E00 vector 92 Config gt add v34 Assign address name 1 23 chars brown Assign network dial address 1 30 digits 555 1211 Config gt add v34 Assign address name 1 23 chars gray Assign network dial address 1 30 digits 555 1212 Config gt list v34 Address assigned name Network Address default_address 9999999 brown 555 1211 gray 555 1212 Config gt add device dial Adding device as interface 3 Defaulting Data link protocol to PPP Use net 3 command to configure circuit parameters Config gt net 3 Circuit configuration Circuit config 3 gt list all Base net Destination name Circuit priority 8 Outbound calls allowed Inbound calls allowed Idle timer 60 sec SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms Circuit config 3 gt set net Base net for this circuit 0 Circuit config 3 gt set idle 0 Circuit config 3 gt set dest Assign destination address name brown N
304. dress for the associated printer LU definition Syntax add map 202 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands This command adds a client IP address to LU name mapping You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets The following mapping rules apply e If a map definition contains a full subnet mask 255 255 255 255 indicating that the entry is for a specific client and a specific LU pool is not requested by the client any LU pool in the map definition that matches the connection type may be tried e If a map definition does not contain a full subnet mask and a specific LU pool is not requested only pool entries in the map definition will be tried You cannot create a definition that maps a subnet to a specific LU You must map the subnet to a pool e For individual workstation LUs with associated printers only the workstation LU is required to be in the map definition e If a connection request is received from a client and there are no map entries that match the request will be rejected e A mixture of pool and LU types can be added to a particular map The resource selected will be based on the type of connection request The order in which the resources are defined in the map will be the order in which it is chosen for a particular connection request e The LU
305. ds Table 13 Configuration Parameter List General Component Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Session connector Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the session connector component Parameter Session services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the session services component Parameter SNMP subagent Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the SNMP subagent component Parameter TN3270E Server Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the TN3270E Server component 118 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 13 Configuration Parameter List General Component Level Traces continued Parameter Information P
306. dvertisement See description of the parameters associated with the change r ra command prefix Changes a configured prefix Prefixes_are added or deleted as you modify the IPV6 address configuration See for more information about adding IPv6 addresses To add a prefix Config gt p ipv6 IPV6 user configuration IPV6 config gt add addr Which net is this address for 0 5 New address 2002 9 6204 Prefix length must be between 8 and 128 128 64 IPV6 config gt exit To change a prefix Chapter 15 Configuring and Monitoring Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP 407 NDP Configuration Commands Talk 6 Delete Use the Syntax Config gt p ndp6 Neighbor Discovery for IPv6 user configuration NDP6 Config gt change prefix Change Prefix Information option for which Prefix address 2002 2 Use this prefix for on link determination Yes Use this prefix for autonomous address configuration Yes n Valid lifetime for Prefix 2592000 ffffffff Preferred Lifetime for Prefix 604800 ffffffff Change prefix information options for which prefix address Specifies the IPv6 address prefix to be placed in the prefix information option in router advertisements sent from the interface Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Use this prefix for on link determination Specifies the value to be placed in the on link flag in the prefix information option When set to yes the prefix can be used for
307. e Syntax route given address given address The network address of the service node Example route 30622222 Net Address Next Hop Nbr Addr Nbr Intf Metric Age secs 30622222 30622222 0001 Eth 0 2 30 248 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 7 Using DNA IV This chapter describes IBM s implementation of Digital Network Architecture Phase IV DNA IV and includes the following sections DNA IV Overview DNA IV is a collection of software components that transfer information between networks connected by physical media By transferring information DNA IV software facilitates communication between network devices such as personal computers file servers and printers DNA IV protocol is the underlying protocol for Digital Equipment Corporation s DECnet software products as well as DNA compatible products DNA IV protocol includes the following Routing software for DNA IV protocol networks NCP an implementation of the DNA IV Network Control Program For more information refer to the appropriate DECnet VAX documentation published by Digital Equipment Corporation Support for DNA IV Maintenance Operations Protocol MOP DNA IV performs two major functions Maintains a complete routing database on all nodes in its area If the router is operating as a level 2 router it maintains the database for all areas as well Routes incoming DECnet data packets to the appropriate destinations based on its own
308. e P PP F RAME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A TM IP p Interface number Default 0 0 17 Port name Max 8 characters PPP017 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Limited resource Y es N o N High performance routing Y es N o Y Maximum BTU size 768 2044 2044 Local SAP address 04 EC 4 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt 1li al NODE NETWORK ID STFNET CONTROL POINT NAME NN6 XID 00000 APPN ENABLED YES MAX SHARED MEMORY 4096 MAX CACHED 4000 DLUR DLUR ENABLED YES PRIMARY DLUS NAME NETB MVSC CONNECTION NETWORK CN NAME LINK TYPE PORT INTERFACES COS COS NAME BATCH BATCHSC CONNECT INTER INTERSC CPSVCMG SNASVCMG USRNOT MODE MODE NAME COS NAME USRBAT USRBAT USRNOT USRNOT PORT INTF PORT LINK HPR SERVICE PORT NUMBER NAME TYPE ENABLED ANY ENABLED 0 TROOO IBMTRNET YES YES YES 1 PPPOOL PPP YES YES YES 2 SS SDLC NO YES YES 3 SDLC NO YES NO 4 PPP YES YES NO 5 TROO5 IBMTRNET YES YES YES 254 DLS NO YES NO 17 PPPO17 PPP YES YES YES STATION STATION PORT DESTINATION HPR ALLOW ADJ NODE NAME NAME ADDRESS ENABLED CP CP TYPE TONN1 TROOO 0004AC4E7505 YES YES 1 TONN2 TROOO 550020004020 YES YES 1 TONN9 TROOO 0004AC4E951D YES YES 1 TOPC4
309. e Applies when the router is configured as a DEC style router Displays all user defined subnets Enables or disables the NSAP alias substitution function Displays the route a packet travels to its destination Displays all user defined virtual circuits Applies when the router is configured as an IBM 2210 style router Returns you to the previous command level See Exiting a Lowed Use the addresses command to list the router s NET and the area addresses configured for this router Syntax addresses Example addresses Network Entity Title 4700 0500 01 000 9310 04FO Area Addresses 4700 0500 01 4900 02 Network Entity Title Identifies the router The NET consists of an area address and a system ID 330 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Area Address Indicates addresses within the routing domain The router can have a maximum of three area addresses configured at any one time Change Metric Use the change metric command to modify the cost of a circuit Syntax change metric Example change metric Circuit 0 New Cost 0 Circuit Indicates the circuit number that you want to change New Cost Indicates the new cost of the circuit Range 1 to 63 CLNP Stats Use the clnp stats command to display the OSI Connectionless Layer Network Protocol CLNP statistics Syntax clnp statistics Example clnp statistics Received incomple
310. e APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list port sd1c001 PORT Interface number DLSw 254 1 PORT enable YES Service any node YES Link Type SDLC MAX BTU size 2048 MAX number of Link Stations 1 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls 0 Cost per connect time 0 Cost per byte 0 Security Nonsecure 1 Public Switched Network 2 Underground Cable 3 Secure Conduit 4 Guarded Conduit 5 Encrypted 6 Guarded Radiation 0 Propagation delay 0 Minimum 1 Lan 2 Telephone 3 Packet Switched Network 4 Satellite 5 Maximum 2 Effective capacity 45 First user defined TG characteristic 128 Second user defined TG characteristic 128 Third user defined TG characteristic 128 APPN config gt add link sd1c001 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters TOSECSTN Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Station address 1 fe C1 Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 66 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics
311. e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a trap that may be generated by an authentication entity when a requesting client is not a member of the SNMP community autonomous system In TCP IP a group of networks and routers under one administrative authority These networks and routers cooperate closely to propagate network reachability and routing information among themselves using an interior gateway protocol of their choice autonomous system number In TCP IP a number assigned to an autonomous system by the same central authority that also assigns IP addresses The autonomous system number makes it possible for automated routing algorithms to distinguish autonomous systems backbone 1 In a local area network multiple bridge ring configuration a high speed link to which the rings are connected by means of bridges or routers A backbone may be configured as a bus or as a ring 2 In a wide area network a high speed link to which nodes or data switching exchanges DSEs are connected backbone network A central network to which smaller networks normally of lower speed connect The backbone network usually has a much higher capacity than the networks it helps interconnect or is a wide area network WAN such as a public packet switched datagram network backbone router 1 A router used to transmit data between areas 2 One in a series of routers that is used to interconnect networks into a larger internet Band
312. e X 25 subscriber the encoding would then be the NSAP 3700002041117010 because the prefix does not end in the IDP Default Address Prefixes A default address prefix is used when you want to originate a default route to all addresses outside your domain Default address prefixes are of zero length so there is nothing to encode Authentication Passwords To provide a minimum layer of security to the network OSI provides the option of authentication passwords When authentication is enabled any IS IS packet that does not contain the proper password is not accepted by the IS The authentication field of the NPDU contains the authentication passwords There are two types of authentication passwords transmit and receive A transmit password is added to IS IS packets transmitted by the IS A receive password is a listing of the transmit passwords that the IS accepts For example with authentication enabled if a transmit password is not added to the packet or a 298 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using OSI DECnet V listing of the transmit password is not in the receive password database the packet is dropped There are three types of transmit and receive passwords domain area and circuit A domain password provides security for L2 routing information An area password provides security for L1 routing information A circuit password provides security for IS IS hello messages ESIS Protocol The ES IS protocol enables ESs
313. e ZoneNames of the new network Note that the net range is repeated in every new RTMP update but that the ZoneNames are requested only once The end stations obtain the network numbers from the broadcasted RTMP routing information packets and then choose a node number This net node pair is then AARP d for AARP Probe to see if any other end station has already claimed its use If another station responds another net node pair is chosen by the end station and the process repeated until no responses are received Why ZoneName Filters When the typical AppleTalk end station wants to use a service printer file server on the Apple Internet it first looks at all available Zones and selects one It then chooses a service type and requests a list of all names advertising the type in the chosen Zone Several problems arise from this mechanism e A large internet may have many Zones Presenting the user with a long list to choose from obscures the needed ones thereby inhibiting usability of the list e The server may not want to make itself available throughout the internet for security reasons If the Zone that the service is in is not visible to the client security is enhanced e Restricting the Zones that are visible from a department to the rest of the internet will allow the internet administration to let the department control or not its own domain while not increasing the overhead for the rest of the internet reducing administra
314. e configuration that is unique Configuring a Permanent Circuit Using ISDN This example is a configuration of a permanent circuit using frame relay over ISDN from node 21 to node 1 Note You configure a permanent circuit by setting the idle timer value to 0 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxxx Configuring a PERMANENT circuit via ISDN from NN21 to NN1 xxx Using Frame Relay over ISDN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt n 6 Circuit configuration FR Config gt li all Base net Destination name 2210 01 Circuit priority 8 Destination address subaddress 99195551234 Inbound destination name 2210 01 Inbound dst address subaddress 99195551000 Inbound calls allowed Idle timer 0 fixed circuit H SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms FR Config gt ex kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxx Verify that a FR PVC is defined to NN1 This is required for APPN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt n 6 Circuit configuration FR Config gt en Frame Relay user configuration FR Config gt li perm Maximum PVCs allowable 64 Total PVCs configured 1 Circuit Circuit Circuit CIR Burst Excess Name Number Type in bps Size Burst 2210 21 16 2 16 Permanent 64000 64000 0 circuit is required and belongs to a required PVC group FR Config gt ex Config gt
315. e entries Displays MIB information Displays LANE shortcut entries Displays changes or resets NHRP configuration information Dynamically reconfigure NHRP interfaces or protocol Use the box status command to display NHRP status as configured for the box for example all interfaces not explicitly defined Syntax box status Example box status Box level NHRP is ON by config Interface Status Statistics Use the interface status command to display NHRP status on interfaces Syntax interface status Example interface status Interface 0 UP NHRP enabled Interface 1 UP NHRP disabled Interface 2 DOWN Interface 3 UP NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface Use the statistics command to display NHRP statistics for all interfaces or for a specific interface Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 369 NHRP Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Syntax statistics all interface all Lists NHRP statistics on all interfaces Example statistics all Output is the same as that for the statistics interface command as shown in the following example interface Lists NHRP statistics on a specified interface Example statistics interface Interface number 0 0 Statistics for Interface 0 Inbound Requests Outbound Requests Inbound Replies Outbound Replies Inbound Registers Outbound Registers Inbound Error Packets Inbound Error Indication Packets Outbound Error Indication Packets Re
316. e first and last values A first value of zero deletes the netrange for the interface and turn the seeded interface into an unseeded interface First and last are inclusive in the network range Setting the first value to zero on a Point to Point PPP interface allows that interface to operate in half router mode In half router mode neither of the two ends of a PPP network is configured with a network range or a zone list which reduces the amount of configuration needed Both routers on a PPP network must operate in the same mode Note When connecting a 2210 to an IBM 6611 using a PPP interface set the 2210 for half router mode which is the only mode of operation supported by the IBM 6611 for AppleTalk communications over a PPP interface Example ap2config gt set Net Range 2 43 45 node interface node Assigns the starting node number for the router The router will AARP for this node but if it is already in use a new node will be chosen The following explains each argument that is entered after this command e interface Designates the router interface to operate on e node Designates the first attempted node number Legal values are 1 to 253 A node value of zero deletes the node number for the interface and forces the router to choose one at random Example 228 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 ap2config gt set node 2 2 Accessing the Ap
317. e first and last values for a single numbered network 2 Use the set node number command to set the Starting Node Number for the interface The router will AARP for this node If the number is already in use the router will choose a new number For example AP2 config gt set node number Interface 0 1 Node number 1 253 or 0 to delete 1 3 Use the add zone command to add one or more zone names for the network attached to the interface If you define a network range for an interface you should also define the zone names for the interface If you did not define a network number do not define zone names For example AP2 config gt add zone Interface 0 1 Zone name Finance 216 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 After you have specified the parameters you can use the list command at the AP2 config gt prompt to view your configuration Setting Up Zone Filters Zone filtering lets you filter zones in each direction on each interface To filter incoming packets set up an input filter To filter outgoing packets set up an output filter The interface will not readvertise filtered zone information in the direction that you define Follow these steps to set up a zone filter 1 Add zone filters to an interface Use the add filter in command to add an input zone filter to an interface Use the add zfilter out command to add an output zone filter to an interface For example AP2 config gt add z
318. e maximum legal cost to the most distant area A suggested value is 25 times area maximum hops area maximum hops number Maximum number of hops allowed between this level 2 router and any other level 2 router If the best route to an area requires more hops than this that area will be considered unreachable Maximum 30 Default 30 This argument does not apply to level 1 routers It should be about twice the longest path length in hops that is expected The hop count is used by routing only to speed the decay of routes to unreachable areas The area maximum hops may be reduced to cause unreachable areas to become unreachable more quickly broadcast routing timer range Specifies how often level 1 and 2 in a level 2 router routing messages are sent in seconds This is how often they will be sent in the absence of any cost or adjacency changes This protects the routing database from corruption At least partial routing updates are sent automatically if any cost or adjacency changes Range 1 to 65535 Default 180 Lower values increase the overhead for this and all adjacent routers Larger values increase the time required to correct the routing database if a partial routing update message is lost Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 269 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands maximum address number range define only Is the highest node address within this area for which routes will be kept by this rou
319. e network node server in turn uses its search facilities to locate the requested resource and calculate a route from the APPN end node to the resource 2 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN LEN Nodes ALEN node is a T2 1 node without APPN extensions A LEN node can establish peer connections with other LEN nodes APPN end nodes and APPN network nodes as long as all of the required destination LUs are registered with the LEN node A LEN node can also serve as a gateway between an APPN network and a SNA subarea network Because a LEN node cannot establish CP CP sessions with an APPN network node server it cannot register its resources with the server or request that the server search for a resource and dynamically calculate a route to that resource A LEN node may indirectly use the directory and routing services of a network node by pre defining remote LUs owned by nonadjacent nodes as being located on an APPN network node although the actual location may be anywhere in the network When the LEN node needs to initiate a session with the remote LU it sends a session activation request BIND for the LU to the network node In this case the network node acts as the LEN node s network node server locating the requested resource calculating a route and forwarding the BIND to its correct destination When configuring the router network node you can specify the names of LUs that are associated with an attached LEN end node These LU
320. e of maintaining a connection over the TG relative to all other TGs in the network A value of zero means that connections over the TG may be made at no additional cost as in the case of many non switched facilities Higher values represent higher costs Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 165 APPN Configuration Commands Table 25 Configuration Parameter List Modify TG Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Cost per byte Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter expresses the relative cost of transmitting a byte over the associated TG The units are user defined and the assigned value should reflect the actual expenses incurred for transmitting over the TG relative to all other TGs in the network A value of zero means that bytes may be transmitted over the TG at no additional cost Higher values represent higher costs Parameter Security Valid Values e Nonsecure all else for example satellite connected or located in a nonsecure country e Public switched network secure in the sense that route is not predetermined e Underground cable located in secure country as determined by the network administrator e Secure conduit Not guarded for example pressurized pipe e Guarded conduit protected against physical tapping e Encrypted link level encryption is provided e Guarded rad
321. e remote DTE on the X 25 circuit This is always the address of the remote system This is a decimal number of up to 14 characters hello timer range Specifies how often in seconds router hellos are sent on this circuit Range 1 to 8191 seconds Default 15 seconds recommended maximum recalls define only Specifies how many attempts the router makes to reestablish an outgoing static SVC call after an initial call failure After the maximum number of recalls the router makes no further attempts to establish the SVC without your intervention Valid values are in the range of 1 to 20 the default is 1 See also the recall timer argument maximum routers range define only Specifies how many other routers there may be on this circuit Range 1 to 33 Default 16 Note This parameter is not user configurable on an X 25 circuit when the executor type is set to DEC routing IV or DEC area In this case the maximum number of routers is 1 If this is a level 1 router only routers on this circuit in the same area count If this is a level 2 router all routers on this circuit count The local router does not count against the limit The router s efficiency and memory requirements are improved by keeping this number low Set this argument to equal a few more than the total number of adjacent routers on the circuit Do not set this argument to less than the number of routers on the circuit this can result in anomalies in routing
322. e that connects a host interface to a local area network such as Ethernet Ethernet transceivers contain electronics that apply signals to the cable and that sense collisions Transmission Control Protocol TCP A communications protocol used in the Internet and in any network that follows the U S Department of Defense standards for internetwork protocol TCP provides a reliable host to host protocol between hosts in packet switched communications networks and in interconnected systems of such networks It uses the Internet Protocol IP as the underlying protocol Glossary 467 Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP A set of communications protocols that support peer to peer connectivity functions for both local and wide area networks transmission group TG 1 A connection between adjacent nodes that is identified by a transmission group number 2 In a subarea network a single link or a group of links between adjacent nodes When a transmission group consists of a group of links the links are viewed as a single logical link and the transmission group is called a multilink transmission group MLTG A mixed media multilink transmission group MMMLTG is one that contains links of different medium types for example token ring switched SDLC nonswitched SDLC and frame relay links 3 In an APPN network a single link between adjacent nodes 4 See also parallel transmission groups transmission header
323. e timer value to be used with the Keepalive function Parameter Automatic logoff Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether automatic logoff will be enabled 196 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 40 Configuration Parameter List Set TN3270E continued Parameter Information Parameter Time Valid Values 1 to 65535 minutes Default Value 30 Description This parameter sets the time that the TN3270E link can be idle before being automatically logged off Parameter IPv4 Precedence Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter sets the IPv4 precedence value which allows priority queueing of IPv4 encapsulated packets Syntax add implicit pool This command defines a pool of LUs as opposed to the add lu command which adds a single LU You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 41 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Implicit Parameter Information Parameter Pool name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value PUBLIC Description This parameter specifies the name of the LU pool to be used when TN3270 clients connect
324. e type of nodes to which VINES IP broadcast packets are sent Error If the error bit is set an exception notification packet is sent to the transport layer protocol entity when a packet cannot be routed to a service or client node Metric Requests that the service node of the destination client node return to the source a routing cost from the service node to the destination client node Redirect Indicates whether the packet contains an RTP message specifying a better route to use Hop Count Specifies the range a packet can travel The hop count can range from 0x0 to Oxf Protocol Type 1 Specifies the VINES network layer protocol of the packet as VINES IP RTP ICP or VINES ARP Destination Network Number 4 A 4 byte network number in the VINES IP address of the destination Destination Subnetwork 2 A 2 byte subnetwork number in the VINES Number IP address of the destination Source Network Number 4 A 4 byte network number in the VINES IP address of the source Source Subnetwork Number 2 A 2 byte subnetwork number in the VINES IP address of the source Routing Update Protocol RTP RTP gathers and distributes routing information that VINES IP uses to compute routes throughout the network RTP enables each router to periodically broadcast routing tables to all of its neighbors The router then determines the destination neighbor it will use to route the packet Chapter 5 Using VINES 235 Using VINES Se
325. ea 1 must have area 2 s address added to its configuration For areas 3 and 4 to be synonymous each area s address must be added to the others L1 IS IS to IS Hello IIH Message The IIH message enables an IS to determine the existence of other ISs and to establish adjacencies There are three types of IIH messages L1 L2 and point to point Each IS contains a local hello timer and holding timer Each time the hello timer expires an IIH is multicast over the IS s interface to any adjacent ISs When the hello message is received the recipient establishes or updates refreshes the adjacency information This information remains current for amount of time seconds specified by the holding timer If the holding timer expires the adjacency is brought down L1 IIH Message The L1 IIH message is multicast over the interface when its local hello timer expires The L1 IS places the following information in its IIH e Source ID e Any manual area addresses that it services 292 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using OSI DECnet V e IS type L1 only or L1 L2 e Priority e LAN ID e If applicable the system ID of the L1 designated IS pseudonode Upon receiving this message the adjacent L1 IS extracts the source ID of the sending IS This IS then constructs its own IIH message and places its source ID into the source ID field The sender s source ID is placed into the IS neighbors field Returning the sender s ID verifies t
326. eachable Addresses Selects the number you are using to size the external metric routing table Max Link State Updates Selects the number you are using to size the link state database network entity title Configures the router s NET The NET consists of the router s system ID and area address Example set network entity title Area address System ID Area address Indicates one of area address portion of the router s NET It is included as the first address in the router s set of manual area addresses Each area address may be a maximum of 19 bytes System ID Defines the portion of the NSAP that identifies this specific router Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 325 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 The system ID can be a maximum of 19 bytes but the length must agree with the domain ID length that you configured with the set globals command phaseivpfx Configures the prefix address to allow the OSI protocol to route packets to the attached DNA IV network The default is 49 hexadecimal Example set phaseivpfx Local Phase IV prefix 49 subnet Adds or changes a subnet This parameter prompts you for different information depending on the type of subnet that your configuring X 25 or LAN Example X 25 subnet set subnet Interface number 0 Interface Type X25 LAN subnet Interface number 0 Interface Type LAN Enable ES IS N Enable IS IS N Le
327. eceives messages to and from a domain outside its IS IS routing domain Default Metric Defines the cost of this address ISIS Hello Timer Defines the time interval between transmission of ISIS hellos Enable DECnetvV Link Initialization Defines whether DEC style link initialization for this circuit is enabled YES or not NO Modify Receive Verifier Specifies verification data to be checked against on receiving an XID when verifying by circuit Modify Transmit Verifier Specifies verification data to be included in the XID Explicit Receive Verification Defines whether verification is by circuit or by system TRUE specifies verification by circuit and FALSE specifies by system Reserve Timer Defines the time after the idle timer expires during which the router still considers a remote node on a DA circuit as active The router can forward data on the DA circuit until the reserve timer expires Idle Timer Defines the length of time a DA adjacency my be idle no data transmission before it is cleared Max SVCs Defines the maximum number of SVC adjacencies supported by this DA circuit If no call can be placed because the maximum SVC adjacencies has been reached then an event Exceed Max SVC adjacencies is generated receive password Adds an ASCII character string 16 characters maximum that authenticates all incoming packets An incoming packet whose password matches one of 310 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2
328. ecified class The network does not specify any QoS CLASS_1 Performance is comparable to current digital private line performance CLASS 2 Intended for packetized video and audio in teleconferencing and multimedia applications CLASS 3 Intended for interoperation of connection oriented protocols such as Frame Relay CLASS 4 Intended for interoperation of connectionless protocols such as IP Default Value CLASS 3 Description This parameter indicates which class of service is provided to an ATM virtual connection Table 32 Configuration Parameter List TG Characteristics Connection Network Parameter Information Parameter Cost per connect time Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Description This parameter expresses the relative cost of maintaining a connection over the associated TG The units are user defined and are typically based on the applicable tariffs of the transmission facility being used The assigned values should reflect the actual expense of maintaining a connection over the TG relative to all other TGs in the network A value of zero means that connections over the TG may be made at no additional cost as in the case of many non switched facilities Higher values represent higher costs 180 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 32 Configuration Parameter List TG Characteristics Connection Network continued Parameter Information
329. ecifies the name to be used to override the primary DLUS configured for this node Parameter Secondary DLUS name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name to be used to override the secondary DLUS configured for this node Parameter Autoactivate Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description This parameter specifies whether to activate this link at start up Syntax add routing_list Note These questions are asked only if you have configured the node as a border node Routing lists are not supported for 2210 12x models There are a number of editing shortcut keys available to speed the modification of existing data in a previously configured routing list These shortcut keys may be used when you are prompted for the Destination LUs and the Routing CPs e Enter alone will retain the currently displayed name e Space bar followed by Enter will delete the currently displayed name Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 187 APPN Configuration Commands e Character data followed by Enter will replace the currently displayed name with the new character data e 9 followed by Enter will jump to the end of the list where new names can be appended At the end of a list Enter alone completes the list Table 37 Configuration Parameter List Rout
330. ecognized Private Operating Agency RPOA Any individual company or corporation other than a government department or service that operates a telecommunication service and is subject to the obligations undertaken in the Convention of the International Telecommunication Union and in the Regulations for example a communication common carrier reduced instruction set computer RISC A computer that uses a small simplified set of frequently used instructions for rapid execution remote 1 Pertaining to a system program or device that is accessed through a telecommunication line 2 Synonym for link attached 3 Contrast with local remote bridging The function of a bridge that allows two bridges to connect multiple LANs using a telecommunication link Contrast with local bridging Remote Execution Protocol REXEC A protocol that allows the execution of a command or program on any host in the network The local host receives the results of the command execution Request for Comments RFC In Internet communications the document series that describes a part of the Internet suite of protocols and related experiments All Internet standards are documented as RFCs reset On a virtual circuit reinitialization of data flow control At reset all data in transit are eliminated reset request packet In X 25 communications a packet transmitted by the data terminal equipment DTE to the data circuit terminating equipment
331. ed and delay For ATM the order of preference is e Campus Reserved SVC or PVC e Campus Best Effort SVC or PVC WAN reserved PVC e WAN Reserved SVC e WAN Best Effort SVC or PVC Syntax set high performance routing You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 5 Configuration Parameter List High Performance Routing HPR Parameter Information Parameter Maximum sessions for HPR connections Valid Values 1 to 65535 Default Value 100 Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of sessions allowed on an HPR connection An HPR connection is defined by the class of service COS the physical path TGs and the network connection end points This parameter is applicable only when the router is the initiator of the BIND If the number of sessions exceeds the specified value for this parameter HPR will allocate another HPR RTP connection Table 6 Configuration Parameter List HPR Timer and Retry Options Parameter Information Low transmission priority traffic Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 89 APPN Configuration Commands Table 6 Configuration Parameter List HPR Timer and Retry Options continued Parameter Information Parameter RTP inactivity timer Valid Values 1 to 3600 seconds Default Value 1
332. ed on the particular ports on which you desire to support APPN routing Additionally support for HPR must be enabled on the particular APPN ports desired and must be supported by the particular link stations on those ports Note HPR only supported on LAN frame relay and PPP direct DLC ports Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 83 APPN Configuration Commands Table 4 Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing continued Parameter Information Parameter Network ID required Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note A network identifier for an existing network of which this router network node is to become a member using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new network IDs Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of the APPN network to which this network node belongs The network ID must be the same for all network nodes in the APPN network Attached APPN end nodes and LEN end nodes can have different network IDs Parameter Control point name required Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing CP name that this node would be acquiring using the special characters and from the character s
333. ed parts of this vocabulary are identified by the symbol I after the definition definitions taken from draft international standards committee drafts and working papers being developed by ISO IEC JTC1 SC1 are identified by the symbol T after the definition indicating that final agreement has not yet been reached among the participating National Bodies of SC1 e The IBM Dictionary of Computing New York McGraw Hill 1994 e Internet Request for Comments 1208 Glossary of Networking Terms e Internet Request for Comments 1392 Internet Users Glossary e The Object Oriented Interface Design IBM Common User Access Guidelines Carmel Indiana Que 1992 The following cross references are used in this glossary Contrast with This refers to a term that has an opposed or substantively different meaning Synonym for This indicates that the term has the same meaning as a preferred term which is defined in its proper place in the glossary Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 Synonymous with This is a backward reference from a defined term to all other terms that have the same meaning See This refers the reader to multiple word terms that have the same last word See also This refers the reader to terms that have a related but not synonymous meaning A AAL ATM Adaptation Layer the layer that adapts user data to from the ATM network by adding removing headers and segmenting reassembling the data in
334. ee bracket protocol and link protocol protocol data unit PDU A unit of data specified in a protocol of a given layer and consisting of protocol control information of this layer and possibly user data of this layer T R Rapid Transport Protocol RTP connection In high performance routing HPR the connection established between the endpoints of the route to transport session traffic reachability The ability of a node or a resource to communicate with another node or resource read only memory ROM Memory in which stored data cannot be modified by the user except under special conditions real time processing The manipulation of data that are required or generated by some process while the process is in operation Usually the results are used to influence the process and perhaps related processes while it is occurring reassembly In communications the process of putting segmented packets back together after they have been received receive not ready RNR In communications a data link command or response that indicates a temporary condition of being unable to accept incoming frames receive not ready RNR packet See RNR packet received line signal detector RLSD In the EIA 232 standard a signal that indicates to the data terminal equipment DTE that it is receiving a signal from the remote data circuit terminating equipment DCE Synonymous with carrier detect and data carrier detect DCD R
335. eived the command or request is retransmitted the retry count is decremented and the LDLC timer period is restarted If the timer expires with the retry count at 0 the link is assumed to be inoperative Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 177 APPN Configuration Commands Table 31 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter LDLC Timer Period Valid Values 1 to 255 seconds Default Value For ATM 1 second For IP 15 seconds Description This parameter specifies the timer period used with the LDLC retry count Parameter Broadband Bearer Class Valid Values Class_A Class_C or Class _X Default Value Class_X Description This parameter specifies the bearer class requested from the ATM network The classes are defined Class A Constant bit rate CBR with end to end timing requirements Class C Variable bit rate VBR with no end to end timing requirements Class X Service allowing user defined traffic type and timing requirements Parameter Shareable Regular Network traffic Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes if this is a Best Effort CN No otherwise Description This parameter specifies whether traffic on this connection network TG can be routed on an ATM VC set up for a regular TG or another CN TG 178 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 31 Configuration Par
336. ence of a default backup server The default backup server may be overridden on a link station basis Parameter Perform retries to restore disrupted pipe Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether DLUR will attempt to reestablish the pipe to a DLUS after a pipe failure If DLUR receives a non disruptive UNBIND and this parameter is No DLUR waits indefinitely for a DLUS to reestablish the broken pipe If the pipe fails for any other reason and this parameter is No DLUR attempts to reach the primary DLUS once If this is unsuccessful DLUR attempts to reach the backup DLUS If this attempt also fails DLUR waits indefinitely for a DLUS to reestablish the pipe for a description of the retry algorithm 94 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 7 Configuration Parameter List Dependent LU Requester continued Parameter Information Parameter Delay before initiating retries Valid Values 0 to 2 756 000 seconds Default Value 120 seconds Description This parameter specifies an amount of time for two different cases when the pipe between the DLUR and its DLUS is broken e For the case of receiving a non disruptive UNBIND This parameter specifies the amount of time the DLUR must wait before attempting to reach the primary DLUS A value of 0 indicates immediate retry by the DLUR e For all other cases of pipe failure The DLUR will try
337. entifier indicating 802 2 LLC L8PID X 7083 Layer 3 protocol identifier indicating SNA APPN FID2 APPN HPR traffic transferred over a frame relay data link connection does not use IEEE 802 2 LLC It uses a different multiprotocol encapsulation as defined in RFC 1490 using NLPID X 08 Q 933 encoding L2PID X 5081 Layer 2 protocol identifier for no Layer 2 protocol L8PID X 7085 Layer 3 protocol identifier indicating SNA APPN HPR APPN HPR does not use a SAP for traffic transferred using the RFC 1490 routed frame format because there is no Layer 2 protocol RFC 1490 Bridged format APPN HPR uses a SAP for traffic transferred using the RFC 1490 bridged frame format For PPP ports APPN ISR traffic uses 802 2 LLC over the PPP connection Since there is no layer 2 protocol used in HPR s RFC 1490 encapsulation no SAP is used for HPR traffic For ATM ports APPN ISR traffic is not supported over native ATM ports However two types of APPN traffic as defined by RFC 1483 are supported During link station bring up XIDs are transported using the following frame format e NLPID X 09 e Layer 2 protocol ID X 4C80 802 2 LLC header present e Layer 3 protocol ID X 7083 SNA APPN FID2 including XID3 HPR traffic is transported using the following frame format e NLPID X 09 e Layer 2 protocol ID X 4C80 802 2 LLC header present 8 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN
338. eply timer override for HPR HPR T1 Valid Values 1 to 254 half seconds Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the HPR override LLC reply timer HPR T1 that is to be used when HPR is supported by this link station This parameter overrides the value taken from the default reply timer override for HPR parameter specified on HPR Defaults This parameter supersedes the value of the LLC reply timer T1 parameter specified on the Modify Logical Link Control LLC Characteristics parameter when HPR is supported Parameter Maximum number retransmission HPR N2 Valid Values 1 to 2 160 000 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the HPR override LLC maximum number of retransmissions HPR N2 that is to be used when HPR is supported by this link station This parameter overrides the value taken from the default maximum number of retransmissions for HPR parameter specified on the HPR LLC Override defaults This parameter supersedes the value of the LLC maximum number of retransmissions N2 parameter specified on the Modify Logical Link Control LLC Characteristics parameter when HPR is supported Parameter Limited Resource Timer Valid Values 1 to 216000 seconds Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the timer
339. equest packet The client node stops and resets the timer when it receives a query response packet When a timeout period exceeds two seconds the client node summarizes the states the service and client nodes enter during VINES ARP implementation Table 54 Client and Service Node VINES ARP States Client Node States Initialization The client node is initializing Query The client node is transmitting a query request packet Request The client node received a query response packet from a service node and is transmitting an assignment request packet to the service node it heard from Assigned The client node received an assignment response packet containing the VINES network and subnetwork addresses Service Node States Initialization The VINES ARP protocol is initializing Listen The service node is waiting for query request packets from the client nodes Service The service node received a query request packet and sent a query response packet Assignment The service node issues an assignment response packet containing the VINES network and subnetwork addresses Basic Configuration Procedures The steps to initially configure each router that sends and receives VINES packets are as follow 1 Assign a unique 32 bit hexadecimal address to each router in the VINES network Using the set network address hex command enter a network address from 30900000 to 3097FFFF The network address for
340. equivalent to a cold start of NHRP interface De activates the NHRP interface and then activates the interface with new interface static configuration values NHRP Packet Tracing NHRP packet traces can be activated from the Event Logging System ELS which is an integral part of the router operating system See Using and Configuring the Event Logging System and Monitoring the Event Logging System in Software User s Guide The NHRP packet tracing mechanism supports the set trace decode on option This option enables the NHRP packet trace output to be interpreted for viewing The control frames over the LSI can also be traced apart from the NHRP protocol packets For details on using the trace facility see the description of the trace command in Monitoring the Event Logging System in Software User s Guide The NHRP protocol packets are identified by event 19 and the LSI control packets are identified by event 113 Sample trace output 1 Dir OUTGOING Time 0 0 48 88 Trap 6035 Comp NHRP Type UNKNOWN Port 1 Circuit 0x000000 Size 160 xx NHRP MPOA Frame AddressFamily ATM NSAP ProtocolType IPv4 HopCount 64 PacketSize 160 Checksum 0x03F4 ExtensionOffset 0x0038 Version 1 PktType ResolutionRequest SrcAddrTL 20 SrcSubAddrTL 0 SrcProtoLen 4 DstProtoLen 4 Flags requester is a router Flags want authoritative only Flags want unique only ReqID 1 Src NBMA 39840F0000000000000000000610005A019600C9 Src Protocol Addr 6 6 6
341. er 16 bit pieces of the address and the d s are the decimal values of the four low order 8 bit pieces of the address in standard IPv4 representation Example ABCD 1234 1234 5555 FFEE 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 Text Representation of Address Prefixes An IPv6 address prefix is represented by the notation IPv6 address prefix length The IPv6 address can use any of the notations listed in FIPv6 Address Format l and the prefix length is a decimal value specifying how many of the leftmost contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix Example ABCD 1234 1234 5555 FFEE 1 2 3 4 64 IPv6 Header Format The IPv6 header has a total of 8 fields eliminating some IPv4 fields such as checksum and fragmentation 378 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using IPv6 IPv6 Minimum MTU The minimum MTU for IPv6 is 1280 bytes You cannot enable IPv6 on an interface with an MTU less than 1280 bytes IPv6 Mandatory Path MTU Discovery Path MTU Discovery is a protocol that allows a host to determine the maximum size packet that will successfully traverse a path to a destination without fragmentation As packets are generated and sent from the host the MTU of the particular output interface that the packet will be transmitted to is available If the packet will fit on the output interface either as a whole or in fragments it is transmitted If a router in the path needs to forward that packet onto a net with a smaller MTU than the packet size
342. er defined COS names and associated definitions for TGs and nodes which can be used with new mode names or mapped to existing mode names In addition you can create new mode names that can be mapped to existing COS names Each COS definition file is identified by a COS name and contains an associated transmission priority and a table of ranges of acceptable TG and node characteristics that APPN compares against actual TG and node characteristics to determine weights for TGs and nodes from which APPN calculates the least weight route for the session Using the Configuration Program you can e View a COS definition file View the transmission priority View a list of node row references along with their corresponding weights View a list of TG row references along with their corresponding weights e Select standard or ATM COS tables as templates to define a new user defined COS definition file with a new COS name Import an IBM defined COS definition file to use as a template Import a previously exported user defined COS definition file to use as a template e Define the minimum and maximum ranges for the user defined TG characteristics within an IBM defined COS definition Note In an IBM defined COS definition you can edit only the user defined TG characteristic ranges Using Configuration Program or talk 6 you can e Use standard COS tables or the Enhanced COS tables for ATM e Define a new mode name and its mapping
343. er for Network 6 10 to Interface 2 on Router B AP2 config gt add nfilter out Interface 0 2 First Network range number decimal 0 6 Last Network range number decimal 0 10 2 Enable the output network filter as exclusive AP2 config gt enable nfilter out exc Interface 0 2 This filter excludes all information on Network 6 10 from being forwarded through Interface 2 to Network 16 20 Chapter 3 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 219 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 220 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 4 Configuring and Monitoring AppleTalk Phase 2 This chapter describes the AppleTalk Phase 2 AP2 configuring and monitoring commands It includes the following sections Accessing the AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Environment To access the AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration environment enter the following command at the Config gt prompt Config gt ap2 AP2 Protocol user configuration AP2 Config gt AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands This section describes the AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration commands The AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration commands allow you to specify network parameters for router interfaces that transmit AppleTalk Phase 2 packets The information you specify with the configuration commands becomes activated when you restart the router Enter the AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration commands at the AP2 config gt prompt shows the commands Table 51 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Co
344. er lets you determine if the router sends certain extensions e path information extensions e IBM vendor private extensions Path Information Extensions Three extensions are defined in NHRP to provide path information These extensions can be used to help monitor the request itself to determine the path taken by the request to determine who generated the reply and the path taken by the reply The path information extensions are e Forward Transmit Each Next Hop Server NHS that forwards the request along the way should append information about itself e Responder Address The Next Hop Server NHS that generates the reply should append information about itself e Reverse Transmit Each Next Hop Server NHS that forwards the reply along the way should append information about itself The router can be configured to send any or all of these extensions in Next Hop Resolution Request packets that it generates The information received in the reply packets is displayed in the router s NHRP ELS messages IBM Vendor Private Extensions To support NHRP in an Emulated LAN environment the server adds vendor unique extensions to NHRP packets These extensions act as queries the NHRP client places them in the Next Hop Resolution Request If the server supports this function it responds with three corresponding extensions containing ELAN address information MAC address ATM address and Routing information these extensions are incl
345. error recovery or flow control for connectionless service The second type is connection oriented service which requires establishing a link prior to the exchange of information Connection oriented service provides sequenced information transfer flow control and error recovery logical link control LLC protocol In a local area network the protocol that governs the exchange of transmission frames between data stations independently of how the transmission medium is shared T The LLC protocol was developed by the IEEE 802 committee and is common to all LAN standards logical link control LLC protocol data unit A unit of information exchanged between link stations in different nodes The LLC protocol data unit contains a destination service access point DSAP a source service access point SSAP a control field and user data logical unit LU A type of network accessible unit that enables users to gain access to network resources and communicate with each other loopback test A test in which signals from a tester are looped at a modem or other network element back to the tester for measurements that determine or verify the quality of the communications path low entry networking LEN A capability of nodes to attach directly to one another using basic peer to peer protocols to support multiple and parallel sessions between logical units low entry networking LEN end node A LEN node receiving network services fr
346. ert queue enter the command set management and answer the Held Alert Queue Size question The queue defaults to a size of 10 alerts and valid values are from 0 through 255 alerts As you increase the size of the held alert queue additional memory is needed If you set it to a high value you may want to adjust the Maximum Shared Memory value See 8 for additional information Defining Transmission Group TG Characteristics When you configure APPN on the router you can specify the Transmission Group TG characteristics for the link station that defines a connection between the router network node and an adjacent node These characteristics such as the security of a link or its effective capacity are used by APPN when calculating an optimum or least weight route between nodes in the APPN network 36 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN APPN on the router uses a set of default TG characteristics for each port or DLSw port These defaults defined by the default TG characteristics parameter apply to all the TGs for link stations defined on a port unless they are overridden for a particular link station by the modify TG characteristics parameter These default TG characteristics are also used for dynamic link stations established when an adjacent node requests a connection with the router network node but does not have a predefined link station definition on the router network node The Service any node parameter must be enab
347. erver table MIB Server Table List Index Server Address State ATM Addr 0 6 6 6 2 UP 39840F0000000000000000000210005A00DEADC8 entry Lists a specific NHRP mib entry in either e Server table e Client table e Next Hop Server NHS statistics table e Next Hop Client NHC statistics table e Resolution cache table Example mib entry serv Index 0 0 Index 0 Protocol 1x0800 Protocol Address 6 6 6 2 ATM Address type 0x0 NSAP ATM Address 39840F000 SubnetworkId 0 Authentication 1 Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 371 NHRP Monitoring Commands Talk 5 LANE Shortcuts Current Clients 0 Max Clients gt 512 State ea Net 1 Use the lane shortcuts command to display all or specific entries using LANE shortcuts You can also display any ATM addresses for which LANE shortcuts are disallowed due to operational problems Syntax lane shortcuts all entry disallowed all Displays all LANE shortcuts Example lane all LANE Shortcut Interface 1 ATM Network Interface 0 5 5 5 1 04 AA AA AA AA 01 0 34 Current MTU being used 4490 entry Displays a LANE shortcut entry Example lane entry LANE Shortcut Interface number 0 1 Enter IP address of next hop 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 1 Next Hop Addr 5 5 5 1 Dest Mac Addr 04 AA AA AA AA 01 ATM Address 39840F0000000000000000000310005A00DEADO2 Media type Token Ring VPI VCI 0 34 Holding Time 20 minutes MTU size 4490 RI Field 064001020203 disallo
348. es 0 to 255 Default Value 128 Description This parameter specifies the third user defined TG characteristic for all link stations defined on this port The third user defined TG characteristic specifies the third of three additional characteristics that users can define to describe the TGs in a network Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 145 APPN Configuration Commands Table 21 Configuration Parameter List Port default LLC Characteristics Parameter Information Parameter Remote APPN SAP Valid Values Multiples of four in the hexadecimal range of X 04 to X EC Default Value x 04 Description This parameter specifies the SAP associated with an adjacent node s APPN link station Parameter Maximum number of outstanding l format LPDUs TW Valid Values 1 to 127 Default Value 26 Description This parameter specifies the LLC maximum number of outstanding l format LPDUs TW for all link stations on this port The maximum number of outstanding l format LPDUs defines the transmit Command Line option TW which is the maximum number of sequentially numbered l format LPDUs that the link station may have unacknowledged at any given time Parameter Receive window size Valid Values 1 to 127 Default Value 26 Description This parameter specifies the LLC receive Command Line option size RW for all link stations on this port The RW parameter specifies the maximum number of unack
349. es a circuit transmit password When you select yes this option prompts you with the following Delete or change the transmit password change Modify the set of receive passwords Removes all or adds one circuit receive password When you select yes this option prompts you with the following Delete all or add 1 receive password add L1 Priority L2 Priority Indicates the router priority for becoming the designated router on the LAN All ESs Indicates the multicast address to use when transmitting IS hellos The default address reflects the ethernet 802 3 multicast address If you are connecting to a 802 5 LAN use C00000004000 All ISs Indicates the multicast address to use when receiving ES hellos The default address reflects the ethernet 802 3 multicast address If you are connecting to a 802 5 LAN use C00000008000 All L1 ISs Indicates the multicast address to use when transmitting and receiving L1 IS IS PDUs The default address reflects the ethernet 802 3 multicast address If you are connecting to a 802 5 LAN use C00000008000 All L2 ISs Indicates the multicast address to use when transmitting and receiving L2 IS IS PDUs The default address reflects the ethernet 802 3 multicast address If you are connecting to a 802 5 LAN use C00000008000 switches Turns the OSI options on or off Example set switches ES IS Checksum Option OFF ES IS Init Option OFF ISIS Authentication OFF IS IS Checksum Opt
350. es for users of the network Multiple SSCPs cooperating as peers with one another can divide the network into domains of control with each SSCP having a hierarchical control relationship to the physical units and logical units within its own domain Systems Network Architecture SNA The description of the logical structure formats protocols and operational sequences for transmitting information units through and controlling the configuration and operation of networks The layered structure of SNA allows the ultimate origins and destinations of information that is the users to be independent of and unaffected by the specific SNA network services and facilities used for information exchange T TCP IP 1 Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol 2 A UNIX like Ethernet based system interconnect protocol originally developed by the US Department of Defense TCP IP facilitated ARPANET Advanced Research Projects Agency Network a packet switched research network for which layer 4 was TCP and layer 3 IP Telnet In the Internet suite of protocols a protocol that provides remote terminal connection service It allows users of one host to log on to a remote host and interact as directly attached terminal users of that host threshold 1 In IBM bridge programs a value set for the maximum number of frames that are not forwarded across a bridge due to errors before a threshold exceeded occurrence is counted and
351. es or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about all calls within the APPN network node that open close or send data on a dialog Parameter AVL Tree Support Valid Values Yes No Default No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about all calls that manage AVL trees Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 107 APPN Configuration Commands Table 11 Configuration Parameter List Inter process Signals Traces Parameter Information Parameter Address space manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the address space manager component Parameter Attach manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the attach manager component Parameter Configuration services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to inc
352. ess is used as source address General Parameters Holding time 20 minutes Protocol Access Controls Use source and destination address When should NHC attempt shortcuts Based on datarate Data rate threshold 10 packets second 360 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 NHRP Configuration Commands Talk 6 NHS allows shortcuts to ATMARP clients Yes Cache Sizes Resolution cache 10000 entries Server purge cache 10000 entries Server registrations cache 10000 entries Extension Usage Use NHRP Forward transit NHS record client extension No Use NHRP Reverse transit NHS record client extension No Use Responder Address client extension No Use LANE shortcuts extension Yes List of NHRP IP exclude records Address Mask 1 6 6 6 6 255 255 255 255 2 5 5 5 0 255 255 255 0 Disallowed router to router shortcuts for IP NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands This section explains all of the NHRP advanced configuration commands as shown in able 631 Enter the commands from the NHRP Advanced config gt prompt Table 63 NHRP Advanced Configuration Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the pons for specific commands if available See Add Adds an NHRP interface exclude list or disallowed R2R shortcuts Change Changes an NHRP interface or changes a LANE shortcut interface definition Delete Deletes an NHRP interface exclude list or disallowed R2R s
353. et A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new CP names Default None Description This parameter specifies the name of the CP for this APPN network node The CP is responsible for managing the APPN network node and its resources The CP name is the logical name of the APPN network node in the network The CP name must be unique within the APPN network identified by the Network ID parameter 84 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 4 Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing continued Parameter Information Parameter Enable branch extender or border node Valid Values 0 enable neither 1 enable branch extender 2 enable border node Default 0 Description This parameter specifies whether branch extender function border node function or neither will be enabled on this node If either function is enabled appropriate additional questions will be asked Parameter Permit search for unregistered LUs Valid Values Yes or No Default No Description This parameter specifies whether this node when acting as an End Node can be searched for LUs even if the LUs were not registered with the network node server of the Branch Extender If yes is specified this node can be searched for LUs Note This question is asked only if Enable Branch Extender or Border Node parameter is set to branch extender Parameter Subnet visit coun
354. eters take effect Note If you want to disable source routing or set the RIF timer to a value other than the default value use the source routing command and the set RIF timer command in the Token Ring configuration process Configuring DNA IV for X 25 The procedure to run the DNA IV protocol over X 25 circuits involves commands from the X 25 and DNA IV configuration processes 1 From the OPCON prompt enter the configuration process Go to t 6 and enter X 25 config net If this is the first time X 25 is being configured then do the following a DEFINE the router s DTE address X 25 Config gt set address b DEFINE each protocol that will be supported over X 25 X 25 Config gt add protocol IP It is usually a good idea to add this protocol so that you can verify the general X 25 configure is OK DN Note Allow protocol parameters to default c DEFINE protocol remote address to the remote X 25 address mapping for the protocols that require this X 25 Config gt add address 262 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using DNA IV for IP e IP address 128 185 247 22 e X 25 address 22 for DN e DN address 5 22 e X 25 address 22 d VERIFY that one end of the X 25 circuit is a DTE and the other end is a DCE X 25 Config gt list all Check the National Personality field for device type For a national personality type of GTE Telenet you see National Personality GTE Telenet DTE or Nati
355. etwork To set up a network filter 1 Add a network filter Use the add nfilter in command to add an input network filter to an interface Use the add nfilter out command to add an output network filter to an interface For example AP2 config gt add nfilter out Interface 0 2 First Network range number decimal 0 11 Last Network range number decimal 0 15 The network range you enter here must match the range that you assigned to that network 2 Enable the network filter that you added and make it either inclusive or exclusive Inclusive filters forward only network information in that filter Exclusive filters block only network information in a filter and they allow all other network information to be forwarded AP2 config gt enable nfilter in exc Interface 0 2 218 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 Following are some examples that explain how to set up network filters in the internet as shown in Egue 13 Zone Admin Zone Finance Network Range 16 20 Zone Service b Interface 2 Interface 2 Router B Router A Interface 3 Interface 3 Network Range 21 25 Interface 1 Zone Connect Interface 1 Network Range a te ca 11 15 one Snipping Network Range Zone Sales 6 10 Figure 13 Example of Network Filtering The following steps show how to filter Network 6 10 so that it is not visible to Network 16 20 as shown in 1 Add an output network filt
356. explain how to prepare for installation install the 2210 perform an initial configuration and verify that the installation is successful These books provide translations of danger notices and other safety information Diagnostics and Maintenance SY27 0345 IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotoco Router Service and Maintenance Manual This book is shipped with the 2210 It provides instructions for diagnosing problems with and repairing the 2210 Summary of Changes for the IBM 2210 Software Library The following list applies to changes in the software that were made in Version 3 2 The changes consist of e New functions IP Version 6 TCP6 UDP6 Telnet PING 6 and traceroute 6 ICMPv6 and IPsec Neighbor discovery protocol NDP for host auto configuration Static routes RIPng Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode PIM DM and Multicast Listener Discovery MLD Configured or automatic tunneling of IPv6 packets over IPv4 networks Support for Ethernet Token Ring and PPP interfaces Resource ReSerVation Protocol RSVP Signalling mechanisms that enable applications on IPv4 networks to reserve network resources to achieve a desired quality of service for packet delivery Supported on ATM point to point SVCs PPP Frame Relay X 25 Token Ring and Ethernet Binary Synchronous Relay BRLY support for BSC interfaces Binary Synchronous Relay BRLY support for tunneling Bisync Synchronous BSC transmissio
357. f change Only the one signals are explicitly recorded Previously called non return to zero inverted NRZI recording nonseed router In AppleTalk networks a router that acquires network number range and zone list information from a seed router attached to the same network O Open Shortest Path First OSPF In the Internet suite of protocols a function that provides intradomain information transfer An alternative to the Routing Information Protocol RIP OSPF allows the lowest cost routing and handles routing in large regional or corporate networks Open Systems Interconnection OSI 1 The interconnection of open systems in accordance with standards of the International Organization for Standardization ISO for the exchange of information T A 2 The use of standardized procedures to enable the interconnection of data processing systems Note OSI architecture establishes a framework for coordinating the development of current and future standards for the interconnection of computer systems Network functions are divided into seven layers Each layer represents a group of related data processing and communication functions that can be carried out in a standard way to support different applications Open Systems Interconnection OSI architecture Network architecture that adheres to that particular set of ISO standards that relates to Open Systems Interconnection T Open Systems Interconnection OSI referen
358. face zonename Adds a default zone name for the interface If a node on the network requests a zone name that is invalid the router assigns the default zone name to the node until another zone name is chosen If you add more than one default to an interface the last one added overrides the previous default If you do not add a default the first zone name added using the zone command is the default Example ap2config gt add defaultzone Interface 0 0 Zone name Headquarters nfilter in interface first network last network Adds a network filter to the input of the interface The network range that you enter must match the network range you set for that interface You cannot filter only a portion of a network range For example if you set a network range of 1 10 and you set up a filter for 5 8 the router filters the full network range of 1 10 Example ap2config gt add nfilter in Interface 0 0 First Network range number decimal 0 1 Last Network range number decimal 0 10 nfilter out interface first network last network Adds a network filter to the output of the interface The network range that you enter must match the network range you set for that interface You cannot filter only a portion of a network range For example if you set a network range of 1 0 and you set up a filter for 5 8 the router filters the full network range of 1 10 Example 222 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol
359. fication is done by the circuit or the system TRUE indicates verification by the circuit FALSE indicates verification by the system Subnet subnet reprt intic Displays subnet information e Subnet reprt has two options Summary and Detailed Summary displays information for all configured subnets Detailed displays information for LAN subnets only e Intfc is the interface that connects to the subnet Example list subnet summary Ifc State Type ESIS ISIS L2 Only Ext Dom Metric EIH sec IIH sec 10 3 0 On LAN Enb Enb False False 2 On X25 3 On Fr Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 321 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 lfc Indicates the interface number of the subnet State Indicates the state of the interface ON or OFF Type Indicates the type of subnet LAN X25 ESIS Indicates the state of the ES IS protocol enabled Enb or disabled Dis ISIS Indicates the state of the IS IS protocol enabled Enb or disabled Dis L2 Only Indicates if the router is operating at level 2 only yes true or no false Ext Dom Indicates if the router is operating outside the IS IS routing domain external domain Metric Indicates the cost of using this subnet EIH Indicates the interval at which ES hello messages are sent out over the subnet IIH Indicates the interval at which IS hello message are sent out over the subnet Example list subnet detailed Interface Number 0
360. fies how the router network node responds to a request from another node to establish a connection over this port When this parameter is enabled the network node accepts any request it receives from another node to establish a connection When this parameter is disabled the network node accepts connection requests only from nodes that you explicitly define via link station definitions This option provides an added level of security for the router network node Note When you disable this parameter a connection request from an adjacent node will be accepted only if the node s fully qualified CP name parameter has been configured for a link station defined on this port When this parameter is enabled the default you may still want this network node to be able to initiate connections with specific nodes over this port Parameter High performance routing HPR supported Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes for token ring Ethernet frame relay and PPP ports Description This parameter indicates whether link stations on this port will support HPR This value may be overridden on the link station definition Parameter IPv4 Precedence Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter sets the IPv4 precedence value which allows BRS precedence filtering of IPv4 encapsulated packets Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 127 APPN Configuration Commands Table 17 Configuration Par
361. filter in Interface 0 1 Zone name Admin 2 Enable the zone filters that you added This turns on the filter and controls whether the filter is inclusive or exclusive Inclusive filters forward only the zone information in that filter Exclusive filters block only the zone information in that filter For example AP2 config gt enable zfilter in exc Interface 0 1 The following are some examples that explain how to set up zone filters in the internet shown in Zone Admin Zone Finance Network Range 1 5 Interface 2 Router B Router A Interface 3 Interface 3 Network Range 21 25 Zone Connect Interface 1 Interface 1 Network Range Zone Manufacturing 11 15 Zone Shipping Network Range Zone Sales 6 10 Figure 12 Example of Zone Filtering Example 1 The following is an example of how to filter the Manufacturing zone from all other networks To do this you would set up an input filter on Interface 1 of Router A to exclude the Manufacturing zone 1 On Router A add an input zone filter to Interface 1 AP2 config gt add zfilter in Interface 0 1 Zone name Manufacturing 2 Enable the input zone filter and make the filter exclusive AP2 config gt enable zfilter in exc Interface 0 1 Chapter 3 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 217 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 This excludes Manufacturing zone information from entering Router A thereby filtering the zone from the rest of the internet
362. fine executor type DEC area define executor maximum broadcast routers 10 type area set only Causes the router to act as a level 2 router It will accept adjacencies with routers in other areas and will keep routes to all areas If it can reach other areas it will also advertise itself as a route to other areas to level 1 routers The DNA state must be set to off before changing the type type routing IV set only Causes the router to act as a level 1 router which is the default Adjacencies will be accepted only to routers in the same area The DNA state must be set to off before changing the type Example set executor state on Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 271 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands set executor maximum broadcast routers 10 module access control circuit specifier argument define only Defines access control lists which are used to restrict the forwarding of packets between certain origins and destinations Each access list is associated with one circuit and applies to DECnet Long Format Data Packets received on that circuit Access control does not apply to any routing or hello packets The arguments for the circuit specifiers include the following all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit known circuits Specifies all circuits on the router The following items are the arguments you select from after you enter the
363. fix Mapping Type Manual DTE Address Default Metric 20 Metric Type Internal State ON Frame Relay Subnet add prefix address Interface Number 0 Address Prefix Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 307 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 DTE Address Default Metric 20 Metric Type Internal State ON Note If the subnet does not exist you will receive the error message Subnet does not exist cannot define a reachable address Interface Number Defines the interface over which the address is reached Address Prefix Defines the NSAP prefix 20 bytes maximum MAC Address Defines the destination MAC address You must specify this address if the interface corresponds to a LAN subnet This prompt will only appear if the interface is connected to a LAN subnet Mapping Type Defines how the destination physical address is determined manual or X 121 If manual the protocol will prompt for the DTE address If X 121 the protocol will not prompt you for the DTE address The DTE address in this instance is extracted from the NSAP DTE Address Defines the destination DTE address You must specify this address if the interface is X 25 and the mapping type is manual This prompt only appears if the interface is configured for X 25 and the mapping type is manual Default Metric Defines the cost of the address Metric Type Defines whether the metric cost is used fo
364. fy LU Address Range s y n n Number of Implicit LUs in Pool 1 253 50 Write this record Y The record has been written TN3270E config gt TN3270E config gt add lu TN3270E Server LU Definitions LU name Max 8 characters printer1 NAU Address 2 254 0 2 Station name Max 8 characters link1 1 2 3 Class 1 Explicit Workstation 2 Implicit Workstation 3 Explicit Printer 4 Implicit Printer 3 LU Type 5 3270 printer 6 SCS printer 5 Write this record Y The record has been written TN3270E config gt TN3270E config gt list all TN3270E Server Definitions TN3270E enabled YES TN3270E IP Address 4 3 2 1 TN3270E Port Number 23 Keepalive type NOP Frequency 60 Automatic Logoff N Timeout 30 Enable IP Precedence N Link Station linkl Local Node ID 11111 Auto activate YES Implicit Pool Informationg Number of LUs 50 LU Mask Q1LU LU Name NAU addr Class Assoc LU Name Assoc printerl 2 Explicit Printer TN3270E config gt exit APPN Config gt exit Config gt Config gt p ip Internet protocol user configuration IP config gt li all Interface addresses IP addresses for each interface NAU addr intf 9 1 1 20 255 0 0 0 Local wire broadcast fill 1 intf 1 IP disabled on this interface intf 2 IP disabled on this interface Internal IP address 4 3 2 1 Routing Protocols BOOTP forwarding disabled IP Time to live 64 Source Routing enabled Echo Reply enabled
365. g 1577 net handler interface for the VNI However when the outbound path is to use a LANE shortcut a unique interface is accessed This is called the LANE Shortcut Interface LSI The LSI is different from a traditional LEC interface because it can provide more than one LAN encapsulation type that is one VC may be established using token ring encapsulation while another uses Ethernet V2 Also the LSI provides connections to more than one Emulated LAN a traditional LEC interface connects to only one ELAN When you enable NHRP an LSI is created for each ATM adapter The LSI is assigned the next available interface number and will be listed when you invoke console functions that display information about the router interfaces LANE Shortcut Interface LSI The LANE shortcuts provided by the IBM extensions to NHRP are not compatible with some LAN Emulation Client LEC and end station protocol stack implementations This section describes how these incompatibilities can arise and in some cases how they can be overcome using configuration options Paranoid LECs are devices that use the LAN Emulation Flush Protocol to verify that clients setting up Data Direct VCCs to it are actually members of its ELAN These devices will not work with NHRP shortcuts generated by LSIs since the LSI is not part of the target ELAN Note The Exclude List configuration option can be used to prevent shortcuts to Paranoid LECs as described in Exclude List
366. g Commands Example show adjacent nodes status This example shows the detailed routing information on all adjacent nodes Only nodes with one hop will be shown The node type is known and displayed for adjacent nodes only since this information is contained in hello messages only Adjacent Node Volatile Status Executor node 2 26 gato State on Physical address AA 00 04 00 1A 08 Type DEC area Node State Type Cost Hops Circuit Next Addr Node 2 14 reachable routing IV 3 1 Eth O 2 14 2 34 reachable routing IV 2 1 PPP Q 2 34 2 42 reachable nonrouting IV 2 1 PPP Q 2 42 1 22 reachable area 3 1 Eth O 1 22 show circuit command to retrieve information on the current state of the specified circuits from the volatile database The list circuit command retrieves the data that is stored in the permanent data base for circuits Syntax show Syntax list all area circuit executor known argument module argument node argument all area circuit argument executor argument module node argument circuit specifier argument Where the circuit specifiers options are the following active circuits Specifies all circuits that are currently on per the volatile database all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 277 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands known circuits Specifies all circu
367. g data by means of addressed packets so that a channel is occupied only during transmission of a packet On completion of the transmission the channel is made available for transfer of other packets I 2 Synonymous with packet mode operation See also circuit switching parallel bridges A pair of bridges connected to the same LAN segment creating redundant paths to the segment parallel transmission groups Multiple transmission groups between adjacent nodes with each group having a distinct transmission group number path 1 In a network any route between any two nodes A path may include more than one branch T 2 The series of transport network components path control and data link control that are traversed by the information exchanged between two network accessible units See also explicit route ER route extension and virtual route VR path control PC The function that routes message units between network accessible units in the network and provides the paths between them It converts the basic information units BIUs from transmission control possibly segmenting them into path information units PIUs and exchanges basic transmission units containing one or more PIUs with data link control Path control differs by node type some nodes APPN nodes for example use locally generated session identifiers for routing and others subarea nodes use network addresses for routing path cost In link state r
368. g procedure to access the APPN configuration process 1 At the prompt enter talk 6 The Config gt prompt is displayed If this prompt is not displayed press Return again 2 Enter protocol appn The APPN Config gt prompt is displayed 3 Enter an APPN configuration command APPN Configuration Command Summary Table 3 APPN Configuration Command Summary Command Help Enable Disable Set Add Function Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for specific commands if available See APPN Dependent LU Requestor Port port name Sets the following Node Traces HPR DLUR Management Tuning Adds or updates the following Port port name Link station link station name LU Name LU name Connection network connection network name Additional port to connection network Mode Focal_point local pu Routing_list COS_mapping_table See page EB EIBIEIEIBIE REBR SEJERRE Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 81 APPN Configuration Commands Talk 6 Table 3 APPN Configuration Command Summary continued Command Function See page Delete Deletes the following Port port name e Link station link station name e LU Name LU name e Connection network connection network name e Connection networks port interface CN PORTIF CN name e Mode mode name e Focal_point local pu e Routing_list e COS_mapping_table List List
369. ge State Life Type 0000 9310 04C8 AA00 0400 EF04 0 L1 L1 L2 DOWN OSI 0000 9310 04C8 AA00 0400 EF04 0 L2 L1 L2 DOWN DNAIV AAQO 0400 0504 AAOO 0400 0504 1 L2 L2 UP 5390 OSI System ID The system ID of the IS adjacency MAC Address Indicates the MAC Address of the IS adjacency Int Indicates the router s interface number that connects to the IS adjacency Level For LANs this indicates the neighbor system level from type of hello message L1 or L2 For point to point this indicates the neighbor system type L1 only otherwise L2 Usage Indicates from the hello packet circuit type L1 only L2 only or L1 and L2 State Indicates the operational state of the IS adjacency up or down Life Indicates the amount of time in seconds before discarding the last IS Hello message Type Indicates the routing protocol type of the IS adjacency OSI or DNA IV Use the is is stats command to display information associated with the ISIS protocol 336 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Syntax is is stats Example is is stats Link State Database Information no of level 1 LSPs 1 no of level 2 LSPs 0 no of L1 Dijkstra runs 21 no of L2 Dijkstra runs 0 no of L1 LSPs deleted 0 no of L2 LSPs deleted no of routing table entries allocated 6 Packet Information evel 1 lan hellos rcvd 0 level 1 lan hellos sent 10967 evel 2 lan hellos rcvd 0 level 2 lan hellos sent 10967 pnt to pnt hellos rcvd 0
370. gth of time that the information can be considered valid Valid values 1 60 minutes Default 20 minutes Example set hold Holding time in minutes 20 data rate threshold Sets the data rate threshold in packets second The datarate threshold is used when the attempt shortcuts parameter is set to Data rate When traffic is destined for a particular station but the rate is less than this threshold then the router does not attempt to establish shortcuts In other words it does not generate Next Hop Resolution Requests and send them 366 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Talk 6 to the next hop along the routed path Once the traffic rate exceeds the threshold the router tries to establish a shortcut If it can successfully create a shortcut path the path is used even if the traffic drops below the threshold The path continues to be used until the traffic stops for a period of time This is done to avoid going back and forth from the routed path to the shortcut path if traffic is sporadic Valid values Minimum 1 packet second Maximum is 5120 packets second Default 10 packets second Example set data Data rate threshold in packets second 10 extensions Sets the selected NHRP extension usage to yes or no Forward transmit NHS default no Reverse transmit NHS default no Responder Address default no Lane Shortcuts default yes Valid Values yes or no E
371. gument settings made with set or define commands Returns you to the previous command level See Exiting d Note the following information about the commands 1 The define commands do not take effect until the next time the router is started 2 The list define and purge commands modify or display data in the permanent router s Static RAM database The permanent database is stored in the configuration and remains in effect across restarts software loads and power cycles 3 The show and list commands are the most useful for monitoring the DNA IV protocol 4 Use set show and zero to modify display or clear data in the volatile database Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 265 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands 5 The zero command clears statistics saved in the volatile database but does not clear the argument settings made with set or define commands Define Set This section explains both the define and the set commands Use the define command to define access control lists and routing filters and to define circuit executor and node parameters Define is used to set SRAM needs reboot Syntax define circuit specifier executor module access control module routing filter node Set can be used for volatile RAM immediate change no reboot Syntax set circuit specifier executor node circuit specifier argument The circuit specifier
372. guration kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Ifc 0 Token Ring CSR 6000000 vector 28 54 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Ifc 1 WAN Frame Relay J CSR 81620 CSR2 80D00 vector 93 Ifc 2 WAN PPP CSR 81640 CSR2 80E00 vector 92 Ifc 3 ISDN Basic CSR 0 vector 0 Ifc 4 PPP Dial Circuit y CSR 0 vector 0 Disabled Ifc 5 PPP Dial Circuit CSR 0 vector 0 Disabled Ifc 6 Frame Relay Dial Circuit CSR 0 vector 0 Disabled kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Ifc 4 is the ALTERNATE with Ifc 1 configured as PRIMARY Note that interface 4 should be Disabled here Wan Reroute function will Enable it when the Primary fails FF F NN6 2210 06 is going the be the destination of the Wan Reroute kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt n 4 Circuit configuration FR Config gt li Base net 3 Destination name 2210 06 Circuit priority 8 Destination address subaddress 99199991201 Outbound calls allowed Idle timer 0 fixed circuit SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms Config gt ex kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxxx Configure the Wan Reroute Primary and Alternate circuit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt fea wan WAN Restoral user configuration WRS Config gt en wrs WRS Config gt add alt Alter
373. hanges please mail or fax your comments on the form for readers comments at the back of this publication At the command prompts you can obtain help in the form of a listing of the commands available at that level To do this type the help commana and then press Enter Use to list the commands that are available from the current level You can usually enter a after a specific command name to list its options For example the following information appears if you enter at the prompt BREAKPOINT DIVERT output from process FLUSH output from process HALT output from process XXV MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Summary of Changes INTERCEPT character is LOGOUT MEMORY statistics RESTART STATUS of process es TALK to process TELNET to IP Address Exiting a Lower Level Environment The multiple level nature of the software places you in secondary tertiary and even lower level environments as you configure or operate the 2210 To return to the next higher level enter the exit command To get to the secondary level continue entering exit until you receive the secondary level prompt either Config gt or For example to exit the IP protocol configuration process IP config gt exit Config gt If you need to get to the primary level OPCON enter the intercept character Ctrl P by default xxvii Summary of Changes XXViii MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 1 APPN This ch
374. haracters X25002 Enable APPN on this port Y es N oL Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Maximum number of link stations 1 239 239 Percent of link stations reserved for incoming calls 0 100 0 Percent of link stations reserved for outgoing calls 0 100 0 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written Boats APPN config gt add link APPN Station Port name for the link station x25002 Station name Max 8 characters x25svcl Limited resource Y es N o N Y Activate link automatically Y es N o N Link Type 0 PVC 1 SVC 0 1 DTE Address 0 2222 Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node or Unknown node type 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 1 Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y N CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N 70 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written Boats APPN config gt add link APPN Station Port name for the link station x25002 Station name Max 8 characters x25pvc1 Limited resource Y es N o N Activate link a Y es N o Y Link Type 0 PVC SVC 0 Logical channel tae a 4095 1 Adjacent node type APPN network node 1 APPN end node or Unknown node type 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2
375. hardware interface to which this device is attached Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 125 APPN Configuration Commands Table 17 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration continued Parameter Information Parameter Port name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters where the first character is alphabetic and the 2nd through 8th characters are alphanumeric Default Value A unique unqualified name that is automatically generated The name will consist of TR token ring EN Ethernet e DLS DLSw e P255 e ATM e FR frame relay e X25 X 25 e SDLC SDLC e PPP point to point e IP followed by the interface number You can change the port name to a name of your choice Description This parameter specifies the name representing this port Parameter Enable APPN routing on this port Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes Description This parameter specifies whether APPN routing is to be enabled on this port Parameter Support multiple PU Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether the port will support multiple subarea 126 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 17 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration continued Parameter Information Parameter Service any node Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes Description This parameter speci
376. he HPR supported parameter is enabled on this port This default overrides the value of the default LLC reply timer T1 parameter specified on the default LLC characteristics parameter Parameter Maximum number of retransmissions for HPR HPR N2 Valid Values 1 to 254 Default Value 3 Description This parameter specifies the LLC maximum number of retransmissions HPR N2 that is to be used for all link stations on this port supporting HPR when the HPR supported parameter is enabled on this port This default overrides the value of the default LLC maximum number of retransmissions N2 parameter specified on the default LLC Characteristics parameter Syntax add link station You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail Parameter Information Parameter Does link support APPN function Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description This parameter specifies whether this link station will support APPN function If the answer is no questions concerning CP CP sessions security encryption CP name adjacent node type branch extender and extended border node will not be asked and all of these functions will be disabled Also HPR will be disabled and no HPR questions will be asked Chapter 2 C
377. he LAN treating the LAN as a pseudonode A pseudonode is a method of modeling the entire LAN as a node on the network with fewer logical links Minimizing logical links throughout the domain lessens the computational complexity of the link state algorithm Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 293 Using OSI DECnet V When more than one IS exists on a LAN each IS compares the following to determine which IS will become the designated IS All ISs compare their priorities The IS with the highest priority becomes the designated IS e If the ISs have the same priority they compare their source MAC addresses The IS with the numerically highest MAC address becomes the designated IS for that LAN and is indicated through the LAN ID Link State Databases Each L1 and L2 IS contains a link state database The primary element of the database is the link state update LSU The router is responsible for building its own LSU and processing other ISs LSUs to maintain the database The L1 database contains information on ESs Each L1 database is identical for all L1 ISs in the same area The L2 database contains information on areas and reachable addresses Each L2 database is identical for all L2 ISs configured in the IS IS domain With information from the databases the Dijkstra routing algorithm calculates the shortest paths to all destinations and builds the routing tables Link State Flooding To ensure that each L1 and L2 IS maintains an identic
378. he LU class Parameter LU type Valid Values e 1 3270 Mod 2 display e 2 3270 Mod 3 display e 3 3270 Mod 4 display e 4 3270 Mod 5 display e 5 3270 printer e 6 SCS printer Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies the type of dependent LU for the LU being added Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 201 APPN Configuration Commands Table 42 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E LU continued Parameter Information Parameter Implicit pool name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z lt e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value lt DEFLT gt Description This parameter specifies the name of the implicit pool to be used in the LU definition This question is asked only if the class is an implicit workstation or implicit printer Parameter Define an associated printer Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether you want to define an associated printer Parameter Associated printer name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z and e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of the associated printer Parameter Associated printer NAU address Valid Values 2 to 254 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the NAU ad
379. he buffer manager The maximum cached directory entries parameter affects the amount of directory information that will be stored or cached to reduce the time it takes to locate a resource in the network In general tuning the APPN network node involves a trade off between node performance and storage usage The better the performance the more storage required Tuning Notes 1 The tuning parameter settings should reflect anticipated growth in your network 2 If you define connection networks within your APPN network and you anticipate that most end nodes will initiate LU LU sessions with other end nodes on the same connection network you should set the maximum number ISR sessions parameter to a smaller value 1 Using connection networks in this manner reduces the shared memory requirements for the router network node because most LU LU sessions will not flow through the APPN component in the router 3 Because the maximum shared memory parameter affects storage allocation within the router you should use care when explicitly defining this parameter Use the defaults as a guide when increasing or reducing maximum shared memory manually Node Service Traces The APPN Node Service Traces option allows you to start any APPN trace through talk 6 or the Configuration Program The traces are activated when the configuration file is applied to the router The traces will continue to be active until they are stopped when a new configurati
380. he delayed acknowledgment before its T1 expires Parameter Acknowledgments needed to increment working window Valid Values 0 to 127 Default Value 1 Description When the working window Ww is not equal to the Maximum Transmit Window Size Tw this parameter is the number of transmitted l format LPDUs that must be acknowledged before the working window can be incremented by 1 When congestion is detected by the loss of l format LPDUs Ww is set to 1 Table 22 Configuration Parameter List HPR Override Defaults Parameter Information Parameter Inactivity timer override for HPR HPR Ti Valid Values 1 to 254 seconds Default Value 2 seconds Description This parameter specifies the LLC inactivity timer HPR Ti that is to be used for all link stations on this port supporting HPR when the HPR supported parameter is enabled on this port This default overrides the value of the default LLC inactivity timer Ti parameter specified on the default LLC characteristics parameter 148 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 22 Configuration Parameter List HPR Override Defaults continued Parameter Information Parameter Reply timer override for HPR HPR T1 Valid Values 1 to 254 half seconds Default Value 2 half seconds Description This parameter specifies the LLC reply timer HPR T1 that is to be used for all link stations on this port supporting HPR when t
381. he following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 15 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Management Parameter Information Parameter Collect intermediate session information Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether the APPN node should collect data on intermediate sessions passing through this node session counters and session characteristics The data is captured in SNMP MIB variables for APPN Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 121 APPN Configuration Commands Table 15 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Management continued Parameter Information Parameter Save RSCV information for intermediate sessions Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether the APPN node should save the Route Selection control vector RSCV for an intermediate session The data is captured in an associated SNMP MIB variable for APPN The session RSCV is carried in the BIND request used to activate a session between two LUs It describes the optimum route through an APPN network for a particular LU LU session The session RSCV contains the CP names and TG associated with each pair of adjacent nodes along a route from an origin node to a destination node Parameter Create intermediate session records Valid Values Yes No
382. he network when a connection is established through a Connection Network or when an end node is made a member of a Connection Network Because the connectivity is represented by a TG from a given node to a Connection Network normal topology and routing services TRS can be used for the network node server to calculate the direct path between any two nodes attached to the SATF with TGs to the same Connection Network DLC signaling information is returned from the destination node during the normal locate process to enable the origin node to establish a connection directly to the destination node Therefore to achieve direct connectivity on an SATF instead of each node on the SATF being defined or connected to each other each node is connected to a Connection Network The Connection Network is often visualized as a virtual node on the SATF to which all other nodes are attached This model is frequently used and in fact the term Virtual Routing Node VRN is often interchanged with the term Connection Network When a connection network is defined it is named This name then becomes the CP name of the VRN and must follow all the requirements of any CP name See for a list of these requirements Restrictions e The same connection network VRN can be defined on only one LAN The same VRN can be defined on multiple ports having the same characteristics to the same LAN however e There is only one connection network TG from a given port to
383. he node number Syntax set cache size net range Chapter 4 Configuring and Monitoring AppleTalk Phase 2 227 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 node cache size value Cache size corresponds to the total number of AppleTalk networks and nodes that can simultaneously communicate through this router using the fastpath feature Fastpath is a method of precalculating MAC headers to forward packets more quickly The default is 500 which allows up to 500 networks and nodes to simultaneously communicate through the router and still use fastpath If the number of networks and nodes becomes greater than the cache size the router still forwards the packets but it does not use fastpath Valid values for cache size are 0 disable 100 to 10 000 Although not recommended setting the cache size to zero disables the fastpath feature and no memory is used for the cache You need to change this default only for very large networks Each cache size entry uses 36 bytes of memory Example ap2config gt set cache size 700 net range interface first last Assigns the network range in seed routers using the following e interface Designates the router interface to operate on e first Assigns the lowest number of the network range Legal values are 1 to 65279 10xFEFF hexadecimal e last Sets the highest number of the network range Legal values are first to 65279 A single numbered network has the sam
384. he packet and sends the sending node an error message To configure router 13 1 in Figure 18 on page 258 enter the following NCP commands and parameters NCP gt def mod routing filter circ eth 1 incoming area 7 NCP gt def mod routing filter circ eth 1 incoming state on Chapter 7 Using DNAIV 257 Using DNA IV Area 22 Area 7 Area 11 i Eth 1 lepi Eth 0 o o 162 TELS 13 4 13 5 Area 13 Figure 18 Example of Area Routing Filter for Security Blending DECnet Domains DECnet has a 16 bit node address space with a fixed hierarchy of 6 bits of area and 10 bits of node By comparison IP has a 32 bit node address space with a flexible multilevel hierarchy Many established networks have now grown to the point where they use all 63 areas The problem is that as different facilities connect to each other they want to connect their DECnet networks but cannot due to area number conflicts The only solution is to redesign the DECnet architecture This is addressed by DECnet Phase V However by using area routing filters it is possible to allow some overlap between two DECnet domains Domain is not a standard DECnet term it is used here as a name for a DECnet wide area network presumably one with many areas The goal is to blend two of these domains so that there is a common area that can reach parts of both domains However there are more than 63 areas in the union of
385. he router uses any one of its LAN interface network nodes src_node Source AppleTalk node number This is an optional parameter If not specified the router uses its interface node number on the outgoing interface leading to the destination network If the outgoing interface is an unnumbered half router PPP interface the router uses any one of its LAN interface network nodes size Number of bytes to use in the AppleTalk echo requests This is an optional parameter Default is 56 bytes rate Rate of sending AppleTalk echo requests This is an optional parameter Default is one second Note If you enter atecho with no parameters you are prompted for all the parameters Enter values for the required parameters and either enter values for the optional parameters or accept defaults Cache The cache command displays information about the cache size entries Syntax cache Example cache Destination Interface Usage Next Hop 122 22 1 1 27 5 138 51 0 1 27 5 23 7 1 1 Direct Destination AppleTalk node address network number node number Net Number of the interface used to forward to the destination node Usage Number of times this cache entry has been used in this aging period which is five seconds An unused entry is deleted after 10 seconds 230 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 AppleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Next Hop The AppleTalk address of the next hop router used to forward a packet to the
386. he service node or when a client s service node is down and an entry has been removed from the routing table database Routing Redirect Received The number of times the router received redirect packets from the service nodes Routing Response Received The number of times response packets were generated as a result of request packets initiated by the router VINES input packet overflows The number of times the VINES forwarder input queue was full when packets were received from the specified interface The packets are subsequently discarded Use the dump command to display the contents of the VINES routing and neighbor tables Syntax dump neighbor tables routing tables neighbor tables Displays information about each neighbor service and client node connected to the router Example dump neighbor tables Nbr Address Intf Metric Age secs H W Addr RIF 30622222 0001 TKR O 4 30 0000C00 95012 0035CC10 8000 Eth 0 2 120 0000C00 78221 2 Total Neighbors Nbr Address The address of the neighbor node In the above example address 30622222 0001 is a service node and address 0035CC10 8000 is a client node Intf The medium to which the neighbor node is attached Metric An estimated cost in 200 milliseconds to route the VINES packet to the neighbor node Age secs The current age in seconds for the entry If a router does not receive a routing update from a neighbor at least every 360 246 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol
387. hich the router advertisement is to be added Valid Values A numeric value identifying a network interface Default Value 0 Managed address configuration stateful Specifies whether hosts use the administered protocol for address autoconfiguration in addition to addresses autoconfigured using stateless autoconfiguration Valid Values yes or no Default Value n Other stateful configuration Specifies whether hosts use the administered protocol for autoconfiguration of other non address information Valid Values yes or no Default Value no Include link layer address with router advertisement Specifies whether to include the link layer address in the router advertisement A router may omit the link layer address in the router advertisement in order to enable inbound load sharing across multiple link layer addresses Valid Values yes or no Default Value yes Hop limit Specifies the default value to be placed in the hop limit field in the router advertisement messages sent by the router This value is used in the hop count field of the IP header for outgoing IP packets Valid Values 0 255 where 0 means unspecified by this router Default Value 0 Maximum router advertisement interval Specifies the maximum time in seconds allowed between sending unsolicited multicast router advertisements from the interface Valid Values 4 1800 seconds Default Value 600 Minimum router advertisement interval Specifies the minim
388. hm Each link e g point to point broadcast network hop has a cost Every router broadcasts to other routers only its cost and the number of hops to get to every node in its area In this way each router finds the cheapest path subject to a maximum hop count Routing Tables A router forwards any DNA IV data packet it receives to the proper node based on its routing table To maintain its routing table a router listens to and sends level 1 updates to every node in its area If the router s type is set to AREA it also exchanges level 2 routing updates Each router maintains a routing table with an entry for every node up to the maximum address and every possible next hop all circuits and up to the maximum broadcast routers Each entry in this table contains the cost and hop to reach a node via one circuit or next hop node Once a second the routing table sends out a broadcast routing timer Chapter 7 Using DNA IV 251 Using DNA IV Area Routers If the router is configured as an area router it maintains a similar database for all of the areas up to the maximum area and can exchange area routing information with other area routers Areas are handled almost exactly the same as nodes except messages give costs to areas but not nodes The areas concept results in two types of routing nodes e A level 1 router only knows about one area so it keeps track of nodes in its area Also it ignores adjacencies across areas e A
389. holding times are used to age out the entries or force refreshes Benefits of NHRP and the IBM implementation In general use of NHRP shortcuts can e Improve end to end performance by eliminating hops between routers when the source and destination are on the same NBMA network and can communicate directly e Reduce the load on network routers since they are bypassed for traffic that without NHRP would be handled by the router This can reduce overall costs as fewer routers or less bandwidth may be needed The IBM implementation of NHRP provides these additional benefits e The NHRP draft does not address using the protocol in an Emulated LAN environment However the IBM implementation of NHRP includes considerations for such environments NHRP packets can flow between routers over ELAN connections and shortcut VCs can be established e One hop Routing ATM devices that do not support NHRP can be the destination of shortcut paths eliminating another router hop for traffic by expanding the definition of the devices that are served to include devices that share a protocol subnetwork with the server For example all IP addresses on a classical IP subnet that a server is part of are served by that server The NHRP function interfaces with classical IP 1577 and LAN Emulation components to use their existing ATM address resolution capabilities and apply them to NHRP requests This enhancement can even be used for traffic to leg
390. hortcuts List Displays the NHRP configuration Set Sets NHRP parameters Exit Add Use the add command to add an explicit interface definition an exclude list entry or disallowed router to router shortcuts Syntax add interface definition exclude list disallowed router to router shortcuts interface definition Adds an explicit interface definition to either enable or disable an NHRP interface If NHRP is disabled on a particular network interface NHRP Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 361 NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Talk 6 packets are not forwarded to any routers that are reached via that interface Also incoming NHRP frames are discarded Note Any explicit interface definitions override the NHRP enabled disabled box level setting Example add int Interface Number 0 Enable NHRP Yes exclude list Adds an exclude list entry Specify a protocol address which must be excluded from the NHRP network This option adds an exclude list entry and prompts you to add the exclude list entry to the disallowed router to router shortcuts See LNHRP more information Valid values IP address and mask Default Empty Example add exc IP Address 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 5 Address Mask 255 255 255 255 Deny Shortcuts Yes Record added to Disallowed Router to Router Shortcuts Record added to Exclude List disallowed router to router shortcuts Adds a router protocol address to
391. iation guarded conduit containing the transmission medium protected against physical and radiation tapping Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter indicates the level of security protection associated with the TG If security attributes other than the architecturally defined ones are needed one of the user defined TG characteristics may be used to specify additional values Parameter Propagation delay Valid Values Minimum LAN less than 480 microseconds Telephone between 48 and 49 152 milliseconds Packet switched between 49 152 and 245 76 milliseconds Satellite greater than 245 76 milliseconds Maximum Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the approximate range for the length of time that it takes for a signal to propagate from one end of the TG to the other 166 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 25 Configuration Parameter List Modify TG Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Effective capacity Valid Values 2 hexadecimal digits in the range X 00 to X FF Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the maximum bit transmission rate for both physical links and logical links Note that the effective capacity for a logical link may be less tha
392. iation off Flow Control Negotiation off Suppress Calling Addresses off DDN Address Translation off Call Request Timer 20 decaseconds Clear Request Timer 18 decaseconds 1 retries Reset Request Timer 18 decaseconds 1 retries Restart Request Timer 18 decaseconds 1 retries Min Recall Timer 10 seconds Min Connect Timer 90 seconds Collision Timer 10 seconds Tl Timer 4 00 seconds N2 timeouts 20 T2 Timer 0 00 seconds DP Timer 500 milliseconds Standard Version 2 Network Type CCITT Disconnect Procedure passive Window Size Frame 7 Packet 2 Packet Size Default 128 Maximum 256 X 25 protocol configuration Prot Window Packet size Idle Max Station Number Size Default Maximum Time VCs Type 30 gt APPN 7 128 1024 0 4 PEER X 25 PVC configuration Prtcl X 25 address Active Enc Window Pkt_len Pkt_chan 30 APPN 6666 NONE 2 128 1 X 25 address translation configuration IF Prot Active Enc Protocol gt X 25 address 2 30 APPN NONE appn gt 6666 Boats X 25 Config gt Configuring APPN Over Frame Relay The following example shows configuration of APPN over Frame Relay nada207 Config gt p appn APPN user configuration nada207 APPN config gt add port APPN Port Link Type P PP F RAME RELAY E THERNET T OKEN RING S DLC X 25 D LSw A T IP f Interface number Default 0 0 4 Port name Max 8 characters FRO04 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any no
393. ical unit LU physical unit PU control point CP or system services control point SSCP It is the origin or the destination of information transmitted by the path control network Synonymous with network addressable unit network address According to ISO 7498 3 a name unambiguous within the OSI environment that identifies a set of network service access points network addressable unit NAU Synonym for network accessible unit network architecture The logical structure and operating principles of a computer network T Note The operating principles of a network include those of services functions and protocols network congestion An undesirable overload condition caused by traffic in excess of what a network can handle network identifier 1 In TCP IP that part of the IP address that defines a network The length of the network ID depends on the type of network class A B or C 2 A 1 to 8 byte customer selected name or an 8 byte IBM registered name that uniquely identifies a specific subnetwork Network Information Center NIC In Internet communications local regional and national groups throughout the world who provide assistance documentation training and other services to users network layer In Open Systems Interconnection OSI architecture the layer that is responsible for routing switching and link layer access across the OSI environment network management The process of plan
394. ice node is in suspended state and is advertised for 90 seconds as being down After 90 seconds the router removes the entry for this service node from the routing table The service node is in hold down state and is advertised for 2 minutes as being down After 2 minutes the router advertises the service node as operational If a service node is in suspended state and it receives an RTP packet the service node enters the hold down state After initialization the X 25 interface enters permanent state for 4 and 1 2 minutes After 4 and 1 2 minutes the neighbor enters the permanent state and its age stays at 0 while in this state If the X 25 interface goes down the entry is removed from the routing table Next Hop Nbr Addr The address of the neighbor service node that is the next hop on the least cost path to the network Nbr Intf Metric The medium to which the next hop neighbor service node is attached An estimated cost in 200 milliseconds to route the VINES packet to the destination service node Chapter 6 Configuring and Monitoring VINES 247 VINES Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Route Age secs The current age in seconds for the entry If a router does not receive a routing update about a service node that is in the routing table at least every 360 seconds 6 minutes the router removes the entry for that service node from the routing table Use the route command to view an entry from the routing tabl
395. ich use similar or different architectures at the reference model network layer 3 In OSI terminology a function that determines a path by which an entity can be reached 4 In TCP IP synonymous with gateway 5 Contrast with bridge routing 1 The assignment of the path by which a message is to reach its destination 2 In SNA the forwarding of a message unit along a particular path 464 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 through a network as determined by parameters carried in the message unit such as the destination network address in a transmission header routing domain In Internet communications a group of intermediate systems that use a routing protocol so that the representation of the overall network is the same within each intermediate system Routing domains are connected to each other by exterior links Routing Information Protocol RIP In the Internet suite of protocols an interior gateway protocol used to exchange intradomain routing information and to determine optimum routes between internet hosts RIP determines optimum routes on the basis of route metrics not link transmission speed routing loop A situation that occurs when routers circulate information among themselves until convergence occurs or until the networks involved are considered unreachable routing protocol A technique used by a router to find other routers and to remain up to date about the best way to get to reachable networks
396. icit pool add lu This command adds a specific LU You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 42 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E LU Parameter Information Parameter LU name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z and e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the LU name of the dependent LU being defined Parameter NAU address Valid Values 2 to 254 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the NAU address of the LU being defined 200 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 42 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E LU continued Parameter Information Parameter Station name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name representing either the link between the DLUR and the PU defined using the add local pu command or the subarea link over which SNA data will flow Parameter Class Valid Values 1 Explicit Workstation 2 Implicit Workstation 3 Explicit Printer 4 Implicit Printer Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies t
397. iew Bd ie aa a boa ae a ay e a GE IPv6 Comparison with IPv4 So Be Oe owe Bla ee Se te a B ee BLL IPV6 Addressingi a a 2 2 ve A eH a ele a Re ae oe a wt a BFL IPv6 Address Format 2 Bee oe amp we ee amp a 37S Text Representation of Address Prefixes Amey Rg me ow e G OLE IPv6 Header Format sos w a soa mo posom koa ee 878 IPv6 Minimum MTU pepi ja eh de ee ee te 2G IPv6 Mandatory Path MTU Discovery oo SS Ei alan 2h Ee oe amp te amp ao B79 IPv6 Mandatory Security pb ip fbb bow kk ee we ZY IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP ow 2 ke Re we ee me ee 2 3BO Router and Prefix Discovery ee es 880 Address Autoconfiguration 2 2 380 Address Resolution Behe age a ce oe a ee Se a ce va IO Neighbor aia Detection noel ty Bod See hk A wt Ok Swe 2 380 Redirect oe a o et a y a e BT IPv6 over IPv4 Tunneling toa Pe hae pot fe we Re 4 eo 2 BB Protocol Independent Multicast PIM egoa ae OR de Ta ee ee eT Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPV6 383 Accessing the IPV6 Configuration Environment 383 IPV6 Configuration Commands 2 383 Add sate 0 a ag e 8 dae oe Ape ew bo ee bee w id we amp 47988 Change 2 s a ee ee ee 887 Delete z ae et ee te ee pe ts Se ce Si a ce or a Se BBL Disable e lt b a 2 ew eee we we Rela 2 Ge ee 2 ee Se BBS Enable s e s e aee we be hoe ee be ek eG doe
398. ilt and the multicast datagram is forwarded on all other interfaces those with PIM DM active local host members and any additional interfaces added by other multicast protocols The use of rpf to validate input interfaces requires unicast routing to be symmetrical Grafting is also supported to allow hosts to dynamically join a group This grafts a branch to an already existing multicast tree removing all prune states where required to ensure the joined hosts receive the requested group multicast datagrams Due to the independent nature of PIM with respect to unicast routing protocols and the broadcast nature of PIM DM parallel paths from the source may occur and duplicate multicast data may be forwarded PIM DM uses an Assert procedure to choose the appropriate forwarding router when this occurs Preferences may be configured on routers that run different unicast routing protocols to resolve which router is desired to have precedence When unicast routing is the same unicast metric costs to the source is used to determine the best route And when all else is equal the router with the largest IP interface address is chosen as the appropriate forwarder Use the p pim command at the Config gt prompt to configure PIM parameters 382 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPV6 This chapter describes how to use the IPV6 configuration and operating commands and includes the following sections
399. implements the LU 6 2 protocols required for CP CP sessions and those used in sessions between a network node CP and its network management focal point The router implementation of APPN does not provide an application program interface to support user written LU 6 2 programs Table 1 Implementation of APPN Network Node Functions APPN Function Yes No Notes Session services and supporting functions Multiple CP CP sessions X Chapter 1 APPN 3 APPN Table 1 Implementation of APPN Network Node Functions continued APPN Function Yes No Notes Mode name to class of service COS mapping Limited resource link stations BIND segmentation and reassembly Session level security Intermediate session routing xX X X X PONI Intermediate session routing Routing of dependent LU sessions Fixed and adaptive session level pacing RU segmentation and reassembly Directory services x Xx Xx Xx x lt Broadcast searches Directed searches Directory caching Safe storage of directory services cache X Central directory server X Central directory client Registration of APPN EN LUs with network node server Definition of LEN node LUs on network node server Use of wild cards to define attached LEN node resources Accept multiple resource found conditions Network node server for DLUR EN Option set 1116 Topology and routing services x Xx NO lt x KK KK XK Topology exchange Periodic topology broadc
400. in the APPN network node Parameter Control of processes outside scope of this tower Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about the definition and activation of processes external to this APPN network node such as when the node operator facility NOF defines the external process configuration control 106 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 10 Configuration Parameter List Node Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Monitoring existence of processes services towers Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about requests that start or stop the monitoring of processes or services within the APPN network node Parameter Distributed environment control Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about requests within the APPN network node that define subsystems and create environments Parameter Process to service dialogs Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enabl
401. ination NSAP Use the subnets command to display information on all operational subnets Subnets that are down or disabled will not be listed Syntax subnets Example subnets L2 Hdw Int Circ Only ES IS IS IS L1DR LiPri L2DR L2pri Cost Ext PPP 2 2 3 N y Eth 0 0 1 N Y y Y 64 N 64 20 N Hdw The type and instance of the network that connects to the subnet Int The router s interface number that connects to the subnet Cire The circuit assigned ID for the ISIS protocol L2 only Whether this router is a level 2 router only Y yes or N no ES IS The ES IS protocol is enabled on the subnet Y or N IS IS The IS IS protocol is enabled on the subnet Y or N L1DR This router is the level 1 designated router for this subnet Y or N L1Pri The subnet s level 1 priority for becoming the designated router L2DR_ This router is the level 2 designated router for this subnet Y or N L2Pri The LAN subnet s level 2 priority for becoming the designated router Cost The cost of the circuit Ext Whether the subnet is operating outside the IS IS routing domain external Toggle Alias No Alias Traceroute Use the toggle alias no alias command to enable or disable the NSAP alias display function for the OSI protocol Syntax toggle Example toggle Alias substitution is ON Use the traceroute command to track the path an OSI packet takes to a destination Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 343 OSI
402. include trace data about module entry and exit information from the rapid transport control component Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 113 APPN Configuration Commands Table 12 Configuration Parameter List Module Entry and Exit Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Resource manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about module entry and exit information from the resource manager component Parameter Session manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about module entry and exit information from the session manager component Table 13 Configuration Parameter List General Component Level Traces Parameter Information Parameter Accounting services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the accounting services component Parameter Address space manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When
403. indicated to network management programs 2 An initial value from which a counter is decremented to 0 or a value to which a counter is incremented or decremented from an initial value throughput class In packet switching the speed at which data terminal equipment DTE packets travel through the packet switching network time to live TTL A technique used by best effort delivery protocols to inhibit endlessly looping packets The packet is discarded if the TTL counter reaches 0 timeout 1 An event that occurs at the end of a predetermined period of time that began at the occurrence of another specified event l 2 A time interval allotted for certain operations to occur for example response to polling or addressing before system operation is interrupted and must be restarted token 1 In a local area network the symbol of authority passed successively from one data station to another to indicate the station temporarily in control of the transmission medium Each data station has an opportunity to acquire and use the token to control the medium A token is a particular message or bit pattern that signifies permission to transmit T 2 In LANs a sequence of bits passed from one device to another along the transmission medium When the token has data appended to it it becomes a frame token ring 1 According to IEEE 802 5 network technology that controls media access by passing a token special packet or frame
404. ine only Defines routing filters which are used to restrict the sending of Area routes by level 2 Executor Type Area routers all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit known circuits Specifies all circuits on the router The following items are the direction options you select from after you enter the define module routing filter command and the circuit specifier incoming Affects the filter on routing information received on this circuit outgoing Affects the filter on routing information sent on this circuit The following items are the arguments you select from after you enter the define module routing filter command and the circuit specifier area area list Specifies that the filter allows routing information to pass for the set of areas in the area list The area list is a comma separated list of areas or ranges of areas A range is specified by two area numbers separated by a dash The area list can also be none specifying that information will be passed on no areas The following are area list examples 1 4 9 60 Areas 1 4 9 and 60 1 7 9 13 23 Areas 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 and 23 state on Specifies that the filter is active state off Specifies that the filter is disabled but continues to be stored in the permanent database The only way to remove the filter is by using the purge command Example define module routing filter circuit e
405. information on the current state of the volatile database for DNA with the show executor command The list executor command retrieves the data which is stored in the permanent data base for DNA The following lists the subcommand options or arguments you select from after you enter the show list executor command characteristics The detailed information on the settings of all of the adjustable arguments of the routing database counters Gives the global event and error counters for DNA There are no permanent counters so the list executor counters command is irrelevant status Gives key information on the state of DNA summary Gives a brief summary on the state of DNA This is the default Example show executor Node Volatile Summary Executor node State Identification 2 26 gato on DECnet MC68360 V1 R2 0 NP00523 P10 Example show executor characteristics This example shows the full configuration of the router s database The list executor characteristics command produces essentially the same display Node Volatile Characteristics Executor node 2 26 gato State Identification Physical address on DECnet MC68360 V1 R2 0 NP00523 P10 AA 00 04 00 1A 08 Type DEC area Routing version V2 0 0 Broadcast routing timer 180 Maximum address 64 Maximum cost 1022 Maximum hops 30 Maximum visits 63 Maximum area 63 Max broadcast nonrouters 64 Max broadcast routers 280 MRS V3 2 Protocol Co
406. ing APPN 211 APPN Monitoring Commands Table 50 TN3270E Monitoring Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for List memory e Pools e Pools pool name e Status e Connections e Connections LU name e Connections IP address e Maps e Ports Exit Returns you to the previous command Exiting a Lower evel Command Function List pools Displays a table of pools in the active state List pools poo name Displays details about the specific pool name List status Displays the status of the TN3270E Server List connections Displays all the connections currently active List connections jp address Displays all the connections currently active that originate from the specified IP address List connections u pool name Displays all the connections currently active that are associated with the specified LU name or Pool name List maps Displays the active client IP address to LU name mapping in the device List ports Displays all active ports that the TN3270E Server is listening to 212 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 3 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 This chapter describes the AppleTalk Phase 2 AP2 configuration commands and includes the following sections Basic Configuration Procedures This section outlines the initial steps required to get the AppleTalk Phase 2 protocol up and running Information o
407. ing List Configuration Parameter Information Parameter Routing list name Valid Values Character string up to 20 characters in length with no imbedded blanks Mixed case and special characters are allowed Default Value Blank Description This parameter identifies a specific routing list for modification listing or deletion by the configuration code It is not used by the operational code Up to 255 routing lists may be configured depending upon availability of configuration memory Case is respected Parameter Subnet visit count Valid Values 1 to 255 Default Value Default taken from corresponding node level parameter Description This parameter specifies how many networks a locate search procedure may traverse Parameter Dynamic routing list updates Valid Values 0 none 1 full 2 limited Default Value Default value taken from corresponding node level parameter Description This parameter controls whether entries can be automatically added to the node s temporary subnet routing list It can be set to the same values as the analogous node level parameter If this function is enabled the automatically added entries are only added to the temporary copy of the routing list 188 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 37 Configuration Parameter List Routing List Configuration continued Parameter Information Parameter Enable routing list optimiza
408. ing packets along the routed path and NHRP successfully obtains a shortcut VC NHRP will update the router function to send the packet directly over the shortcut VC NHRP updates the routing function s forwarding table after the VC is up This allows the switch from routed path to the shortcut path to occur without any packet loss When an NHRP shortcut is used the router transmits frames to a next hop address on a subnetwork that the router itself is not a part of So the NET or interface that provides the outbound path for the traffic is called a virtual network interface Virtual Network Interface VNI Normally outbound packet flow from a router is constrained by the following e Inability to send packets directly to network addresses that are not defined on a network interface e Inability to send packets to network types for example token ring ELAN unless that network type is defined on a network interface The Virtual Network Interface VNI net handler removes all of these constraints which allows the router to forward packets directly to next hops obtained via NHRP shortcut routes It enables one hop routing where NHRP shortcut routes can be made directly to devices that do not support NHRP The VNI supports token ring Ethernet V2 and Ethernet DIX ELAN network interfaces and classic IP network interfaces When the outbound path is to use a classic IP 1577 interface the implementation actually uses the existin
409. ink topristn will show link station definitions APPN config gt act kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Configuring a Negotiable Point To Point SDLC Station kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt set data sdlc 1 Config gt n 1 SDLC user configuration SDLC 1 Config gt set link role negotiable SDLC 1 Config gt list link will show link configuration SDLC 1 Config gt ex Config gt CTRL p restart Are you sure you want to restart the gateway Yes or No yes t 6 Config gt p appn APPN user configuration APPN config gt add port sdic APPN Port Interface number Default 0 0 1 Port name Max 8 characters SDLC001 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list port sd1c001 will show port definitions APPN config gt add link sd1c0 1 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters TOREMSTN Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Station address 1 fe C1 Note Cl may be used if this station is becoming a secondary station Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP n
410. ion When switched on the router generates checksums for all sourced ES IS packets Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 327 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 ES IS Init Option When switched on the router sends a directed IS Hello to a new ES neighbor IS IS Authentication If switched on each IS IS packet includes the transmit password configured for the domain area and circuits Also no checking against receive passwords is done timers Configures the OSI timers excluding any circuit timers Example set timers Complete SNP 10 sec Partial SNP 2 sec Minimum LSP Generation 30 sec Maximum LSP Generation 900 sec Minimum LSP Transmission 5 sec Minimum Broadcast LSP Transmission 33 msec Waiting Time 60 sec Designated Router ISIS Hello 1 sec Suggested ES Configuration Timer sec 10 Complete SNP Selects the interval between the generation of complete sequence number PDUs SNP by the designated router on a broadcast circuit Partial SNP Selects the minimum interval between sending partial sequence number PDUs SNP Minimum LSP Generation Selects the minimum interval between successive generations of Link State Packets LSPs with the same LSP ID generated by the router Maximum LSP Generation Selects the maximum interval between LSPs generated by the router Minimum LSP Transmission Selects the minimum interval between retransmissions of a LSP Minimu
411. ion Commands Summary Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 183 185 186 186 188 191 194 194 197 200 203 204 205 206 206 208 209 212 221 xiii 52 AppleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Command aig a ee er ee 53 Vines IP Header Fields Summary io at ke des ee t s GZS 54 Client and Service Node VINES ARP States Ao Spe ee OW 55 VINES Configuration Commands Summary 244 56 VINES Monitoring Command Summary 245 57 DNA IV and DNA V Algorithm Considerations 261 58 NCP Configuration and Monitoring Commands 265 59 IS IS Multicast Addresses ioe Bog Shae we be g o te 2 288 60 OSI Configuration Commands Summary maaa Han eee ae es es OD 61 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Summary 330 62 NHRP Configuration Command Summary oh a eo ae g Og 63 NHRP Advanced Configuration Command Summary oe a amp a 2361 64 NHRP Monitoring Command Summary 869 65 NHRP Config Parameter Summary 2 2 2 878 66 IPV6 Configuration Command Summary cb ew amp amp we BBS 67 Update Packet filter Configuration Command Summary Age oy a aw a BOF 68 IPv6 Monitoring Command Summary a 398 69 NDP Configuration Command Summary 405 70 NDP Monitoring Command Summary 410 71 PIM Configuration Command Summary 411 72
412. ion in group poll list Yes or No no Enter max packet size 2048 Enter receive window 7 Enter transmit window 7 SDLC 1 Config gt list station all Address Name Status Max BTU Rx Window Tx Window C1 SDLC_C1 ENABLED 2048 7 7 SDLC 1 Config gt ex Config gt CTRL p restart Are you sure you want to restart the gateway Yes or No yes t 6 Config gt p appn APPN user configuration APPN config gt add port sdic APPN Port Interface number Default 0 0 1 Port name Max 8 characters SDLC001 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list port sdlc001 will show port definitions APPN config gt add link sd1c001 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters TOPRISTN Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Note Y to accept activation from the primary or negotiable station Station address 1 fe C1 Adjacent node type 0 APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 Chapter 1 APPN 67 APPN Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list l
413. is configuration requires two connection network definitions since there are two SATFs The DLCI number specified on the ports can be the same or different The BDA MAC address must be defined on the connection network definition The BNI MAC address specified on the ports can be the same or different 46 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN CNA APPN APPN _ APPN Bridge He gt on VRN BNI 1 node M BNI 1 POLO ie Logical view APPN node Figure 9 Single Connection Network using Bridging with One Frame Relay Port Notes 1 The BDA address is not defined on the connection network definition Example 5 DLCI 1 CNA APPN cp APPN C Bridge BNI 1 gt phi E ZOI BNI 1 X BNI 1 BNI 1 i DECI 1 Logical view APPN node Figure 10 Single Connection Network Using Bridging with Multiple Frame Relay Ports Notes 1 The same DLCI number must be specified on both ports 2 The same BNI MAC address SAP pair must be specified on both ports 3 No BDA MAC address is specified on the connection network definition 4 If the APPN node initiates the connection to the device the APPN port chosen for the connection depends upon which port responds first to the test frame Example
414. ish a shortcut VC by building a Next Hop Resolution Request and sending it to the next hop station N No Never try to establish a shortcut Using this option essentially disables the client function in the router This setting might be used in an intermediate router one that is not an entry point into the NBMA network for routed traffic to eliminate the domino effect where traffic following the routed path triggers NHRP Resolution Requests at each NHRP router along the path Data rate Try to establish a shortcut only after the datarate threshold is reached Note This setting can prevent the creation of VCCs for one time traffic such as SNMP traps that are sent to an SNMP manager Default Data rate Example set attempt Try shortcut VCs Yes No Data rate Data rate holding time Sets the holding time in minutes The holding time parameter is used for these functions e When the router responds to a Next Hop Resolution Request with information about itself that is the router is to become the next hop shortcut the holding time is sent to the requestor as the length of time that the information can be considered valid e When the router responds to a Next Hop Resolution Request with information about another NBMA station that was not learned using NHRP for example the destination station is an ATM device with an IP address on one of the device subnets the holding time is sent to the requestor as the len
415. istics to be associated with Data VCCs Bandwidth is not reserved for best effort traffic Peak Cell Rate of outbound Data VCCs kbps Specifies the Peak Cell Rate PCR traffic parameter for the Data VCCs Sustained Cell Rate of outbound Data VCCs Kbps Specifies the Sustained Cell Rate SCR traffic parameter for the Data VCCs Use ATM adapter s burned in MAC address for source You can use as the source MAC address for LANE shortcuts 1 The adapter s universally administered MAC address 2 The MAC address supplied in the NHRP resolution reply 3 The MAC address you configured by specifying a MAC address using the change nhrp command See ATM and LAN Emulation in Software User s Guide for further information Note It is recommended that you use the default values until you have determined the specific processing options required by your environment List Use the list command to display the NHRP configuration information Syntax list all exclude list disallowed router to router shortcuts interface definitions cache size all Displays the entire NHRP configuration Example li all Output is the same as for the list command See exclude list Displays the exclude list entries Example 1i exc List of NHRP IP exclude records s Mask of 255 255 255 255 364 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Set NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Talk 6 disallowed router to router shortcuts Displays disa
416. ital Equipment Corporation systems together for resource sharing distributed computation or remote system configuration DECnet network implementations follow the Digital Network Architecture DNA model default Pertaining to an attribute condition value or option that is assumed when none is explicitly specified I dependent LU requester DLUR An APPN end node or an APPN network node that owns dependent LUs but requests that a dependent LU server provide the SSCP services for those dependent LUs designated router A router that informs end nodes of the existence and identity of other routers The selection of the designated router is based upon the router with the highest priority When several routers share the highest priority the router with the highest station address is selected destination node The node to which a request or data is sent destination port The 8 port asynchronous adapter that serves as a connection point with a serial service destination service access point DSAP In SNA and TCP IP a logical address that allows a system to route data from a remote device to the appropriate communications support Contrast with source service access point SSAP device A mechanical electrical or electronic contrivance with a specific purpose digital 1 Pertaining to data that consist of digits T 2 Pertaining to data in the form of digits A 3 Contrast with analog Digital Network Archi
417. itiate a connection to the APPN NN they must define a link station in the APPN NN in the device and specify e BAN DLCI MAC address if the device connecting the token ring to the frame relay network is performing the BAN function e The Boundary Node Identifier MAC address if the device connecting the token ring to the frame relay network is a bridge Bridge or sth TR J BAN device a lee Berea APPN NN i No APPN sacs APPN EN Figure 4 Logical View with Frame Relay Bridged Frame BAN Connection Network Support Note In this diagram and in all the following Frame Relay BAN diagrams the APPN resides in the 2210 Defining connections between all possible pairs of nodes attached to the SATF results in a large number of definitions and a large number of topology database update flows on the network APPN allows nodes to become members of a connection network to represent their attachment to the SATF Figure 5 on page 44 shows all nodes as members of the same connection network Nodes use the connection network to establish communication with all other nodes removing the necessity of creating connections to all other nodes on the SATF To become a member of a connection network an APPN node s port must be attached to a connection network by defining a connection network interface When the port is activated a connection network TG is created by the APPN component to a 44 MRS V3 2 Pr
418. itions from reusable model LU definitions instead of using predefined LUs The LU definitions are replaced or changed each time the device containing the LU s powers on or notifies that it is enabled and startable The DDDLU capability requires some minor changes in VTAM and depends on the activation of the physical unit PU being done by a format 1 ACTPU This format 1 ACTPU can carry the PU Capabilities Control Vector and should be sent only to devices that send an XID3 with byte 10 bit 3 set to 1 this PU supports format 1 ACTPU The PU Capabilities Control Vector will tell whether the sending node supports unsolicited NMVTs network management vector transport for Reply Product Set ID PSID If unsolicited NMVTs for Reply PSID are supported DDDLU can be achieved The Reply PSID NMVT contains the local address of each LU a power on off indicator the machine type and model number of the device and optionally other device dependent information needed to define the logical units VTAM uses this information to choose an appropriate model LU definition statement to build an LU definition TN3270E Server The TN3270E Server provides a TN3270 gateway function for TN3270 clients that are downstream of a SNA host running a 3270 application These clients connect to the server using a TCP connection This connection is mapped to a SNA dependent LU LU session that the server maintains with the SNA host The TN3270E Server handles the conver
419. itly or implicitly it will notify all its served end nodes including served branch extender nodes of the focal point name If the session between the router entry point and its primary focal point fails the router can initiate a session with a designated backup focal point Before initiating a session with a backup focal point the router entry point makes an attempt to reestablish communication with its primary focal point if the router has been assigned session re establishment responsibility If that attempt fails the router switches to the backup focal point Note The router will attempt to establish a session with the backup focal point or will attempt to re establish the session with the primary focal point only if the router has an alert to send After switching to a backup focal point the router will periodically attempt to re establish its session with the primary focal point The interval between attempts is doubled each time an attempt fails until a maximum interval of one day is reached From that point on the attempt is performed daily Notes 1 If the focal point is explicit and the explicit focal point retains the re establishment responsibility for itself this retry mechanism is disabled 2 If the focal point is explicit and assigns re establishment responsibility to the router the router will attempt to reestablish communication until the next restart of APPN in the router The router entry point communicates
420. its on the router The following items are the subcommand options you select from after you enter the command and the circuit specifier characteristics Provides detailed information on all of the argument settings for the circuit counters Shows counters for the circuit status Shows detailed information on the circuit from the volatile database summary Shows summary information on the circuit from the volatile database This is the default if no argument is supplied Example show all circuits Circuit Volatile Summary Circuit State Adjacent Node X25 0 on 5 25 Eth 0 on 1 22 Eth 0 2 14 Eth 0 1 13 PPP O off Example list circuit eth 0 characteristics Circuit Permanent Characteristics Circuit Eth 0 State On Cost 4 Router priority 64 Hello timer 15 Maximum routers 16 Router type Standard Example show active circuits status Active Circuit Volatile Status Circuit State Adjacent Block Node Size Eth 0 on 1 22 1498 Eth 0 2 14 1498 Eth 0 1 13 1498 X25 0 on 5 25 1498 Example show all circuits characteristics This example shows the current characteristics of the circuits on this machine This includes all of the configuration arguments as well as the current adjacencies and the Listen timer three times the adjacency s hello timer Circuit Volatile Characteristics Circuit Eth 0 State on Designated router 2 26 Cost 4 Router priority 64 Hello time
421. ity in the network route 1 An ordered sequence of nodes and transmission groups TGs that represent a path from an origin node to a destination node traversed by the traffic exchanged between them 2 The path that network traffic uses to get from source to destination route bridge A function of an IBM bridge program that allows two bridge computers to use a telecommunication link to connect two LANs Each bridge computer is connected directly to one of the LANs and the telecommunication link connects the two bridge computers route extension REX In SNA the path control network components including a peripheral link that make up the portion of a path between a subarea node and a network addressable unit NAU in an adjacent peripheral node See also explicit route ER path and virtual route VR Route Selection control vector RSCV A control vector that describes a route within an APPN network The RSCV consists of an ordered sequence of control vectors that identify the TGs and nodes that make up the path from an origin node to a destination node router 1 A computer that determines the path of network traffic flow The path selection is made from several paths based on information obtained from specific protocols algorithms that attempt to identify the shortest or best path and other criteria such as metrics or protocol specific destination addresses 2 An attaching device that connects two LAN segments wh
422. ity to include trace data about general information from the directory services component Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 115 APPN Configuration Commands Table 13 Configuration Parameter List General Component Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter HPR path control Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the HPR path control component Parameter LUA RUI Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the LUA RUI component Parameter Management services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the management services component Parameter Node operator facility Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about general information from the node operator facility component 116 M
423. k Specific Size Limits Given the information in the previous section the maximum amount of network layer data supported by each data link layer network interface can be determined Table 77 lists the default maximum packet sizes for common interface types Table 77 Default Network Specific Maximum Packet Size Network Type Data Network Layer max Length of Network Information Link packet size bytes Header Trailer Token Ring 4 Mbps 2052 22 0 Token Ring 16 Mbps 2052 22 0 Ethernet 1500 18 4 PPP 2046 2 0 Frame Relay 2048 variable 2 For Frame Relay interfaces you configure the maximum frame size not the network layer maximum packet size To determine the maximum network layer packet size for a protocol see the description of the set frame size command in the aT entitledCon Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 435 Packet Sizes Note You can change the maximum packet size for interfaces other than Ethernet Use the network command from the Config gt prompt to access the interface s configuration commands The maximum packet size is the maximum amount of data the protocol forwarder can pass to the device Note These numbers correspond to the MTUs in 4 2 BSD UNIX For an IP packet this includes the IP header the UDP or TCP header and all data The packet size in use is displayed when the router s GWCON memory command is used The Pkt size is the Network layer packet size The Hdr header and Tir
424. k node Since this name becomes the CP name of the virtual routing node VRN the name must be unique among all CP and LU names in the APPN network same as in the local Control Point Name All nodes that are members of a given connection network must use the same VRN Name The fully qualified VRN Name CP name of VRN has the form NetworkID ConnectionNetworkName where NetworkID is this router network node s network identifier Parameter Port name Valid Values A unique unqualified name that is automatically generated by the Command Line The name will consist of e TR token ring EN Ethernet Default Value Unqualified name generated by the Command Line Description This parameter specifies the name representing this port When the connection network that the port is being added to is IP only ports that IP is defined to have an interface on will be permitted to be added to the IP CN At least one real port that has IP defined must be added to the IP CN for the CN to become active and to be used Syntax add focal_point You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 185 APPN Configuration Commands will be shown in square brackets Table 35 Configuration Parameter List APPN Implicit Focal Point Parameter Information Parameter focal point
425. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xA20RT PATH PID 1 DLURNAME GREEN DLCADDR 1 C SDLCNS DLCADDR 2 X 5353 port name DLCADDR 3 X C1 Eyerstation address kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Below is Frame Relay kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xA20RT PATH PID 2 DLURNAME GREEN DLCADDR 1 C FRPVC DLCADDR 2 X 4652303033 port name DLCADDR 3 X 04 SAP address DLCADDR 4 X 0024 DLCI kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Below is Frame Relay BAN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xA20RT PATH PID 3 HF DLURNAME GREEN DLCADDR 1 C FRPVC DLCADDR 2 X 4652303033 port name DLCADDR 3 X 04 SAP address DLCADDR 4 X 0024 flxxDLCI DLCADDR 6 X 400000000001 f MAC addr kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Below is DLSw kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A20RT PATH PID 3 DLURNAME GOLD DLCADDR 1 C TR DLCADDR 2 X 444C53323534 4 port name DLCADDR 3 X 04 k SAP address DLCADDR 4 X 400000000001 j MAC address e HF kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xx Below is Token Ring kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xPATHT20 PATH PID 1 DLURNAME RED DLCAD
426. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xPU21LU1 LU LOCADDR 2 11 APPN Chapter 1 APPN 11 APPN PU2Z1LU2 LU LOCADDR 3 PU2Z1LU3 LU LOCADDR 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Notes J The difference between PU statement coding is For 2 0 definitions the PU statement has IDBLK IDNUMB For 2 1 definitions the PU statement has CPNAME j Port name in ASCII defined on the router and used by DSPU SAP of DSPU noncanonical except for Ethernet LEJ Station address for SDLC u DLC must have 4 digits because it is a half word ij MAC address of the DSPU noncanonical for frame relay BAN MAC address of the DSPU noncanonical except for Ethernet MAC address which is canonical y DLSw appears to VTAM like a token ring DLC ij Protocol identifier g Destination DTE address 000566666 where 00 is fixed 05 is the length of the DTE address 66666 is the DTE address Uy Logical channel number It must have 4 digits because it is a halfword iJ LU coding See for an example of an internal PU path statement APPN Connection Network When nodes are attached to a shared access transport facility SATF any to any connectivity is possible This any to any connectivity allows direct connections between any two nodes eliminating routing through intermediate network nodes and
427. l Institute of Standards and Technology NIST administers NSAP addresses and determines how the addresses are assigned and interpreted within their domain If desirable these authorities may further partition the domain into subdomains and designate corresponding authorities to administer them There are two NSAP addresses within the NPDU a destination address and a source address Each address can vary in length from 2 octets to 20 octets and is usually represented in hexadecimal notation The following is an example of a 6 octet NSAP that can be entered in the OSI configuration of the router AA000400080C Because the address length is variable portions of the PDU header called Destination Address Length Indicator and Source Address Length Indicator are used to indicate the length in octets of each address An NSAP address consists of two parts an Initial Domain Part IDP and a Domain Specific Part DSP as shown in Figure 21 IDP DSP AFI IDI Figure 21 NSAP Address Structure IDP The IDP consists of two parts the Authority and Format Identifier AFI and the Initial Domain Identifier IDI 286 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DSP Using OSI DECnet V The AFI specifies the type of IDI and the network addressing authority responsible for allocating the values of the IDI The IDI specifies both the network addressing domain from which the values of the DSP are allocated and the network addressing authori
428. l routing table contains entries to reachable address prefixes that also lead to other domains If the external routing table contains a match the packet is forwarded along the path to the appropriate domain If no match exists the packet is dropped Refer to Eloternal and e X ngi for a detailed explanation of the internal and external routing tables Routing Metric A routing metric is a value associated with a function of the circuit to indicate the cost of routing over that circuit For example the routing metric based on the monetary expense of a circuit would use a low number to indicate a low monetary expense and high number to indicate a high monetary expense of routing a packet over that circuit The IS IS routing protocol uses four routing metrics default metric delay metric expense metric and an error metric The current implementation of the OSI protocol uses the IS IS default metric only The default metric by convention is intended to measure the circuits capacity to handle traffic All ISs in the routing domain must be capable of calculating routes based on the default metric The other routing metrics are optional Though they are not used by this implementation of the OSI protocol they are described below for informational purposes only e The delay metric measures the transit delay of the associated circuit e The expense metric measures the monetary cost of utilizing the associated circuit e The error me
429. ld send routers only for areas 1 and 2 on the Ethernet You can filter on both ends of an adjacency This adds an extra layer of security against accidental reconfiguration However if you set up only one end for filtering then only that end filters Given these filters the two domains cannot contaminate each other However for a node in the intersection it is not clear which area 3 will be reached when a connection is attempted to node 3 4 It depends on the current route and the circuit costs Clearly this is not ideal It does not matter that there might only be a node 3 4 in domain A and not in domain B Routing between areas is done solely on the basis of area only the routers inside an area know the routes to nodes in that area Thus you must establish a second set of filters to decide which instance of an area domain A or B is reachable from the intersection for each area not in the intersection Therefore you could decide that nodes in the intersection could reach areas 3 and 4 in domain A and area 5 in domain B In the example this would be Chapter 7 Using DNA IV 259 Using DNA IV 260 done by configuring routers 1 18 and 2 21 to only accept routes to areas 3 4 6 and 8 from domain A Routers 2 17 and 2 21 would only accept routes for areas 5 and 9 from domain B Therefore nodes in the intersection see a universe that contains areas 1 and 2 from the intersection areas 3 4 6 and 8 from domain A and areas 5 and 9
430. led You can change the following parameters using the router talk 6 gt interface as well as the Configuration Program time cost byte cost user defined TG characteristics 1 3 effective capacity propagation delay security Calculating APPN Routes Using TG Characteristics The APPN route calculation function uses a COS definition for TGs which is a table containing rows of TG characteristic ranges Each row defines a given range for each of the eight TG characteristics and the corresponding TG weight for that row APPN starts at the top of the table and continues down the table until all eight of the TG characteristic parameter values fit within the ranges given for that row APPN then assigns the weight of that row as the TG weight for that link There is also a COS definition for nodes that calculates a node s weight The route calculation function continues until it has found the path with the least combined weight of TGs and nodes This is the least weight route As an example of how TG characteristics are used to influence the selection of a route through an APPN network node suppose that a route from network node router A to network node router D can pass through either network node router B or router C In this example router A defines serial port PPP connections to both router B and router C However the connection from router A to router B is a 64 Kbps link while the connection from router A to router C is a slower speed 1
431. led or disabled See P P Se in the on ed for additional information about IP security 1 Use the add packet command at the IPv6 Config gt prompt to add a packet filter 2 Use the update packet command at the IPv6 Config gt prompt to update the packet filter 3 Use the add access command at the Packet filter filter_name Config gt prompt to add access controls Chapter 13 Using IP Version 6 IPv6 379 Using IPv6 4 Use the set acc on command at the IPv6 Config gt prompt to enable access control IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP IPv6 uses NDP to perform autoconfiguration NDP allows IPv6 nodes on the same link to discover each other s presence to determine each other s link layer addresses to find routers and to maintain reachability information about the paths to active neighbors NDP is supported on the following media types e Ethernet e Token Ring e FDDI PPP e IP64 Tunnel e LCS Router and Prefix Discovery Hosts use Router Discovery to discover routers that reside on an attached link Each router periodically multicasts a Router Advertisement packet if configured announcing its availability Router advertisements contain a list of prefixes used for on link determination and autonomous address configuration Hosts can use the advertised on link prefixes to determine when a packets destination is on the link or beyond a router Address Autoconfiguration Router advertisements a
432. level 2 router keeps an area routing database and can have cross area adjacencies Level 2 routers advertise routes to all other areas so level 1 routers send all foreign area traffic to the level 2 routers End nodes simply pass packets on to a router A level 2 router that can reach other areas advertises a route to node 0 within its area When level 1 routers need to send a packet to another area they route it toward the closest node 0 This is not necessarily the best route to that area From there the level 2 routing algorithm sends the packet to its destination area Configuring Routing Parameters In each system you can set the following routing parameters e Maximum number of nodes in the area e Maximum number of routers adjacent to this router e Maximum number of networks on any given node e Maximum number of end nodes one hop away from this end node e Cost of a hop on each network to which this node is attached e Values of several timers involved in sending hello messages and expecting them from other nodes IBM s Implementation of DNA IV The main user interface program for the router s implementation of DNA IV is called NCP The router s NCP is a limited subset of the DECnet Network Control Program NCP commands The router s NCP enables you to view and modify the various operating arguments of DNA IV and to read various DNA specific counters Some of the features of the router s NCP include the following e N
433. licit Focal Point A focal point is a node with centralized management responsibility The managing node can contact the managed node router and establish a management session The managing node is then an explicit focal point When the name of the managing node is configured at the router and the router can initiate a management session the managing node is an implicit focal point You can configure a single primary implicit focal point with up to eight backup implicit focal points where each focal point is a fully qualified network name The router will attempt to contact each focal point in order until a successful management session is established If the management session is with a backup implicit focal point the device will periodically attempt to reestablish its session with the primary implicit focal point Chapter1 APPN 19 APPN The interval between attempts is doubled each time an attempt fails until a maximum interval of one day is reached From that point on the attempt is performed daily Note If an explicit focal point initiates a management session with a device it will cause a session with an implicit focal point to terminate Dynamic Definition of Dependent LUs DDDLU The dynamic definition of dependent LUs DDDLU is a VTAM facility that allows the logical units to be Known by VTAM when they connect to VTAM rather than during the major node activation of the related PU With this support VTAM builds LU defin
434. lists This is the default Example show module access control circuit eth 0 counters Example list module access control circuit eth 0 counters Module Access Control Volatile Counters Circuit Eth 0 6337 Seconds since last zeroed 0 Packets processed 0 Packets rejected 0 Access control loop iterations module routing filter circuit specifier argument Lists the DECnet area routing filters that have been defined in the permanent database for the router all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit 282 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands known circuits Specifies all circuits on the router The following items are the arguments you select from after you enter the show list module routing filter command and the circuit specifier status Shows detailed information on the routing filters including the area list summary Shows summary information on the state of the routing filters This is the default Example show module routing filter circuit eth 0 status Example list module routing filter circuit eth 0 status Zero Use the zero command to clear circuit counters in the volatile database global counters in the volatile database and counters in the access control list module Syntax zero circuit specifier executor module access control circuit specifier circuit specifier all circuits Specifies all circuits on
435. lk Phase 2 protocol Syntax enable ap2 checksum interface nfilter in nfilter out split horizon routing zfilter ap2 Enables the AppleTalk Phase 2 packet forwarder over all of the interfaces Example ap2config gt enable ap2 checksum Specifies that the router will compute the checksum in packets it generates The router checksums all AP2 packets it forwards Example Chapter 4 Configuring and Monitoring AppleTalk Phase 2 225 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 ap2config gt enable checksum interface interface Enables the router to send AppleTalk Phase 2 packets over specific interfaces Example ap2config gt enable interface 3 nfilter in exclusive or exclusive interface Enables network input filters and controls how the filter is applied to the interface Inclusive forwards matches Exclusive drops matches Example ap2config gt enable filter in inc Interface 0 1 nfilter out exclusive or exclusive interface Enables network output filters and controls how the filter is applied to the interface Inclusive forwards matches Exclusive drops matches Example ap2config gt enable filter out exec Interface 0 1 split horizon routing interface Enables split horizon routing on the interface The default is enabled Example ap2config gt enable split horizon routing 1 zfilter Enables zone filters assigned to an interface Must specify if filter is in or
436. ll bit set to solicit remote link station status or any U format command LPDUs that have not been responded to The duration of T1 should take into account any delays introduced by underlying layers Parameter Maximum number of retransmissions N2 Valid Values 1 to 254 Default Value 8 Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions N2 for all link stations on this port The N2 parameter specifies the maximum number of times an LPDU will be retransmitted following expiration of the reply timer T1 Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 147 APPN Configuration Commands Table 21 Configuration Parameter List Port default LLC Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Receive acknowledgment timer T2 Valid Values 1 to 254 half seconds Default Value 1 half second Description This parameter specifies the LLC receiver acknowledgment timer T2 for all link stations on this port The T2 parameter may be used with the N3 counter to reduce acknowledgment traffic A link station uses T2 to delay the sending of an acknowledgment for a received l format LPDU T2 is started when an l format LPDU is received and reset when an acknowledgment is sent in an l format or S format LPDU If T2 expires the link station must send an acknowledgment as soon as possible The value of T2 must be less than that of T1 to ensure that the remote link station will receive t
437. llow routers to inform host how to perform address autoconfiguration Routers can specify whether hosts use stateful or autonomous stateless address configuration Address Resolution Routers accomplish address resolution by multicasting a neighbor solicitation message that asks the target node to return its link layer address The link layer address is returned in a unicast neighbor advertisement By including its link layer address in the neighbor solicitation message a single request response pair of messages the message initiator and the target can determine each other s link layer addresses Neighbor Unreachability Detection NDP can detect the failure of a neighbor or the failure of the forward path to the neighbor When no positive confirmation has been received from a neighbor for a time interval the node actively probes the neighbor using unicast neighbor solicitation messages to verify that the forward path is still working 380 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Redirect Using IPv6 If the source address of the packet and the next hop are on the same network a router may send a redirect message informing the sender that the next hop is a neighbor Use the p ndp command at the Config gt prompt to configure NDP parameters IPv6 over IPv4 Tunneling IPv6 over IPv4 tunneling allows you to migrate from IPv4 networks to IPv6 networks without the need to simultaneously upgrade all equipment to IPv6 support IPv6 over IPv
438. llowed router to router shortcuts Example 1i dis interface definitions Disallowed router to router shortcuts for IP 1 8 8 8 1 255 255 255 255 2 6 6 6 1 255 255 255 255 Displays the NHRP interface definitions Example 1i int cache size Interfaces explicitly defined for NHRP Interface 3 ESI burned in Sel auto Use Best Effort yes Data Cell Rate kbps Peak 0 0 Sustained 1000 538764944 MAC address supplied by NHS is used as source address Displays cache sizes Example 1i ca Cache Sizes Resolution cache 10000 entries Server purge cache 10000 entries Server registrations cache 10000 entries Use the set command for the following Syntax set protocol access control usage attempt shortcuts holding time data rate threshold extensions cache size shortcuts to atmarp clients protocol access control usage Determines if the IP access controls will be checked and if so how these controls will be are to NHRP packets See EProtacol Access Control Example set prot for more information Use Destination Source amp Destination None None Valid Values None Source and Destination Destination Default Value None Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 365 NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Talk 6 attempt shortcuts Determines how the NHRP client decides when to originate resolution requests Valid values Y N Data rate Y Yes Always try to establ
439. lude trace data about inter process signals from the configuration services component Parameter Dependent LU requester Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the dependent LU requester component 108 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 11 Configuration Parameter List Inter process Signals Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Directory services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the directory services component Parameter Half Session Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the half session component Parameter HPR Path Control Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the HPR path control component Parame
440. lues 0 to 7200 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter specifies the maximum amount of time that a path switch may be attempted on an HPR connection carrying traffic with network transmission priority A value of zero indicates that the path switch function is to be disabled and a path switch will not be performed 92 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Syntax set dlur You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 7 Configuration Parameter List Dependent LU Requester Parameter Information Parameter Enable dependent LU requester DLUR on this network node Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether a dependent LU requester is to be functionally enabled on this node Parameter Default fully qualified CP name of primary DLUS required when DLUR is enabled Valid Values A string of up to 17 characters in the form of netiD CPname where e netiD is a network ID from 1 to 8 characters CPname is a CP name from 1 to 8 characters Each name must conform to the following rules e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing fully qualified CP name using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be s
441. m access control protocols A bridge forwards a frame to another bridge based on the medium access control MAC address bridge identifier An 8 byte field used in a spanning tree protocol composed of the MAC address of the port with the lowest port identifier and a user defined value bridging In LANs the forwarding of a frame from one LAN segment to another The destination is specified by the medium access control MAC sublayer address encoded in the destination address field of the frame header broadcast 1 Transmission of the same data to all destinations T 2 Simultaneous transmission of data to more than one destination 3 Contrast with multicast Glossary 449 broadcast address In communications a station address eight 1 s reserved as an address common to all stations on a link Synonymous with all stations address C cache 1 A special purpose buffer storage smaller and faster than main storage used to hold a copy of instructions and data obtained from main storage and likely to be needed next by the processor T 2 A buffer storage that contains frequently accessed instructions and data it is used to reduce access time 3 An optional part of the directory database in network nodes where frequently used directory information may be stored to speed directory searches 4 To place hide or store in a cache call request packet 1 A call supervision packet that a data terminal equipment D
442. m Broadcast LSP Transmission Selects the minimum transmission in milliseconds between transmission of LSPs on a broadcast circuit Waiting Time Selects the number of seconds the update process should delay in the waiting state before entering the ON state Designated Router ISIS Hello Selects the interval between the generation of IS IS hello PDUs by the router if the router is the designated router on a LAN Suggested ES Configuration Timer Sets the option field of the IS hello message that instructs the ES to change the rate at which it sends ES hellos transmit password Sets or changes a transmit password Example 328 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 set transmit password Password type Domain Password Reenter password Password type Selects the type of password domain or area Domain passwords are used with L2 LSPs and SNPs Area passwords are used with L1 LSPs and SNPs Password Indicates the character string that your using for authentication Maximum allowable string can be 16 characters virtual circuit Configures an X 25 SVC or PVC or a Frame Relay PVC Example set virtual circuit Interface Number 0 DTE Address Enable ISIS Y or N Y L2 only Y or N N External Domain Y or N N Default Metric 20 ISIS Hello Timer 3 sec Modify transmit password y or n N Modify the set of receive passwords No Interface Number
443. m software does not work correctly in some AppleTalk Phase 2 implementations so you may not want to originate packets with checksums for compatibility with these implementations Normally however you will want to enable the generation of checksums Any packet forwarded with a checksum will have its checksum verified Setting Network Parameters You must also specify certain parameters for each network and interface that sends and receives AppleTalk Phase 2 packets After you have specified the parameters use the AppleTalk Phase 2 list configuration command to view the results of the configuration e Set the Network Range for Seed Routers Coordinating network ranges and zone lists for all routers on a network is simplified by having specific routers Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 213 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 designated as seed routers Seed routers are configured with the network range and zone list while all other routers are given null values Null values indicate that the router should query the network for values from the seed routers For every network segment of your interconnected AppleTalk internet at least one router interface must be configured as the seed router for that network There are usually several seed routers on a network in case one of them fails Also a router can be a seed router for some or all of its network interfaces Use the set net range command to assign the network range in seed routers e Set the St
444. m two or more asserting upstream routers Assert information is used to ensure the downstream routers understand who the correct upstream router is or forwarding router so that PIM messages may be sent to the correct router If no further asserts are received before the assert time has expired the assert information is discarded and the router uses local information in the unicast routing tables to determine the correct upstream forwarding router Valid Values 1 65535 Default Value 210 variables graft_tout Example PIM config gt set v graft_tout PIM Graft Time Out 3 Graft time out Specifies the number of seconds that the device that has sent a graft message but has received no acknowledgement will wait before sending another message Valid Values 1 65535 Default Value 3 Accessing the PIM Monitoring Environment Use the following procedure to access the PIM monitoring commands This process gives you access to the PIM monitoring process 1 At the OPCON prompt enter talk 5 For more detail on this command refer to The OPCON Process and Commands in the Software User s Guide For example talk 5 After you enter the talk 5 command the GWCON prompt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again 2 At the prompt enter the p pim command to get you to the PIM6 gt prompt Example p pim PIM gt Chapter 16 Configuring and Moni
445. me must conform to the following rules e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the fully qualified CN name to which this TG is defined 176 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 31 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Connection network TG number Valid Values 1 to 239 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the TG number uniquely identifying this connection from the local port to the CN The CN name and TG number pair must be unique Parameter Limited Resource Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description This parameter indicates if this TG should be brought down when not in use by session traffic Parameter Limited Resource Timer Valid Values 1 to 2160000 seconds Default Value 180 seconds Description This parameter indicates the time limit after which this CN TG should be brought down when not in use by session traffic Parameter LDLC retry count Valid Values 1 to 255 Default Value 3 Description This parameter is used in conjunction with the LDLC timer period to provide reliable delivery of XIDs The retry count is initialized when a command or request is first transmitted over the link If the LDLC timer period expires before a response is rec
446. mmands Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for specific commands if available See Add Adds zone names network filters and zone filters to an interface Delete Deletes the zone names interfaces network filters and zone filters Disable Disables interfaces checksumming split horizon routing network filters or zone filters or globally disables AppleTalk Phase 2 Enable Enables interfaces checksumming split horizon routing network filters zone filters or globally enables AppleTalk Phase 2 List Displays the current AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration Set Sets the cache size network range and node number Exit Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 221 AppleTalk Phase 2 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Add Use the add command to add the zone name to the interface zone list or to add the zone name to the interface zone list as the default for the interface or to add network and zone filters Syntax add zone defaultzone nfilter in nfilter out zfilter in zfilter out zone interface zonename Adds the zone name to the interface zone list If you define a network number for an interface you should also define the zone names for the interface If you did not define a network number do not define zone names Example ap2config gt add zone Interface 0 0 Zone name Finance defaultzone inter
447. mmittee CCITT recommendation for the interface between data terminal equipment and packet switched data networks 2 See also packet switching Xerox Network Systems XNS The suite of internet protocols developed by the Xerox Corporation Although similar to TCP IP protocols XNS uses different packet formats and terminology See also Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX Z zone In AppleTalk networks a subset of nodes within an internet Zone Information Protocol ZIP In AppleTalk networks a protocol that provides zone management service by maintaining a mapping of the zone names and network numbers across the internet on the session layer zone information table ZIT A listing of network numbers and their associated zone name mappings in the internet This listing is maintained by each internet router in an AppleTalk internet Glossary 469 470 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Index A accounting and node statistics 40 activate_new_config APPN configuration command 193 add AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration command 222 APPN configuration command 124 IPV6 configuration command 383 IPV6 update packet filter configuration command 395 NDP configuration command 405 OSI configuration command 305 RIP6 configuration command 425 VINES configuration command 241 Address Resolution Protocol ARP VINES 238 addresses OSI DECnet V monitoring command 330 aping APPN monitoring command 209 AppleTalk Control Protocol for
448. mote address in hexadecimal octets Both the local and remote DTE addresses can be up to 14 hexadecimal octets in length with two ASCII characters representing one hexadecimal octet Routing DNA IV handles both forwarding of DNA IV data packets and automatic routing with other DNA IV nodes The router performs the following DNA IV functions e Announces its presence by sending hello messages on each network that has DNA IV enabled e Maintains a list of adjacent DNA IV nodes from the hello packets it receives from other DNA IV nodes e Exchanges routing information with other routers e Forwards packets between nodes All end and routing nodes periodically broadcast hello messages to the all routers multicast address This allows each router to locate other nodes in its area On each broadcast network for example Ethernet Token Ring one router declares itself the designated router for that wire The designated router broadcasts its presence so that the end nodes know to use it as their default gateway Any end node sending a packet to a node not on that wire automatically sends it to the designated router for forwarding In a multi area DNA assign priorities to routers in such a way that the designated router is a level 2 router or is likely to be the best next hop to commonly used destinations This reduces the possibility of traffic from end nodes having to take an extra hop Routing decisions are based on a least cost algorit
449. multaneously must also appear as multiple PUs to an attached host Subarea connections are supported over the following DLC types e Ethernet e Token Ring e FDDI LANE e LSA e Frame Relay Note Support for Subarea SNA connections for TN3270E Server services eliminates the need for APPN in the host However APPN must still be configured in the router A subarea attached SNA node configuration with a device performing the TN3270E Server function and appearing to VTAM as multiple downstream PUs is shown in TN3270 Client NCP TN3270E Server TN3270 TN3270 peo TN3270 Client Client Client Figure 2 Multiple PUs for Subarea Connected SNA Nodes configuration example 24 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Enterprise Extender Support for HPR over IP Enterprise Extender support for HPR over IP allows HPR APPN applications to run over an IP backbone network and still take advantage of APPN Class of Service HPR over IP encapsulates HPR data into a UDP IP packet for delivery over the IP network Supported DLCs able 2 shows the DLC ports supported by the device over APPN Table 2 Port Types Supported for APPN Routing Port Type Standard HPR ISR DLUR Ethernet Version 2 Yes Yes Yes Ethernet IEEE 802 3 Yes Yes Yes TR 802 5 Yes Yes Yes Serial PPP Yes Yes No Serial FR bridged and Yes Yes Yes ro
450. mum LSP buffer size Max IS Adjacencies Max ES Adjacencies Displays the maximum number of ES and IS adjacencies that are allowed for all circuits Max Areas Displays the maximum number of areas in the routing domain Max ESs per Area Displays the maximum number of ESs allowed in one area Max Int Prefix Adds Displays the maximum number of internal prefix addresses Max Ext Prefix Adds Displays the maximum number of external prefix addresses Max Synonymous Areas Displays the maximum number of level 1 areas serviced by this router password Displays the number of transmit and receive passwords configured for each OSI Domain and Area You configure receive passwords using the add receive password command You configure transmit passwords using the set transmit password command Example list password Number of Passwords Configured Domain Transmit 3 Receive 2 Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 319 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Area Transmit 4 Receive 6 phaseivpfx Displays the configured DNA phase IV address prefix that the OSI protocol is using to route packets to a connected DNA IV network Example list phaseivpfx Local Phase IV Prefix 49 prefix address Displays all the SNPAs for statically configured routes Example list prefix addresses Ifc Type Metric State Address Prefix Dest Phys Address INT 20 On 470006 302198112233 1 EXT 50 OFF 47000
451. n be adjacent to this router maximum buffers Number of packet buffers in the router maximum cost Maximum allowed cost to a node maximum hops Maximum allowed hops to a node Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 281 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands maximum visits Maximum number of routers a packet may be routed through between source and destination physical address Physical Ethernet address set on all Ethernet circuits when DNA starts Derived from the node ID routing version Version is always Version 2 0 0 state The state of DNA on or off type Either ROUTING IV or AREA corresponding to level 1 and level 2 module access control circuit specifier argument Lists the DECnet access control lists that have been defined in the permanent database for the router as well as the counters of their use The options for the circuit specifiers include the following all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit known circuits Specifies all circuits on the router The following items are the arguments you select from after you enter the show list module access control command and the circuit specifier counters Gives counters on the use of the access control lists status Shows detailed information on the access control lists including the filters in the access control list summary Shows summary information on the state of the access control
452. n change the maximum Network layer packet size that the router handles by using the set packet size command however do not use this command unless specifically directed to by Customer Service 436 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 List of Abbreviations AARP AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol ABR area border router ack acknowledgment AIX Advanced Interactive Executive AMA arbitrary MAC addressing AMP active monitor present ANSI American National Standards Institute AP2 AppleTalk Phase 2 APPN Advanced Peer to Peer Networking ARE _ all routes explorer ARI ATM real interface ARI FCI address recognized indicator frame copied indicator ARP Address Resolution Protocol AS autonomous system ASBR autonomous system boundary router ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASN 1 abstract syntax notation 1 ASRT adaptive source routing transparent ASYNC asynchronous ATCP AppleTalk Control Protocol ATP AppleTalk Transaction Protocol AUI attachment unit interface AVI ATM virtual interface ayt are you there BAN Boundary Access Node BBCM Bridging Broadcast Manager BECN backward explicit congestion notification BGP Border Gateway Protocol BNC bayonet Niell Concelman BNCP Bridging Network Control Protocol BOOTP BOOT protocol BPDU bridge protocol data unit bps bits per second BR bridging routing Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 437 BRS bandwidth reservation BSD Berkeley software distrib
453. n enter config N n Exit Enable NHRP Use the enable command to enable NHRP on all interfaces not explicitly defined using an NHRP advanced config command It is a simple way to get NHRP up and running with default parameters Syntax enable nhrp Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 359 NHRP Configuration Commands Talk 6 Disable NHRP Use the disable command to disable NHRP on all interfaces not explicitly defined using an NHRP advanced config command Syntax disable nhrp Example NHRP config gt disable Disable NHRP for the router No Advanced Config List Use the advanced command to get to the NHRP advanced configuration prompt NHRP Advanced config gt From this prompt you can enter the commands described Syntax advanced nhrp Example NHRP config gt advanced NHRP Advanced config gt Note Most installations will not need to use this advanced command The enable NHRP command is sufficient to enable NHRP with recommended default options Use the list command to list the NHRP configuration Syntax list Example NHRP config gt list Box level NHRP enabled Explicit interface definitions override box level setting Interfaces explicitly defined for NHRP Interface 0 ATM NHRP enabled NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface Interface 1 ESI burned in Sel auto Use Best Effort no Data Cell Rate kbps Peak 155000 Sustained 155000 ATM adapter s burned in MAC addr
454. n how to make further configuration changes will be covered in the command sections of this chapter For the new configuration changes to take effect the router must be restarted Enabling Router Parameters When you configure a router to forward AppleTalk Phase 2 packets you must enable certain parameters regardless of the number or type of interfaces in the router If you have multiple routers transferring AppleTalk Phase 2 packets specify these parameters for each router e Globally Enable AppleTalk Phase 2 To begin you must globally enable the AppleTalk Phase 2 software using the AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration enable ap2 command If the router displays an error in this step there is no AppleTalk Phase 2 software present in your load If this is the case contact your customer service representative e Enable Specific Interfaces You must then enable the specific interfaces over which AppleTalk Phase 2 is to send the packets Use the enable interface interface number command to do this Note When enabling AppleTalk over ATM you must enable the specific emulated LAN interfaces over which AppleTalk is to send packets You must not enable AppleTalk over the physical ATM interface All further uses of the word interface in this chapter refer to the emulated LAN interface not the ATM physical interface e Enable Checksumming You can then determine whether the router will compute DDP checksums of packets it originates Checksu
455. n records are to be stored in the router s local memory Parameter Time between database updates Valid Values 60 1440 minutes Default Value 60 Description This parameter sets the time in minutes between topology database updates Note e When you enable the collection of intermediate session records the data associated with the records also is collected by default in SNMP e MIB variables for APPN The MIB variables are updated in this case whether or not the Collect intermediate session information parameter in able 15 on page 121 has been enabled e Intermediate session data can be stored in router memory Use the add command to add or update Syntax add port 124 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 17 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration Parameter Information Parameter Link type Valid Values Ethernet E Token ring T ATM A DLSw D PPP P Frame relay F SDLC S X 25 X IP Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the type of link associated with this port Parameter Interface number Valid Values 0 to 65533 Default Value 0 Description This parameter defines the physical interface number of the
456. n the physical link speed The effective capacity is encoded as a single byte representation The values X 00 and X FF are special cases used to denote minimum and maximum capacities The range of the encoding is very large however only 256 values in the range may be specified Parameter First user defined TG characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the first of three additional characteristics that users can define to describe the TGs in a network Parameter Second user defined TG characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the second of three additional characteristics that users can define to describe the TGs in a network Parameter Third user defined TG characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the third of three additional characteristics that users can define to describe the TGs in a network Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 167 APPN Configuration Commands Table 26 Configuration Parameter List Modify Dependent LU Server Parameter Information Parameter fully qualified CP name of primary DLUS Valid Values A string of up to 17 characters in the form
457. n the last ES Hello message is discarded In the case of static or a manually configured ES Adjacency this field reads Static Type Indicates the type of ES adjacency OSI DNAIV DNAIV and MANUAL for statically configured adjacencies Use the es is stats command to display the statistics for the ESIS protocol Syntax es is stats Example es is stats ESIS input queue overflow Received incomplete packet Received packet with bad checksum Received packet with bad version Received packet with bad type No iob available to send hello Cannot send hello due to packet handler error Sent hello Received packet with bad header Received hello with bad nsap Received hello packet with bad option Received hello Received hello with unsupported domain source No resources to install route Received hello with conflicting route Timed out route reactivated No resources to send redirect Redirect not sent handler error Sent redirect Timed out route Timed out route Unable to allocate resources for a new ES adjacency 0 Oo DBODVDDDDODDDDOVWODODODOOO 334 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 hello PDU dropped received over point to point circ 0 ESIS hello PPDU dropped no matching area address 0 dropped hello packet manual ES adjacency exists 0 ESIS input queue overflow The ESIS packet was dropped because of a task input queue has overflowed Received incomplete pa
458. nables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the presentation services component 110 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 11 Configuration Parameter List Inter process Signals Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Resource manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the resource manager component Parameter Session connector manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the session connector manager component Parameter Session connector Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the session connector component Parameter Session manager Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the
459. nal code at all It s purpose is to allow you to identify a specific routing list if you want to modify it or delete it at some later time Subnetwork visit count and list optimization are the next two prompts and follow the same concept as the analogous parameters defined at the node level A new routing list initializes these values with the current node level settings You change these values for individual routing lists as your requirements dictate Destination LU prompt s are next Here you may configure at least one and optionally more destination resources Any of the FQLU names may be prematurely terminated with a trailing wildcard to identify a group of LUs You may not imbed a in the middle of an FQLU name One of your routing lists may specify a standalone as one of the destination LUs If this is done then that routing list is known as the default routing list and this default routing list will be used by the extended border node for all destination LUs that don t better match the LUs specified in the other routing lists This list is also used to find LUs when INAUTHENTIC NETID is indicated When modifying an existing routing list with many LU names the process of stepping through the LU names could be quite tedious There are a number of shortcut keys defined to help speed stepping through an existing list of names Those shortcut keys are defined in the section with the configuration command detail
460. names reside in the router network node s local directory If the router network node receives a request to search for one of these LEN end node resources it will be able to find the LU in its local directory and return a positive response to the node originating the search To reduce the number of LU names you need to specify for an attached LEN end node the router supports the use of generic LU names which allow a wildcard character to represent a portion of an LU name PU 2 0 Nodes A PU 2 0 node is a type T2 0 node containing dependent LUs PU 2 0 nodes are supported by the Dependent LU Requestor DLUR function which is implemented by an APPN end node or network node PU 2 0 nodes require the services of a system services control point which is made available through the DLUR enabled APPN node Note that APPN nodes can contain dependent LUs supported by the DLUR function However the router does not contain dependent LUs What APPN Functions Are Implemented on the Router The router implements the APPN Release 2 base architecture functions as defined in the Systems Network Architecture APPN Reference The APPN network node functions implemented by the router are summarized in able il Notes on specific functions follow the table For_a description of the APPN management services supported by the router see Managing a N APPN uses LU 6 2 protocols to provide peer connectivity between CP CP session partners The router network node
461. nate interface number 0 4 Primary interface number 0 1H WRS Config gt li all WAN Restoral is enabled Default Stabilization Time 0 seconds Default First Stabilization Time 0 seconds No Primary Secondary pairs defined Alt lst Subseq TOD Revert Back Primary Interface Alternate Interface Enabled Stab Stab Start Stop 1 WAN Frame Re 4 PPP Dial Circuit No dfit dflt Not Set Not Set kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxxx Set Default and first stabilization times kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk WRS Config gt set default firs 30 WRS Config gt set def stab 10 WRS Config gt 1li all WAN Restoral is enabled Default Stabilization Time 10 seconds Default First Stabilization Time 30 seconds No Primary Secondary pairs defined Alt lst Subseq TOD Revert Back Chapter 1 APPN 55 APPN Primary Interface Alternate Interface Enabled Stab Stab Start Stop 1 WAN Frame Re 4 PPP Dial Circuit No dfit dflt Not Set Not Set WRS Config gt en alt Alternate interface number 0 4 WRS Config gt ex kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Configure APPN PORTS and LINKSTATIONS for the ALTERNATE and PRIMARY interfaces kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Config gt p appn APPN user configuration APPN config gt add p APPN Port Link Type P PP F RAME RELAY
462. nd level or lists the options for Set IEY Add Adds or updates the following implicit pool Ho lu mapping 204 port od Delete Deletes the following bod e implicit pool e lu e mapping e port List all Lists the configuration memory bod Exit Returns you to the previous command Syntax set You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 40 Configuration Parameter List Set TN3270E Parameter Information Parameter Enable TN3270E Server Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description This parameter specifies whether TN3270E Server support will be enabled 194 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 40 Configuration Parameter List Set TN3270E continued Parameter Information Parameter TN3270E Server IP Address Valid values Any IP address Default Value None Description This parameter is the IP address associated with the TN3270E Server Parameter Port number Valid Values 1 to 65535 Default Value 23 Description This parameter specifies the port number associated with the TN3270E Server Parameter Enable Client IP address to LU name mapping Valid values Yes or No Default Value No Descripti
463. nd lists a hexadecimal value displaying the currently configured metric preference Set Use the set command to change PIM configuration parameter values You can use this command to add a new physical interface Syntax set interface interfaceaddress helloperiod joinpruneholatime preference routetype preferencevalue variables interface Example PIM config gt set interface Interface address Hello period 30 Join Prune Hold Time 210 Interface address Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Chapter 16 Configuring and Monitoring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM 413 PIM Configuration Commands Talk 6 Default Value None Hello period Specifies the number of seconds between Hello messages On point to point interfaces this value is ignored Once the 2210 establishes adjacency Hello messages are silenced Valid Values 1 65535 Default Value 30 Join prune hold time Controls messages to inform the receiving device on how long in seconds to hold the state activated by the message Prunes sent to the device remain active for this number of seconds Valid Values 1 65535 Default Value 210 preference routetype This is a configured metric preference to be used in the assert process It allows the user to selectively select which unicast route types in the unicast forwarding tables has precedence over other route types It is of local significance only meaning it is used for this device
464. nd multimedia applications CLASS 3 Intended for interoperation of connection oriented protocols such as Frame Relay CLASS 4 Intended for interoperation of connectionless protocols such as IP Default Value CLASS 0 Description This parameter indicates which class of service is provided to an ATM virtual connection You cannot specify this parameter for Best Effort connections Note The following parameters are backward traffic parameters Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 163 APPN Configuration Commands Table 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Backward Peak Cell Rate Valid Values 1 85 of line speed Default Value Taken from the port definition Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the cell transmission rate Parameter Backward Sustained Cell Rate Valid Values 1 85 of line speed Default Value Taken from the port definition Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the average cell transmission rate You cannot specify this parameter for Best Effort connections Parameter Backward Tagging Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes Description This parameter indicates that cells that are nonconforming to cell loss priority O traffic specification but are conforming to cell loss priority 1 traffic specification are marked and allowed into the ATM network You
465. ne Eth 0 10 52 on net 10 19 default zone Sales PPP 1 0 0 in startup range TKR O 0 0 on net 20 29 default zone Backbone You can also enter the interface command followed by a specific interface number to view the AP2 configuration of that interface Example interface 1 Eth O 1 30 on net 1 5 default zone marketing Input Net filters inclusive 1 5 Output Zone filters inclusive finance Output Net filters exclusive 1 5 232 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 5 Using VINES This chapter describes the commands to configure the Banyan VINES protocol and includes the following sections Note If you need more detailed information on VINES Protocols consult the Banyan publication VINES Protocol Definition order number 003673 VINES Overview VINES Over Router Protocols and Interfaces The VINES protocol routes VINES packets over the following interfaces and protocols e PPP Banyan Vines Control Protocol PPP BVCP e Frame Relay e Ethernet 802 3 e 802 5 Token Ring e X 25 e Ethernet ATM LAN Emulation Client e Token Ring ATM LAN Emulation Client It also supports packets across an 802 5 Source Routing Bridge SRB The VINES protocol is implemented at the network layer layer 3 of the OSI model VINES routes packets from the transport layer in one node to the transport layer in another node As VINES routes the packets to their destination nodes the packets pass through the network layers of the interme
466. neighbor as the designated router DR Identifies if this router has identified the neighbor as the designated router Last Heard The number of seconds since last heard from the neighbor First Heard The total number of seconds since the adjacency was first established to this neighbor lfc The interface that the neighbor was discovered on Use the pim command to display the PIM state database Syntax pim Example PIM6 gt pim PIM State Database 1 Group FFQ5 2 3 121 1 Source 9 1 2 3 12 101 1 Interface 1 PRUNE Lifetime sec 210 2 Group FFQ5 2 3 121 2 Source 9 1 2 3 12 101 2 Interface 1 PRUNE Lifetime sec 210 PIM6 gt Group The destination group address associated with the entry Source The source address of the originator of the multicast datagram Interface The PIM interface number and the type of PIM state in the database Lifetime The total lifetime in seconds of the state received obtained from the PIM control message that set up the state Chapter 16 Configuring and Monitoring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM 421 i Summary PIM PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Ping Traceroute Use the summary pim command to display summary information about the PIM state database Syntax summary pim Example PIM6 gt s Summary PIM State Database 0 Group FF05 2 3 121 0 Source 9 1 2 3 12 101 0 States 1 P 2 P PIM6 gt Group The destination group
467. nfig Ref Vol 2 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands 1022 30 103 2038 Area maximum cost Area maximum hops Maximum buffers Buffer size Example list executor status This example shows the status of the router in the permanent database Node Permanent Status Executor node State Type 2 26 gato on DEC area Example show executor counters This example shows the counters that DNA keeps Node Volatile Counters Executor node 2 26 gato 525948 Seconds since last zeroed Aged packet loss Node unreachable packet loss Node out of range packet loss Oversized packet loss Packet format error Partial routing update loss Verification reject oolololokoka The following items define the fields that are displayed when you use the show list executor command area maximum cost Maximum allowed cost to an area area maximum hops Maximum allowed hops to an area broadcast routing timer Frequency of sending routing messages in the absence of any changes buffer size Buffer size for the router executor node Node address and node name The node name is the name set by the CONFIG set hostname command identification Identification of the router software as sent in MOP System ID messages maximum area Highest area to which routes are kept maximum broadcast nonrouters Maximum number of end nodes that can be adjacent to this router maximum broadcast routers Maximum number of routers that ca
468. nfiguration and Monitoring Commands This section describes the NCP configuration and monitoring commands Enter the commands at the NCP gt prompt AIl NCP commands can be accessed from either the configuration or monitoring environments Table 58 NCP Configuration and Monitoring Commands Command Help define purge module set show show list zero Exit Function Displays all the commands available for this command level or including e Access control lists and routing filters e Circuit items e Arguments global to DNA e Configuration data from the nodes Removes access control lists and routing filters from the permanent database Sets or changes items in the volatile database including e Circuit items e Arguments global to DNA e Configuration data from the nodes Displays the status of the volatile database and volatile nodes in the routing database Displays items in the volatile show or permanent list database including e The current state of the specified circuits e The current state of the volatile oermanent database for DNA e DECnet access control lists that have been defined in the permanent database for the router DECnet area routing filters that have been defined in the permanent database for the router Clears circuit counters in the volatile database global counters in the volatile database and counters in the access control list module Does not clear the ar
469. ng DLUR Configuring Focal Points TE i Configuring Held Alert Queue Size f Defining Transmission Group TG Characteristics Calculating APPN Routes Using TG Characteristics Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 xi xiii XV xvii xix xxi xxi Xxil Xxil XXIV XXV XXV XXVi COS Options APPN Node Tuning Node Service Traces APPN Trace Enhancements Accounting and Node Statistics DLUR Retry Algorithm a A APPN Implementation on the Router Using DLSw APPN Frame Relay BAN Connection Network implementation Port Level Parameter Lists Link Level Parameter Lists LU Parameter List Node Level Parameter Lists APPN Configuration Notes Configuring a Permanent Circuit Using ISDN Configuring APPN Over Dial on Demand Circuits Configuring WAN Reroute ne ee Configuring WAN Restoral Configuring V 25bis Configuring V 34 Configuring APPN Over ATM Configuring APPN Using SDLC Configuring APPN Over X 25 TEPE Configuring APPN Over Frame Relay Configuring APPN Over Frame Relay BAN Configuring TN3270E Using DLUR Configuring TN3270E Using a Subarea Connection cee Configuring Enterprise Extender Support for HPR Over IP Configuring Connection Networks over HPR over IP Configuring an Extended Border Node Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN Accessing the APPN Configuration Process APPN Configuration Command Summary APPN Configuration Command Detail
470. ng tables These limits vary according to the model router you have See lable a8 od for the configuration command detail Limits have been set to allow as much flexibility as possible in various environments The ability of the router to handle the specification of many COS mapping tables each with many non native network names and COS name pairs is limited by the availability of configuration nonvolatile memory router memory and APPN shared memory See EAPPN Nodal g g for a discussion of the APPN tuning parameters which control the amount of APPN shared memory COS mapping table name is the first prompt As with the analogous name for routing lists this parameter is not used by the operational code Its purpose is to allow you to refer to a specific COS mapping table so that you can modify or delete it Different COS mapping tables must have different names but a given COS mapping table may have an identical name as a routing list Non native CP name s are prompted for next These are use to specify the non native network s that this COS mapping table applies to As with LU names in a routing list you may prematurely terminate any of the FQCP names at any point with a trailing wildcard This allows you to specify a range of non native FQCP names in one or more non native networks You may not imbed a wildcard in the middle of a FQCP name One COS mapping table in the extended border node may have a standalone wildcard
471. ng adjacencies They affect the area routing database If the filters prevent an area router from learning about another area they would prevent the router from becoming attached and then the router could not advertise as an area router Security by Area Filtering Like access controls routing filters provide security However routing filters have some disadvantages compared to access controls e Area filtering is less flexible than access controls because it requires the assignment of areas to correspond to the desired security architecture e Area filtering is more difficult to understand and configure e The level of security is lower because a host that ignores the lack of routing information can send the packets to the correct router anyway However area filtering is more efficient because there is no need to check every packet In the following example area filtering occurs in an area that contains workstations that are part of a large network that contains machines with confidential information There might be one machine outside the area that the confidential machines need to reach for information In Figure 18 on page 258 area 13 contains workstations that need to be able to reach area 7 Node 13 1 is the router and the other nodes are the workstations Node 13 1 has a filter to accept only routes to area 7 Therefore if node 13 1 receives a packet from any node in area 13 not destined for area 7 node 13 1 cannot forward t
472. ning organizing and controlling a communication oriented data processing or information system network management station In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a station that executes management application programs that monitor and control network elements network management vector transport NMVT A management services request response unit RU that flows over an active session between physical unit management services and control point management services SSCP PU session network manager A program or group of programs that is used to monitor manage and diagnose the problems of a network network node NN See Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN network node network user address NUA In X 25 communications the X 121 address containing up to 15 binary code digits node 1 In a network a point at which one or more functional units connect channels or data circuits I 2 Any device attached to a network that transmits and receives data noncanonical address In LANs a format for the transmission of medium access control MAC addresses for token ring adapters In noncanonical format the most significant leftmost bit of each address byte is transmitted first Contrast with canonical address Non Return to Zero Changes on Ones Recording NRZ 1 A recording method in which the ones are represented by a change in the condition of magnetization and zeros are represented by the absence o
473. nitial protocol identifier Received error packet Indicates that an ISO CLNP error packet was received for this router Received local data packet Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received with the destination NSAP indicating one of the router s NSAPs 332 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Sent error packet Indicates that ISO CLNP error packet was sent on receipt of a bad packet Designated router DNAV info Use the designated router command to display the designated router for the LAN subnets that are physically attached to this router and actively running IS IS Syntax designated router Example designated router Designated Router Information Hdw Int Circ L1DR L2DR Eth 1 1 2 0000931004F002 0000931004F002 TKR O 0 1 Elvis 01 Elvis 01 Hdw Indicates the type and instance of LAN attached to this router Int Indicates the interface number of this router that attaches to the LAN Circ Indicates the circuit number assigned by the router This number is always one more than the interface number for LAN subnets L1DR Indicates the LAN ID of the designated router If the use of an alias is enabled this command displays the alias of the particular segment The LAN ID is the designated router s system ID concatenated with a 1 byte locally assigned circuit ID L2DR_ Description is the same as L1DR described above Note If the designated router has not been elected
474. nly one address can be specified as the TN3270E address e Use of an interface address There can be any number of addresses assigned to an interface If the system administrator does not want to lose the ability to Telnet to the router using an existing interface address an additional address with a subnet mask which RIP and OSPF will advertise can be added to an interface We recommend designating an interface address as the TN3270E Server Address e Use of the device id For TN3270 purposes this address is like an interface address e Use of the internal address This address is advertised over all dynamic routing protocols It is also continually reachable whereas interface addresses are only reachable when the interface is up This address is not recommended as the TN3270E Server Address except in cases where reachability is guaranteed without respect to the up or down state of any interface T N3270 LU Pooling LU pooling is an enhancement to the TN3270E Server function that makes it easier to configure some TN3270E Server networks This function allows SNA LUs to be grouped into named pools TN3270E clients can then request a connection using the pool s name as an LU name The TN3270E Server will then choose an LU from the specified pool to service the client s request Chapter1 APPN 21 APPN A pool is a logical group of LUs These LUs can be from different PUs or the same PU different Host or same Host etc When a
475. nnect time 0 Cost per byte 0 Security Nonsecure 1 Public Switched Network 2 Underground Cable 3 Secure Conduit Guarded Conduit 5 Encrypted 6 Guarded Radiation 0 Propagation delay 0 Minimum 1 Lan 2 Telephone 3 Packet Switched Network 4 Satellite 5 Maximum 3 Effective capacity 45 First user defined TG characteristic 128 Second user defined TG characteristic 128 Third user defined TG characteristic 128 Predefined TG number 0 Boats APPN config gt list link x25pvc1 STATION Port name X25002 Interface number DLSw 254 2 Link Type X25 Link Type 0 PVC 1 SVC 0 Logical Channel number 1 Activate link automatically YES Allow CP CP sessions on this link YES CP CP session level security NO Fully qualified CP name of adjacent node Chapter1 APPN 71 APPN Encryption key 0000000000000000 Use enhanced session security only NO Cost per connect time 0 Cost per byte 0 Security Nonsecure 1 Public Switched Network 2 Underground Cable 3 Secure Conduit 4 Guarded Conduit 5 Encrypted 6 Guarded Radiation 0 Propagation delay 0 Minimum 1 Lan 2 Telephone 3 Packet Switched Network 4 Satellite 5 Maximum 3 Effective capacity 45 First user defined TG characteristic 128 Second user defined TG characteristic 128 Third user defined TG characteristic 128 Predefined TG number 0 Boats APPN config gt 1li all NODE NETWORK ID STFNET CONTRO
476. nnects to the adjacency Area Address Indicates the area where the adjacency is located System ID Indicates system ID portion of the NET that is used to identify the adjacency MAC Address Indicates the MAC address SNPA of the adjacency algorithm Note This is a DNA phase V command This command will work only if the DNA phase V protocol is included in the software load This enables you to select the type of routing algorithm that you are using for the DNA routing protocol link state DNA V or distance vector DNA IV Example set algorithm Level 1 Algorithm link state Level 2 Algorithm distance_vector Level 1 Algorithm Selects the type of routing algorithm link_state for DNA V networks or distance_vector for DNA IV networks Level 2 Algorithm Selects the type of routing algorithm link_state for DNA V networks or distance_vector for DNA IV networks globals Configures the global parameters required by the OSI protocol Example set globals IS Type L2 System ID Length 6 bytes Max Synonymous Areas L1 LSP Buffer Size 1492 bytes L2 LSP Buffer Size 1492 bytes Max IS Adjacencies 50 Max ES Adjacencies 200 Max Areas in Domain 50 Max ESs per Area 500 Max Internal Prefix Addresses 100 Max External Prefix Addresses 100 Max Link State Updates 100 IS Type L1 or L2 Selects the level of the router level 1 or level 2 324 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref
477. nowledged sequentially numbered l format LPDUs that the link station can receive from the remote link station RW is advertised in SNA XID frames and IEEE 802 2 XID frames The XID receiver should set its effective TW to a value less than or equal to the value of the received RW to avoid overruns 146 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 21 Configuration Parameter List Port default LLC Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Inactivity timer Ti Valid Values 1 to 254 seconds Default Value 30 seconds Description This parameter specifies the LLC inactivity timer Ti for all link stations on this port An LLC link station uses Ti to detect an inoperative condition in either the remote link station or in the transmission media If an LPDU is not received in the time interval specified by Ti an S format command LPDU with the poll bit set is transmitted to solicit remote link station status Recovery is then based on the reply timer T1 Parameter Reply timer T1 Valid Values 1 to 254 half seconds Default Value 2 half seconds Description This parameter specifies the LLC reply timer T1 for all link stations on this port An LLC link station uses T1 to detect a failure to receive a required acknowledgment or response from the remote link station When T1 expires the link station sends an S format command link layer protocol data unit LPDU with the po
478. ns over a IPv4 network to a partner 2210 or 2212 router e Enhanced functions Base Services Event Logging System ELS enhancements to capture format and offload large volumes of ELS messages Timed configuration change support from the configuration tool that is persistent across reloads and restarts Packet trace support for PPP Frame Relay and V 34 interfaces Bridging support for a multiaccess bridge port for source route bridging over Frame Relay The multiaccess port incorporates many DLCls in a single bridge port for improved scalability DIALs XX V MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Summary of Changes DIALs support for functions supported by Microsoft Dial Up Network Clients e Support for Callback Control Protocol CBCP e Support for Microsoft Point to Point Encryption MPPE and Microsoft PPP CHAP MS CHAP Virtual connections to suspend and resume dial up connections when Shiva Password Authentication Protocol SPAP is used IP items IP precedence TOS filter enhancements Policy based routing Configuration of the IP MTU by interface OSPF Enhancements to allow for easier migration of IBM 6611 router networks BGP 4 support for policies per neighbor and additional attributes for path selection DVMRPv3 support IGMP prune and grafting support ISDN support for callback based on the caller ID and call blocking L2TP support for the L2TP client model which allows the 2
479. nt on a given physical medium in a single frame For example the MTU for Ethernet is 1500 bytes medium access control MAC In LANs the sublayer of the data link control layer that supports medium dependent functions and uses the services of the physical layer to provide services to the logical link control LLC sublayer The MAC sublayer includes the method of determining when a device has access to the transmission medium medium access control MAC protocol In a local area network the protocol that governs access to the transmission medium taking into account the topological aspects of the network in order to enable the exchange of data between data stations T medium access control MAC sublayer In a local area network the part of the data link layer that applies a medium access method The MAC sublayer supports topology dependent functions and uses the services of the physical layer to provide services to the logical link control sublayer T metric In Internet communications a value associated with a route which is used to discriminate between multiple exit or entry points to the same autonomous system The route with the lowest metric is preferred metropolitan area network MAN A network formed by the interconnection of two or more networks which may operate at higher speed than those networks may cross administrative boundaries and may use multiple access methods T Contrast with local area network L
480. nterface enters permanent state for 4 1 2 minutes after initialization After 4 1 2 minutes the neighbor enters the permanent state and its age stays at 0 while in this state If the X 25 interface goes down the entry is removed from the routing table Next Hop Nbr Addr The address of the neighbor service node that is the next hop on the least cost path to the network Nbr Intf The medium to which the next hop neighbor service node is attached Metric An estimated cost in 200 millisecond increments to route the VINES packet to the destination service node 236 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using VINES Age secs The current age in seconds for the entry If a router does not receive an update about a service node that is in the routing table at least every 360 seconds 6 minutes the router removes the entry for that service node from the routing table Neighbor Tables The neighbor table contains information about the neighbor service nodes and client nodes connected to the router Figure 14 shows a sample neighbor table and descriptions of the fields in this table follow the figure Nbr Address Intf Metric Age secs H W Addr RIF 30633333 0001 TKR O 4 30 0000C0095012 Q035CC10 8000 Eth 1 2 120 0000C0078221 2 Total Neighbors Figure 15 Sample Neighbor Table Neighbor Table Field Description Nbr Address The address of the neighbor node In Eigure 15 the address 30633333 0001 is a service node and address 0035
481. ntly saved with the configuration data The list is recreated whenever a resource needs to be located Full This functions the same as limited except the restriction on matching NETIDs is removed when adding all non native adjacent extended border nodes and network nodes If List optimization is enabled the reordering process described in Bilis repeated a second time and the CP names obtained from configured data are also eligible to be reordered Add port If extended border node is enabled two additional prompts are presented when you invoke the add port menu item Both of these new items establish the default for analogous parameters at the link level The values of these parameters at the link level determine link station behavior 32 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Subnetwork visit count is the first of these and describes the same concept as defined at the node level When a port is first configured this parameter is initialized to the node setting With this parameter you allow individual ports to deviate from the node level setting Adjacent subnetwork affiliation is controlled by the other new extended border node prompt This allows you to define whether or not the adjacent node is in the same network as the extended border node The value specified here will be used as the default value for all links through the port Allowed values are Native Adjacent node is in the same topology subnetwork as the extended bor
482. ntries Chapter 12 Configuring and Monitoring NHRP 367 NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Talk 6 Default 10000 entries Example set cache res Number of cache entries 10000 registration cache Sets a limit on the number of registration entries in the resolution cache When the server receives a registration request it checks to see if the number of NHRP client registrations is below this limit before adding a registration entry in the resolution cache Valid values 256 16384 entries Default 10000 entries Example set cache reg Number of cache entries 10000 server purge cache This parameter lets you determine the number of entries in the server purge cache An entry in this cache represents a destination protocol address and a client to which the server has provided Authoritative NBMA information for that destination The destination address may represent the server itself devices on subnetworks to which the server is attached NHRP clients that have registered with the server or routers for which a R2R shortcut has been advertised The router uses the information in these cache entries to notify clients to purge address information that becomes invalid before the holding time expires When the server purge cache size is exceeded the server rejects Authoritative Next Hop Resolution Requests Valid values 256 65535 entries Default 10000 entries Example set cache serv Number of cache entries 10000
483. o Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about any shared memory that was obtained and released by the APPN network node 104 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 10 Configuration Parameter List Node Level Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Queue data type management Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about all calls in the APPN network node that manage general purpose queues Parameter Table data type management Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about all calls in the APPN network node that manage general purpose tables including calls to add table entries and calls to query tables for specific entries Parameter Buffer management Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled the trace option causes the router trace facility to gather data about buffers in the APPN network node that were obtained and released Parameter Configuration control
484. o end telecommunication network that supports multiple services including but not limited to voice and data Note ISDNs are used in public and private network architectures interface 1 A shared boundary between two functional units defined by functional characteristics signal characteristics or other characteristics as appropriate The concept includes the specification of the connection of two devices having different functions T 2 Hardware software or both that links systems programs or devices interior gateway In Internet communications a gateway that communicates only with its own autonomous system Contrast with exterior gateway Interior Gateway Protocol IGP In the Internet suite of protocols a protocol used to propagate network reachability and routing information within an autonomous system Examples of IGPs are Routing Information Protocol RIP and Open Shortest Path First OSPF intermediate node A node that is at the end of more than one branch T intermediate session routing ISR A type of routing function within an APPN network node that provides 456 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 session level flow control and outage reporting for all sessions that pass through the node but whose end points are elsewhere International Organization for Standardization ISO An organization of national standards bodies from various countries established to promote development of standards to
485. o the sender that the adjacent IS is aware that it exists 2 way adjacency When the first IS receives the IIH it too extracts the source ID and looks at the IS neighbor field Upon discovering its own source ID in the IS neighbor field this IS establishes an adjacency with the other IS Note Before the adjacent L1 IS can accept the packet the packet must have a common area address and the same system ID length as the adjacent IS L2 IIH Message The L2 IIH is multicast over its interfaces for purpose of identifying itself to other L2 ISs The L2 IS has the same function as an L1 IIH The L2 IS places the following information in its IH e Source ID e Any manual area addresses that it services e IS type L2 only or L1 L2 e Priority e LAN ID e f applicable the system ID of the L2 designated IS Note Before the adjacent L2 IS can accept the packet the packet must have the same system ID length as the adjacent IS Point to Point IIH Message Designated IS A point to point IIH message is sent out over an IS s non broadcast interface Frame Relay or X 25 to identify itself to other ISs This IS gives the IIH to contain the following information e Source ID e Any manual area addresses that it services e IS type L1 only L2 only or L1 L2 e Local circuit ID A designated IS is selected among all ISs connected to the same LAN to perform additional duties In particular it generates link state updates on behalf of t
486. ocal VINES IP address and the checksum is valid the local node accepts the packet e If the destination address equals the broadcast address and the checksum is valid VINES IP accepts the packet processes it locally and checks the hop count field of the IP header If the hop count is greater than 0 VINES IP decrements the hop count by one and rebroadcasts the packet on all local media except the one on which the packet was received 234 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using VINES e lf the destination address does not equal the local VINES IP address or the broadcast address VINES IP checks its routing tables for the next hop If the hop count equals 0 VINES IP discards the packet Otherwise it decrements the hop count by one and forwards the packet to the next hop If the destination VINES IP address is not in the routing table and the error bit in the transport control field is set VINES IP drops the packet and returns an ICP Destination Unreachable message to the source If the error bit in the transport control field is not set VINES IP discards the packet and does not return a message to the source Table 53 Vines IP Header Fields Summary VINES IP Header Field of Bytes Description Checksum 2 Detects bit error corruption of a packet Packet Length 2 Indicates the number of bytes in the packet including the VINES IP header and data Transport Control 1 Consists of the following five subfields Class Determines th
487. ocol ARP 238 basic configuration procedures 239 client nodes 233 configuring 233 disabling an interface 242 disabling globally 242 enabling an interface 243 enabling globally 243 monitoring 241 monitoring commands 245 neighbor tables 237 dumping 246 setting size 244 network layer protocols 234 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 238 Internet Control Protocol ICP 238 Routing Update Protocol RTP 235 VINES IP 234 overview 233 routing tables 236 dumping 247 setting size 244 RTP implementation 237 service nodes 233 setting number of client nodes 244 VINES configuration commands 241 VINES monitoring commands counters 245 dump 246 exit 248 virtual network interface VNI NHRP 352 VNI 352 VTAM DSPU_ 10 W WAN reroute 54 WAN restoral 59 Index 477 478 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services Protocol Configuration and Monitoring Reference Volume 2 Version 3 2 Publication No SC30 3865 04 Overall how satisfied are you with the information in this book Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Overall satisfaction o How satisfied are you that the information in this book is Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Accurate Complete Easy to find Easy to understand Well organized Applicable to your tasks ogo0g0g0og
488. ocol These standards refer to LMI protocol as link integrity verification tests LIVT locally administered address Ina local area network an adapter address that the user can assign to override the universally administered address Contrast with universally administered address logical channel In packet mode operation a sending channel and a receiving channel that together are used to send and receive data over a data link at the same time Several logical channels can be established on the same data link by interleaving the transmission of packets logical link A pair of link stations one in each of two adjacent nodes and their underlying link connection providing a single link layer connection between the two nodes Multiple logical links can be distinguished while they share the use of the same physical media connecting two nodes Examples are 802 2 logical links used on local area network LAN facilities and LAP E logical links on the same point to point physical link between two nodes The term logical link also includes the multiple X 25 logical channels that share the use of the access link from a DTE to an X 25 network logical link control LLC The data link control DLC LAN sublayer that provides two types of DLC operation for the orderly exchange of information The first type is connectionless service which allows information to be sent and received without establishing a link The LLC sublayer does not perform
489. octet field contains the area ID Sys ID This 6 octet field identifies the system Selector This 1 octet field selects the entity to receive the NPDU Multicast Addresses Multicast addressing is the method that level 1 L1 and level 2 L2 ISs use to distribute link state updates LSUs and hello messages to other systems or LANs When an LSU or a hello message is multicast a group of destination stations receive the packet For example an L1 LSU is multicast only to other L1 ISs An Intermediate System Hello ISH is multicast only to ESs on the same subnetwork You can configure multicast addresses for each subnet with the set subnet command Malle 9 on page 2ad lists the multicast addresses for Ethernet and Token Ring LANs 288 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 OSI Routing IS IS Protocol IS IS Areas Using OSI DECnet V Table 59 IS IS Multicast Addresses Destination Ethernet 802 3 Token Ring 802 5 Address Description All ESs 09002B000004 C00000004000 For alll end systems on the subnetwork All ISs 09002B000005 C00000008000 For all intermediate systems on the subnetwork All L2 ISs 0180C2000015 C00000008000 For alll L2 intermediate systems on the subnetwork All L1 ISs 0180C2000014 C00000008000 For alll L1 intermediate systems on the subnetwork OSI routes packets using the IS IS protocol Routing with the IS IS protocol is based on e A system ID for routing within an area e An area address for rou
490. ode A in this case would choose to route over the A B D path because the cost is lower e Nodes B and C advertise the cost of their routes as external The external cost for A B D is 30 which is the cost of routing from B to D The external cost for A C D is 20 Node A in this case would choose to route over the A C D path because the cost of this route is lower e Nodes B and C advertise the cost of their routes as both internal and external The internal and external cost of the routes are added to their respective routing tables Because internal routes are preferred over external routes the router chooses the internal route of A B D Note Because there is no exterior routing protocol all prefix routes between domains must be statically configured DOMAIN 1 DOMAIN 2 Routing from A to D Internal Metric External Metric AtoBtoD 35 30 AtoCtoD 40 20 Figure 26 Internal and External Routing Metrics Address Prefix Encoding When entering address prefix routes into the router carefully consider the difference between encoding rules for NSAPs and for prefix routes The following four examples illustrate address prefix encoding Encoding a Fixed Length IDI For many address prefixes encoding the prefix and the corresponding NSAP is the same For example you are using a GOSIP 1 0 address and you want to create a route to an organization in the DoD The Org IDI is 1234 and the DoD IDI i
491. ode name mappings Delete TN3270E parameters Routing lists COS mapping tables Configuration Requirements for APPN APPN routing is configured on the individual adapters supporting the DLC desired To use APPN routing at least one of the following DLCs must be configured and enabled e LAN ports Token ring Ethernet e Serial ports configured with PPP Frame relay X 25 SDLC Dial circuits over ISDN Dial circuits over V 25bis Dial circuits over V 34 e DLSw e ATM e HPR over IP Configuring the Router as an APPN Network Node You can configure the router as an APPN network node in one of three ways depending on the level of connectivity you desire with other nodes e Minimum configuration e Initiate connections configuration e Controlling connections configuration 26 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Minimum Configuration This group of APPN configuration steps e Allows the network node to accept any request it receives from another node to establish a connection e Restricts the network node from initiating connections with other nodes If you choose the minimum configuration steps adjacent nodes must define connections to the router network node to ensure connectivity Because APPN nodes can initiate CP CP sessions with the router network node these nodes do not need to be defined in the router s configuration In general when configuring APPN on the route
492. odify High Performance Routing parameters e Configure Dependent LU Requester e Define connection networks e Define new COS names or mode name mappings e Tune the performance of this node e Perform node service trace diagnostics e Collect statistics for this network node Chapter1 APPN 27 APPN Notes 1 APPN routing must be defined and enabled on the specific ports you configure the router network node to use 2 Bridging and DLSw must still be enabled on the specific adapter ports you desire the device network node to use Initiate Connections Configuration This group of APPN configuration steps e Allows the network node to accept any request it receives from another node to establish a connection e Enables the network node to initiate connections with other nodes that you specify including LEN end nodes Because APPN nodes can initiate CP CP sessions with the router network node these nodes do not need to be defined in the router s configuration except in the following cases e The adjacent node is a LEN end node LEN end nodes do not support CP CP sessions so information about such nodes and their LU resources must be configured on the router network node e You want the router network node to be able to initiate a CP CP session with an adjacent APPN node If neither of these cases apply to your configuration you should follow the configuration steps described in Use the following procedure for initiate
493. oduct to form an XID node identification Node identifications are exchanged between adjacent nodes when the nodes are establishing a connection The router network node automatically appends an ID block number to this parameter during the XID exchange to create an XID node identification The ID number you assign to this node must be unique within the APPN network identified by Network ID parameter Contact your network administrator to verify that the ID number is unique Note Node identifications are normally exchanged between T2 1 nodes during CP CP session establishment If the network node is communicating with the IBM Virtual Telecommunications Access Method VTAM product through a T2 1 LEN node and the LEN node has a CP name defined for it the XID number parameter is not required If the adjacent LEN node is not a T2 1 node or does not have an explicitly defined CP name the XID number parameter must be specified to establish a connection with the LEN node VTAM versions prior to Version 3 Release 2 do not allow CP names to be defined for LEN nodes Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 87 APPN Configuration Commands Table 4 Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing continued Parameter Information Parameter Use enhanced BATCH COS Valid Values Yes or No Default Yes Description This parameter specifies whether to use the enhanced COS tables The enhanced tables assign reasonable weights to ATM
494. om an adjacent APPN network node low entry networking LEN node A node that provides a range of end user services attaches directly to other nodes using peer protocols and derives network services implicitly from an adjacent APPN network node that is without the direct use of CP CP sessions Management Information Base MIB 1 A collection of objects that can be accessed by means of a network management protocol 2 A definition for management information that specifies the information available from a host or gateway and the operations allowed 3 In OSI the conceptual repository of management information within an open system management station In Internet communications the system responsible for managing all or a portion of a network The management station communicates with network management agents that reside in the managed node by means of a network management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP mapping The process of converting data that is transmitted in one format by the sender into the data format that can be accepted by the receiver mask 1 A pattern of characters used to control retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters I A 2 To use a pattern of characters to control retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of characters I A maximum transmission unit MTU In LANs the largest possible unit of data that can be se
495. ommand 244 sizes IPV6 monitoring command 400 SNMP managed node using the router as 19 sphere of control 17 static IPV6 monitoring command 401 stop APPN monitoring command 211 subnets OSI DECnet V monitoring command 343 summary of NCP configuration commands 265 NCP monitoring commands 265 summary pim PIM monitoring command 422 supported message units 18 supported message units APPN related alerts 18 F7 talk OPCON command 208 383 397 405 409 411 415 425 431 TG characteristics 36 the router as entry point 17 TN3270 gateway function 20 tn3270e APPN monitoring command 211 TN3270E Server 20 24 Client IP Address to LU Name Mapping 22 configuration commands 194 Configuration parameters 194 Configuring using DLUR 75 Configuring using local node identifier 79 How LUs are chosen for client connections 23 LU Pooling 21 monitoring commands 212 Multiple TN3270 ports 22 toggle Alias No Alias OSI DECnet V monitoring command 343 Token Ring 4 16 packet size 435 topology Database Garbage Collection 19 traceroute IPV6 monitoring command 422 OSI DECnet V monitoring command 343 traceroute6 IPV6 monitoring command 402 traces 39 tracing 39 transmission group characteristics setting 36 transporting data 43 tunnels IPV6 monitoring command 403 U update IPV6 configuration command 394 V V 25 bis 60 V 25bis APPN using 60 V 34 APPN using 62 variables PIM monitoring command 423 VINES 243 Address Resolution Prot
496. on press Return again 2 At the CONFIG prompt enter the p rip6 command to get to the RIP66 Config gt prompt RIP6 Configuration Commands To configure RIP6 enter the commands at the RIP66 Config gt prompt Table 73 RIP6 Configuration Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the ewns for specific commands if available See add Adds RIP6 on an interface change Changes RIP6 metric configuration values delete Removes RIP6 from an interface disable Disables RIP6 on an interface enable Enables RIP6 on an interface list Lists the configuration set Sets RIP6 metric values Exit Add Use the add command to add RIP6 on an interface Syntax Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 425 RIP6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 add interface interface Specifies the interface to which RIP6 protocol is to be added Note This interface must have an IPV6 address configured or be the virtual interface of an IPV6 over IPV4 tunnel Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value None Change Use the change command to change a RIP6 metric Syntax change rip6 in metric rip6 out metric rip6 in metric Changes the value of the RIP6 metric for the incoming RIP6 updates Change RIPng metric on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 input metric is to be changed Note The interface must have RIP
497. on This parameter specifies whether client IP address to LU name mapping occurs Parameter Default pool name Valid Values Any alphanumeric string of 1 to 8 characters Default Value PUBLIC Description This parameter specifies the name of the default pool This pool is used when TN3270 clients connect and do not specify an LU pool name Parameter NetDisp Advisor Port Number Valid Values 1 to 65535 Default Value 10008 Description This parameter sets the port number for the Network Dispatcher Advisor Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 195 APPN Configuration Commands Table 40 Configuration Parameter List Set TN3270E continued Parameter Information Parameter Keepalive type Valid Values 0 None 1 Timing mark 2 NOP Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies the Keepalive type A Keepalive type of Timing mark requires responses from the client within the amount of time specified using the Timer parameter A Keepalive type of NOP specifies that the client will not send back a response to the Keepalive message Notification that the client is no longer there will come from TCP Parameter Frequency Valid Values 1 to 65535 seconds Default Value 60 Description This parameter specifies how often the Keepalive message is sent to the client Parameter Timer Valid Values 1 to 65536 seconds Default Value 10 Description This parameter sets th
498. on for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter ATM network type Valid Values Campus Widearea Default Value Campus Description This parameter specifies the ATM network type Parameter Shareable connection network traffic Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether connection network traffic can be routed on the ATM VC set up this TG Parameter Shareable other protocol traffic Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter specifies whether other higher level protocol traffic can be routed on the ATM VC set up for this TG Parameter TG Number Valid Values 0 20 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies the TG number for the ATM VC 160 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter LDLC retry count Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 3 Description This parameter is used in conjunction with the LDLC timer period to provide reliable delivery of XIDs The retry count is initialized when a command or request is first transmitted over the link If the LDLC timer period expires before a response is received the command or request is retransmitted the retry count is decremented and the LDLC timer period is restarted If the timer expires with the retry c
499. on is 0 0 Default Value 8 Via gateway 1 Specifies the IPv6 address of the gateway 1 Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Cost Specifies the cost of this route Valid Values A numeric value Default Value 1 Via gateway 2 Specifies the IPv6 address of the gateway 2 Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Cost Specifies the cost of this route Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPV6 385 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Valid Values A numeric value Default Value 1 Via gateway 3 Specifies the IPv6 address of the gateway 3 Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Cost Specifies the cost of this route Valid Values A numeric value Default Value 1 Via gateway 4 Specifies the IPv6 address of the gateway 4 Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Cost Specifies the cost of this route Valid Values A numeric value Default Value 1 tunnel Adds a tunnel Add a static route through this tunnel Specifies whether or not the tunnel will have a static route defined Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes IPV6 destination network Specifies the IPv6 address of the destination network that will be reached by the tunnel Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Prefix length Decimal value specifying how many of the leftmost contiguous bits of the IPv6 address comprise the prefix Valid Values 8 128 Defaul
500. on that stops the traces is applied to the router Note Running traces on the router can affect its performance Traces should be started only when needed for node service and should be stopped as soon as the required amount of trace information is gathered The APPN traces are grouped into the following 5 categories e Node level traces specify traces concerning the overall APPN network node e Inter process signals traces specify component level traces concerning signals between APPN components Chapter1 APPN 39 APPN e Module entry and exit traces specify component level traces concerning the entry and exit of APPN modules e General traces specify component level traces concerning the APPN components e Miscellaneous traces specify trace information about DLC transmissions and receptions APPN Trace Enhancements The following are enhancements to the APPN traces e You can now enable disable all trace flags through talk 6 using the Turn all trace flags off question asked under the set trace command or by using the Configuration Program See for more information e You can now filter the data link control transmissions and receptions trace data by message type and or by specifying the maximum length of data per packet to trace See Fable 7 on page tia fof information Accounting and Node Statistics Intermediate sessions are LU LU sessions that pass through the APPN network node but whose endpoints origin and destina
501. onal Personality GTE Telenet DCE To change the device type to DCE enter X 25 Config gt set equipment type dce Lists all parameters configured for X 25 National Personality GTE Telenet DTE National Personality GTE Telenet DCE If not then chose one router to act as a DCE and modify as such X 25 Config gt set national personality dce e RESTART the router so that all configured parameters take effect f To VERIFY that the configuration is valid after a restart go to the monitor side and observe if the link is coming up t5 c This gives you the state of the link at that time If you see the state of the X 25 link transitions from testing to down go to ELS messages and see if there is an obvious error If the state of the X 25 link transitions from testing to up then chances are the x 25 configuration is valid 2 To VERIFY that the X 25 link is operational a TRY to PING each end of the X 25 link from the IP monitor IP gt interface Verify that the correct X 25 addresses had been configured in the IP protocol IP gt ping IP address of remote X 25 link 3 To CONFIGURE DECnet PhaselV on the Router a DEFINE DECnet Executor parameters NCP gt define exec address area node Routers DECnet address NCP gt define exec type DEC ROUTING IV Configures the router as a LEVEL 1 DEC type router Chapter 7 Using DNAIV 263 Using DNA IV Note This example is for configuring a router to in
502. onfig gt set link role secondary SDLC 1 Config gt set link type point to point SDLC 1 Config gt list link xx will show link configuration SDLC 1 Config gt ex Config gt CTRL p reload Are you sure you want to reload the gateway Yes or No yes t6 Config gt p appn APPN user configuration APPN config gt add port sdic APPN Port Interface number Default 0 0 1 Port name Max 8 characters SDLC001 Enable APPN on this port Y es N o Y Port Definition Service any node Y es N o Y Maximum number of link stations 1 127 2 Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list port sd1c001 will show port definitions APPN config gt add link sd1c001 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters TOSTNC1 Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Station address 1 fe C1 Note Cl must match to the remote secondary station Adjacent node type APPN network node 1 APPN end node 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 0 Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Chapter1 APPN 69 APPN Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt list link tostncl will show link station definitions APPN config gt add link sd1c0 1
503. onfiguration Commands Delete Disable Enable List Set Accessing the PIM Monitoring Environment PIM Monitoring Commands Dump routing tables Clear Interface Join Leave Mcache Mgroup Mstats Neighbor PIM Summary PIM Ping Traceroute Variables Chapter 17 Configuring and Monitoring Routing Information Protocol RIP6 Accessing the RIP6 Configuration Environment RIP6 Configuration Commands Add Change Delete Disable Enable List Contents 402 402 403 405 405 405 405 407 408 409 409 409 409 410 410 410 410 411 411 411 411 412 412 412 413 415 416 416 416 417 417 418 418 418 419 420 421 422 422 422 423 425 425 425 425 426 427 427 428 430 ix Seba gk ge Bowe bee Bek eee be Be Se we Boe oe we 6 4 480 Accessing the RIP6 Monitoring Environment 2 481 RIP6 Monitoring Commands 2 481 LISS fe we Ge Oe Ge et Ge eo en Se lee a es ee a 4 DUMPS 3 ee ie ed PG ag ok Ee eR a Re wo eS 2487 PINQG s a e a oe ee oe we ee ee ee ee ek ew ee Pe 2 482 Appendix A Comparison of Protocols 483 Protocol Comparison Table 2 2 ee ee ee 483 Key to Protocols 2 2 2 ee ee 483 Appendix B Packet Sizes 2 2 2 2 485 General Issues 2
504. onfiguring and Monitoring APPN 149 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Link station name required Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of a link station that represents the TG link between the router network node and the adjacent node The link station name must be unique within this network node Parameter Port name Valid Values A unique unqualified name that is automatically generated The name will consist of TR token ring EN Ethernet e DLS DLSw FR frame relay e X25 X 25 e SDLC SDLC e PPP point to point e IP followed by the interface number Default Value The name of the port that this link station is defined on Description This parameter specifies the name representing the port this link station is defined on The port must already have been configured for APPN 150 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Link type X 25 and ATM only If limited resource yes is configured for this link station then the link type parameter defaults to a value of 1 SVC and is not config
505. onment VINES Dn Commands Add ea Delete Disable Enable List Set Accessing the VINES Monitoring Environment VINES Monitoring Commands Counters hae Dump Route Chapter 7 Using DNA IV DNA IV Overview f DNA IV Terminology and Concepts 214 214 214 215 215 216 eel 221 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 229 229 229 230 231 231 231 232 233 233 233 233 234 234 235 238 238 239 239 240 241 241 241 241 242 242 242 243 244 245 245 245 246 248 249 249 250 Contents V ROUINO eee a ek ew ee ee we ee oe 5 Routing Tables wa eare a kos eee 251 Area Routers be Sa hc A a ce we we 2 252 Configuring Routing Parameters S Goes Se Gh wien ie oe ie a 4 Re me aoe IBM s Implementation of DNAIV 2 ee ee 252 Managing Traffic Using Access Control 2 258 Managing Traffic Using Area Routing Filters 256 Configuring DNA IV 2 2 we ee ee ee 26 Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNAIV 265 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands 265 Define Set 2 2 2 eee ee 266 PUIG so fe SS aie Ae A wm ha a a ee ae 4 Seba ok aoe we Ba Be a ee 2 Ape eke we we bee 6 oe 24 SNOW s a 6 ete mR BR RH Bow HR A we Aa we ew A om te we wm wet SHOWEISt 2 4 S210 amp deh oe 4
506. onstructs this message to inform the ES of its NET Upon receiving of this message the ES extracts the NET and SNPA information and stores the pair in one of its local routing tables replacing any other information currently stored there X 25 Circuits for DECnet V OSI For X 25 networks the router establishes X 25 switched virtual circuits SVCs on routing circuits Note To enable DECnet V OSI for X 25 you must enter the DECnet IV process and define your router to be a DEC AREA or DEC ROUTING IV router You must do this and restart the router to enable the commands to do the DECnet V OSI configuration Use the define executor type command Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 299 Using OSI DECnet V Routing Circuits Filters Routing circuits are point to point connections between nodes that implement the ISO CLNS protocol The router employs these types of routing circuits e Static incoming circuits e Static outgoing circuits e Dynamically assigned circuits Static incoming and static outgoing circuits have only one SVC associated with them and they carry both user data and non user data Such as routing protocol messages You bring static circuits up and down explicitly using DECnet V OSI configuration commands Dynamically assigned routing circuits are established upon data arrival and are cleared when there is no data being transmitted or received A dynamically assigned circuit can have multiple SVCs but can carry only user da
507. opology isolation between the two subnetworks while allowing directory services flows and sessions to span the subnetwork boundaries There must be a BN on one side of the subnetwork boundary in order to use this function When a BN connects to a non native NN the BN looks like an EN to the non native NN even though the BN is actually a NN There may be two BNs one on each side of the boundary cooperating to perform this function When two BNs connect across a subnetwork boundary the BN will look like a NN to the non native BN A BN will appear to be the NN server for all non native resources accessible through the BN This allows the existing APPN directory caching and route calculation functions to work while enabling the BN to intercept and modify all Locate and BIND flows which cross an inter subnetwork TG ISTG BNs implement piece wise optimal session route calculation Each subnetwork calculates its own part of the session s route selection control vector RSCV to the entry point in the next non native subnetwork While the RSCV will be optimal through the native subnetwork there is no guarantee that the end to end session path will be optimal 14 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Network Topology Example Figure 1 shows many of the connectivity options provided by the BN function In general you can get from any network to any other network except that NetF can only reach network NetE and NetE is the only network
508. option for this node The value of this parameter is the suggested receive pacing Command Line option for the adjacent node e For adaptive session level pacing The session level pacing Command Line option size parameter specifies a tuning parameter to be used as the minimum size for Isolated Pacing Messages sent by the adjacent nodes Syntax add additional port to connection network You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Note You can have a maximum of 5 ports per connection network definition 184 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 34 Configuration Parameter List APPN Additional port to Connection Network Parameter Information Parameter Connection network name fully qualified required for each connection network defined Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing connection network of which this node desires to become a member named using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new connection network names Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of the connection network being defined on this router networ
509. or Unknown node type 2 LEN end node 3 PU 2 0 node 1 0 High performance routing Y es N o Y Edit Dependent LU Server Y es N o N Allow CP CP sessions on this link Y es N o Y CP CP session level security Y es N o N Configure CP name of adjacent node Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written nada207 APPN config gt act nada207 APPN config gt exit nada207 Config gt write Config Save Using bank B and config number 2 74 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuring TN3270E Using DLUR APPN config gt APPN config gt set node Enable APPN Y es N o Y Network ID Max 8 characters STFNET Control point name Max 8 characters VLNN2 Enable branch extender Y es N o N Route addition resistance 0 255 128 XID ID number for subarea connection 5 hex digits 00000 Use enhanced BATCH COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced BATCHSC COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced INTER COS Y es N o Y Use enhanced INTERSC COS Y es N o Y Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt APPN config gt APPN config gt set dlur Enable DLUR Y es N o Y Fully qualified CP name of primary DLUS STFNET MVS8 Fully qualified CP name of backup DLUS Perform retries to restore disrupted pipe Y Delay before initiating retries 0 27
510. or a response This command can be used to verify basic AppleTalk connectivity and to isolate trouble in the AppleTalk internetwork Syntax atecho dest_net dest_node dest_net Specifies the destination AppleTalk network number in decimal This is a required parameter dest_node Specifies the destination AppleTalk node number in decimal This is a required parameter Chapter 4 Configuring and Monitoring AppleTalk Phase 2 229 AppleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Note For many AppleTalk nodes the network address network number and node number is dynamically assigned and might not be readily available However there are still a number of ways to use the atecho command effectively 1 The AppleTalk address for router nodes is statically configured in many cases Connectivity between router nodes is critical to overall network connectivity 2 By setting the atecho destination node number to 255 you can query all nodes on the specified network number on a directly attached AppleTalk network The received responses will indicate the node s node number These node numbers can then be used to echo these nodes from distant routers to verify connectivity src_net Source AppleTalk network number This is an optional parameter If not specified the router uses its interface network number on the outgoing interface leading to the destination network If the outgoing interface is an unnumbered half router PPP interface t
511. or forwarding APPN and LU 6 2 generic alerts about itself and the resources in its domain to a focal point for centralized processing A focal point is an entry point that provides centralized management and control for other entry points for one or more network management categories Note If a focal point is not available to receive an alert from the device the alert is held stored by the device Entry points that communicate with a focal point make up that focal point s sphere of control f a focal point explicitly defines the entry points in its sohere of control and initiates communication with those entry points it is an explicit focal point If a Chapter1 APPN 17 APPN focal point is designated by its entry points which initiate communication with the focal point the focal point is an implicit focal point The focal point for the router can be either an explicit or implicit focal point Routers configured as branch extender nodes have additional flexibility As with conventional network nodes the focal point can directly establish an explicit relationship with the branch extender node Also as with conventional network nodes you can configure one or more implicit focal points at the branch extender node Unlike conventional network nodes branch extender nodes can alternatively learn of the focal point from its network node server When the network node server establishes a relationship with the focal point either explic
512. or other network nodes Topology and Routing services At the request of an APPN end node the network node dynamically determines the route from an origin logical unit LU to a destination LU in the network The network node also maintains information on other network nodes and the routes to those nodes The route is based on the current topology of the network Management services The network node can pass alert conditions to a designated focal point to allow centralized problem management The network node is responsible for processing alert conditions for all the resources in its domain EManagingl b Network Node on page TA describes this process APPN End Nodes An APPN end node provides limited directory routing and management services for logical units LUs associated with the node An APPN end node selects a network node to be its network node server If the network node agrees to act as the APPN end node s server the end node can register its local resources with the network node This enables the network node server to intercept and pass along search requests for resources located on the APPN end node The APPN end node and its network node server communicate by establishing CP CP sessions An APPN end node may be connected to a number of network nodes but only one of these nodes acts as the APPN end node s server at any one time The APPN end node forwards all requests for unknown resources to the network node server Th
513. oring command 331 command summary DNAIV 265 configurable Held Altert Queue 19 36 123 configuration changes affect on the router 26 configuration options 26 configuration requirements 26 connection networks 12 COS 36 COS mapping table 35 counters AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring command 231 IPV6 monitoring command 398 VINES monitoring command 245 471 D DDD LU TN3270E Server and 23 DDDLU 20 DECnet NCP See NCP 249 delete AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration command 223 APPN configuration command 192 IPV6 configuration command 387 IPV6 update packet filter configuration command 396 NDP configuration command 408 OSI configuration command 314 PIM configuration command 411 RIP6 configuration command 427 VINES configuration command 242 destination devices 354 Dial on Demand 51 APPN using 51 Digital Network Architecture DNA phase IV 249 disable AppleTalk Phase 2 configuration command 224 APPN configuration command 83 IPV6 configuration command 388 NDP configuration command 409 OSI configuration command 316 PIM configuration command 412 RIP6 configuration command 427 VINES configuration command 242 DLUR 9 36 41 DLUR retry algorithm 41 DNA IV access control configuring 254 exclusive 255 inclusive 254 managing traffic 253 addressing 802 5 Token 250 description 250 Ethernet data link 250 X 25 data link 250 area routers description 251 level 1 252 level 2 252 area routing filters 256 area support of 249 blending domains 25
514. ormation Use the define circuit tyoe state on command DNA IV and DNA V Algorithm Considerations DNA IV uses a distance vector routing algorithm DNA V can use either a distance vector or a link state routing algorithm The algorithm is selected according to what is enabled and disabled and combinations that can result from these two protocols DNA IV disabled and OSI DNA V enabled This combination is considered a pure OSI DNA V environment and the algorithm is automatically set to link state at both levels 1 and 2 regardless of how the set algorithm command is configured DNA IV enabled and OSI DNA V disabled This combination is considered a pure DNA IV environment and the algorithm is set automatically to distance vector regardless of how the set algorithm command is configured DNA IV enabled and OSI DNA V enabled This is a mixed environment and the algorithm information is configured and read out of SRAM Use the set algorithm command to configure this information into SRAM Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 303 Using OSI DECnet V 304 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V This chapter describes the OSI DECnet V monitoring commands and includes the following Accessing the OSI Configuration Environment For information on how to access the OSI configuration environment refer to Getting Started Introduction to the User Interface in the Software User s Guide D
515. otocol NBP In AppleTalk networks a protocol that provides name translation function from the AppleTalk entity resource name character string into an AppleTalk IP address 16 bit number on the transport layer name resolution In Internet communications the process of mapping a machine name to the 460 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 corresponding Internet Protocol IP address See also Domain Name System DNS name server In the Internet suite of protocols synonym for domain name server nearest active upstream neighbor NAUN In the IBM Token Ring Network the station sending data directly to a given station on the ring neighbor A router on a common subnetwork that has been designated by a network administrator to receive routing information NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System A standard interface to networks IBM personal computers PCs and compatible PCs that is used on LANs to provide message print server and file server functions Application programs that use NetBIOS do not need to handle the details of LAN data link control DLC protocols network 1 A configuration of data processing devices and software connected for information interchange 2 A group of nodes and the links interconnecting them Network Access Server NAS A device providing temporary on demand network access to users This access is point to point using PSTN or ISDN lines network accessible unit NAU A log
516. otocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Virtual Routing Node VRN This TG identifies the direct connection from the port to the connection network The CP name of the VRN is the connection network name Since the connectivity is represented by a TG from a given node to a VRN normal topology and routing services TRS can be used by the network node server to calculate the direct path between any two nodes attached to the connection network DLC signaling information is returned from the destination node during the normal locate process to enable the origin node to establish a connection directly to the destination node Connection Network CNI APPN a VRN ae EEE eama S APPN NN NN T ENTG SENi APPN EN Figure 5 APPN Frame Relay Bridged Frame BAN Connection Network The following are limitations on using APPN Frame Relay BAN connection networks e The same connection network can be defined on only one SATF e All frame relay ports belonging to the same connection network on the router must use the same DLCI number to connect to the frame relay network e When bridging is used instead of BAN all frame relay ports belonging to the same connection network on the router must have the same BNI MAC address SAP pair defined e CP CP sessions cannot be established over links established through a connection network Sample APPN Frame Relay BAN Connection Network Definitions Example 1
517. ount at 0 the link is assumed to be inoperative Parameter LDLC Timer Period Valid Values 1 255 seconds Default Value For ATM 1 second For IP 15 seconds Description This parameter specifies the timer period used with the LDLC retry count Parameter VPI Valid Values 0 255 Default Value 0 Description This parameter identifies the VPI of the PVC at the interface Parameter VCI Valid Values 0 65535 Default Value 0 Description This parameter identifies the VCI of the PVC at the interface Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 161 APPN Configuration Commands Table 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Broadband Bearer Class Valid Values Class_A Class_C Class _X Default Value Class_X Description This parameter specifies the bearer class requested from the ATM network The classes are defined Class A Constant bit rate CBR with end to end timing requirements Class C Variable bit rate VBR with no end to end timing requirements Class X Service allowing user defined traffic type and timing requirements Parameter Best Effort Indicator Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter indicates if a throughput guarantee is required on this SVC If the value of this parameter is yes then VCCs associated with this interface will be allocated based upon
518. our 64 Kbps channels The European version E1 transmits 2 048 Mbps U universally administered address In a local area network the address permanently encoded in an 468 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 adapter at the time of manufacture All universally administered addresses are unique Contrast with locally administered address User Datagram Protocol UDP In the Internet suite of protocols a protocol that provides unreliable connectionless datagram service It enables an application program on one machine or process to send a datagram to an application program on another machine or process UDP uses the Internet Protocol IP to deliver datagrams V V 24 In data communication a specification of the CCITT that defines the list of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment DTE and data circuit terminating equipment DCE V 25 In data communication a specification of the CCITT that defines the automatic answering equipment and parallel automatic calling equipment on the General Switched Telephone Network including procedures for disabling of echo controlled devices for both manually and automatically established calls V 34 An ITU T Recommendation for modem communication over standard commercially available voice grade 33 6 Kbps and slower channels V 35 In data communication a specification of the CCITT that defines the list of definitions for interchange circuits between dat
519. outing protocols the sum of the link costs along the path between two nodes or networks path information unit PIU A message unit consisting of a transmission header TH alone or a TH followed by a basic information unit BIU or a BIU segment pattern matching character A special character such as an asterisk or a question mark that can be used to represent one or more characters Any character or set of characters can replace a pattern matching character Synonymous with global character and wildcard character permanent virtual circuit PVC In X 25 and frame relay communications a virtual circuit that has a logical channel permanently assigned to it at each data 462 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 terminal equipment DTE Call establishment protocols are not required Contrast with switched virtual circuit SVC physical circuit A circuit established without multiplexing See also data circuit Contrast with virtual circuit physical layer In the Open Systems Interconnection reference model the layer that provides the mechanical electrical functional and procedural means to establish maintain and release physical connections over the transmission medium T physical unit PU 1 The component that manages and monitors the resources such as attached links and adjacent link stations associated with a node as requested by an SSCP via an SSCP PU session An SSCP activates a session with the ph
520. p Resolution Request packet along the routed path The request Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 345 Using NHRP includes the destination protocol address The routers that are also NHRP servers along the routed path first check to see if the destination protocol address is an address that it can serve If the router can satisfy the request the router returns a Next Hop Resolution Reply with the NBMA address of the destination station The originator can then establish a direct virtual circuit with the destination If it cannot satisfy the request the router forwards the request to the next hop router This forwarding continues until the request can be satisfied or it is determined that the destination cannot be reached To use client server terminology a device may be both a client and a server The client is the device that originates Next Hop Resolution Requests and the server is the one that provides Next Hop Resolution Replies with NBMA address information The 2210 is such a device the client conceptually registers with the server function in the same machine although no Registration Requests actually flow The server also supports NHRP Registrations from remote NHRFP clients The information provided by clients to their server and by servers to requestors must be refreshed periodically and may be purged if conditions dictate Clients and Servers maintain caches of resolution information that they have sent and received
521. parameter is used in conjunction with the Maximum number of adjacent nodes parameter by the automatic tuning algorithm to calculate the values for the Maximum shared memory and Maximum cached directory entries tuning parameters This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Parameter Percent of adjacent nodes with CP CP sessions using HPR Valid Values 0 to 100 Default Value 0 none Description This parameter specifies an estimate of the maximum number of adjacent EN and NN with CP CP sessions using option set 1402 Control Flows over RTP option set This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Parameter Maximum percent of ISR sessions using HPR data connections Valid Values 0 to 100 percent Default 0 percent Description This parameter specifies the largest percentage of ISR sessions that use ISR to HPR mappings This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only 98 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 8 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Tuning continued Parameter Information Parameter Percent adjacent nodes that function as DLUR PU nodes Valid Values 0 to 100 percent Default 0 percent Description This parameter specifies the largest percentage of adjacent nodes allowed to function as adjacent DLUR PU nodes This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only
522. passed to the final destination A benefit of spoofing is the prevention of end to end session timeouts standard MIB In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a MIB module that is located under the management branch of the Structure of Management Information SMI and that is considered a standard by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF static route The route between hosts networks or both that is manually entered into a routing table station An input or output point of a system that uses telecommunication facilities for example one or more systems computers terminals devices and associated programs at a particular location that can send or receive data over a telecommunication line StreetTalk In the Virtual NEtworking System VINES a unique network wide naming and addressing system that allows users to locate and access any resource on the network without knowing the network topology See also Internet Control Protocol ICP and RouTing update Protocol RTP Structure of Management Information SMI 1 In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the rules used to define the objects that can be accessed by means of a network management protocol 2 In OSI the set of standards relating to management information The set includes the Management Information Model and the Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects subarea A portion of the SNA network consisting of a subarea node attached
523. pe destination type DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol E1 2 048 Mbps transmission rate EDEL end delimiter EDI error detected indicator EGP Exterior Gateway Protocol EIA Electronics Industries Association ELAN Emulated LAN ELAP EtherTalk Link Access Protocol ELS Event Logging System ESI End system identifier EST Eastern Standard Time Eth Ethernet fa ga_ functional address group address FCS frame check sequence FECN forward explicit congestion notification FIFO first in first out FLT filter library FR Frame Relay FRL Frame Relay FTP File Transfer Protocol GMT Greenwich Mean Time GOSIP Government Open Systems Interconnection Profile List of Abbreviations 439 GTE General Telephone Company GWCON HDLC HEX HPR HST HTF IBD ICMP ICP ID IDP IDP IEEE lic IGP InARP IP IPCP IPPN IPX IPXCP ISDN ISO Kbps LAC LAN LAPB LAT LCP LED LF LIS LLC LLC2 LMI LNS Gateway Console high level data link control hexadecima high performance routing TCP IP host services host table format Integrated Boot Device Internet Control Message Protocol Internet Control Protocol identification Initial Domain Part Internet Datagram Protocol Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers interface number interior gateway protocol Inverse Address Resolution Protocol Internet Protocol IP Control Protocol IP Protocol Network Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX Control Protocol
524. pecifies all addresses packet filter Enables a packet filter 388 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 List IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 packet filter name Specifies the name of the packet filter to be enabled This name is configured using the add packet filter command Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None path mtu discovery Enables Path MTU Discovery a protocol that allows a host node to determine the maximum size packet that will traverse a path to a destination without fragmentation Use the list command to display the IPV6 configuration Syntax list all addresses icmp redirect leaked routes mid packet filter routes sizes tunnels Example IPV6 config gt list all Interface addresses IPV6 addresses for each interface intf 0 IP disabled on this interface intf 1 IP disabled on this interface intf 2 IP disabled on this interface intf 3 IP disabled on this interface intf 4 IP disabled on this interface intf 5 1234 1234 1234 1234 5234 6234 7234 8234 128 1223 7 1234 8 Router ID 1 9 Internal IP address 1 8 Routing route to 1234 1223 128 via 1234 0 9 8 cost 100 via 1234 0 9 8 8 7 6 8 cost 232 via 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 cost 1 via 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cost 1 route to 0 via 1 8 cost 100 route to 2 8 9 8 via 1 8 cost 1 Path MTU Discovery disabled Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPV6 389 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Path MTU Aging Timer
525. pecifies the UDP port number to be used for XID exchange and is used during IP port definition This port number must be the same as the one defined on other devices in the network Parameter UDP port number for network priority traffic Valid Values 1024 to 65535 Default Value 11001 Description This parameter specifies the UDP port number to be used for network priority traffic Parameter UDP port number for high priority traffic Valid Values 1024 to 65535 Default Value 11002 Description This parameter specifies the UDP port number to be used for high priority traffic Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 137 APPN Configuration Commands Table 19 Configuration Parameter List Port Definition continued Parameter Information Parameter UDP port number for medium priority traffic Valid Values 1024 to 65535 Default Value 11003 Description This parameter specifies the UDP port number to be used for medium priority traffic Parameter UDP port number for low priority traffic Valid Values 1024 to 65535 Default Value 11004 Description This parameter specifies the UDP port number to be used for low priority traffic Parameter IP network type Valid Values Campus or Widearea Default Value Widearea Description This parameter specifies the IP network type Parameter Local APPN SAP address Valid Values Multiples of four in the hexadecimal range X 04 to
526. pecifies the fully qualified names of LUs associated with a LEN end node The specified LU names are registered in the network node s directory services database If a name is not registered the network node cannot locate the LU unless the LU name is the same as the CP name of the LEN end node You need to specify a fully qualified LU name which consists of a network ID and the LU name The network ID is the name of the network that contains the adjacent LEN end node The LU name is the name of a logical unit accessible through the adjacent LEN end node Syntax add connection network You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 173 APPN Configuration Commands Table 30 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Detail Parameter Information Parameter Fully qualified Connection network name required for each connection network defined Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing connection network of which this node desires to become a member named using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new connection network names Default
527. peripheral nodes and associated resources Within a subarea node all network accessible units NAUs links and adjacent link stations in attached peripheral or subarea nodes that are addressable within the subarea share a common subarea address and have distinct element addresses subnet 1 In TCP IP a part of a network that is identified by a portion of the IP address 2 Synonym for subnetwork 466 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 subnet address In Internet communications an extension to the basic IP addressing scheme where a portion of the host address is interpreted as the local network address subnet mask Synonym for address mask subnetwork 1 Any group of nodes that have a set of common characteristics such as the same network ID 2 Synonymous with subnet Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP In LANs a 5 byte protocol discriminator that identifies the non IEEE standard protocol family to which a packet belongs The SNAP value is used to differentiate between protocols that use AA as their service access point SAP value subnetwork mask Synonym for address mask subsystem A secondary or subordinate system usually capable of operating independently of or asynchronously with a controlling system T switched virtual circuit SVC An X 25 circuit that is dynamically established when needed The X 25 equivalent of a switched line Contrast with permanent virtual circuit PVC synchronous 1
528. pleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Environment To access the AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring environment enter the following command at the GWCON prompt protocol ap2 AP2 gt AppleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Commands Atecho This section describes the AppleTalk Phase 2 monitoring commands which allow you to view the parameters and statistics of the interfaces and networks that transmit AppleTalk Phase 2 packets Monitoring commands display configuration values for the physical frame and packet levels You also have the option of viewing the values for all three protocol levels at once shows the commands Table 52 AppleTalk Phase 2 Monitoring Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the options for specific commands if available See boai Atecho Sends echo requests and watches for responses Cache Displays the cache table entries Clear Clears all cache usage counters and packet overflow counters Counters Counters Displays the overflow count of AP2 packets for each interface Dump Displays the current state of the routing table for all networks in the internet and their associated zone names Interface Displays the current addresses of the interfaces Exit Returns you to the previous command level See FExiting a Lower l evel n onmen ON npade xx The atecho command sends AppleTalk Echo Requests to a specified destination and watches f
529. ply Forwards Unrecognized Options Registration Overflows ProtocolErrors Negative Outbound Replies Inbound Packets on NHRP disabled interface Send_to_me Outbound Replies Inbound Purges Outbound Purges NOVDDOVDVVTVDVVVVVOMNWWwm Cache Use the cache command to display all NHRP resolution cache entries or a specific cache entry identified by a destination address Syntax cache list entry list Lists NHRP cache entries entry Lists a specific NHRP cache entry Examples cache list Total Client Cache Entries 3 NHRP Client Cache Entries Dest Address NextHop Address State Htime MTU Net 5 51 Ded 5 5 5 1 Act 1121 4490 1 5 5052 Die Dis Ded Inact 1185 4490 1 6 6 6 1 6 6 6 1 Act 602 9180 0 370 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 NHRP Monitoring Commands Talk 5 cache entry Enter destination address 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 1 Destination 6 6 6 1 NextHop 6 6 6 1 ATM Address 39840F0000000000000000000410005A00DEADCA State Act Net 0 HoldingTime 433 seconds MTU size 9180 Flags 0x00420000 Server_purge_cache Use the server_purge_cache command to list all NHRP server purge cache entries Syntax server_purge_cache Use the MIB command to display NHRP MIB related information Syntax mib list entry list Lists NHRP mib entries for e Server table e Client table e Next Hop Server NHS statistics table e Next Hop Client NHC statistics table e Resolution cache table Example mib list s
530. pping enhances central administration by allowing the administrator to configure which SNA resources LUs Pool client IP address subnets will map to and use without modifying client configurations Mapping removes the burden on the client of having to connect to a specific port or request a specific LU Pool on their connect request These decisions are maintained at the server When a client connects in while mapping is enabled the Server will begin ANDing the client s IP address with the subnet mask of each map definition The longest match between the incoming Client IP address and the map definition determines which map definition is tried first If all eligible resources in the map definition are in use the map definitions are again searched for the next most specific match If a map definition contains a full subnet mask 255 255 255 255 indicating that the entry is for a specific client and a specific LU Pool is not requested by the client any LU Pool in the map definition that matches the connection type may be tried If a map definition does not contain a full subnet mask and a specific LU Pool is not requested only Pool entries in the map definition will be tried You must have the subnet map to a Pool For individual workstation LUs with associated printers only the workstation LU is required to be in the map definition 22 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN A mixture of Pool and LU types Workstation or Printe
531. presenting the connections to the adjacent nodes 2 See also adjacent link station ALS local 1 Pertaining to a device accessed directly without use of a telecommunication line 2 Contrast with remote 3 Synonym for channel attached local area network LAN 1 A computer network located on a user s premises within a limited geographical area Communication within a local area network is not subject to external regulations however communication across the LAN boundary may be subject to some form of regulation T 2 A network in which a set of devices are connected to one another for communication and that can be connected to a 458 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 larger network 3 See also Ethernet and token ring 4 Contrast with metropolitan area network MAN and wide area network WAN local bridging A function of a bridge program that allows a single bridge to connect multiple LAN segments without using a telecommunication link Contrast with remote bridging local management interface LMI See ocal management interface LMI protocol local management interface LMI protocol In NCP a set of frame relay network management procedures and messages used by adjacent frame relay nodes to exchange line status information over DLCI X 00 NCP supports both the American National Standards Institute ANSI and International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee ITU T CCITT versions of LMI prot
532. quired to get AP2 up_and running For information on how to make further configuration changes see AppleTalk Phase A Con For the configuration changes to take effect you must restart the router To access the AP2 configuration environment enter protocol ap2 at the Config gt prompt Enabling AP2 When you configure a router to forward AP2 packets you must enable certain parameters If you have multiple routers transferring AP2 packets specify these parameters for each router To enable AP2 1 Use the enable ap2 command to globally enable AP2 on the router For example AP2 config gt enable ap2 2 Enable the specific interfaces over which AP2 is to send packets For example AP2 config gt enable interface 1 Setting Network Parameters To set up your router as a seed router you must set the network range a starting node number and at least one zone name You can configure some interfaces on a router as seed routers and leave other interfaces as non seed routers You must have at least one seed router for each AppleTalk network and you should configure several seed routers on a network in case one of them fails Note Do not set a network range or a node number for half routers 1 Use the set net range command to set the Network Range For example AP2 config gt set net range Interface 0 1 First Network range number 1 65279 or O to delete 1 Last Network range number 1 165279 5 Enter the sam
533. r e For dec the user data identifies the outgoing calls as coming from a Digital Equipment Company router e For user you are prompted for an additional entry of up to 16 octets Enter text to match the user data of the appropriate filter on a remote router Example add template Template Name Routing Circuit Name DTE Address Call UserData OSI DEC USER If you choose user this additional prompt appears max 16 octets Enter up to 16 octets of text for user data Allows you to modify the parameters of ISO DNV records created in the permanent database Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 311 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Syntax change filter prefix address routing circuit template filter filter name Changes the values for routing circuit filter parameters You can enter a filter name or let the router prompt you for the filter name The values in brackets are the current values for the parameters the configured value read from the permanent database Example change filter Filter Name currentvalue DTE Address currentvalue Call Userdata OSI DEC USER currentvalue If you select user this additional prompt appears for you to enter user data followed by a Priority prompt max 16 octets currentvalue prefix address Changes the address data for subnets The router prompts you for the address data Example change prefix address LAN S
534. r 15 Maximum routers 16 278 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands Adjacent node Listen timer Adjacent node Listen timer Adjacent node Listen timer n v uv ac Circuit State Designated router Cost Router priority Hello timer Maximum routers Example show circuit eth 0 counters This example shows the counters that are kept for the circuits Note that some counters kept by DECnet VAX are not kept here but are instead read through the network command of GWCON Circuit Volatile Counters Circuit Eth 0 525249 Seconds since last zeroed 0 Terminating packets received 0 Originating packets sent 3693 Transit packets received 4723 Transit packets sent 0 Transit congestion loss O Circuit down 0 Initialization failure 0 Packet corruption loss adjacent node Node ID of a node that has an adjacency with this node on the circuit being displayed While adjacencies with end nodes automatically make that node reachable a router adjacency does not automatically make that node reachable A router is not considered reachable unless a routing message has been received over an active adjacency from that router Thus nodes may show as adjacent in the circuit database but will not be in the reachable nodes database show active nodes block size Maximum data block size that the associated adjacent node is willing to receive This is typically 1498 bytes which is the stand
535. r broadcast media do not have built in security features Chapter 7 Using DNA IV 253 Using DNA IV Access control prevents the forwarding of DNA IV Long Format data packets on the basis of source address destination address and interface Access control does not affect routing packets because they use a different packet format This makes configuring access control safer because you cannot break the routing protocol To implement access control addresses are masked and compared That is the address in question is masked with 1s in the bit positions to be tested and Os in the free area The address is then compared to a fixed value For example you could use a mask of 63 1023 all 1s and compare it to a result of 6 23 which would be true only for node 6 23 You could use a mask of 63 0 and a result of 9 0 which would be true for any node in area 9 These mask and compare values come in pairs for source and destination address They are then formed into lists for an interface Each interface can have one access control list which is applied to packets received on that interface This list may be inclusive or exclusive An inclusive list is a set of address pairs that designates a corridor for traffic flow An exclusive list is a set of address pairs that does not allow traffic flow In an inclusive list the source and destination addresses are tested using the mask and compare values If any entry s source and destination matche
536. r can be added to a particular map The resource selected will be based on the type of connection request The order in which the resources are defined in the map will be the order in which it is chosen for a particular connection request How LUs are Chosen For Client Connections When IP Address to LU Name Mapping is enabled client IP Address to LU Name Mappings take priority over everything else The client s IP address is used to determine which LU Pool will be used If the IP Address Map definition specifies lt DEFLT gt as the pool name the destination port number will be used to determine the SNA resource to use based on the table below The table will also be used when Mapping is enabled but no Map definitions exist If the client specifies an LU Pool name on the connect request that name must match a resource in a Map definition If the name specified by the client is an LU name that is contained within a Pool that LU name MUST be in the Map definition for the connection to be accepted It is not sufficient for just an LU s Pool name to be in the Map definition When IP Address to LU Name Mapping is not enabled the following table describes how SNA resources are assigned Client Connection Port Definition Result Explicit LU or Pool name specified Pool name defined Explicit name is used as long as the incoming name matches the defined name Explicit LU or Pool name specified lt DEFLT gt define
537. r you can simplify the task considerably by allowing the router network node to accept connection requests from any node Configuring the network node in this manner eliminates the need to define information about adjacent nodes except in the following cases e The adjacent node is a LEN end node LEN end nodes do not support CP CP sessions so information about such nodes and their LU resources must be configured on the router network node e You want the router network node to be able to initiate a CP CP session with an adjacent APPN node In these cases you must specify information about the adjacent node when enabling APPN routing on the specific port you are using to connect to the adjacent node and should follow the configuration steps described in A Use the following procedure for minimum configuration steps 1 If you are configuring APPN using a DLSw port a Enable bridging on the node b Enable DLSw on the node c Define the DLSw port with a locally administered MAC address for DLSw 2 Enable APPN routing on the port Note Since Service Any is enabled by default the node accepts any request for a connection that it receives from another node 3 Enable the APPN Network Node 4 Configure the following parameters e Network ID e Control point name 5 Define the XID number for subarea connections parameter for the APPN network node optional 6 Accept all other defaults 7 Optionally do the following e M
538. r APPN APPN Network Node An APPN network node provides directory and routing services for all resources LUs in its domain A network node s domain consists of e Local resources owned by the node Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 1 APPN e A control point CP which manages the node s resources e Resources owned by APPN end nodes and LEN end nodes that use the services of the network node APPN network nodes also e Exchange information about the topology of the network This information is exchanged each time network nodes establish a connection or when there is a change in the topology of the network such as when a network node is deactivated brought on line or when a link is congested or fails When a network node receives a topology update it broadcasts this information to other active and network nodes with which it has CP CP sessions e Act as intermediate nodes receiving session data from one adjacent node and passing that data on to the next adjacent node along the route As a network node the router can act as a server to attached APPN end nodes and LEN end nodes and provide functions that include Directory services The network node communicating with other network nodes can locate a resource in the network on behalf of an APPN end node The network node also maintains a local directory of APPN and LEN end node resources that it can search on behalf of an attached APPN end node attached LEN end node
539. r external E routing or internal I routing State When set to ON this prefix address is advertised to other L2 routers When set to OFF this is a non functional prefix address routing circuit Adds a communications channel for X 25 switched virtual circuits SVCs that the routing layer uses to send and receive data The routing circuit parameter is only applicable if you configure your router as a DEC type router You can specify on of these types of routing circuit e static in e static out e dynamically assigned A static in circuit handles incoming X 25 calls A call filter see add filter specifies data the router uses to accept or reject incoming calls on the circuit A static out circuit initiates outgoing X 25 calls The router uses a call template see add template to make outgoing calls A dynamically assigned circuit can have multiple SVCs running simultaneously Unlike static circuits the router uses a dynamically assigned circuit only when there is traffic in or out of the router It closes the dynamically assigned circuit upon expiration of an idle timer 308 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 The add routing circuit command prompts you for values for its parameters Example add routing circuit Interface number 0 Circuit Name Circuit Type STATIC DA STATIC Circuit Direction OUT IN OUT If you select STATIC and OUT the following additional
540. r list 48 LU Pooling 21 managing network nodes 17 managing the router network node 17 mcache PIM monitoring command 418 mcast IPV6 monitoring command 399 memory APPN monitoring command 211 mgroup PIM monitoring command 418 mid IPV6 monitoring command 400 monitoring APPN 208 IPV6 monitoring commands 398 NDP monitoring commands 410 PIM monitoring commands 416 474 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 monitoring continued RIP6 monitoring commands 431 move IPV6 update packet filter configuration command 396 mstats PIM monitoring command 419 Multiple TN3270 ports 22 N NCP description of 252 NCP configuration commands purge 274 set 274 show 274 show circuit 277 summary of 265 zero 283 NCP monitoring commands purge 274 set 274 show 274 show circuit 277 summary of 265 zero 283 NDP configuring 405 NDP command 405 NDP configuration commands add 405 change 407 delete 408 disable 409 enable 409 list 409 summary 405 NDP monitoring commands accessing 409 dump 410 list 410 ping6 410 summary of 410 neighbor PIM monitoring command 420 Network Control Protocols NCP for PPP interfaces AppleTalk Control Protocol 214 Next Hop Resolution Protocol overview 345 next hop routers 354 NHRP 345 benefits 346 destination devices 354 examples classic IP environment 347 classic IP environment with non NHRP device 348 Egress Router 351 LAN emulation 349 LAN switches 349 NHRP continued examples continued
541. rameter determines if the protocol layer access controls will be checked and if so how these controls will be applied to NHRP packets If this configuration parameter is set to its default value of none the protocol layer access controls are not checked With the value of source and destination when the NHRP requester is not a router the NHRP client s IP address is assumed to be the source of all IP packets that will be transmitted by that client using the NHRP shortcut route The router denies NHRP shortcut requests from a non router NHRP client if any IP packets are being filtered for that IP destination source address pair where the source is the NHRP client s address 356 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using NHRP Selecting the destination only option causes the router to deny shortcut requests from any NHRP client if any IP packets are being filtered to the destination address If NHRP clients should not be trusted destination only should be selected destination only might be the best option when NHRP clients are non routers with multiple IP addresses or non router clients that transmit packet that originate from other sources NHRP clients that reside in the routers use the NHRP shortcut routes to forward packets from other sources therefore if source and destination is configured and the router receives a shortcut request from a router the router applies the IP filters the same way as when destination only is selected
542. ransmitted and the number of replies received Syntax ping 1139 Example ping 1139 Long term Short term LONG TERM Destination NSAP AA0003000A14 Data Length 16 PINGing AAQ003000A14 PING Statistics 8 requests transmitted 8 replies received Route Use the route command to display the next hop a packet would take to a specified destination destnsap Syntax route dest nsap Example route 490002aa0004000e08 Destination System 0000 9310 04C9 Destination MAC Address AA00 0400 1408 Interface 0 Destination System Indicates the system ID of the next hop IS For a directly connected ES this will be blank Destination MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the next hop IS or the directly connected ES Interface Indicates the interface that a packet would go out over to reach the next hop IS or the directly connected ES Send Echo Packet Use the send echo packet command to encode an echo request message in the CLNP packet to the specified destination nsap During this command the system does not interact with the OSI monitoring To verify that the echo request was sent and that an echo reply was received check the ELS Event Logging System Note You cannot send an echo packet to yourself If you try you will receive an CLNP 004 ELS message Syntax send 342 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Subnets OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Example send Dest
543. re provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement This document is not intended for production use and is furnished as is without any warranty of any kind and all warranties are hereby disclaimed including the warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 XV XVi MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Notice to Users of Online Versions of This Book For online versions of this book you are authorized to e Copy modify and print the documentation contained on the media for use within your enterprise provided you reproduce the copyright notice all warning statements and other required statements on each copy or partial copy e Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM product which may be either machines you own or programs if the program s license terms permit a transfer You must at the same time destroy all other copies of the documentation You are responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from this authorization THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization Upon termination you must destroy
544. rify that you have configured the subnets correctly Set the virtual circuit Use the set virtual circuit command to configure an X 25 or a Frame Relay virtual circuit Note The router will prompt you for a DTE address For frame relay enter the DLCI Data Link Control Identifier number For X 25 the enter the PSN s DTE address Configuring a DNA V Router for a DNA IV Environment When configuring a DNA V router you may need to configure an interface to run in a DNA IV environment For example the router is attaching to both a DNA V and DNA IV network or a DNA IV ES is attached to a DNA V router 302 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using OSI DECnet V Before beginning the steps below use the appropriate preceding section to configure OSI over a LAN X 25 or Frame Relay 1 Enter the DN configuration process Exit OSI config gt and enter NCP gt Use the protocol DN command 2 Define the global DNA address Use the define executor address command to configure the DNA node and area number of the router 3 Globally enable DNA Use the define executor state command to enable the DNA protocol to run on the router 4 Enable inter area routing If the L2 routing algorithm is distance vector at level 2 use the define executor type area command to ensure that this router can exchange DNA IV level 2 routing information 5 Enable the DNA IV circuit Enable the circuit that the router will use to exchange the routing inf
545. rity This is not required however because once a packet from an end node packet reaches a router it will be forwarded toward its destination This argument is irrelevant on point to point lines where there will be no end nodes A designated router is selected anyway router type state Specifies the kind of routing that the router needs to perform standard AMA or bilingual Standard Specifies that the router is using conventional phase IV addressing where the MAC address is built from the area and node number The router defaults to this type AMA Specifies that the router can route packets that use phase IV addressing where the MAC address is arbitrary and learned from the data link layer Bilingual Specifies that the router can route packets that use both conventional and phase IV with AMA addressing When set to on specifies that the circuit is enabled for use by DNA When set to off specifies that the circuit is disabled for use by DNA off is the default usage Specifies whether an X 25 circuit is 268 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 e PVC A permanent virtual circuit e OUT SVC An outgoing static circuit e IN SVC An incoming static circuit This parameter applies when the executor type is set to DEC routing I V or DEC area See circuit executor type for more information DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands verification Specifies whether the router compares a verification string on
546. rity to filters for static circuits than for DA circuits This can prevent an incoming static call from being assigned a DA circuit The call UserData can have one of three values osi dec or user e For osi the router automatically configures an ISO protocol discriminator for the call data and requires the call to be from an OSI node e For dec the router expects the incoming calls to be from a Digital Equipment Company router e For user you are prompted for an additional entry of up to 16 octets Enter text to constrain the acceptance of incoming calls The call UserData field of the incoming call must match the specified text Example add filter Filter Name Routing Circuit Name DTE Address Call UserData OSI DEC USER If you select user and additional prompt appears for you to enter user data followed by a Priority prompt max 16 octets Priority 1 10 5 prefix address Adds static routes to destinations outside the IS IS domain This parameter prompts you for different information depending on the type of subnet X 25 LAN or FRL that was configured using the set subnet command Note If no Address Prefix is entered the default prefix is assumed Example LAN Subnet add prefix address Interface Number 0 Address Prefix MAC Address Default Metric 20 Metric Type Internal State ON X 25 Subnet add prefix address Interface Number 0 Address Pre
547. rnally 765 routes free Use the clear command to reset the cache Syntax clear Example 416 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Interface Join PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 PIM6 gt clear Mfwd Cache has been cleared PIM6 gt Use the interface command to display a summary of the statistics and parameters related to the interface Syntax interface Example PIM6 gt interface PIM Interface Table Hello State IP Address Interval Holdtime Status Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 101 30 210 up TKR O 1 2 5 6 7 102 30 210 up TKR 1 PIM6 gt IP address Specifies the IP address of the interface Hello interval Specifies the number of seconds between hello messages on this interface State holdtime Specifies the number of seconds upstream devices are informed to hold state information before discarding For PIM this is the number of seconds a prune is active upstream Status Specifies the current status of the interface up The interface is up and fully operational but does not generate the mid queries disabled The interface is operational but is disabled and PIM is not active down The interface is not operational Use the join command to join a multicast group Syntax join Example PIM6 gt join ff05 42 101 Chapter 16 Configuring and Monitoring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM 417 PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Leave Mcache Mgroup Use the leave command to lea
548. rol point consisting of management services function sets that provides facilities to assist in performing problem management performance and accounting management change management and configuration management Capabilities provided by the CPMS include sending requests to physical unit management services PUMS to test system resources collecting statistical information for example error and performance data from PUMS about the system resources and analyzing and presenting test results and statistical information collected about the system resources Analysis and presentation responsibilities for problem determination and performance monitoring can be distributed among multiple CPMSs control point management services unit CP MSU The message unit that contains management services data and flows between management services function sets This message unit is in general data stream GDS format See also management services unit MSU and network management vector transport NMVT D D bit Delivery confirmation bit In X 25 communications the bit in a data packet or call request packet that is set to 1 if end to end acknowledgment delivery confirmation is required from the recipient daemon A program that runs unattended to perform a standard service Some daemons are triggered automatically to perform their task others operate periodically data carrier detect DCD Synonym for received line signal detector RLSD
549. rom the remote link station When T1 expires the link station sends an S format command link layer protocol data unit LPDU with the poll bit set to solicit remote link station status or any U format command LPDUs that have not been responded to The duration of T1 should take into account any delays introduced by underlying layers Parameter Maximum number of retransmissions N2 Valid Values 1 to 254 Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the maximum number of times an LPDU will be retransmitted following the expiration of the reply timer T1 170 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 27 Configuration Parameter List Modify LLC Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter Receive acknowledgment timer T2 Valid Values 1 to 254 half seconds Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter may be used in conjunction with the N3 counter to reduce acknowledgment traffic A link station uses T2 to delay the sending of an acknowledgment for a received l format LPDU T2 is started when an l format LPDU is received and reset when an acknowledgment is sent in an l format or S format LPDU If T2 expires the link station must send an acknowledgment as soon as possible The value of T2 must be less than that of T1 to ensure that the remote link sta
550. route6 Destination IPv6 address 7 8 Source IPV6 address 6 9 Data size in bytes 56 Number of probes per hop 3 402 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Tunnels IPV6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Wait time between retries in seconds 3 Maximum TTL 32 TRACEROUTE6 7 8 56 data bytes 1l x k IPV6 gt Destination IPv6 address Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Source IPv6 address Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None Data size in bytes Valid Values 0 to size of global buffer Default Value 56 Number of probes per hop Valid Values 1 10 Default Value 3 Wait time between retries in seconds Valid Values 1 60 Default Value 3 Maximum ttl Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 32 Use the tunnels command to display configured tunnels Syntax tunnels Example IPV6 gt tunnels Configured Tunnels Tun Remote Endpoint Local Endpoint Frag Allowed TTL MTU Net IPv6 Address Prefix 1 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 No 100 2048 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 128 Automatic Tunnels Tun Remote Endpoint Frag Allowed TTL MTU IPV6 gt Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPve 403 IPV6 Monitoring Commands Talk 5 404 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 15 Configuring and Monitoring Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP Configuration for NDP is done for each interface This chapter describes how to use the NDP configuration and operating commands and includes
551. routing table A collection of routes used to direct datagram forwarding or to establish a connection The information is passed among routers to identify network topology and destination feasibility Routing Table Maintenance Protocol RTMP In AppleTalk networks a protocol that provides routing information generation and maintenance on the transport layer by means of the AppleTalk routing table The AppleTalk routing table directs packet transmission through the internet from source socket to destination socket RouTing update Protocol RTP The Virtual NEtworking System VINES protocol that maintains the routing database and allows the exchange of routing information between VINES nodes See also nternet Control Protocol ICP rsh A variant of the rlogin command that invokes a command interpreter on a remote UNIX machine and passes the command line arguments to the command interpreter skipping the login step completely S SAP See service access point seed router In AppleTalk networks a router that maintains configuration data network range numbers and zone lists for example for the network Each network must have at least one seed router The seed router must be initially set up using the configurator tool Contrast with nonseed router segment 1 A section of cable between components or devices A segment may consist of a single patch cable several patch cables that are connected or a combination of building
552. rt retries to reach the DLUS after an attempt to establish this connection has failed See ED algorithm for a complete description of the retry Parameter Perform long retries to restore disrupted pipe Valid Values Yes No Default Value If Perform retries to restore disrupted pipes is Yes then the default value is Yes Otherwise the default is No Description for a complete description of the retry algorithm Parameter Long retry timer Valid Values 0 to 2 756 000 seconds Default Value 300 seconds Description This parameter specifies the time DLUR will wait when performing long retries for a complete description of the retry set tuning You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Note You will have to re boot in order for the changes you specify to take place 96 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 8 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Tuning Parameter Information Parameter Maximum number of adjacent nodes Valid Values 1 to 2 800 Default 100 Description This parameter is an estimate of the maximum number of nodes that you expect to be logically adjacent to this router network node at any one time This parameter is used along with the Maximum number of ISR sessions parameter by the automa
553. rted version number Received packet with bad type Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received with an incorrect or unsupported type field Received packet with expired lifetime Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received with an expired lifetime Received packet with bad option Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received with a bad optional parameter Received packet with unknown destination Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received but could not be routed The routing table contains no entry for the destination Received packet with no segmentation permitted Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received that needed segmentation The segmentation permitted flag was not set Received data packet cannot be forwarded Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received but could not be routed because of a handler error No buffer available to send error packet An attempt to send an ISO CLNP error packet failed because of a lack of system I O buffers No route to send error packet An attempt to send an ISO CLNP error packet failed because it could not be routed Received OK CLNP packet Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received and passed error checking Cannot forward error packet Indicates that an ISO CLNP error packet could not be routed because of a handler error ISO unknown initial protocol ID Indicates that an ISO CLNP packet was received with an unknown or unsupported i
554. rver IP Router a i ELAN IP subnet 9 1 2 0 ELAN IP subnet 9 0 ELAN IP subnet 9 1 3 0 IP HostB LEC NON NHRP Shortcut VC part of routed path that is not bypassed Figure 30 NHRP in an ELAN Environment NHRP in a LAN Emulation Environment with LAN Switches In this example the source and destination stations are attached to legacy LANs and do not connect to the ATM net work LAN switches operating as LAN Emulation Clients give ATM connectivity to the legacy LAN devices The enhancements to NHRP and the IBM extensions allow the same kind of one hop routing in this environment as described in the previous example With the enhancements the servers exchange the actual MAC addresses and routing information for the legacy LAN devices The 2210s can then establish data direct VCCs with the switches and pass the traffic directly There is only one router hop in the path although the traffic passes through two LAN switches Chapter 11 Using NHRP 349 Using NHRP This example also illustrates that the ELAN environment can be token ring or Ethernet or any mixture of LAN types NHRP Server NHRP Server IP Router IP Router ELAN C IP subnet 9 1 3 0 ELAN B IP subnet 9 1 2 0 Shortcut VC m part of routed path that is not bypassed Figure 31 NHRP in an ELAN Environment with LAN Switches NHRP in a Mixed Classical IP and ELAN Environment The NHRP function in
555. rvice nodes maintain two tables a routing table and a neighbor table Both of these tables have timers that age their contents to eliminate out of date entries Routing updates for X 25 interfaces occur when there is a change in the routing database for example when a node goes up down or the metric changes Routing Table The routing table contains information about the service nodes Eigure 14 shows a sample routing table Descriptions of the fields in this table follow the figure Net Address Next Hop Nbr Addr Nbr Intf Metric Age secs S 30622222 30622222 0001 Eth 0 20 30 H 0027AA21 0027AA21 0001 Eth 1 2 120 P 034CC11 0034CC11 0001 X 25 0 45 0 3 Total Routes S Entry is suspended H Entry is in Hold down P Entry is permanent Figure 14 Sample Routing Table Routing Table Field Description Net Address The Net Address is a unique 32 bit number An S H or P preceding the Net Address field indicates the following S Indicates the service node is in suspended state and is advertised for 90 seconds as being down After 90 seconds the router removes the entry for this service node from the routing table H Indicates the service node is in hold down state and is advertised for 2 minutes as being down After 2 minutes the router advertises the service node as operational If a service node is in suspended state and it receives an RTP packet the service node enters the hold down state P Indicates that the X 25 i
556. s AppleTalk Transaction Protocol ATP In AppleTalk networks a protocol that provides client server request and response functions for hosts accessing the Zone Information Protocol ZIP for zone information APPN network See Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN network APPN network node See Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN network node arbitrary MAC addressing AMA In DECnet architecture an addressing scheme used by DECnet Phase IV Prime that supports universally administered addresses and locally administered addresses area In Internet and DECnet routing protocols a subset of a network or gateway grouped together by definition of the network administrator Each area is self contained knowledge of an area s topology remains hidden from other areas asynchronous ASYNC Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals T ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode a connection oriented high speed networking technology based on cell switching ATMARP ARP in Classical IP attachment unit interface AUI In a local area network the interface between the medium attachment unit and the data terminal equipment within a data station I A Attribute Value Pair AVP A uniform method of encoding message types and bodies This method maximizes the extensibility while permitting interoperability of L2TP authentication failure In th
557. s Table 18 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Forward QoS Valid Values CLASS _0 CLASS _1 CLASS 2 CLASS _3 CLASS 4 where CLASS_0 The unspecified class The network does not specify any QoS CLASS_1 Performance is comparable to current digital private line performance CLASS 2 Intended for packetized video and audio in teleconferencing and multimedia applications CLASS 3 Intended for interoperation of connection oriented protocols such as Frame Relay CLASS 4 Intended for interoperation of connectionless protocols such as IP Default Value CLASS 0 Description This parameter indicates which class of service is provided to an ATM virtual connection This parameter is always CLASS_0 for a Best Effort connection Note The following parameters are backward traffic parameters Parameter Backward Traffic Peak Cell Rate Valid Values 1 85 of line speed Default Value Port s Default Effective Capacity 48 Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the cell transmission rate Parameter Backward Traffic Sustained Cell Rate Valid Values 1 85 of line speed Default Value Port s Default Effective Capacity 48 Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the average cell transmission rate You cannot specify this parameter for a Best Effort connection 132 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol
558. s on page 354 352 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using NHRP By default the LSI will use the MAC address burned into the associated ATM adapter as the source MAC address of frames transmitted over the LANE shortcut VCCs It is possible though unlikely that this could confuse some end station protocol stack implementations since the MAC address will not match that of the router that the end station uses as a gateway to transmit packets to the associated IP address For this to happen the end station would have to learn router MAC addresses from unicast IP frames which is not normal IP to MAC address mappings are normally learned from ARP packets If this were to happen the end station might use the learned MAC address as the destination MAC address of frames that it transmits to the associated IP destination instead of using the MAC address of the router Such frames would either be dropped or forwarded over the LANE shortcut VCC Forwarding would only occur if the LEC learns MAC to ATM address binding from received frames which is an optional implementation choice In either case these frames will not reach the destination since the LSI discards frames received over a LANE shortcut VCC Furthermore the LSI releases the LANE shortcut VCC and no further shortcuts will be established to the associated ATM address Traffic for destinations associated with that ATM address will follow the routed path thereafter Note that ELS me
559. s the packet is forwarded In an exclusive list the source and destination addresses are tested using the mask and compare values If any entry s source and destination matches the packet is dropped The choice between exclusive and inclusive should be made on the basis of which list will be shorter However exclusive access control is usually easier to configure When packets are dropped due to access controls the Return to Sender Request RQR bit is set in the Long Format Data Packet header and the packet is returned Then the connect request immediately fails because NSP Connect Initiate packets are normally sent with the RQR bit set Configuring Access Control Access control limits access to a particular host or group of hosts You must assign access control to all routes to that host not just the preferred route Otherwise access control functions when the primary route is up but fails when the secondary route is in use On your network map draw a line to isolate the secure region from the rest of the network Ideally the line should cross the minimum possible set of adjacencies so that the least number of interfaces are running with access control For broadcast networks Ethernet and Token Ring draw the line through the drop cable to the node to identify the interface to filter For each interface crossed by the access control line use NCP to define the same access control list Note Because all DECnet applications use
560. s 0006 The encoded NSAP address is Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 297 Using OSI DECnet V 4700061234CCCC222222222222 The encoded address prefix is a result of the truncation of the NSAP 4700061234 The encoding rules are about all NSAP formats having a fixed length IDI and to any address prefix ending after the IDP Encoding an AFI An address prefix based entirely on the AFI is encoded only on the 1 octet AFI field For example if an address prefix is needed for all X 121 format addresses used on X 25 networks you would use the X 121 AFI of 37 Encoding a Variable Length IDI NSAP addresses that have variable length IDI formats such as X 121 F 69 E 163 and E 164 use a more complicated encoding scheme When variable length IDIs are encoded as an NSAP the address is left padded with zeros however when the IDI is encoded as an address prefix there is no left padding For example you want to route X 25 calls from the U S to an X 25 carrier in the Netherlands The carrier has a Data Network Identifier Code NDIC of 2041 The encoding of the address prefix would be 372041 An X 25 subscriber having a national telephone number NTN of 117010 on this carrier would have an NSAP of 3700002041117010 Notice that the IDI of the NSAP is left padded with zeros to 14 digits because the resulting international data number 2041117010 was less than 14 digits If however you want an address prefix that points only to this on
561. s for each client node is a hexadecimal value of 8000 to FFFE VINES Network Layer Protocols This implementation of VINES consists of the following four network layer protocols The next sections describe these protocols and their implementations Routes packets through the network j Distributes topological information to are the Salida services ae by VINES IP j Provides diagnostics and support functions to certain transport layer protocol entities such as providing notification on some network errors and topological conditions j Assigns VINES internet addresses to dien nodes that do not already have addresses VINES Internet Protocol VINES IP The VINES IP protocol routes packets through the network using the destination network number in the VINES IP header VINES IP consists of an 18 byte network layer header which prefixes each packet Table 53 on page 235 summarizes the fields within this header VINES IP Implementation When VINES IP receives a packet it checks the packet for size and exception errors A size error is a packet that is less than 18 bytes or greater than 1500 bytes If it contains a size error VINES IP discards the packet An exception error is for example a bad checksum or a hop count that has expired If the packet does not contain size or exception errors VINES IP checks the destination address and forwards the packet as follows e f the destination address equals the l
562. s or No Default Value No Description This parameter indicates whether or not the adjacent node has the Branch Extender function enabled This question is asked only if Branch Extender is enabled on this node this is an uplink and the uplink is a limited resource 156 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Preferred Network Node Server Valid Values Yes or No Default Value No Description This parameter indicates whether this uplink is to a network node server that is to be used as the network node server for the node supporting Branch Extender function and acting as an end node If yes is specified this uplink will be used as the network node server for this node This question will be asked only if Enabled Branch Extender is yes e This station is a network node e Branch Uplink is yes and e CP CP sessions are supported on this link Parameter TG Number Valid Values If limited resource is Yes valid values are 1 20 If limited resource is No and link type is X 25 SVC valid values are 0 20 Otherwise valid values are 0 20 Default Value If limited resource is Yes default is 1 If limited resource is No default is 0 Otherwise default value is 0 Description This parameter uniquely identifies a TG between adjacent nodes Parameter Solicit SSC
563. s the DSPU is requesting ACTPU 5 Wait for the amount of time specified by the Long retry timer wo Note If Perform long retries to restore disrupted pipe is No no further retries will be attempted 6 Attempt to reach the primary DLUS Chapter1 APPN 41 APPN 7 Ifthe attempt to reach the primary DLUS is unsuccessful attempt to reach the backup DLUS Example Assume the following parameter values Delay before initiating retries 120 sec Perform short retries to restore disrupted pipe yes Short retry timer 60 sec Short retry count 2 Perform long retries to restore disrupted pipe yes Long retry timer 300 sec Pipe activation fails Wait 120 seconds the value of Delay before initiating retries Retry the primary DLUS and if this fails retry the backup DLUS If retry fails wait 300 seconds the value of Long retry timer retry the primary DLUS and if this retry fails retry the backup DLUS If retries fail continue to retry the primary and backup DLUS waiting 300 seconds between retry sequences for as long as the DSPU is requesting ACTPU e For all other cases of pipe failure DLUR will try the primary DLUS and then the backup DLUS immediately If this fails DLUR will 1 Wait for the amount of time specified by the minimum of the short retry timer and the Delay before initiating retries parameters 2 Attempt to reach the primary DLUS 3 If the attempt to reach the primar
564. s the following from configuration kog memory e All e Node e Traces e Management e HPR DLUR Port port name e Link station link name e LU Name LU name e Mode mode name e Connection network connection network name e Focal_point e Routing_list e COS_mapping_table Activate_new_config Reads the configuration into non volatile i4 configuration memory TN3270 Accesses the TN320E config gt command Lod prompt Exit Returns you to the previous command Note APPN will respond to a dynamic reset command at the interface level 82 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands APPN Configuration Command Detail Enable Disable Use the enable disable command to enable or disable Syntax Set enable appn or disable dlur port port name Use the set command to set Syntax set node You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 4 Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing Parameter Information Parameter Enable APPN Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes Description This parameter enables or disables the router as an APPN network node This parameter enables both APPN and HPR routing capability for this network node which consists of defining the Network ID and CP name for this node APPN however must be enabl
565. ses adjacencies pvc algorithm and phaseivpfx Exit Returns you to the previous command level See eve a Onmen ON Dade xXx Add Use the add command to configure area and prefix addresses receive passwords and address aliases Syntax add alias Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 305 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 area filter prefix address receive password routing circuit template alias Adds an ASCII string that designates a particular area address or system ID The ASCII string can be a z A Z 0 9 a few other characters including the hyphen comma and underscore _ Do not use escape characters The offset indicates the position in semi octets nibbles where the ASCII string begins within the address aliases used for system IDs have an offset of 1 The string must be the same size or longer than the segment it is designating or you will receive an invalid segment length message The maximum allowable alias is 20 bytes Note When using an alias input you must surround it with brackets For example I11_update 47 newname 9999900001 2341234 Example add alias Alias Segment Offset 1 Alias The character string you want to use Segment The NSAP segment that the alias is replacing Offset The location of the alias in 4 bit semi octets within the NSAP The offset is determined from the beginning left of the NSAP as it is displayed on
566. set command The APPN MIBs can be accessed only using SNMP Topology Database Garbage Collection Information flows between APPN NNs to inform the NNs about network resources Each NN keeps a topology database consisting of the names and characteristics of those resources When a resource is eliminated from the network it can also be deleted from each NN topology database When a NN detects that a resource in its topology database is obsolete the node will broadcast information stating that the resource should be garbage collected If NNs receiving this information support Enhanced Garbage Collection they should delete that resource from their topology database The record is not actually garbage collected until the next garbage collection cycle ANN examines each resource in its topology database once a day Configurable Held Alert Queue The configurable held alert queue function allows you to configure the size of the held alert queue If a focal point is not available the held alert queue saves APPN alerts When a focal point becomes available the held alerts are sent If more alerts arrive than can be held the oldest alerts are discarded Note If you configure a large value for the Held Alert Queue Size the extra memory should be accounted for You can do this by letting the tuning algorithm automatically calculate the Maximum Shared Memory value See APPN Node Tu 8 for additional information about the node tuning algorithm Imp
567. sh a CP CP session with session level security enabled both partners must be configured with the same encryption key Currently session level security support is limited to the basic LU LU verification protocol Parameter Encryption key Valid Values Up to 16 hexadecimal digits If fewer than 16 digits are specified the value is padded on the right with zeros Default Value None Description This parameter is used to encrypt data exchanged during BIND flows Both partners must be configured with the same key to establish a CP CP session 154 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter Use enhanced session security If security is enabled Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Parameter High performance routing HPR supported Valid Values Yes No Default Value APPN network node APPN end node or LEN end node the value specified in the default HPR supported parameter for this port All other adjacent node types No Description This parameter indicates whether this link station supports HPR The user should disable HPR support if the underlying link is unreliable An HPR connection will not be established unless both link stations advertise HPR support during XID exchange Parameter DLCI number for link frame relay only Valid Values 16 to 1007 Default Value 16
568. shortcuts using protocol addresses and masks consider the following network diagram 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 5 9 9 9 5 9 9 9 3 Other 1 1 1 gt Routert C 9 9 9 Router2 IP i sub nets host1 9 9 9 1 host2 9 9 9 2 Figure 34 Using Disallowed Router to Router Shortcuts Example 1 An entry with address 9 9 9 1 mask 255 255 255 255 would cause the NHS to send a NAK to the sender of a Next Hop Resolution Request with destination protocol address 9 9 9 1 HOST1 Since 9 9 9 1 is not directly attached to one of the device subnets but is reached by another router the router checks the Disallowed R2R Shortcuts List Example 2 An entry with address 9 9 9 0 mask 255 255 255 0 would cause the router to send a NAK for any destination address 9 9 9 1 through 9 9 9 255 HOST1 HOST2 and ROUTER2 could not be reached using shortcuts to the router but devices on the other subnets serviced by ROUTER2 could be reached Example 3 An entry with address 1 1 1 5 mask 255 255 255 255 would cause the router to respond negatively for any destination whose next hop router is 1 1 1 5 ROUTER1 The router would respond negatively for any address on subnet 9 9 9 and for any address on the other IP subnets reached via router 9 9 9 3 because next hop is 1 1 1 5 Example 4 An entry with address anything mask 0 0 0 0 would disable R2R shortcuts for all addresses Protocol Access Control Usage This pa
569. sion between the TN3270 datastream and a SNA 3270 datastream The TN3270E Server function complies with RFC 1646 and RFC 1647 TN3270 sessions can span APPN networks as well as IP networks using the HPR over IP The TN3270E Server can use a subarea connection or the APPN DLUR function to communicate with the host sample configurations If you are using DLUR to communicate with the host the local PUs used by the TN3270E Server need to be configured in the host as DLUR internal PUs The following code is an example of the host VTAM configuration 20 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN PUJOE7 PU ADDR 12 IDBLK 077 IDNUM EEEE7 l MAXPATH 8 ISTATUS ACTIVE MODETAB LMT3270 USSTAB STFTSNA2 ANS CONT MAXDATA 521 IRETRY YES MAXOUT 7 DLOGMOD G22NNE NETID STFNET PASSLIM 5 PUTYPE 2 JCPATH7 PATH PID 1 DLURNAME VLNNO1 DLCADDR 1 C INTPU DLCADDR 2 X 077EEEE7 JC7LU2 LU LOCADDR 2 JC7LU3 LU LOCADDR 3 JC7LU4 LU LOCADDR 4 JC7LU5 LU LOCADDR 5 JC7LU6 LU LOCADDR 6 Note J 977EEEE7 represents the ID block ID number of the local PU There are two Telnet servers in the device the remote console and the TN3270E Server One IP address will be designated as the TN3270E Server address port Telnets to this address port will be tn3270 and will not get to the remote console The TN3270E configuration includes the TN3270E config gt set command to configure the IP address port for the TN3270E Server O
570. sm that allows IPX servers on an internet to advertise their services by name and type Servers using this protocol have their name service type and address recorded in all file servers running NetWare e A mechanism that allows a workstation to broadcast a query to discover the identities of all servers of all types all servers of a specific type or the nearest server of a specific type e A mechanism that allows a workstation to query any file server running NetWare to discover the names and addresses of all servers of a specific type session 1 In network architecture for the purpose of data communication between functional units all the activities which take place during the establishment maintenance and release of the connection T 2 A logical connection between two network accessible units NAUs that can be activated tailored to provide various protocols and deactivated as requested Each session is uniquely identified in a transmission header TH accompanying any transmissions exchanged during the session 3 In L2TP L2TP creates a session when an end to end PPP connection is attempted between a dial user and the LNS regardless of whether the user initiates the session or the LNS initiates an outbound call The datagrams for th session are sent over the tunnel between the LAC and LNS The LNS and LAC maintain the state information for each user attached to an LAC Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP In
571. specified This parameter provides the default value for the Effective capacity parameter on the Modify TG Characteristics Command Line option The Modify TG Characteristics Command Line option enables you to override the default values assigned to TG characteristics on the individual link stations you define 144 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 20 Configuration Parameter List Port Default TG Characteristics continued Parameter Information Parameter First user defined TG characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 128 Description This parameter specifies the first user defined TG characteristic for all link stations defined on this port The first user defined TG characteristic specifies the first of three additional characteristics that users can define to describe the TGs in a network The default value of 128 allows a subset of TGs to be defined as more or less desirable than the rest without defining values for all TGs Parameter Second user defined TG characteristic Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 128 Description This parameter specifies the second user defined TG characteristic for all link stations defined on this port The second user defined TG characteristic specifies the second of three additional characteristics that users can define to describe the TGs in a network Parameter Third user defined TG characteristic Valid Valu
572. specified locally either for the circuit or for the calling system The verification data appears in the verification data field of the XID message Note This release of the router software does not support verification by the system OSI DECnet V Configuration Note When operating DNA IV networks together with DNA V networks all DNA IV configuring and monitoring must be done from the DNA IV _NCP gt configuration rocess For information on configuring DNA IV refer to Chapier Z Using DNA IV on page 24d The use of the term OSI in this chapter refers to both the OSI and DNA V environments unless indicated otherwise Basic Configuration Procedure This section outlines the minimum configuration steps that you are required to perform to get the OSI DNA V protocol up and running over a LAN Ethernet or Token ring X 25 packet switching networks and Frame Relay Before beginning any configuration procedure use the list device command from the config process to list the interface numbers of the different devices If you desire any further configuration command explanations refer to the configuration commands described in this chapter Note You must restart the router for new configuration changes to take effect Do the following basic configuration procedure before beginning the specialized procedures described in the following sections Seiting the network entity title NET Set the router s NET using the set network entity
573. splay includes information on the pseudo mode area 0 A route to node area 0 is advertised by any level two router which reaches other areas Level one routers use these routes to forward all packets to the nearest level one router that knows how to get that packet to the correct area There is no other way to examine node 0 because it is not a legal node address node node Provides information on the specified node If the node is not provided you will be prompted known nodes Provides information on those nodes which are currently reachable The arguments include the following characteristics summary Both subcommand options show the current state of the specified nodes status Provides detailed information on the specified nodes including cost and hops Example show node status This example shows the detailed status of a specific node Which node 1 9 2 26 Node Volatile Status Executor node 2 26 gato State on Physical address AA 00 04 00 1A 08 Type DEC area Example show active nodes This example shows the reachable nodes Active Node Volatile Summary Executor node 2 26 gato State Identification on DECnet MC68360 V1 R2 0 NP00523 P10 Node State Circuit Next Address Node 2 14 reachable Eth O 2 14 2 34 reachable PPP O 2 34 2 37 reachable PPP O 2 34 1 22 reachable Eth O 1 22 276 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Show List Use the DNA IV Configuration and Monitorin
574. ssages and console display for LANE shortcuts aid in identifying these destinations The LSI can be configured not to use the universally administered MAC address as the source MAC address With this option you have two choices for the source MAC address 1 You can use the MAC address of the last hop router provided in the NHRP resolution reply packet as the source MAC address Using the last hop router s MAC address as the source MAC address solves the problem of end station protocol stack confusion but introduces another potential problem It may confuse LECs that learn MAC to ATM address binding from received frames and therefore should not be used with LECs that perform this type of learning For example the LEC in IBM s 8281 ATM LAN bridge performs this type of learning 2 You can configure the source MAC address The source MAC address can be configured to avoid the problem of duplicate MAC addresses seen on an ELAN because of inter ELAN shortcuts The MAC address should be configured for this LSI network when there are an disallowed LANE shortcut entries See on displaying disallowed LANE shortcut entries 2 for details These configuration options are provided to maximize flexibility in achieving compatibilit with me largest possible set at destinations in a given installation See A for further information snd Coane an oad for a description of the change command Configuration Parameters This section descri
575. ssing between corresponding equipment in a data transmission system l Notes 1 The rate is expressed in bits characters or blocks per second minute or hour 2 Corresponding equipment should be indicated for example modems intermediate equipment or source and sink datagram 1 In packet switching a self contained packet independent of other packets that carries information sufficient for routing from the originating data terminal equipment DTE to the destination DTE without relying on earlier exchanges between the DTEs and the network I 2 In TCP IP the basic unit of information passed across the Internet environment A datagram contains a source and destination address along with the data An Internet Protocol IP datagram consists of an IP header followed by the transport layer data 3 See also packet and segment Datagram Delivery Protocol DDP In AppleTalk networks a protocol that provides network connectivity by means of connectionless socket to socket delivery service on the internet layer DCE ready In the EIA 232 standard a signal that indicates to the data terminal equipment DTE that the local data circuit terminating equipment DCE is connected to the communication channel and is ready to send data Synonymous with data set ready DSR DECnet A network architecture that defines the operation of a family of software modules databases and hardware components typically used to tie Dig
576. static routes on an interface Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be disabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 default Overrides RIP6 default routes on an interface Chapter 17 Configuring and Monitoring Routing Information Protocol RIP6 427 RIP6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Enable Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be disabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 sending Modify RIP6 flags on which interface Specifies the interface number on which RIP6 is to be disabled Note The interface must have RIP6 configured Valid Values Any valid interface number Default Value 0 all routes Disables advertisement of all RIP6 routes on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes default routes Disables advertisement of RIP6 default routes on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes static routes Disables advertisement of RIP6 static routes on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes poisoned reverse routes Disables poison reverse in sending RIP6 updates on an interface Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Use the enable command to enable RIP6 rip6 override sending Enables
577. stination name 2210 35 Inbound calls allowed Idle timer fixed circuit SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms FR Config gt ex Config gt fea wan WAN Restoral user configuration WRS Config gt 1li all WAN Restoral is enabled Default Stabilization Time 0 seconds Default First Stabilization Time 0 seconds Secondary Primary Interface Secondary Interface Enabled 1 WAN PPP 8 PPP Dial Circuit Yes No Primary Alternate pairs defined WRS Config gt ex Config gt p appn APPN user configuration APPN config gt 1i al NODE NETWORK ID STFNET CONTROL POINT NAME NN6 XID 00000 APPN ENABLED YES MAX SHARED MEMORY 4096 MAX CACHED 4000 DLUR DLUR ENABLED YES PRIMARY DLUS NAME NETB MVSC Chapter1 APPN 59 APPN CONNECTION NETWORK CN NAME LINK TYPE PORT INTERFACES COS COS NAME BATCH BATCHSC CONNECT INTER INTERSC CPSVCMG SNASVCMG USRBAT USRNOT MODE MODE NAME COS NAME USRBAT USRBAT USRNOT USRNOT PORT INTF PORT LINK HPR SERVICE PORT NUMBER NAME TYPE ENABLED ANY ENABLED 0 TROOQ IBMTRNET YES YES YES xxxx lt This is the port that will get backed up 1 PPPOQO1 PPP YES ES YES 4 2 SS SDLC NO YES YES 3 SDLC NO YES NO 4 PPP YES YES NO 5 TROO5 IBMTRNET YES YES YES 254 DLS NO YES NO 17 PPPOQ17 PPP YES YES YES 9 PPPOQ09 PPP YES YES YES STATION STATION PORT DESTINATION HPR ALLOW ADJ NODE NAME NAME ADDRESS ENABLED CP CP TYPE TONN1 TROOO Q004AC4E7505 ES YES 1 TONN2 TROOO 550020004020 YES YES 1 TONNS T
578. t Valid Values 1 255 Default 3 Description Specifies the node level default for the maximum number of subnetworks that a multi subnetwork session may traverse The default may be overridden as part of port link or routing list configuration Note This is the first of the questions asked only if border node has been enabled Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 85 APPN Configuration Commands Table 4 Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing continued Parameter Information Parameter Cache searches for 0 255 minutes Valid Values 0 255 Default 8 Description Specifies how many minutes the BN retains information in the multi subnet search cache once the search terminates Parameter Maximum number of searches in cache Valid Values 0 32765 O unlimited Default 0 Description Specifies the maximum number of entries in the multi network search cache Once this limit is reached the oldest entries are discarded Note The primary mechanism for deletion of these entries is the cache search time value specified in cache searches for 0 255 minutes Parameter Dynamic routing list updates Valid Values 0 none No dynamic entries are added 1 full All native border nodes all adjacent non native border and network nodes and nodes that know of similarly named destination LUs are added 2 limited All native border nodes all adjacent non native border nodes and ne
579. t Value 64 IPv4 tunnel remote address Specifies the IPv4 address for the IPv6 frames passed through the tunnel Valid Values Any valid IP 32 bit address Default Value None IPv4 tunnel local address Specifies the IPv4 source address for the IPv6 frames passed through the tunnel Valid Values Any valid IP 32 bit address Default Value None 386 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Change Delete IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Cost Specifies the cost associated with the tunnel which will be used during route lookups to find the best route to the destination Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 1 TTL value Specifies the time to live value used in frames encapsulated for this tunnel Valid Values Any numeric value in the range of 1 255 Default Value 64 Allow fragmentation in the tunnel Specifies whether the fragmentation in the tunnel will be allowed Specifying yes allows fragmentation in the tunnel in case the IPv4 network that the tunnel is using does not provide enough information to allow the device to return a Packet Too Big message to the IPv6 host Valid Values yes or no Default Value no Use the change command to add an IPv6 address leaked routes packet filters routes or tunnels Syntax change address net address prefix leaked routesdestination packet filter name interface route destination mask gateway cost tunnel destination prefix raddress locaddress cost ttl fr
580. t see while configuring your device Who Should Read This Manual This manual is intended for persons who install and operate computer networks Although experience with computer networking hardware and software is helpful you do not need programming experience to use the protocol software To get additional information Changes may be made to the documentation after the books are printed If additional information is available or if changes are required after the books have been printed the changes will be in a file named README on diskette 1 of the configuration program diskettes You can view the file with an ASCII text editor About the Software IBM Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services is the software that supports the IBM 2210 licensed program number 5801 ARR This software has these components e The base code which consists of The code that provides the routing bridging data link switching and SNMP agent functions for the device The router user interface which allows you to configure monitor and use the Multiprotocol Routing Services base code installed on the device The router user interface is accessed locally through an ASCII terminal or emulator attached to the service port or remotely through a Telnet session or modem attached device The base code is installed at the factory on the 2210 e The Configuration Program for IBM Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services referred to in this book as the Config
581. ta DECnet V OSI controls calls for each of the types of routing circuits by using filters and templates Filters are used to process incoming calls templates are used to establish outgoing calls A filter is a collection of user configurable parameters that define the criteria for accepting all incoming calls for the specified X 25 routing circuit The parameters defined in a filter include the calling DTE address a filter priority and call user data Filters and Routing Circuits Incoming calls can be on a static incoming circuit or a dynamically assigned DA circuit One or more filters may be defined for the same routing circuit For example a DA circuit can have multiple adjacencies and more than one filter may be defined for that routing circuit Filter Priorities The list of filters for static incoming circuits and DA circuits are intermixed and ordered by descending priority When an incoming call is received the router searches the list of filters highest priority first To prevent a static circuit from being erroneously assigned to a DA circuit it is recommended that the filters of all static circuits be assigned a higher priority than the filters of all DA circuits Filter Constraints on Calls For a static incoming circuit the filter should specify a particular calling DTE address but the first octet of the call user data must contain the ISO 8473 Protocol Discriminator 129 For correct operation of multiple DA cir
582. tagrams received by the router Datagrams fwd multicast Displays the number of datagrams that have been forwarded as data link multicasts this includes packet replications when necessary so this count could very well be greater than the number received Chapter 16 Configuring and Monitoring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM 419 PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Neighbor Datagrams fwd unicast Displays the number of datagrams that have been forwarded as data link unicasts Locally delivered Displays the number of datagrams that have been forwarded to internal applications Unreachable source Displays a count of those datagrams whose source address was unreachable Unallocated cache entries Displays a count of those datagrams whose cache entries could not be created due to resource shortages Off multicast tree Displays a count of those datagrams that were not forwarded either because there was no upstream neighbor or no downstream interfaces neighbors in the matching cache entry Unexpected DL multicast Displays a count of those datagrams that were received as data link multicasts on those interfaces that have been configured for data link unicast Buffer alloc failure Displays a count of those datagrams that could not be replicated because of buffer shortages TTL scoping Indicates those datagrams that were not forwarded because their TTL indicated that they could never reach a group member
583. te device from the appropriate communications support Contrast with destination service access point DSAP spanning tree In LAN contexts the method by which bridges automatically develop a routing table and update that table in response to changing topology to ensure that there is only one route between any two LANs in the bridged network This method prevents packet looping where a packet returns in a circuitous route back to the sending router sphere of control SOC The set of control point domains served by a single management services focal point sphere of control SOC node A node directly in the sphere of control of a focal point A SOC node has exchanged management services capabilities with its Glossary 465 focal point An APPN end node can be a SOC node if it supports the function to exchange management services capabilities split horizon A technique for minimizing the time to achieve network convergence A router records the interface over which it received a particular route and does not propagate its information about the route back over the same interface spoofing For data links a technique in which a protocol initiated from an end station is acknowledged and processed by an intermediate node on behalf of the final destination In IBM 6611 data link switching for example SNA frames are encapsulated into TCP IP packets for transport across a non SNA wide area network unpacked by another IBM 6611 and
584. te packet Received packet with bad NSAP length Received packet with bad checksum Received packet with bad version number Received packet with bad type Received packet with expired lifetime Received packet with bad option Received packet with unknown destination Received packet with no segmentation permitted Received data packet cannot be forwarded CLNP input queue overflow No buffer available to send error packet No route to send error packet Received OK CLNP packet Cannot forward error packet ISO unknown initial protocol ID Received error packet Received local data packet Sent error packet received echo packet destination unknown cannot send an echo packet handler error sent ECHO reply packet sent ECHO request packet received ECHO Request received ECHO reply Error PDU dropped SP MS or E R flag set oololokokokokokokokokolokokooookoooqoqokogoko Received incomplete packet Indicates that a data packet fragment recognized as an ISO CLNP data packet was received Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 331 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 Received packet with bad NSAP length Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received with an incorrect NSAP length Received packet with bad checksum Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received with a bad checksum Received packet with bad version number Indicates that an ISO CLNP data packet was received with an incorrect or unsuppo
585. tecture DNA The model for all DECnet hardware and software implementations direct memory access DMA The system facility that allows a device on the Micro Channel bus to get direct access to the system or bus memory without the intervention of the system processor directory A table of identifiers and references to the corresponding items of data I A directory service DS An application service element that translates the symbolic names used by application processes into the complete network addresses used in an OSI environment T directory services DS A control point component of an APPN node that maintains knowledge of the location of network resources disable To make nonfunctional disabled 1 Pertaining to a state of a processing unit that prevents the occurrence of certain types of interruptions 2 Pertaining to the state in which a transmission control unit or audio response unit cannot accept incoming calls on a line domain 1 That part of a computer network in which the data processing resources are under common control T 2 In Open Systems Interconnection OSI a part of a distributed system or a set of managed objects to which a common policy applies 3 See Administrative Domain and domain name domain name In the Internet suite of protocols a name of a host system A domain name consists of a sequence of subnames separated by a delimiter character For example if the fully qualified
586. ted e 2210 14x or 24x 46 5 Across all COS mapping tables you may use no more than the following number of native COS names e 2210 12x not supported e 2210 14x or 24x 96 There is no analogous limit for non native COS names 6 Any given native COS name may appear no more than 255 times across all routing lists Delete Use the delete command to delete Syntax 192 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 delete List APPN Configuration Commands port port name link link station name lu name u name connection network connection network name additional port to connection network cn port name mode name focal_point focal point name local pu routing_list routing list name cos_mapping_table mapping table name Use the list command to list Syntax list Activate_new_config all node traces management hpr dlur port port name link station link station name lu name lu name mode name mode name connection network connection network name focal_point routing_list routing list name cos_mapping_table mapping table name Use the activate_new_config command to read the configuration into non volatile memory Syntax activate_new_config Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 193 APPN Configuration Commands TN3270E Table 39 TN3270E Configuration Command Summary Command Function See page Help Displays all the commands available for this comma
587. ter ES adjacencies ES IS Stats IS adjacencies IS IS Stats L1 routes L2 route L1 summary L2 summary L1 update L2 update Ping 1139 Route Send echo packet Show routing circuits Subnets Toggle Traceroute Virtual circuits Exit Function Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the oer for specific commands if available See Displays the router s NET and area addresses Modifies the cost of a circuit Displays OSI CLNP statistics Displays the DNAV Level1 and Level2 routing algorithm currently in effect Displays the designated router for the LAN Displays all the ES adjacencies in the adjacency database Displays statistics associated with the ESIS protocol Displays all the IS adjacencies in the adjacency database Displays statistics associated with the ISIS protocol Displays all the L1 routes in the Level 1 database Displays all the L2 routes in the Level 2 database Displays a summary of the level 1 link state database Displays a summary of the level 2 link state database Displays the information contained in L1 link state update packet Displays the information contained in L2 link state update packet Causes the router to send an echo request to a destination and wait for a reply Displays the route a packet takes to a specified destination Encodes an echo request message in the CLNP packet Displays the state of user defined routing circuits for the specified interfac
588. ter LUA RUI Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the LUA RUI component Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 109 APPN Configuration Commands Table 11 Configuration Parameter List Inter process Signals Traces continued Parameter Information Parameter Management Services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the management services component Parameter Node Operator Facility Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the node operator facility component Parameter Path Control Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter enables or disables this APPN trace option When enabled this parameter informs the trace facility to include trace data about inter process signals from the path control component Parameter Presentation Services Valid Values Yes No Default Value No Description This parameter e
589. ter The routing database will not include routes to nodes in this area with a higher node part of their address Range 1 to 1023 Default 32 It should be higher than the highest node address in the router s area Setting it excessively large will affect the efficiency of the router and will use excess memory This argument does not take effect until the router is restarted maximum area number number define only Is the highest area for which routes will be kept if this is a level 2 router The routing database will not include routes to areas higher than this Maximum 63 Default 63 It should be higher than the highest area number in the overall network This argument does not take effect until the router is restarted maximum broadcast nonrouters number define only Maximum number of end nodes that can be adjacent one hop away to this router This is the sum over all broadcast circuits If there are more end nodes some of those end nodes will not be reachable by this router which may cause unpredictable routing problems This argument does not take effect until the router is restarted Range 1 to 1023 Default 63 maximum broadcast routers number define only Maximum number of routers than can be adjacent one hop away to this router This is the sum over all broadcast circuits If there are more routers routes will not be accepted from the excess routers This may cause unpredictable routing problems This argument
590. terface receives routing response packets from all of the X 25 destination nodes routing requests are no longer sent to those X 25 addresses e RTP update packets Packets sent by client nodes to the service nodes to notify the service nodes of their existence RTP update packets are also sent by the service nodes to notify other nodes of their existence and to advertise their routing databases e RTP response packets Packets service nodes send in response to RTP request packets e RTP redirect packets Informs the nodes of the best paths between them for routing packets Unless connected by a permanent circuit every client and service node broadcasts an RTP update every 90 seconds This notifies the neighbors of the node s existence and its type service or client node and in the case of service nodes advertises their routing databases When a router receives an update packet from a service node RTP extracts the VINES IP address and looks in the routing table for an existing entry on that service node If it exists RTP updates the entry and resets the entry s timer If an entry does not exist RTP creates one and initializes the timer for that entry Internet Control Protocol ICP ICP generates network information messages on two types of packets destined for the local router e Destination unreachable packet Indicates a packet could not reach its destination and was returned to its source The router then issues an ELS mess
591. teristics Parameter Information Parameter Cost per connect time Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value For ATM SVCs Campus ATM best effort 0 Campus ATM reserved 64 WAN ATM best effort 0 WAN ATM reserved 128 For ATM PVCs Campus ATM best effort 0 Campus ATM reserved 0 WAN ATM best effort 0 WAN ATM reserved 0 For IP 0 for Campus and WAN For all other 0 Description This parameter specifies the cost per connect time TG characteristic for all link stations on this port The cost per connect time TG characteristic expresses the relative cost of maintaining a connection over the associated TG The units are user defined and are typically based on the applicable tariffs of the transmission facility being used The assigned values should reflect the actual expense of maintaining a connection over the TG relative to all other TGs in the network A value of zero means that connections over the TG may be made at no additional cost as in the case of many non switched facilities Higher values represent higher costs 140 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Parameter Information APPN Configuration Commands Table 20 Configuration Parameter List Port Default TG Characteristics continued Parameter Cost per byte Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value For ATM SVCs and ATM PVCs Campus ATM best effort 0 Campus ATM reserved 0 WAN ATM best effort 128 WAN ATM reserved
592. teristics and after link activation to communicate changes in these characteristics explicit route ER In SNA a series of one or more transmission groups that connect two subarea nodes An explicit route is identified by an origin subarea address a destination subarea address an explicit route number and a reverse explicit route number Contrast with virtual route VR explorer frame See explorer packet explorer packet In LANs a packet that is generated by the source host and that traverses the entire source routing part of a LAN gathering information on the possible paths available to the host exterior gateway In Internet communications a gateway on one autonomous system that communicates with another autonomous system Contrast with interior gateway Exterior Gateway Protocol EGP In the Internet suite of protocols a protocol used between domains and autonomous systems that enables network reachability information to be advertised and exchanged IP network addresses in one autonomous system are advertised to another autonomous system by means of EGP participating routers An example of an EGP is the Border Gateway Protocol BGP Contrast with Interior Gateway Protocol IGP F fax Hardcopy received from a facsimile machine Synonymous with telecopy File Transfer Protocol FTP In the Internet suite of protocols an application layer protocol that uses TCP and Telnet services to transfer bulk data files
593. teroperate with other routers supporting the DEC routing standard over X 25 networks A router supporting the standard must be defined as type DEC ROUTING IV level 1 or DEC AREA level 2 The default routing type is ROUTING IV and AREA which allows interoperation with many existing IBM 2210 and other compatible routers NCP gt define exec state on Restart the router so that when you configure the X 25 circuit all DEC specific parameters are visible To verify executor configuration NCP gt show executor characteristics DEFINE PhaselV X 25 circuits You must configure the X 25 circuit as either a PVC or SVC If this circuit is configured as a PVC then the other end must also be a PVC If this circuit is configured as an IN SVC then the other end must be configured as an OUT SVC NCP gt define cir x25 0 usage IN SVC NCP gt define cir x25 0 DTE address remote X 25 DTE NCP gt define cir x25 0 call data NCP gt define cir x25 0 verification enabled Enabling verification is optional DEFINE circuits to the active state e for Token Ring NCP gt define cir TKR O router type bilingual e for ALL circuits NCP gt define cir xxx state on Restart the router so that all of the DECnet parameters become effective VERIFY the X 25 configuration within the DECnet protocol is as you want it NCP gt list circuit x25 0 characteristics 264 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV DNA IV Co
594. ters Specifies the tunnel parameter values for automatic tunnels that flow through the router ttl value Specifies the time to live value for the frames encapsulated for the tunnel Valid Values Default Value 64 allow fragmentation in tunnel Specifies whether the fragmentation in the tunnel will be allowed Specifying yes allows fragmentation in the tunnel in case the IPv4 network that the tunnel is using does not provide enough information to allow the device to return a Packet Too Big message to the IPv6 host Valid Values yes or no Default Value no hop count Specifies the hop count to be used on automatically tunnelled packets Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 64 cache size Specifies the buffer size for the fast forwarding path cache number of cache entries Specifies the number of entries in the fast forwarding path cache Valid Values 64 10 000 Default Value 64 default network gateway default gateway Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value none gateway s cost Specifies the cost associated with this gateway Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 1 default subnet gateway for which subnetted network Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value none default gateway Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value none 392 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 gateway s cost Specifies the cost associated with this gatewa
595. tes the cost to the neighbor IS Two Way Indicates whether the router is receiving updates from its neighbor End System Neighbors Indicates any directly connected ESs Use the I2 update command to display the link state update for the specified level 2 IS Syntax 2 update Example 12 update LSP ID 0000931004F0000 Link State Update For ID 0000931004F00000 INTERMEDIATE SYSTEM NEIGHBORS METRIC TWO WAY 0000931004F002 20 N 0000931004F001 20 N 55002000182000 20 N Intermediate System Neighbors Indicates other directly connected ISs Metric Indicates the cost to the IS Two Way Indicates whether the router is receiving updates from its neighbor Causes the router to send an echo request to a destination and wait for a reply as recommended in RFC 1139 RFC 1139 specifies this as an OSI function and not as a DECnet function Ping 1139 supports short and long term echos Short term echos use regular CLNP data packets which makes them transparent to intermediate systems that do not support RFC1139 Long term echos use PING request reply packets Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OS DECnet V 341 OSI DECnet V Monitoring Commands Talk 5 The default data length of the echo request packet is 16 bytes You can set the data length up to 64 bytes Once you enter the ping 1139 command echo requests are sent continually until you press any key At that time statistics are displayed showing the number of requests t
596. th state on node argument Allows defining or setting configuring information on nodes into the volatile set or permanent define database The only node for which any information is kept is the executor node because node names are not stored The node specifies the router s executor s node address See the define executor command description Example define node state on Example set node state on Chapter 8 Configuring and Monitoring DNA IV 273 DNA IV Configuration and Monitoring Commands Purge Set Show Use the purge command to remove access control lists and routing filters from the permanent database Syntax purge module access control module routing filter module access control circuit specifier Removes access control lists from the permanent database You can delete an entire access control list you cannot delete one filter all circuits Specifies all circuits on the router circuit name Specifies the named circuit Example purge module access control all circuits module routing filter circuit specifier Removes routing filters from the permanent database You can purge a specified filter or you can purge them all The options for the circuit specifiers include the following all Specifies all routing filters in the configuration memory circuit name Specifies the routing filter for the named circuit Example purge module routing filter all Use the set command to add set or mo
597. that can reach NetF NetA BNa2 NetA BNa1 a Net C R NetA BNa3 NNc SANT pe NetA BNa4 a A al _ ae Net or NNe BNf se tZ SL oa Ne es oN N Figure 1 Extended Border Node Connectivity Note Solid lines represent intersubnetwork TGs In this figure e Netid subnetwork NetA has been divided into topology subnetworks The left most topology subnetwork contains BNa1 which is connected across an intersubnetwork TG to BNaz2 in the right topology subnetwork The netid of both BNa1 and BNaz2 is NetA e BNa1 is non native to all the other extended border nodes including NetA2 e BNa2 BNa3 and BNa 4 are all native to the right topology subnetwork of NETA and non native to the other networks including the subnetwork containing BNa1 e ABN can interconnect multiple networks as BNa4 connects topology subnetwork of NetA to both NetB and NetD e Multiple links can connect two networks as the right topology subnetwork of NetA and NetB are connected by both BNa3 BNb1 and BNa4 BNb2 Chapter1 APPN 15 APPN e Both ends of an inter network link must be BNs unless one of the networks is a peripheral network In this case the peripheral network may use a conventional non BN network node to connect to the BN in the adjoining network This is shown where peripheral network NetC connects to
598. the router to verification data in an incoming initialization message If they do not match the X 25 circuit must be reinitialized Specify enabled or disabled executor argument Defines or sets arguments that is the executor global to DNA in the permanent define or volatile set database Most of these arguments reduce the efficiency of the router and increase the load on the circuits as they are made larger They can also increase memory requirements They should not be used unnecessarily in excess of the values required for the actual network configuration For set the executor must be in the off state to modify numeric arguments or type in the volatile database Unlike DECnet VMS the set executor state on command is valid when the executor state is off These changes take place immediately without rebooting the router address area node Sets the executor s node address the node ID of this router Area range 1 to 63 The area and the node must be less than executor maximum area Node range is 1 to 1023 The default 0 0 is illegal Note DNA will not be enabled if the executor address is not set to a legal value area maximum cost number Maximum cost allowed between this level 2 router and any other level 2 router If the best route to an area is more costly than this that area will be considered unreachable Maximum 1022 Default 1022 This argument does not apply to level 1 routers It should be greater than th
599. the IP address The LU name can only be mapped to a Host address If the mask is a network mask the name specified must be a pool name Syntax add port This command specifies additional port for the TN3270E Server to listen on You will be prompted to enter values for the following parameters The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets Table 44 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Port Parameter Information Parameter Port number Valid Values 1 to 65536 Default Value none Description This parameter specifies the port number to be added 204 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 44 Configuration Parameter List Add TN3270E Port continued Parameter Information Parameter Support TN3270E Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description This parameter specifies whether the added port will negotiate to be a TN3270E server If it is not an E Server it will not support printing or system requests Parameter Pool name Valid Values A string of 1 to 8 characters e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of the pool associated with this port Clients that connect to this port and do not specify an LU name or pool name will be assigned an LU from this pool
600. the NSP protocol which requires bidirectional connectivity you do not need to define access controls in both directions Inclusive Access Control In Figure 16 on page 255 node 1 13 wants to communicate with nodes 1 2 and 1 4 only Access control allows you to secure nodes from all nodes connected by routers Therefore in Eigura Ion page 255 you can protect node 1 13 from all 254 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using DNA IV nodes except node 1 9 because these two nodes share the same physical network To configure the desired access control for this example build an inclusive filter on interface Eth O of router 1 19 as shown in the bottom of 1 2 14 1 20 5 a 1 23 o o Eth 0 1 19 PPP 0 o o 1 13 1 9 Inclusive Filter Information Source Source Destination Destination Result Mask Result Mask 1 2 63 1023 1 13 63 1023 1 4 63 1023 1 13 63 1023 0 0 0 0 1 9 63 1023 Figure 16 Example of Inclusive Access Control allow nodes 1 2 and 1 4 to send packets to node 1 13 The third entry allows any node to send to node 1 9 you are not trying to secure node 1 9 To configure the example given for router 1 19 enter the following NCP commands and parameters NCP gt def mod access cont circ eth 0 type inclusive NCP gt def mod access cont circ eth 0 filter 1 2 63 1023 1 13 63 1023 NCP gt def mod access cont circ eth 0 filter 1 4 63 1023 1 13 63 1
601. the available bandwidth Note The following parameters are forward traffic parameters Parameter Forward Peak Cell Rate Valid Values 85 of line speed Default Value Port s Default Effective Capacity 48 Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the cell transmission rate 162 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter Forward Sustained Cell Rate Valid Values 1 85 of line speed Default Value Port s Default Effective Capacity 48 Description This parameter indicates an upper bound on the average cell transmission rate You cannot specify this parameter for Best Effort connections Parameter Forward Tagging Valid Values Yes No Default Value Yes Description This parameter indicates that cells that are nonconforming to cell loss priority 0 traffic specification but are conforming to cell loss priority 1 traffic specification are marked and allowed into the ATM network You cannot specify this parameter for Best Effort connections Parameter QoS Valid Values CLASS_0 CLASS_1 CLASS_2 CLASS_3 CLASS_4 where CLASS_0 The unspecified class The network does not specify any QoS CLASS _1 Performance is comparable to current digital private line performance CLASS _2 Intended for packetized video and audio in teleconferencing a
602. the base APPN Architecture functions the router also implements the following option set towers and new functions 087 Garbage Collection Enhancements 1002 Adjacent Link Station name 1007 Parallel TGs 1012 LU name CP name 1016 Extended Border Node 1061 Prerequisites for SS Extensions for NNS Support 1063 SS Extensions NNS Support 1067 Dependent LU Requester 1071 Generalized ODAI Usage 1101 Preloaded Directory Cache 1107 Central Resource Registration of LUs 1116 Network Node Server support for DLUS Served LU registration 1119 Report Branch Topology to a Manager 1120 Branch Awareness 1121 Branch Extender 1200 Tree Caching and TG Caching 1400 High Performance Routing HPR 1401 Rapid Transport Protocol RTP 1402 Control Flows over RTP 1405 HPR Border Node Node performance tuning Node service traces Accounting and node statistics collection High Performance Routing HPR is an enhancement to APPN architecture that provides better performance over high speed low error rate links using existing hardware HPR replaces the normal APPN intermediate session routing ISR with a Network Control Layer NCL containing a new type of source routing function called automatic network routing ANR The complete HPR route is contained in the ANR packet allowing intermediate routing nodes to route the packets with less processing overhead and storage HPR also eliminates the error recovery and flow control session level pacing procedures for e
603. the corresponding data traversing the SATF multiple times To achieve this direct connectivity however TGs must be defined on each node for all the other possible partners Defining connections between all possible pairs of nodes attached to the SATF results in a large number of definitions increasing on the order of the square of the number of nodes involved and also a large number of topology database updates TDUs flowing in the APPN network To alleviate these problems APPN allows nodes to become members of a connection network to represent their attachment to an SATF Session traffic between two nodes that have been defined as members of a connection network can be routed directly without passing through a network node achieves direct connectivity To become a member of a connection network an APPN node s port must be attached to a Connection Network by defining a connection network interface When the port is defined a Connection Network TG is created by the APPN component to identify the direct connection from the port to the SATF i e the connection network This TG is not a conventional TG as in the case of defined link stations but rather represents the connection to the Connection Network in the topology database 12 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Note TGs for end nodes are not contained in the network topology database but are contained in the node s local topology database TDUs do not flow through t
604. the following sections Accessing the NDP Configuration Environment Use the following procedure to access the NDP configuration process 1 At the OPCON prompt enter talk 6 For more detail on this command refer to The OPCON Process and Commands in the Software User s Guide For example talk 6 Config gt After you enter the talk 6 command the CONFIG prompt Config gt displays on the terminal If the prompt does not appear when you first enter configuration press Return again 2 At the CONFIG prompt enter the p ndp command to get to the NDP6 Config gt prompt NDP Configuration Commands To configure NDP enter the commands at the NDP6 Config gt prompt Table 69 NDP Configuration Command Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the ca for specific commands if available See add Adds a router advertisement or parameters change Changes a router advertisement or parameters delete Deletes a router advertisement or parameters disable Disables router advertisement enable Enables router advertisement list Lists the configuration Exit Add Use the add command to add a router advertisement add fa Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 405 NDP Configuration Commands Talk 6 Example NDP config gt add ra ra Adds a router advertisement add router advertisement on which interface Specifies the interface to w
605. the packet will be dropped and an ICMP message will be sent to the originator of the packet indicating the packet size that is necessary to fit onto the output net of the intermediate router The host receiving this message will adjust the size of subsequent packets forwarded on the path This process may occur multiple times before the packet reaches its final destination Once the packet reaches its destination subsequent packets should not be dropped because their packet size being too large Because the route can change dynamically the path MTU may increase and will need adjustment in the host node Learned path MTUs are aged and the Path MTU Discovery process re occurs This allows the transmitted packet size to react to the dynamic nature of routes through the network Path MTU Discovery is mandatory because fragmentation is not allowed on transit routers If the device is acting as a transit router it will not forward packets that are larger than the output net s MTU It will generate an ICMP Packet Too Big message back to the source of the packet The enable path mtu discovery command at the IPv6 Config gt prompt can be used to enable or disable path MTU discovery Path MTU discovery is enabled by default Use the set path mtu aging timer command at the IPv6 Config gt prompt to specify the aging time for path MTUs that have been determined IPv6 Mandatory Security An IPv6 node must support IP security IP security can be enab
606. the performance of this node e Perform node service trace diagnostics e Collect statistics for this network node Controlling Connections Configuration This group of APPN configuration steps e Allows the network node to accept requests only from nodes that you specify e Enables the network node to initiate connections with other nodes that you specify including LEN end nodes This configuration provides a higher level of security because you explicitly define which APPN nodes may communicate with this router network node A connection request from an adjacent node will be accepted only if its fully qualified CP name parameter has been configured on this network node This group of configuration steps optionally enables you to have a secure link with each adjacent node by configuring the session level security feature for each link Use the following procedure for the controlling connections configuration 1 Select ports over which you desire to establish connections to adjacent nodes from the following DLC port types supported by APPN e Token ring LAN port e Ethernet LAN port e Frame relay serial port e PPP serial port e X 25 e DLSw e SDLC e IP port 2 Define ports selected as direct APPN ports with the following parameters e Enable APPN routing on this port e Disable the service any port parameter 3 If you are configuring APPN using a DLSw port e Enable bridging on the node Chapter 1 APPN 29 APPN e Enable DLSw on the
607. the primary DLUS and then the backup DLUS immediately If this fails DLUR will wait for the amount of time specified by the minimum of the short retry timer and this parameter before attempting to reach the primary DLUS See ED algorithm for a complete description of the retry Parameter Perform short retries to restore disrupted pipe Valid Values Yes No Default Value If Perform retries to restore disrupted pipes is Yes then the default value is Yes Otherwise the default is No Description for a complete description of the retry algorithm Parameter Short retry timer Valid Values 0 to 2 756 000 seconds Default Value 120 seconds Description In all cases of pipe failure other than non disruptive UNBIND the minimum of Delay before initiating retries and this parameter specifies the amount of time DLUR will wait before attempting to reach the primary DLUS after an attempt to establish this connection has failed See ED algorithm for a complete description of the retry Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 95 APPN Configuration Commands Table 7 Configuration Parameter List Dependent LU Requester continued Parameter Information Parameter Short retry count Valid Values 0 to 65 535 Default Value 5 Description In all cases of pipe failure other than non disruptive UNBIND this parameter specifies the number of times the DLUR will attempt to perform sho
608. tic tuning algorithm to calculate the values for the Maximum shared memory and Maximum cached directory entries tuning parameters This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Parameter Maximum number of network nodes sharing the same APPN network id Valid Values 10 to 8 000 Default 50 Description This parameter is an estimate of the maximum number of nodes that you expect in the subnetwork that is in the topology known by this node This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Parameter Maximum number of TGs connecting network nodes with the same APPN network id Valid Values 9 to 64 000 Default 3 times the value of the maximum number of network nodes in the subnetwork Description This parameter is an estimate of the maximum number of TGs connecting network nodes in the subnetwork that is in the topology known by this node This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 97 APPN Configuration Commands Table 8 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Tuning continued Parameter Information Parameter Maximum number of ISR sessions Valid Values 10 to 7 500 Default Value 200 Description This parameter specifies an estimate of the maximum number of intermediate session routing sessions ISR expected to be supported by this router network node at any one time This
609. tics Y es N o N Edit LLC Characteristics Y es N o N Edit HPR defaults Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written APPN config gt 1li all NODE NETWORK ID STFNET CONTROL POINT NAME NN6 XID 00000 APPN ENABLED YES MAX SHARED MEMORY 4096 MAX CACHED 4000 DLUR DLUR ENABLED YES PRIMARY DLUS NAME NETB MVSC CONNECTION NETWORK CN NAME LINK TYPE PORT INTERFACES COS COS NAME BATCH BATCHSC CONNECT INTER INTERSC CPSVCMG SNASVCMG USRBAT USRNOT MODE MODE NAME COS NAME USRBAT USRBAT USRNOT USRNOT PORT INTF PORT LINK HPR SERVICE PORT NUMBER NAME TYPE ENABLED ANY ENABLED APPN Chapter1 APPN 53 APPN 0 TRO0Q IBMTRNET YES YES YES 1 PPPOO1 PPP YES YES YES 2 SS SDLC NO YES YES 3 SDLC NO YES NO 4 PPP YES YES NO 5 TROQ5 IBMTRNET YES YES YES 254 DLS NO YES NO 17 PPPO17 PPP YES YES YES 9 PPP009 PPP YES YES YES STATION STATION PORT DESTINATION HPR ALLOW ADJ NODE NAME NAME ADDRESS ENABLED CP CP TYPE TONN1 TROOO 0004AC4E7505 YES YES 1 TONN2 TRO00O 550020004020 YES YES 1 TONN9 TROOO O004AC4E951D YES YES 1 TOPC4 TROGO 0004AC9416B4 YES YES 1 TOVTAM1 TROOO 400000003888 YES YES 1 TONN35 PPPOO1 000000000000 YES YES 0 TO15D0D PPPO09 900000000000 YES NO 0 y LU NAME LU NAME STATION NAME CP NAME Note yidle timer gt 0 means dial on demand This is a limited resource TG number is required for a limited resource Do not allow CP CP sessions on this link Pro
610. ties Any active adapter on the ring has the ability to provide the active monitor function if the current active monitor fails address In data communication the unique code assigned to each device workstation or user connected to a network address mapping table AMT A table maintained within the AppleTalk router that provides a current mapping of node addresses to hardware addresses address mask For internet subnetworking a 32 bit mask used to identify the subnetwork address bits in the host portion of an IP address Synonymous with subnet mask and subnetwork mask address resolution 1 A method for mapping network layer addresses to media specific addresses 2 See also Address Resolution Protocol ARP and AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP Address Resolution Protocol ARP 1 In the Internet suite of protocols the protocol that dynamically maps an IP address to an address used by a supporting metropolitan or local area network such as Ethernet or token ring 2 See also Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP addressing In data communication the way in which a station selects the station to which it is to send data adjacent nodes Two nodes connected together by at least one path that connects no other node T Administrative Domain A collection of hosts and routers and the interconnecting networks managed by a single administrative authority Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN
611. ting within a domain e The reachable address prefix for routing outside the domain The IS IS protocol uses routing tables to forward packets to their correct destinations The routing table entries are built from information in the link state database or from user configured reachable addresses The link state database is built from information received in the link state update LSU Refer to the The IS IS protocol is a link state dynamic routing protocol that detects and learns the best routes to reachable destinations IS IS can quickly perceive changes in the topology of a domain and after a short convergence period calculate new routes To accomplish this the IS uses the following packets e Link State Updates LSU that the IS uses to keep the link state database information current e Sequence Number PDU SNP to keep the database synchronized and to ensure that each adjacent IS knows what the most recent Link State Packet LSP from each other router was e Hello messages that ISs use to discover initialize and maintain adjacencies with neighboring Ss An IS IS area is a collection of systems on contiguous subnetworks Each area s topology is hidden from those of the other areas to reduce routing traffic A level 1 L1 IS is used to route within an area A level 2 L2 IS is used to route between areas or over the backbone An IS that routes within an area and over the backbone is considered an L1 L2 IS Chapter 9 Using OS
612. tinued Parameter Information Parameter IP address of adjacent node Valid Values Any valid IP address Default Value none Description Each link on the HPR IP port must have a unique destination IP address Parameter Adjacent node type Valid Values APPN network node APPN end node LEN end node Default Value APPN network node Description This parameter identifies whether the adjacent node is an APPN node a low entry networking LEN end node When APPN end node is selected and Limited resource is No APPN changes the adjacent node type internally to earn and will work with any node type When APPN end node is selected and Limited resource is Yes the adjacent node type is unchanged When you select LEN end node the fully qualified control point name parameter is a required parameter If this network node is communicating with the IBM Virtual Telecommunications Access Method VTAM product through the LEN node and the LEN node is not a T2 1 node or does not have an explicitly defined control point CP name then the router network node s XID number for the Subarea connection parameter also must be specified to establish a connection Note LEN end node is not a valid node type for HPR IP interface 152 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter fully qualified
613. tion The filtering of network numbers further enhances the security and administration of the internet Network access is only indirectly controlled by Zone filtering An unregulated department could add networks with the same Zone names but new net numbers that conflict with other departments Network number filtering can be used to prevent these random additions of zone names and net numbers from impacting the rest of the network How Do You Add Filters The router is configured with an exclusive meaning block the specified zones or inclusive meaning allow only these zones list of Zones for each direction on each interface The specified interface will not readvertise filtered Zone information in the defined direction If all Zones in a network s Zonelist are filtered network information will also be filtered across the interface e Use configuration commands add and delete to create the filter list for an interface e Use configuration commands enable and disable to specify how the filter list is applied Use similar commands to create network number filters Chapter 3 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 215 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 Other Commands You can use the AP2 CONFIG gt list command to display all filter information for the interfaces In addition the list command accepts an interface as an argument so that you can list information for only an interface Sample Configuration Procedures This section covers the steps re
614. tion Valid Values Yes or No Default Value Yes Description Indicates whether the node is allowed to reorder the subnetwork routing list so that entries most likely to succeed come first This reordering occurs in the internal temporary copy of the routing list Parameter Destination LU found via this list Valid Values A fully qualified LU name with optional trailing wildcard Legal characters for the LU name are A Z 0 9 The first character of the NETID part and of the LU name part must be non numeric kI Any of the FQ LU names may be terminated with a wild card the range of LUs For example character to designate p e NETI e NETI LUA Default Value Blank Description This parameter specifies a list of destination LUs that can be found via this routing list This question will be repeated until terminated with a null entry Notes 1 Only a single entry among all of the routing lists may have a standalone This will match all LUs and the routing list containing it is known as the default routing list 2 All the editing shortcuts described at the beginning of this table are available to speed modification of a previously configured routing CP s list 3 Any given LU name may not be duplicated in another routing list 4 Maximum number of LU names that may be specified e 2210 12x not supported e 2210 14x or 24x 98 Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 18
615. tion Circuit config 3 gt list all Base net Destination name Circuit priority 8 Outbound calls allowed Inbound calls allowed Idle timer 60 sec SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms Circuit config 3 gt set net Base net for this circuit 0 Circuit config 3 gt set idle 0 2 Circuit config 3 gt set dest Assign destination address name brown N Circuit config 3 gt list all Base net 2 Destination name brown Circuit priority 8 Destination address subaddress 555 1211 Outbound calls allowed Inbound calls allowed Idle timer 0 fixed circuit SelfTest Delay Timer 150 ms Circuit config 3 gt ex Config gt net 2 V 25bis Data Link Configuration V25bis Config gt list all V 25bis Configuration Local Network Address Name Unassigned No local addresses configured Non Responding addresses Retries 1 Timeout 0 seconds Call timeouts Command Delay ms Connect 60 seconds Disconnect 2 seconds Cable type RS 232 DTE Speed bps 9600 V25bis Config gt set local Local network address name gray V25bis Config gt list all V 25bis Configuration Local Network Address Name Local Network Address gray 555 1212 Chapter 1 APPN 61 APPN Non Responding addresses Retries 1 Timeout seconds Call timeouts Command Delay ms Connect 60 seconds Disconnect 2 seconds Cable type RS 232 DTE Speed bps 9600 V25bis Config gt Note J A non zero value for I
616. tion lie outside of the network node Information about intermediate sessions is generated by the ISR component in the network node and falls into two categories e Intermediate session names and counters e Route selection control vector RSCV data for intermediate sessions Enabling the collect intermediate session information parameter instructs the router to collect session names and counters for all active intermediate sessions Enabling the save RSCV information for intermediate sessions parameter instructs the router to collect RSCV data for active intermediate sessions The RSCV data is useful for monitoring session routes In both cases you can retrieve the data on active sessions by issuing SNMP get and get next commands for variables in the APPN Management Information Base MIB The collect intermediate session information function defaults to being disabled You can enable it using the Configuration Program or using the set management talk 6 command Once enabled you can control it including disabling and re enabling using SNMP set commands to the APPN accounting MIB Note This function can use a significant amount of APPN memory You should configure APPN with the needed memory before you enable the collection of ISR information For accounting purposes you can maintain records of intermediate sessions passing through the network node The data records can be created and stored in router memory SNMP must be used to retrieve
617. tion Parameter List Connection Network Detail continued Parameter Information Parameter BAN destination address BDA Valid Values X 0000 0000 0000 to X 7FFF FFFF FFFF Default Value X 0000 0000 0000 Description This parameter specifies the BAN destination address configured in the node that is performing the BAN function If you are using bridging to connect the LAN network to the frame relay network specify X 0000 0000 0000 as the value of this parameter In this case the MAC address reported to the APPN topology for the connection network TG is the BNI MAC address coded on the APPN port associated with this connection network definition Table 31 Configuration Parameter List Connection Network Configuration for ATM Parameter Information Parameter Port name required Valid Values Name of port on which APPN routing has been enabled Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the name of a port providing connectivity to the shared access transport facility SATF for the connection network being defined All ports defined for a given connection network must be the same type and have the same characteristics Parameter fully qualified connection network name Valid Values A string of 3 to 17 characters in the form of netID CNname where e netiD is a network ID from 1 to 8 characters e CNname is a connection network name from 1 to 8 characters Each na
618. tion Program only Parameter Number of local pus for TN3270E support Valid Values Default Value Description This parameter specifies the number of local PUs that are available for TN3270 support This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only Parameter Total number of LUs for TN3270E Valid Values Default Value Description This parameter specifies the total number of LUs available for TN3270E support This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program only 100 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 8 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Tuning continued Parameter Information Parameter Maximum shared memory Valid Values 0 5108 KB Default Value 5 108 KB Description This parameter specifies the amount of shared memory within the router that is allocated to the APPN network node APPN uses its shared memory allocation to perform network operations and to maintain required tables and directories You can allow APPN to have a 4K RU size by setting percent of APPN shared memory used for buffers to a sufficiently large value to allow at least 1 Megabyte of memory to be available to the buffer manager This parameter is configurable using the Configuration Program and from talk 6 Parameter Percent of APPN shared memory to be used for buffers Valid Values 10 to 50 Default 10 or 512 Kilobytes whichever is larger Des
619. tion will receive the delayed acknowledgment before its T1 expires Parameter Acknowledgment needed to increment working window Valid Values 0 to 127 acknowledgments Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description When the working window Ww is not equal to the Maximum Transmit Window Size Tw this parameter is the number of transmitted l format LPDUs that must be acknowledged before the working window can be incremented by 1 When congestion is detected by the lost of l format LPDUs Ww is set to 1 Table 28 Configuration Parameter List Modify HPR Defaults Parameter Information Parameter Inactivity timer override for HPR HPR Ti Valid Values 1 to 254 seconds Default Value Default value is taken from the associated port parameter Description This parameter specifies the HPR override LLC inactivity timer HPR Ti that is to be used when HPR is supported by this link station This parameter overrides the value taken from the default inactivity timer override for the HPR parameter This parameter supersedes the value of the LLC inactivity timer Ti parameter specified on the Modify Logical Link Control LLC Characteristics parameter when HPR is supported Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 171 APPN Configuration Commands Table 28 Configuration Parameter List Modify HPR Defaults continued Parameter Information Parameter R
620. tions ISs perform the functions of the lower three layers of the OSI reference model and handle the routing of the network protocol data units NPDUs between subnetworks ISs logically attach to the subnetwork at the subnetwork point of attachment SNPA The SNPA is the access point into the data link layer Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 285 Using OSI DECnet V Depending on the IS configuration each IS can run three protocols ES IS IS IS and Connectionless Mode Network Protocol CLNP The ES IS protocol enables the ESs and ISs attached to the same subnetwork to dynamically discover each other s existence An ES connected to the same subnetwork as an IS is adjacent to the IS The IS IS routing protocol enables the ISs to do the following e Dynamically discover the existence and availability of adjacent ISs e Exchange routing information with other ISs e Use the exchanged routing information to calculate routes based on the shortest path The CLNP protocol is a datagram protocol that transports packets between ISs NSAP Addressing The NPDU contains OSI network addresses also called NSAPs The NSAP refers to a point at the network layer where the user accesses the network layer NSAPs are unique points within a system that represent addressable endpoints of communication through the network layer The number of NSAPs may vary from system to system An addressing authority such as the United States government s Nationa
621. tionship of a product to other products in the same network or can define characteristics of the product itself configuration report server CRS In the IBM Token Ring Network Bridge Program the server that accepts commands from the LAN Network Manager LNM to get station information set station parameters and remove stations on its ring This server also collects and forwards configuration reports generated by stations on its ring The configuration reports include the new active monitor reports and the nearest active upstream neighbor NAUN reports congestion See network congestion connection In data communication an association established between functional units for conveying information I A control point CP 1 A component of an APPN or LEN node that manages the resources of that node In an APPN node the CP is capable of engaging in CP CP sessions with other APPN nodes In an APPN network node the CP also provides services to adjacent end nodes in the APPN network 2 A component of a node that manages resources of that node and optionally provides services to other nodes in the network Examples are a system services control point SSCP in a type 5 subarea node a network node control point NNCP in an APPN network node and an end node control point ENCP in an APPN or LEN end node An SSCP and an NNCP can provide services to other nodes control point management services CPMS A component of a cont
622. title command The NET Chapter 9 Using OSI DECnet V 301 Using OSI DECnet V consists of the router s system ID and its area address Use the list globals command to verify that the NET is configured correctly Globally enabling OSI Enable the OSI software to run on the router using the enable OSI command Use the list globals command to verify that the OSI protocol is enabled Configuring OSI Over an Ethernet or a Token Ring LAN To configure the OSI protocol to run over an Ethernet or over a Token Ring LAN set the subnet There is a one to one correspondence between subnetworks and interfaces Use the set subnet command to configure all LAN subnets Ethernet and Token Ring Use the default multicast addresses for Ethernet When configuring a token ring use these addresses Parameter Functional Address 802 5 All ESs 09002B000004 C00000004000 All ISs 09002B000005 C00000008000 All L1 ISs 018002000014 C00000008000 All L2 ISs 018002000015 C00000008000 Use the list subnet detailed or list subnet summary command to verify that you have configured the subnets correctly Configuring OSI Over X 25 or Frame Relay To configure the OSI protocol to run over the X 25 or Frame Relay interface do the following Set the subnet Use the set subnet command to set the interface to X 25 or FRL Frame Relay Use the defaults for all the required information Use the list subnet detailed or list subnet summary command to ve
623. tly configured interfaces Example PIM config gt list i Hello State Type IP Address Interval Holdtime Physical 1 2 3 4 5 101 30 210 Type Identifies the type of interface that is configured IP address Identifies the IPv6 address assigned to this interface Hello Interval Identifies the interval between hello messages in seconds sent on this interface State holdtime Identifies the number of seconds to tell other devices upstream to hold PIM state for this device For PIM this is the amount of time for upstream devices to keep prunes alive 412 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 PIM Configuration Commands Talk 6 variables Displays configuration information about global PIM variables Example PIM config gt list v PIM Global Configuration Values PIM on Graft Timeout 3 seconds Assert Timeout 210 seconds PIM config gt PIM on off Identifies whether PIM is currently enabled or disabled Graft timeout Identifies the number of seconds that grafts are retransmitted if no graft acknowledgement has been received Assert timeout Identifies the number of seconds that assert information learned by upstream devices is retained before reverting back to local routing information preference Displays current configured routing type metric preferences Example PIM config gt list p RIP FFFF Default FFFF Direct FFFF Fixed FFFF Filter FFFF PIM config gt Route type Identifies the route type supported a
624. to a COS name e Change a mode name to COS name mapping Re map an IBM defined mode name to a different COS name Re map a previously specified user defined mode name to a different COS name Refer to the discussion of Topology and Routing Services in the SNA APPN Architecture Reference SC30 3422 for a description of standard and ATM COS tables APPN Node Tuning The performance of the router APPN network node can be tuned in two ways 38 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN e By manually setting the values of the maximum shared memory percent of APPN shared memory to be used for buffers and the maximum cached directory entries tuning parameters using the talk 6 option of the command line interface e By selecting values for the maximum number of ISR sessions maximum number of adjacent nodes and other parameters shown in able 8 on page 971 and having the tuning algorithm automatically calculate the maximum shared memory and maximum cached directory entries tuning parameter values Use the Configuration Program to invoke the tuning algorithm The maximum shared memory parameter affects the amount of storage available to the APPN network node for network operations For example you can allow APPN to have a 4K RU size by setting maximum shared memory to at least 1 Megabyte and setting percent of APPN shared memory used for buffers to a sufficiently large value to allow at least 1 Megabyte of memory to be available to t
625. to from cells AAL 5 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 one of several standard AALs AAL 5 was designed for data communications and is used by LAN Emulation and Classical IP abstract syntax A data specification that includes all distinctions that are needed in data transmissions but that omits abstracts other details such as those that depend on specific computer architectures See also abstract syntax notation 1 ASN 1 and basic encoding rules BER abstract syntax notation 1 ASN 1 The Open Systems Interconnection OSI method for abstract syntax specified in the following standards e ITU T Recommendation X 208 1988 ISO IEC 8824 1990 e ITU T Recommendation X 680 1994 ISO IEC 8824 1 1994 See also basic encoding rules BER ACCESS In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the clause in a Management Information Base MIB module that defines the minimum level of support that a managed node provides for an object acknowledgment 1 The transmission by a receiver of acknowledge characters as an affirmative response to a sender T 2 An indication that an item sent was received active 1 Operational 2 Pertaining to a node or device that is connected or is available for connection to another node or device active monitor In a token ring network a function performed at any one time by one ring station that 447 initiates the transmission of tokens and provides token error recovery facili
626. toring Protocol Independent Multicast Routing Protocol PIM 415 PIM Monitoring Commands Talk 5 PIM Monitoring Commands This section describes the PIM monitoring commands Table 72 PIM Monitoring Command Summary Command Help dump clear interface join leave mcache mgroups mstats neighbor pim summary pim ping traceroute variables Exit Function Displays all the commands available for this command level or Clears the multicast forwarding table Displays the status of the interface Joins a multicast group Leaves a multicast group Displays currently active multicast forwarding table cache entries Displays group membership of the device s attached interfaces Displays various multicast routing statistics Displays information about current adjacencies Displays the PIM state database Displays a summary of the PIM state database Dynamically pings an IPv6 address Dynamically traces a route Displays the configuration values for PIM variables Dump routing tables Clear Use the dump command to display the configured routing tables Syntax dump Example PIM6 gt dump Type Dest net Prefix Cost Age Next hop s Fitr 102 304 128 0 576 filter Stat 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 128 100 576 1P64 0 Stat 3 4 128 ul 576 IP64 1 IPV6 Routing table size 768 nets 79872 bytes 3 nets known PIM6 gt 0 nets hidden 0 nets deleted 0 nets inactive 0 routes used inte
627. tory server e Topology database exchanges with other APPN network nodes enabling network nodes throughout the network to select optimal routes for LU LU sessions based on requested classes of service e Session services for its local LUs and client end nodes e Intermediate routing services within an APPN network Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN node An APPN network node or an APPN end node agent A system that assumes an agent role alert A message sent to a management services focal point in a network to identify a problem or an impending problem all stations address In communications synonym for broadcast address American National Standards Institute ANSI An organization consisting of producers consumers and general interest groups that establishes the procedures by which accredited organizations create and maintain voluntary industry standards in the United States A analog 1 Pertaining to data consisting of continuously variable physical quantities A 2 Contrast with digital AppleTalk A network protocol developed by Apple Computer Inc This protocol is used to interconnect network devices which can be a mixture of Apple and non Apple products AppleTalk Address Resolution Protocol AARP In AppleTalk networks a protocol that a translates AppleTalk node addresses into hardware addresses and b reconciles addressing discrepancies in networks that support more than one set of protocol
628. trailer sizes depend on the networks and their network interfaces Protocol Specific Size Limits This section explains the protocol specific size limits IP Packet Lengths The IP protocol specifications do not require a host IP implementation to accept IP packets of more than 576 octets however router IP implementations must accommodate IP packets of any length up to the limits imposed by the network specific packets in use Furthermore router IP performs transparent fragmentation and reassembly of packets that would otherwise exceed network specific length restrictions as required by the IP specification Packet size mismatches do not cause connectivity problems However fragment reassembly does pose a performance penalty so fragmentation should be avoided whenever possible Changing Maximum Packet Sizes Normally the router automatically sets the maximum network layer packet size to the size of the largest possible packet on all the connected networks It then adds any headers and trailers required by the networks to determine the internal buffer size which is larger than the network layer size Some networks Token Ring 4 Mbps and Token Ring 16 Mbps allow you to configure maximum packet sizes Configuring maximum packet sizes affects the size of buffers used on the router and this in turn affects the number of buffers available for a given memory size Routers automatically determine what size buffer it is going to need You ca
629. transport data over IP IP address The 32 bit address defined by the Internet Protocol standard 5 Request for Comments RFC 791 It is usually represented in dotted decimal notation IP datagram In the Internet suite of protocols the fundamental unit of information transmitted through an internet It contains source and destination addresses user data and control information such as the length of the datagram the header checksum and flags indicating whether the datagram can be or has been fragmented IP router A device in an IP internet that is responsible for making decisions about the paths over which network traffic will flow Routing protocols are used to gain information about the network and to determine the best route over which the datagram should be forwarded toward the final destination The datagrams are routed based on IP destination addresses IPXWAN A Novell protocol that is used to exchange router to router information before exchanging standard Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX routing information and traffic over wide area networks WANs L L2TP Access Concentrator LAC A device attached to one or more public service telephone network PSTN or ISDN lines capable of handling both PPP operation and of the L2TP protocol The LAC implements the media over which L2TP operates L2TP passes the traffic to one or more L2TP Network Servers LNS L2TP can tunnel any protocol carried by the PPP network L2TP
630. tric measures the residual error probability of the associated circuit Internal and External Routing Internal or external routing involves an L2 IS routing a packet between two separate domains When a packet needs to be routed to another domain the L2 IS tries to match the address to a reachable address prefix in the internal or external routing table Internal and external routes are based on the cost routing metric to the destination An internal route s cost considers the cost of routing within the domain and the cost of routing to the destination An external route s cost is based only on the cost of routing to the destination outside the routing domain The IS chooses the path with the lowest cost 296 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using OSI DECnet V For example a packet is destined to go from node A in domain 1 to node D in domain 2 igure 2a Node A can choose two paths to send the packet to node B and then on to D or to node C and then on to D How nodes B and C advertise the cost of their routes to D determines how node A decides to route the packet internally or externally There are three possible options e Nodes B and C advertise the cost of their routes to D as internal The internal cost of the route A B D is 35 which is the cost of routing from A to B plus the cost of routing from B to D The internal cost of the route A C D is 40 which is the cost of routing from A to C plus the cost of routing form C to D N
631. try Count 1 255 3 LDLC Timer Period 1 255 seconds 1 Would you like TG characteristics updated to recommended values based on config changes Y es N o N Edit TG Characteristics Y es N o N Write this record Y The record has been written nada205 APPN config gt add link atm006 APPN Station Station name Max 8 characters tograya WARNING You are changing an existing record Limited resource Y es N o N Activate link automatically Y es N o Y Virtual Channel Type 0 PVC 1 SVC 0 1 Destination ATM Address 3999999999999900009999010103168902259411 Broadband Bearer Class 0 CLASS A 1 CLASS C 2 CLASS X 2 Best Effort Indicator Y es N o N 64 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Forward Traffic Peak Cell Rate 1 16777215 30000 Forward Traffic Sustained Cell Rate 1 16777215 20000 Forward Traffic Tagging Y es N o Y Forward Traffic QOS Class 0 CLASS 0 1 CLASS 1 2 CLASS 2 3 CLASS 3 4 CLASS 4 0 Backward Traffic Peak Cell Rate 1 16777215 30000 Backward Traffic Sustained Cell Rate 1 16777215 20000 Backward Traffic Tagging Y es N o Y Backward Traffic QOS Class CLASS 0 1 CLASS 1 2 CLASS 2 3 CLASS 3 4 CLASS 4 0 Call out anonymously Yyes N o N ATM Network Type CAMPUS 1 WIDEAREA 0 Shareable Connection Network Traffic Y es N o N Shareable Other Protocol Traffic Y es N o N Remote SAP 04 EC
632. try count is initialized when a command or request is first transmitted over the link If the LDLC timer period expires before a response is received the command or request is retransmitted the retry count is decremented and the LDLC timer period is restarted If the timer expires with the retry count at 0 the link is assumed to be inoperative Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 133 APPN Configuration Commands Table 18 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration for ATM continued Parameter Information Parameter LDLC Timer Period Valid Values 1 255 seconds Default Value For ATM 1 second For IP 15 seconds Description This parameter specifies the timer period used with the LDLC retry count 134 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 19 Configuration Parameter List Port Definition Parameter Information Parameter Maximum BTU size Valid Values 768 to 1496 bytes for Ethernet 768 to 17745 bytes for token ring 768 to 4096 bytes for ATM 768 to 4096 bytes for IP 768 to 8136 bytes for Frame Relay 768 to 8132 bytes for frame relay over ISDN and V 25bis 768 to 4086 bytes for PPP 768 to 4082 bytes for PPP over ISDN and V 25bis X 25 will take value from network level 768 to 2048 bytes for all other ports Default Value 1289 bytes for Ethernet 2048 bytes for token ring 2048 for ATM 1469 bytes for IP 2048 bytes for frame relay or
633. ts 79872 bytes Reassembly buffer size 12000 bytes Routing cache size 64 entries Time to live 64 Path MTU aging timer 10 390 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Set IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 IPV6 config gt list tunnel Tun Remote Endpoint Local Endpoint Frag Allowed TTL Cost Net IPv6 Address Prefix 1 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 No 100 100 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 128 IPV6 config gt Use the set command to set configuration parameters Syntax set access control automatic tunnel parameters tt fragmentation hopcount cache size entries default internal ip address mid path mtu aging timer reassembly size router id routing nets itl Example IPV6 config gt set au TTL value 64 Allow fragmentation in tunnel Yes or No IPV6 config gt set ca number of cache entries 64 IPV6 config gt set mld query interval etwork interface 0 5 ew Query Interval in secs 125 IPV6 config gt set mld response interval etwork interface 0 5 ew Response Interval in secs 10 IPV6 config gt set mld robust etwork interface 0 5 ew Robustness Variable 2 IPV6 config gt set mld leave etwork interface 0 New Leave Interval in secs 1 IPV6 config gt access control Specifies whether access control is enabled or disabled Valid Values on or off Default Value off Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPve 391 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 automatic tunnel parame
634. twork nodes with the same NETID and nodes that know of similarly named destination LUs are added Default 2 Description Indicates the degree to which if any that a BN can supplement configured routing list data with topology data learned by the operational code This supplemental data is not saved in SRAM 86 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 4 Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing continued Parameter Information Parameter Enable routing list optimization Valid Values Yes or No Default Yes Description Indicates whether or not a BN may reorder the operational code s temporary copy of a subnetwork routing list so that entries that are more likely to be successful are found first Note This is the last of the questions asked only if border node has been enabled Parameter Route addition resistance Valid Values 0 to 255 Default Value 128 Description This parameter indicates the desirability of routing through this node This parameter is used in the class of service based route calculation Lower values indicate higher levels of desirability Parameter XID number for subarea connection see table notes Valid Values A string of 5 hexadecimal digits Default X 00000 Description This parameter specifies a unique ID number identifier for the network node The XID number is combined with an ID block number which identifies a specific IBM pr
635. ty responsible for allocating values of the DSP from that domain The network addressing authority identified by the IDI determines the DSP However what is important is that the DSP includes specific addressing information for the domain IS IS Addressing Format The IS IS protocol divides the NSAP address into three portions area address system ID and selector see Eigure 22 The area address and system ID together with a selector of 0 are referred to as the Network Entity Title NET A NET is the address of the network layer itself and is assigned when you configure an IS into the OSI network IDP DSP Area Address System ID Selector Figure 22 IS IS NSAP Addressing Interpretation Area Address In the IS IS protocol the area address is that portion of the NSAP that includes all or a portion of the IDP and the portion of the DSP up to the system ID The area address is that portion of the NSAP that identifies a specific area within a domain This address must be at least 1 octet long and all ESs and ISs in the same area must have the same area address System ID The system ID is that portion of the NSAP that identifies a specific system within an area System IDs must have the following attributes e 1 octet to 8 octets in length e Equal length throughout the domain The routers use a default configuration length of 6 octets e Unique for each system throughout the domain Selector The selector is a
636. ubnet Interface Number 0 Address Prefix MAC Address Default Metric 20 Metric Type Internal State ON X 25 Subnet Interface Number 0 Address Prefix Mapping Type Manual DTE Address Default Metric 20 Metric Type Internal State ON Frame Relay Subnet Interface Number 0 Address Prefix DTE Address Default Metric 20 Metric Type Internal State ON Interface Number Indicates the interface over which the address is reached Address Prefix Indicates the destination NSAP prefix 20 bytes maximum MAC Address Indicates the destination MAC address You must specify this address if the interface corresponds to a LAN subnet This prompt will only appear if the interface is connected to a LAN subnet 312 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Clear DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 Mapping Type Indicates how the destination physical address is determined manual or X 121 If manual the protocol prompts you for the DTE address If X 121 the protocol will not prompt you for the DTE address The DTE address in this instance is extracted from the NSAP DTE Address Defines the destination DTE address You must specify this address if the interface is X 25 and the mapping type is manual This prompt only appears if the interface is configured for X 25 and the mapping type is manual Default Metric Indicates the cost of the address Metric Type
637. uded in the Next Hop Resolution Reply The router can be configured so that it does not support the IBM specific extensions If the IBM specific extensions are not used shortcuts directly to ELAN devices are not possible Use the Exclude List option to disallow shortcuts selectively to certain ELAN devices Disallowed Router to Router Shortcuts Operation of NHRP may result in establishing transit paths across NBMA network between routers However establishing an NHRP shortcut across a boundary where information used in route selection is lost may result in a routing loop Such situations include the loss of BGP path vector information and the interworking of multiple routing protocols with dissimilar metrics Under such circumstances NHRP shortcuts between routers should be disallowed This situation can be avoided if there are no back door paths between the entry and egress router outside the NBMA network The server allows router to router R2R shortcuts by default However by configuring disallowed R2R shortcuts you can create a list of destination or router addresses for which the router does not allow shortcuts To create a disallowed R2R shortcut you must specify both a protocol address and a mask The protocol address is either the destination or a router and the mask allows for a range of addresses Chapter 11 Using NHRP 355 Using NHRP t nhs To illustrate how to specify disallowed R2R
638. um time in seconds allowed between sending unsolicited multicast router advertisements from the interface Valid Values 3 75 Maximum router advertisement interval Default Value Maximum router advertisement interval 3 406 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Change NDP Configuration Commands Talk 6 Router lifetime Specifies the time in seconds that the router is to be used as a default router Valid Values 0 or 4 9000 seconds where 0 indicates that the router is not being used as a default router Default Value 3 Maximum router advertisement interval Reachable Time Specifies the time in seconds that a node assumes a neighbor is reachable after having received a reachability confirmation Valid Values 0 3 600 seconds where 0 indicates unspecified by this router Default Value 0 Retransmit timer Specifies the time in seconds between retransmitted neighbor solicitation messages Valid Values 0 3 600 seconds where 0 indicates unspecified by this router Default Value 0 link mtu Specifies the value to be placed in the MTU options sent by the router This value should be sent on links that have a variable MTU and may be sent on other links Valid Values A 32 bit unsigned integer where 0 indicates that no MTU options are sent Default Value 0 Use the change command to change a route advertisement or prefix Syntax change ra are prefix ra Changes a configured route a
639. upported however these characters should not be used for new CP names Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the fully qualified control point CP name of the dependent LU server DLUS that is used by default The default primary server may be overridden on a link station basis The default server is used for incoming requests from downstream PUs when a primary DLUS has not been specified for the associated link station Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 93 APPN Configuration Commands Table 7 Configuration Parameter List Dependent LU Requester continued Parameter Information Parameter Default fully qualified CP name of backup dependent LU server DLUS Valid Values A string of up to 17 characters in the form of netlID CPname where e netlD is a network ID from 1 to 8 characters e CPname is a CP name from 1 to 8 characters Each name must conform to the following rules e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing fully qualified CP name using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new CP names Default Value Null Description This parameter specifies the fully qualified CP name of the dependent LU server DLUS that is used as the default backup A backup is not required and the null value representing no entry indicates the abs
640. urable Valid Values If PVC then specify a logical channel number in the range of 1 4095 If SVC then specify a DTE address that is variable length up to 15 digits Default Value 0 unless it is a limited resource Description This parameter specifies whether the X 25 link is a PVC or SVC Parameter MAC address of adjacent node required Ethernet token ring DLSw FR bridged format only Valid Values Token ring and DLSw ports e 12 hexadecimal digits in the range X 000000000001 to X 7FFFFFFFFFFF Ethernet 802 3 ports e 12 hexadecimal digits in the form X xyxxxxxxxxxx where X is any hexadecimal digit y is a hexadecimal digit in the set 0 2 4 6 8 A C E Default Value None Description This parameter specifies the medium access control MAC layer address of the adjacent node Different formats are used for token ring and Ethernet 802 3 Token ring and DLSw ports The MAC address is specified in noncanonical form In the noncanonical address format the bit within each octet that is to be transmitted first is represented as the most significant bit Ethernet 802 3 ports The MAC address is specified in canonical form In the canonical address format the bit within each octet that is to be transmitted first is represented as the least significant bit Chapter 2 Configuring and Monitoring APPN 151 APPN Configuration Commands Table 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail con
641. uration Program is a graphical user interface that enables you to configure the device from a stand alone workstation The Configuration Program includes error checking and online help information The Configuration Program is not pre loaded at the factory it is shipped separately from the device as part of the software order You can also obtain the Configuration Program for IBM Nways Multiprotocol Routing Services from the IBM Networking Technical Support home page See Configuration Program User s Guide for Nways Multiprotocol and Access Services Products GC30 3830 for the server address and directories Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 xxi Conventions Used in This Manual The following conventions are used in this manual to show command syntax and program responses 1 The abbreviated form of a command is underlined as shown in the following example reload In this example you can enter either the whole command reload or its abbreviation rel Keyword choices for a parameter are enclosed in brackets and separated by the word or For example command keyword1 or keyword2 Choose one of the keywords as a value for the parameter Three periods following an option mean that you enter additional data for example a variable after the option For example time host In this example you enter the IP address of the host in place of the periods as explained in the description of the command In information
642. uted Frame Relay BAN Yes Yes Yes Serial LAN bridging NA NA NA SDLC No Yes Yes X 25 CCITT X 25 No Yes Yes DLSw remote only No Yes Yes APPN PPP ISDN Yes Yes No APPN FR ISDN Yes Yes Yes APPN PPP V 25bis Yes Yes No APPN PPP V 34 Yes Yes No LANE Forum compliant Yes Yes Yes ATM Yes No Yes HPR over IP Yes No Yes 100Mbps Ethernet Yes Yes Yes 100Mbps TR 802 5 Yes Yes Yes Notes 1 This column refers to the port providing the connection to the downstream PU DSPU 2 Use bridged format when you have two devices connected by frame relay and one of them does not have APPN Otherwise use routed format because of improved performance 3 Since APPN runs over DLSw and DLSw runs over X 25 you can route APPN ISR traffic over X 25 by running APPN over DLSw Router Configuration Process This section describes the router configuration process and includes details about parameters Chapter1 APPN 25 APPN Configuration Changes That Require the APPN Function to Restart e Network ID of the network node e Control point name of the network node e XID number of network node for subarea connection e Adjacent node type of link station e Change of node function EBN BN NN e Any parameters under the following options High Performance Routing HPR at the node level Dependent LU Requester DLUR at the node level Connection network Class of service Node tuning Node management Focal points M
643. uter id and router time to live update Updates the packet filter Exit Add Use the add command to add an IPv6 address leaked routes packet filters routes or IPv6 over IPv4 tunnels Copyright IBM Corp 1994 1998 383 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 add address net address prefix leaked routesdestination packet filter name interface route destination mask gateway cost tunnel destination prefix raddress locaddress cost ttl fragmentation Example IPV6 config gt add address Which net is this address for 0 5 New address 1 2 Prefix length must between 8 and 128 128 IPV6 config gt add leaked IPV4 destination 1 2 3 4 Address mask 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IPV6 config gt add packet filter Packet filter name pktf01 Which interface is this filter for 0 3 IPV6 config gt add route IPV6 destination 8 9 Prefix length must between 8 and 128 8 128 Via gateway 1 at 1 2 Cost 1 Via gateway 2 at 2 3 Cost 1 1000 Via gateway 3 at 3 4 Cost 1 10000 Via gateway 4 at 4 5 Cost 1 10 IPV6 config gt add tunnel Add a static route through this tunnel Yes IPV6 destination network 3 4 Prefix length must between 0 and 128 64 128 IPV4 tunnel remote address 71 2 3 4 IPV4 tunnel local address 2 3 40 0 Cost 1 TTL value 64 Allow fragmentation in tunnel Yes or No address Adds an IPv6 address Which net is
644. uting APPN Configuration Command Summary Configuration Parameter List APPN Routing Configuration Parameter List High Performance Routing HPR Configuration Parameter List HPR Timer and Retry Options Configuration Parameter List Dependent LU Requester Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Tuning Configuration Parameter List Trace Setup Questions 10 Configuration Parameter List Node Level Traces 11 Configuration Parameter List Inter process Signals Traces 12 Configuration Parameter List Module Entry and Exit Traces 13 Configuration Parameter List General Component Level Traces 14 Configuration Parameter List Miscellaneous Traces 15 Configuration Parameter List APPN Node Management 16 Configuration Parameter List APPN ISR Recording Media 17 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration 18 Configuration Parameter List Port Configuration for ATM 19 Configuration Parameter List Port Definition 20 Configuration Parameter List Port Default TG Characteristics 21 Configuration Parameter List Port default LLC Characteristics 22 Configuration Parameter List HPR Override Defaults 23 Configuration Parameter List Link Station Detail 24 Configuration Parameter List Station Configuration for ATM 25 Configuration Parameter List Modify TG Characteristics 26 Configuration Parameter List Modify Dependent LU Server 27 Configuration Parameter List Modify
645. ution BTP BOOTP relay agent BTU basic transmission unit CAM _content addressable memory CCITT Consultative Committee on International Telegraph and Telephone CD collision detection CGWCON Gateway Console CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing CIP Classical IP CIR committed information rate CLNP Connectionless Mode Network Protocol CPU central processing unit CRC cyclic redundancy check CRS configuration report server CTS clear to send CUD call user data DAF destination address filtering DB database DBsum database summary DCD data channel received line signal detector DCE data circuit terminating equipment DCS Directly connected server DDLC dual data link controller DDN Defense Data Network DDP Datagram Delivery Protocol DDT Dynamic Debugging Tool DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol dir directly connected DL data link DLC data link control DLCI data link connection identifier DLS data link switching DLSw data link switching DMA direct memory access DNA Digital Network Architecture 438 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DNCP DECnet Protocol Control Protocol DNIC Data Network Identifier Code DoD Department of Defense DOS Disk Operating System DR designated router DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DSAP destination service access point DSE data switching equipment DSE data switching exchange DSR data set ready DSU data service unit DTE data terminal equipment DTR data terminal ready Dty
646. value associated with the limited resource Syntax add lu name You will be prompted to enter a station name to associate this LU with You will be prompted to enter a value for the following parameter The parameter range will be shown in parentheses The parameter default will be shown in square brackets 172 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN Configuration Commands Table 29 Configuration Parameter List LEN End Node LU Name Parameter Information Parameter Valid Values Default Value Description fully qualified LU name fully qualified explicit LU name Generic partially explicit LU name Wildcard entry A string of up to 17 characters in the form of netiID LUname where e netiD is a network ID from 1 to 8 characters e LUname is a control point name from 1 to 8 characters Each name must conform to the following rules e First character A to Z e Second to eighth characters A to Z 0 to 9 Note An existing fully qualified LU name using the special characters and from the character set A continues to be supported however these characters should not be used for new LU names To reduce the number of fully qualified LU names you need to specify you can define a generic LU name using the wildcard character to represent a portion of the LU name LUname You can also define a wildcard entry by using the wildcard character as the whole LU name None This parameter s
647. ve a NHRP client server and its configuration requires you to give the ATM address of the router NHRP server you must select the proper ATM address You must use an address associated with an ATM interface in the device and an IP address must be assigned to this interface The last two digits of the router ATM Chapter 11 Using NHRP 357 Using NHRP address the selector are assigned dynamically after the router is activated and may change if the configuration of the router changes unless you have configured a specific selector You can specify the ATM address including selector by entering prot arp at the talk 6 Config gt prompt followed by add atm giving the desired IP address and then specifying a selector This is the same procedure used to define an ATMARP client Using NHRP with LAN Emulation If you want to use NHRP on the device you must configure all LECs with a unique locally administered MAC address LAA If you do not configure the LECs with unique LAAs the NHRP shortcut capability to the corresponding switch or device will not work because e Traffic sent over an NHRP LANE shortcut VCC will contain the router Universally Administered universally administered MAC address as the source MAC address e Some network devices learn the association between the MAC address and the VCC from traffic the device has received These devices then use the NHRP VCC to transmit data e lf the router detects incoming traffic
648. ve a multicast group This prevents the device from responding to pings and SNMP queries sent to the group address Syntax leave Example PIM6 gt leave ff05 42 101 Use the mcache command to display a list of currently active multicast cache entries Multicast cache entries are built on demand whenever the first matching multicast datagram is received There is a separate cache entry and therefore a separate route for each datagram source network and destination group combination Syntax mcache Example PIM6 gt mcache 0 TKR O 1 TKR 1 2 TKR 2 3 IPPN O 4 BDG O 5 Internal Prot Count Upstr Downstream Olz FF05 42 101 PIM6 8 0 1 2 3 4 22 FFO5 42 102 PIM 8 1 0 33125253 FFQ5 33 4 120 PIM6 25 0 2 PIM6 gt Prot Specifies the owning protocol of the multicast forwarding table entry Count Displays the number of multicast packets received for this multicast forwarding table entry Upstr Displays the neighboring network or router from which the datagram must be received in order to be forwarded Downstream Displays the total number of downstream interfaces or neighbors to which the datagram will be forwarded Use the mgroup command to display the group membership of the device s attached interfaces Only the group membership for those interfaces on which the router is either designated router or backup designated router are displayed 418 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Mstats PIM Monitoring Commands
649. ve a non zero node number and to have a zone name In this case the other end of the link must have either e The same network number and zone name and a different node number e Network and node numbers set to zero The router will learn network and node numbers from the configured router To set up your network for half router mode configure both routers on the PPP link so that network and node numbers are set to zero and no zone name is used AppleTalk 2 Zone Filters ZoneName filtering although not required for AppleTalk is a very desirable feature for the security and administration of large AppleTalk Internetworks There are also provisions for restricting access to networks by net numbers General Information AppleTalk is structured so that every network is identified in two ways The first is a network number or range of consecutive network numbers that must be unique throughout the internet The network number combined with the node number uniquely identifies any end station in the internet 214 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Using AppleTalk Phase 2 The second identifier for the network is one or more ZoneNames These ZoneName strings are not unique throughout the internet The end station is uniquely identified by a combined object type ZoneName string A router first learns about a network when the new net range appears in the RTMP routing update from a neighboring router The router then queries the neighbor for th
650. vel 2 Only N External Domain N Default Metric 20 ESIS IS Hello Timer 10 sec ISIS Hello Timer 3 sec Modify Transmit password No Modify the set of receive passwords No L1 Priority 64 L2 Priority 64 All ESs 0x09002B000004 All ISs 0x09002B000005 All L1 ISs 0x0180C2000014 All L2 ISs 0x0180C2000015 Frame Relay subnet Interface number 0 Interface Type FRL Interface number Binds the subnet to the specified interface Enable ES IS Indicates whether the ES IS protocol is going to run over the interface yes Y or no N Enable IS IS Indicates whether the IS IS protocol is going to run over the interface yes Y or no N Interface Type Indicates the type of subnet LAN X 25 and Frame Relay FRL LAN includes Ethernet and Token Ring Level 2 Only Indicates whether the subnet should run at level 2 only yes Y or no N Ano designation allows the router to route over that subnet at both level 1 and level 2 326 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 External Domain Indicates whether the circuit is operating outside the IS IS routing domain Default Metric Indicates the cost of the subnet Cost range 20 63 IS Hello Timer Indicates the period between transmissions of IS hello PDUs ISIS Hello Timer Indicates the period between transmissions of L1 and L2 IS IS hello PDUs Modify Transmit password Removes or chang
651. vide a fully qualified CP name This is the port UThis is the link station Configuring WAN Reroute WAN reroute lets you set up an alternate route so that if a primary link fails the router automatically initiates a new connection to the destination through the alternate route You can use any type of link as the alternate link and any type of link as the primary link The alternate link does not need to be connected to the same end point as the primary link If HPR is used on the primary link and alternate link when the primary link fails HPR s Non disruptive Path Switch function will automatically reroute traffic to the alternate link without disrupting end user sessions In this configuration example the router performing the WAN reroute function is configured with two APPN link station definitions one link station is defined over the primary interface and the other is over the alternate interface The destination router needs to have APPN enabled on the port If the destination router has a link station defined that link station should not try to bring up the connection in order to avoid extra traffic In this example frame relay is the primary route from NN22 to NN6 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk xxx The configuration is NN22 primary FR kkk Alternate WRR to NN6 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k kkkk xxxx This is the NN22 confi
652. wed Displays all disallowed LANE shortcut entries Any ATM address listed in this display means that the NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface received data from that ATM address This is not allowed since all NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface VCCs will be used only to transmit data to a LEC at the other end If the LEC attempts to send data over a VCC set up by an NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface then the VCC will be brought down and no further LANE shortcuts will be set up to that LEC Once the condition which caused the NHRP LANE Shortcut Interface to receive data has been corrected then the device must be restarted in order to allow that ATM address to be again used for NHRP LANE shortcuts Example lan dis LAN Shortcut Interface 2 ATM Network Interface 0 39840F0000000000000000000310005A00DEAD02 372 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 NHRP Monitoring Commands Talk 5 CONFIG Parameters Use the config parameters command to access the command menus for display change or reset NHRP configuration parameters Table 65 NHRP Contig Parameter Summary Command Function Help Displays all the commands available for this command level or lists the eens for specific commands if available See Display Displays the current NHRP and Route switching configuration parameters Change Allows NHRP configuration parameters to be dynamically changed without affecting the static configuration Reset Reads the configuration parameter from the
653. which shortcuts are not allowed information Example add dis IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 1 Address Mask 255 255 255 255 Valid values IP address and mask Default Empty Delete Use the delete command to delete an interface definition for NHRP an exclude list entry or disallowed router to router shortcuts Syntax delete interface definition for NHRP exclude list disallowed router to router shortcuts interface definition for NHRP Deletes an explicit NHRP interface definition Example del int Interface Number 0 362 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 Change NHRP Advanced Configuration Commands Talk 6 exclude list Deletes an exclude list entry This option deletes an exclude list entry and prompts you to delete the entry from the disallowed router to router shortcuts See ENH A for more information You must specify an index which must be deleted Use the list exclude command to determine the right index Example del exc Enter index of access control to be deleted 1 Address Mask 1 6 6 6 6 255 255 255 255 Are you sure this the record you want to delete Yes Record deleted from Exclude List Delete from Disallowed Router to Router Shortcuts Yes Record deleted from Disallowed Router to Router Shortcuts disallowed router to router shortcuts Deletes a disallowed router to router shortcuts entry You must specify an index to be deleted Use the list disallowed command to determine
654. width The bandwidth of an optical link designates the information carrying capacity of the link and is related to the maximum bit rate that a fiber link can support basic transmission unit BTU In SNA the unit of data and control information passed between path control components A BTU can consist of one or more path information units PIUs baud In asynchronous transmission the unit of modulation rate corresponding to one unit interval per second that is if the duration of the unit interval is 20 milliseconds the modulation rate is 50 baud A bootstrap 1 A sequence of instructions whose execution causes additional instructions to be loaded and executed until the complete computer program is in storage T 2 A technique or device designed to bring itself into a desired state by means of its own action for example a machine routine whose first few instructions are sufficient to bring the rest of itself into the computer from an input device A Border Gateway Protocol BGP An Internet Protocol IP routing protocol used between domains and autonomous systems border router In Internet communications a router positioned at the edge of an autonomous system that communicates with a router that is positioned at the edge of a different autonomous system bridge A functional unit that interconnects multiple LANs locally or remotely that use the same logical link control protocol but that can use different mediu
655. wing DLC types e APPN PPP ISDN e APPN FR ISDN e APPN PPP V 25 BIS e APPN PPP V 34 Refer to the Software User s Guide for additional information about dial on demand circuits PU 2 1 Node Considerations When configuring an APPN link station for PU 2 1 nodes over a Dial on Demand link you should specify yes for the limited resource link station parameter This allows APPN to e Consider this link as a viable link to be used for route computation even though the link is not actually active The link will automatically become active during LU LU session activation for a session needing to use it e Deactivate the link station when there are no active sessions using this link You should not configure CP CP sessions over a dial on demand link CP CP sessions are persistent sessions That is they should remain active as long as the link is active Since the active session count will not go to zero in this case the link will remain active Note If you specify yes for the limited resource parameter for a PU 2 1 node you must specify an adjacent CPNAME and a TG number in the range of 1 to 20 PU 2 0 Node Considerations When configuring an APPN link station for PU 2 0 nodes over a Dial on Demand link you can specify yes for the limited resource link station parameter This allows APPN to deactivate the link station when there are no active sessions using it Note If imited resource is yes link activation for this link station
656. with the focal point through an LU 6 2 session Multiple domain support MDS is the mechanism that controls the transport of management services requests and data between these nodes The router network node does not support SSCP PU sessions with focal points Management processes within the router s control point are handled by its control point management services CPMS component The CPMS component within the router network node collects unsolicited problem management data from resources within the router s domain and forwards this data to the appropriate focal point Supported Message Units The router network node uses the following message units for sending and receiving management services data including alert messages from domain ENs Message unit Description 18 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN CP MSU Control point management services unit This message unit is generated by CPMS and contains alert information forwarded by the router entry point CPMS passes CP MSU message units to MDS MDS MU Multiple domain support message unit This message unit is generated by MDS It encapsulates the CP MSU for transport between nodes SNMP Capabilities for APPN MIBs An operator or application at an SNMP network management station can query objects in the APPN MIBs using the SNMP get and get_next commands to retrieve APPN status information and node statistics A subset of APPN MIB objects can be modified using the SNMP
657. xample set ext lane Use LANE shortcuts extension Yes cache size resolution OR registration OR server purge Sets the selected cache s maximum entries Cache sizes can be selected for any of the following resolution cache This parameter lets you determine the number of entries in the cache for client functions Each cache entry contains the protocol address to NBMA address mapping that can be used to create shortcut VCs Entries are in the cache when the router has e Successfully resolved a protocol address to an NBMA address by sending Next Hop Resolution Requests e Attempted to resolve a protocol request to an NBMA address but has either not received a reply or has received a negative reply and the associated timer has not expired These entries are kept in the cache to prevent the device from generating additional Next Hop Resolution Requests for some period of time e Received a registration request from a client and the holding time indicated in that request has not yet expired When the cache size is exceeded no new attempts are made to resolve protocol addresses to NBMA addresses in other words no new Next Hop Resolution Requests are sent until existing entries are purged either because the holding time has expired or a specific purge request has been received from the originator of the information Also when cache size is exceeded Registration Requests from new clients are rejected Valid values 256 65535 e
658. y Valid Values 1 255 Default Value 1 internal ip address Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None mid query interval network interface Valid Values Any valid network interface number Default Value 0 new query interval in secs Valid Values 1 3600 Default Value 125 response interval network interface Valid Values Any valid network interface number Default Value 0 new response interval in secs Valid Values 1 60 Default Value 10 robustness variable network interface Valid Values Any valid network interface number Default Value 0 new robustness variable Valid Values 2 10 Default Value 2 leave interval network interface Valid Values Any valid network interface number Default Value 0 new leave interval in secs Valid Values 1 60 Default Value 1 Chapter 14 Configuring and Monitoring IPve 393 IPV6 Configuration Commands Talk 6 Update path mtu aging timer Specifies the aging time in minutes for path MTUs that have been determined using path MTU discovery Valid Values 10 60 minutes where 0 disable Default Value 10 reassembly size Specifies the size of the reassembly buffers used for processing the fragment header Valid Values 2048 65536 Default Value 12000 router id Specifies the IPv6 address of the router Valid Values Any valid IPv6 address Default Value None routing table size number of nets Valid Values 64 65 535 Default Value 768 til
659. y DLUS is unsuccessful attempt to reach the backup DLUS 4 If pipe activation continues to fail DLUR will retry as described in steps 1 3 for the number of times specified in the short retry count If the short retry count is exhausted DLUR will retry as defined in steps 5 7 as long as the DSPU is requesting ACTPU 5 Wait for the amount of time specified by the Long retry timer Note If Perform long retries to restore disrupted pipe is No no further retries will be attempted 6 Attempt to reach the primary DLUS 7 If the attempt to reach the primary DLUS is unsuccessful attempt to reach the backup DLUS Example Assume the following parameter values Delay before initiating retries 120 sec Perform short retries to restore disrupted pipe yes Short retry timer 60 sec Short retry count 2 Perform long retries to restore disrupted pipe yes Long retry timer 300 sec Pipe activation fails Retry the primary and backup DLUS immediately 42 MRS V3 2 Protocol Config Ref Vol 2 APPN If this retry fails wait 60 seconds the value of Short retry timer Retry the primary DLUS If this retry fails retry the backup DLUS This is attempt 1 of the Short retry count If this fails wait 60 seconds the value of Short retry timer Retry the primary DLUS and then the backup DLUS This is attempt 2 Short retry count Short retry count is now exhausted Ifthe retry still fails wait 30
660. y established upon operator action but the circuit is not fully enabled until both ends of the circuit have initialized successfully Recall Timer Defines the time in seconds that an out static circuit or a DA circuit must wait before attempting a new call request This is a result of the initial call request failing or a subsequent call having been cleared Max Call Attempts If a call request fails Max Call Attempts defines the maximum Chapter 10 Configuring and Monitoring OSI DECnet V 309 DECnet V OSI Configuration Commands Talk 6 number of subsequent call requests that are attempted by the out static circuit before no further attempts are made At this point a Call failure is logged and operator intervention is required to activate the out static circuit Initial Min Timer Specifies the amount of time in seconds an out static circuit waits for a link to be initialized reception of either an ESH or an ISH after the call request has been accepted If the initial min timer expires before the link has been fully initialized the SVC is cleared and an event generated that indicates initialization failure Enable IS IS Defines whether the IS IS protocol is enabled on this routing circuit When set to ON the IS IS protocol is enabled when set to OFF the IS IS protocol is not enabled Level2 Only Specifies if this routing circuit is used for Level2 routing only External Domain Specifies whether the router transmits and r
661. y go around the intersection of the two domains and locate all level 2 adjacencies that cross the filtering fence These are one hop communications paths between level 2 routers that cross between areas In the example there are six adjacencies that cross the fence 1 18 to 5 7 1 18 to 5 8 1 18 to 8 3 2 17 to 3 12 2 21 to 4 7 and 2 21 to 4 9 The first step in designing the area filters is to set up filters that keep the areas in one domain from being propagated into the other domain The only area routes that should leave the intersection are those for areas in the intersection In the example these are areas 1 and 2 Therefore only routes for areas 1 and 2 should be sent from nodes such as 2 17 and 3 12 On point to point links such as 2 17 and 3 12 it does not matter which end filters but it is probably safer to filter on the sending end Therefore there would be a filter on the interface of 2 17 allowing forwarding only routes from areas 1 and 2 The same would occur on the two interfaces of 2 21 and the link from 1 18 and 8 3 When the hop between two areas is an Ethernet or other broadcast media such as 1 18 to 5 7 and 5 8 you should make the decision on another basis Most Ethernets have most of the level 2 routing nodes in one area and a few in the second area Here the filtering should be on the few rather than the many In the example node 1 18 is the interloper on the Ethernet in area 5 so it should filter Mode 1 18 wou
662. ysical unit in order to indirectly manage through the PU resources of the node such as attached links This term applies to type 2 0 type 4 and type 5 nodes only 2 See also peripheral PU and subarea PU ping command The command that sends an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request packet to a gateway router or host with the expectation of receiving a reply Point to Point Protocol PPP A protocol that provides a method for encapsulating and transmitting packets over serial point to point links polling 1 On a multipoint connection or a point to point connection the process whereby data stations are invited one at a time to transmit I 2 Interrogation of devices for such purposes as to avoid contention to determine operational status or to determine readiness to send or receive data A port 1 An access point for data entry or exit 2 A connector on a device to which cables for other devices such as display stations and printers are attached 3 The representation of a physical connection to the link hardware A port is sometimes referred to as an adapter however there can be more than one port on an adapter There may be one or more ports controlled by a single DLC process 4 In the Internet suite of protocols a 16 bit number used to communicate between TCP or the User Datagram Protocol UDP and a higher level protocol or application Some protocols such as File Transfer Protocol FTP an

IBM SC30-3865-04 Network Router User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents